JP7209386B2 - Receiving method and receiving device - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a signal receiving method and a receiving device .

Conventionally, in Non-Patent Document 1, for QAM (Quadrature Amplitude Modulation), by changing the bit labeling aspect, BICM-ID (Bit Interleaved Coded Modulation-Iterative Detection) to improve the data reception quality Consideration is underway.

JP 2013-16953 A

“Design, analysis, and performance evaluation for BICM-ID with square QAM constellations in Rayleigh fading channels” IEEE Journal on selected areas in communication, vol.19, no.5, May 2001, pp.944-957

However, due to constraints such as PAPR (Peak-to-Average power ratio) (peak power to average transmission power), modulation methods other than QAM, such as APSK (Amplitude Phase Shift Keying) modulation, are used for communication and broadcasting systems. may be adopted, and it may be difficult to apply the technology of Non-Patent Document 1 regarding QAM labeling to communication/broadcasting systems.
SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a transmission method that contributes to improving the reception quality of data when iterative detection is performed on the receiving side, for example, in a communication/broadcasting system.
It should be noted that the present disclosure discloses means for solving each of the plurality of problems found by the present invention, not limited to the above problems. Needless to say, each means for solving those problems may be used in combination with means for solving other problems, or may be used individually.

A transmission method according to the present invention is a transmission apparatus that transmits data by a modulation scheme that shifts amplitude and phase, wherein the first modulation scheme and the first modulation scheme differ in signal point arrangement and bit allocation to each signal point. 2 modulation schemes alternately for each symbol, a mapping unit for mapping signal points according to the selected modulation scheme, and a transmission unit for transmitting the mapped modulated signal, In the first modulation method, in the IQ plane, four signal points are arranged on the circumference of the inner circle, and 12 signal points are arranged on the circumference of the outer circle. is a 16APSK modulation having a concentric relationship, and 16 signal points are divided into one signal point on the circumference of the inner circle and one signal point on the outer circle in the direction from the origin of the IQ plane to the signal point. When divided into four groups consisting of three signal points on the circumference, a pair of adjacent signal points on the circumference of the outer circle within the same group and on the circumference of the outer circle within the same group The difference in bit allocation between one of the signal points at both ends of the group and the set of signal points on the inner circle is 1 bit, and the signal points on the circumference of the outer circle that are the shortest on the IQ plane between different groups and the set of signal points on the circumference of the inner circle, the difference in bit assignment is 1 bit, and the second modulation method is, in the IQ plane, 8 signal points on the circumference of the inner circle points are arranged, 8 signal points are arranged on the circumference of the outer circle, and the inner circle and the outer circle are in a concentric relationship with 16APSK modulation, wherein the 16 signal points are arranged on the inner circle. Signal points adjacent to each other on the circumference within the same group when divided into the first group consisting of 8 signal points on the circumference and the second group consisting of 8 signal points on the circumference of the outer circle The difference in bit allocation between the pairs is 1 bit.

According to the transmission method according to the present invention, in particular, an error correction code with high error correction capability such as a turbo code such as an LDPC (Low Density Parity Check) code or a Duo-binary Turbo code is applied to a communication/broadcasting system. However, it can contribute to the improvement of data reception quality at the time of initial detection or when repeated detection is performed on the receiving side.

Example of input/output characteristics of a power amplifier installed in a transmitter Configuration example of a communication system using the BICM-ID method An example of the input/output of the encoder of the transmitter An example of a bit-reduction encoder in a transmitter An example of a bit-reduction decoder of a receiving device Example of input/output of XOR part of bit-reduction decoder Configuration diagram of transmitter (12,4)16APSK constellation diagram (8,8)16APSK constellation diagram Block diagram of modulation signal generation Modulated signal frame structure Data symbol example Examples of pilot symbols (12,4)16APSK labeling example (12,4)16APSK labeling example (8,8)16APSK labeling example (8,8)16APSK constellation example Image of transmission signal frame structure in advanced wideband satellite digital broadcasting Configuration diagram of receiver Examples of modulation scheme sequences Examples of modulation scheme sequences Configuration example of stream type/relative stream information Examples of modulation scheme sequences Example of symbol placement Example of 32APSK signal constellation Example of NU-16QAM constellation and labeling Image of broadband satellite digital broadcasting Block diagram for ring ratio determination Diagram for explaining the band-limiting filter (4,8,4)16APSK constellation example (4,8,4)16APSK constellation example (4,8,4)16APSK constellation example Example of symbol placement Example of symbol placement Example of symbol placement Example of symbol placement Examples of modulation scheme sequences Examples of modulation scheme sequences Transmitting station configuration example Examples of receiver configuration Transmitting station configuration example Transmitting station configuration example Transmitting station configuration example Example of frequency allocation for each signal Satellite configuration example Satellite configuration example Examples of extended information configuration Signaling example Signaling example Signaling example Signaling example Signaling example Signaling example Signaling example Signaling example Signaling example Signaling example (4,12,16)32APSK constellation example Signaling example Signaling example Signaling example Signaling example Signaling example Signaling example Signaling example Signaling example Signaling example Signaling example Example of TMCC signal configuration Example of TMCC information configuration Example of configuration of channel part in transmitting station Example of frame change Example of change in time axis when roll-off rate is switched Example of change in time axis when roll-off rate is switched Examples of receiver configuration Configuration of control information related to "emergency warning (emergency bulletin)" Example of frame configuration for "emergency warning (emergency bulletin)" Examples of receiver configuration Example of frame configuration for "emergency warning (emergency bulletin)" Example of frame configuration for "emergency warning (emergency bulletin)" Example of frame configuration for "emergency warning (emergency bulletin)" Example of frame configuration for "emergency warning (emergency bulletin)" Example of frame configuration for "emergency warning (emergency bulletin)" Examples of receiver configuration Examples of receiver configuration Examples of receiver configuration Example of setting screen for audio output method Examples of receiver configuration Example of setting screen for audio output method Examples of receiver configuration Example of setting screen for audio output method Screen display example Screen display example Screen display example Screen display example Examples of receiver configuration Example of setting screen for audio output method Example of frame transmission status Example of frame transmission status Example of frame transmission status Example of how to generate TMCC Configuration example of TMCC component Configuration example of TMCC component Configuration example of TMCC estimator in receiver System diagram showing the relationship between the receiving device and other devices Configuration example of receiver System diagram showing the relationship between the receiving device and other devices Configuration example of receiver Diagram showing the relationship between the receiving device and the remote control

(Circumstances leading to obtaining one form according to the present invention)
Generally, in communication and broadcasting systems, PAPR (Peak-to-Average power ratio) is used to reduce the power consumption of transmission amplifiers and to reduce data errors at receivers. A modulation scheme with low transmission power and high data reception quality is desired.
Especially for satellite broadcasting, it is desirable to use a modulation method with a low PAPR in order to reduce the power consumption of the transmission system amplifier, and there are 16 signal points on the IQ (In Phase-Quadrature Phase) plane. 16APSK (16 Amplitude and Phase Shift Keying) of (12,4) as modulation method
Modulation is often applied. The signal point arrangement on the IQ plane of (12, 4) 16APSK modulation will be described later in detail.

However, when 16APSK of (12,4) is used in communication/broadcasting systems, the data reception quality of the receiver is sacrificed. There is a demand to use the system/transmission method for satellite broadcasting.
To improve reception quality, it is conceivable to use a modulation scheme with good BER (Bit Error Ratio) characteristics. However, adoption of a modulation scheme with excellent BER characteristics is not necessarily the best solution in any case. This point will be explained below.

For example, the SNR (Signal-to-Noise power ratio) for obtaining BER=10 ^-5 when using modulation method #B is 10.0 dB, and when using modulation method #A, BER=10 ^-5 is obtained. The SNR for this is assumed to be 9.5 dB.
At this time, if the average transmission power is the same regardless of whether the transmitter uses modulation scheme #A or #B, the receiver can obtain a gain of 0.5 (=10.0-9.5) dB by using modulation scheme #B. can be obtained.

By the way, PAPR becomes a problem when a transmitter is mounted on a satellite. FIG. 1 shows input/output characteristics of a power amplifier installed in a transmitter.
Here, it is assumed that PAPR is 7.0 dB when modulation scheme #A is used, and PAPR is 8.0 dB when modulation scheme #B is used.
At this time, the average transmission power when modulation scheme #B is used is 1.0 (=8.0-7.0) dB smaller than the average transmission power when modulation scheme #A is used.

Therefore, when modulation scheme #B is used, 0.5-1.0=0.5, and therefore, the receiving apparatus obtains a gain of 0.5 dB when modulation scheme #A is used.
As described above, in such a case, it does not mean that it is better to use a modulation scheme that is superior in terms of BER characteristics. This embodiment considers the above points.
Therefore, the present embodiment aims to provide a modulation scheme/transmission method with a small PAPR and good data reception quality.

In addition, in Non-Patent Document 1, studies are being conducted on how to improve the reception quality of data during BICM-ID by how to label bits for QAM. However, the same approach as in Non-Patent Document 1 above (that is, How to label bits for QAM) may be difficult to obtain an effect.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, an error correction code with high error correction capability such as LDPC code or turbo code is applied, and high data reception quality is obtained when iterative detection (or detection) is performed on the receiving side. We aim to provide a transmission method for
BEST MODE FOR CARRYING OUT THE INVENTION Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.
(Embodiment 1)
A transmission method, a transmission device, a reception method, and a reception device according to this embodiment will be described in detail.

Before proceeding to this explanation, an outline of a communication system using the BICM-ID scheme on the receiving side will be explained.
<BICM-ID>
FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a communication system using the BICM-ID system.
In the following, BICM-ID in the case of having the bit-reduction encoder 203 and the bit-reduction decoder 215 will be described. Detection) can be implemented.

The transmitting apparatus 200 includes an encoding section 201, an interleaver 202, a bit-reduction encoder
203, mapping section 204, modulation section 205, transmission RF (Radio Frequency
y) a unit 206 and a transmitting antenna 207;
The receiving device 210 includes a receiving antenna 211, a receiving RF section 212, a demodulating section 213, a demapping section 214, a bit-reduction decoder 215, a deinterleaver 216, and a decoding section 217.
, interleaver 218 .

FIG. 3 shows an example of input/output of the encoding section 201 of the transmission device 200. As shown in FIG.
The encoding unit 201 performs encoding at a coding rate of R1, and when information bits of the number of bits _Ninfo are input, it outputs encoded bits of the number of bits of _Ninfo /R1.
FIG. 4 shows an example of the bit-reduction encoder 203 of the transmission device 200. As shown in FIG.
When an 8-bit bit string b (b ₀ to b ₇ ) is input from the bit-reduction encoder 203 and the interleaver 202 of this example, it is converted to a 4-bit bit string m (m ₀ to m ₃ ) to mapping section 204 . [+] in the figure indicates an XOR (exclusive-or) part.

That is, the bit-reduction encoder 203 of this example has a system in which an input portion of bit b0 and an output portion of bit _{m0 are} connected by _an XOR portion, an input portion of bits b1 and b2, and an output portion of bit m1. A system connected by an XOR unit, a system in which an input unit of bits _b3 and b4 and an output unit of bit m2 are connected by an XOR unit, an input unit of bits _{b5 , b6} and _b7 and an output of bit m3 Part and X
It has a system connected by an OR section.

FIG. 5 shows an example of the bit-reduction decoder 215 of the receiving device 210. As shown in FIG.
The bit-reduction decoder 215 of this example outputs LLRs (Log Likelihood Ratios) of the 4-bit bit string m (m ₀ to m ₃ ) from the demapping unit 214 to L (m ₀ ) to L
(m ₃ ) is input and subjected to conversion accompanied by restoration of the number of bits, LLRs L(b ₀ ) to L(b ₇ ) of the 8-bit bit string b (b ₀ to b ₇ ) are output, 8-bit bit string b (b ₀ to b ₇
) are input to decoding section 217 via _{deinterleaver 216} .

Also, when the bit-reduction decoder 215 receives as input LLRs L(b ₀ ) to L(b ₇ ) of an 8-bit bit string b (b ₀ to b ₇ ) passed through the interleaver 218 from the decoding unit 217, Transformation with a reduction in the number of bits is performed, and LLRs L(m ₀ ) to L(m ₃ ) of a 4-bit bit string m(m ₀ to m ₃ ) are output to demapping section 214 .
Note that [+] in the figure indicates the XOR part. That is, the bit-reduction decoder 2 in this example
Reference numeral ₁₅ denotes a system in which the input/output unit of L( _{b 0} ) and the input/output unit of L(m ₀ ) are connected by an XOR unit; m ₁ ) input/output unit connected by an XOR unit, and L(b ₃ ), L(b ₄ ) input/output unit and L(m ₂ ) input/output unit connected by an XOR unit. , L(b ₅ ), L(b ₆ ), L(b ₇ ) input/output units and L(m ₃ ) input/output units are connected by an XOR unit.

Here, in this example, for the 8-bit bit string b (b ₀ to b ₇ ) before the number of bits is reduced, bit b ₀ is LSB (Least Significant Bit) and bit b ₇ is MSB (Most Significant Bit). Bit, most significant bit). Also, in the 4-bit bit string m (m ₀ to m ₃ ) after the number of bits has been reduced, bit m ₀ is the LSB and bit m ₃ is the MSB.

FIG. 6 shows an XOR (exclude) for explaining the operation of the bit-reduction decoder 215.
ive-or) indicates the input/output of the unit.
In FIG. 6, bits u ₁ , u ₂ and bit u ₃ are connected by an XOR section. LLRs L(u ₁ ), L(u ₂ ), and L(u ₃ ) of bits u ₁ , u ₂ , and u ₃ are also shown. The relationship among L(u ₁ ), L(u ₂ ), and L(u ₃ ) will be described later.

Next, the flow of processing will be described with reference to FIGS.
On the transmission device 200 side, an encoding unit 201 receives transmission bits as an input and performs (error correction) encoding. Here, for example, as shown in FIG. 3, when the coding rate of the error correction code used in coding section 201 is R1, when information bits of the number of bits N _info are input to coding section 201, the code The number of output bits from transforming section 201 is N _info /R1.

A signal (data) encoded by the encoding unit 201 is interleaved (rearranged data) by the interleaver 202 and then input to the bit-reduction encoder 203 . Then, as described with reference to FIG. 3, the bit-reduction encoder 203 performs bit number reduction processing. Note that the bit number reduction process may not be performed.
Mapping section 204 performs mapping processing on the signal (data) that has undergone bit number reduction processing. The modulation unit 205 converts the mapped signal from a digital signal to an analog signal, performs band limitation, orthogonal modulation, and processing such as multi-carrier conversion such as OFDM (Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing). I do. The signal that has undergone this signal processing is transmitted wirelessly from, for example, a transmission antenna 207 via transmission RF (Radio Frequency) processing (206) that performs transmission processing.

On the receiving device 210 side, the receiving RF (212) performs processing such as frequency conversion and orthogonal demodulation on the signal received by the receiving antenna 211 (radio signal from the transmitting side), generates a baseband signal, and demodulates it. Output to unit 213 . Demodulation section 213 performs processes such as channel estimation and demodulation, generates a demodulated signal, and outputs it to mapping section 214 . Demapping section 214 is based on the received signal input from demodulation section 213, the noise power contained in this received signal, and the a priori information obtained from bit-reduction decoder 215, LLR (logarithmic likelihood ratio) for each bit. calculate.

Here, the demapping section 214 processes the signal mapped by the mapping section 204 . In other words, demapping section 214 calculates LLRs for a bit string (corresponding to bit string m in FIGS. 4 and 5) after the bit number reduction process has been performed on the transmitting side.
On the other hand, in the decoding process in the latter stage (decoding unit 217), all the encoded bits (corresponding to the bit string b in FIGS. 4 and 5) are processed. LLRs related to the processing of the unit 214) and LLRs before bit number reduction (LLRs related to the processing of the decoding unit 217) need to be converted.

Therefore, the bit-reduction decoder 215 converts the LLRs after the bit number reduction input from the demapping section 214 into the LLRs before the bit number reduction (corresponding to the bit string b in FIGS. 4 and 5). Details of the processing will be described later.
The LLRs calculated by the bit-reduction decoder 215 are input to the decoding unit 217 after being deinterleaved by the deinterleaver 216 . The decoding unit 217 performs decoding processing based on the input LLRs, and thereby calculates the LLRs again. The LLRs calculated by the decoding unit 217 are fed back to the bit-reduction decoder 215 after being interleaved by the interleaver 218 . The bit-reduction decoder 215 converts the LLRs fed back from the decoding unit 217 into LLRs after reducing the number of bits, and inputs the LLRs to the demapping unit 214 . The demapping section 214 again calculates the LLR for each bit based on the received signal, the noise power contained in the received signal, and the a priori information obtained from the bit-reduction decoder 215 .

Note that if the transmission side does not perform bit number reduction processing, the bit-reduction decoder 215
No special processing is performed in
By repeating the above process, a good decoding result can be finally obtained.
Here, LLR calculation processing in the demapping unit 214 will be described.
A bit string b (b ₀ , _{b 1} , . S ₀ , _{S 1} , .

Let y be the received signal, let b _i be the _i (i=0, 1, . ₎ , the formula (1) holds.

Here, as will be described later, the first term on the last right-hand side of equation (1) is an LLR obtained from bits other than the i-th bit, which is defined as extrinsic information L _e (b _i ). Also, the second term on the last right-hand side of Equation (1) is an LLR obtained based on the a priori probability of the i-th bit, which is defined as a priori information L _a (b _i ).
Then, equation (1) becomes equation (2), which can be transformed into equation (3).

The demapping unit 214 outputs the processing result of equation (3) as LLRs.
Now consider the numerator p(y|b _i =0) of the first term on the last right hand side of equation (1).
p(y|b _i =0) is the probability that the received signal is y when it is known that b _{i = 0} . _{p(y|S k ) p ( S k |} b _i =0). Considering all symbol points, Equation (4) holds.

Similarly, for the denominator p(y|b _i =1) of the first term on the last right side of equation (1), equation (5)
holds.
Therefore, the first term on the last right side of Equation (1) becomes Equation (6).

Assuming that Gaussian noise with variance σ2 is added to p(y|S _k ) in equation (6) in the process of transmitting symbol point Sk and becoming received signal y, equation (7) can be used.

Also, p(S _k |b _i =0) in equation (6 ₎ is the symbol point S
This is the probability of becoming k, and is represented by the product of the prior probabilities of the bits other than bi among the bits constituting the symbol point Sk. Let S _k (b _j ) be the j-th bit (j=0, 1, . It holds.

Now consider p(b _j =S _k (b _j )).
Assuming that L _a (b _j ) is given as prior information, the second term on the last right side of equation (1) yields equation (9) and equation (10).

Furthermore, from the relationship p(b _j =0)+p(b _j =1)=1, Equations (11) and (12) hold.

Using this results in equation (13), and equation (8) becomes equation (14).

Here, an equation similar to equation (14) also holds for p(S _k |b _i =1).
Equation (6) becomes Equation (15) from Equations (7) and (14). Note that the numerator S _k (b _i ) is 0 and the denominator S _k (b _i ) is 1 as in the condition of Σ.

From the above, in performing repeated processing in BICM-ID, the demapping unit 214 performs an exponential operation and a summation operation for each symbol point and the bit assigned to that point. Each of them is obtained, and then logarithmically calculated.
Next, processing in the bit-reduction decoder 215 will be described.

The bit-reduction decoder 215 converts the LLR after the bit number reduction calculated by the demapping unit 214 into the LLR before the bit number reduction required by the decoding unit 217, and the bit number before the reduction calculated by the decoding unit 217. A process of converting the LLRs into LLRs after the number of bits required by the demapping unit 214 is reduced.
In the bit-reduction decoder 215, the process of converting to LLR before and after bit reduction is
This is performed for each [+] (each XOR part) in FIG. 5, and the operation is performed by the bit connected to the [+].

Here, in the configuration as shown in FIG. 6, each bit is u ₁ , u ₂ , u ₃ , LLR of each bit is L(u ₁ ), L(u ₂ ), L(u ₃ ), and L Consider L(u ₃ ) given (u ₁ ) and L(u ₂ ).
First, consider u ₁ .
Given L(u ₁ ), from equations (11) and (12), equations (16) and (1)
7) holds.

When u ₁ =0 is associated with "+1" and when u ₁ =1 is associated with "-1", the expected value E of u ₁
[u ₁ ] becomes Equation (18).

In FIG. 6, since u ₃ =u ₁ [+]u ₂ and E[u ₃ ]=E[u ₁ ]E[u ₂ ], substituting equation (18) yields equation (19). , the equation (20).

_In the above, the bits u ₁ , u ₂ , and u ₃ were considered, but when generalized to the case where j signals are connected, the equation (21) is obtained. For example, in FIG. In the case of obtaining, the formula (22) is obtained using L(m ₃ ), L(b ₆ ), and L(b ₅ ).

Note that when the transmission side does not perform bit number reduction processing, the special processing described above is not performed.
Although the operation of BICM-ID has been described above, iterative detection is not necessarily required, and signal processing that performs detection only once may be used.
<Transmitter>
FIG. 7 is a configuration diagram of a transmission device.

Transmitting apparatus 700 includes error correction coding section 702 , control information generating section 704 , interleaving section 706 , mapping section 708 , modulating section 710 and radio section 712 .
The error correction coding unit 702 receives a control signal and information bits as input, and based on the control signal, for example, determines the code length (block length) of the error correction code and the coding rate of the error correction code. Then, error correction coding is performed based on the determined error correction coding method, and the bits after error correction coding are output to interleaving section 706 .

Interleaving section 706 receives a control signal and encoded bits as input, determines an interleaving method based on the control signal, interleaves (rearranges) the encoded bits, and maps the rearranged data to mapping section 708 . output to
A control information generation and mapping unit 704 receives a control signal, and based on the control signal, generates control information (for example, information on the physical layer such as the error correction scheme and modulation scheme used by the transmission apparatus, , control information other than the physical layer, etc.), performs mapping on this information, and outputs a control information signal.

Mapping section 708 receives the control signal and the rearranged data as input, determines a mapping method based on the control signal, performs mapping on the rearranged data by the determined mapping method, and converts the baseband signal in-phase component. Output I, the quadrature component Q. Assume that modulation schemes that mapping section 708 can handle include, for example, π/2 shift BPSK, QPSK, 8PSK, (12,4)16APSK, (8,8)16APSK, and 32APSK.

Details of (12,4)16APSK and (8,8)16APSK and details of the mapping method that characterizes this embodiment will be described in detail later.
Modulation section 710 receives a control signal, a control information signal, a pilot signal, and a baseband signal, determines a frame configuration based on the control signal, and modulates the control information signal, pilot signal, and baseband signal according to the frame configuration. Generate and output a signal.

Radio section 712 receives the modulated signal as input, performs processing such as band limitation using a root roll-off filter, orthogonal modulation, frequency conversion, amplification, etc., and generates a transmission signal, which is transmitted from the antenna. be.
<Signal point arrangement>
Next, the signal point arrangement for (12,4)16APSK and (8,8)16APSK mapping performed by mapping section 708, which is important in the present embodiment, and bit allocation (labeling) to each signal point will be described. .

As shown in FIG. 8, (12,4)16APSK mapping signal points are arranged on two concentric circles with different radii (amplitude components) on the IQ plane. In this specification, of these concentric circles, the circle with the larger radius _R2 is called the "outer circle", and the circle with the smaller radius _R1 is called the "inner circle". The ratio of radius _R2 to radius _R1 is called the "radius ratio" (or "ring ratio"). R ₁ is a real number, R ₂ is a real number, and R ₁ >0 and R ₂ >0. Also, R ₁ <R ₂ .

Also, 12 signal points are arranged on the circumference of the outer circle, and 4 signal points are arranged on the circumference of the inner circle. (12, 4) (12, 4) of 16APSK means that there are 12 signal points on the outer circle and 4 signal points on the inner circle, respectively.
The coordinates of each signal point of (12,4)16APSK on the IQ plane are as follows.
Signal point 1-1[0000]・・・（R ₂ cos(π/4), R ₂ sin(π/4)）
Signal point 1-2[1000]・・・（R ₂ cos(5π/12), R ₂ sin(5π/12)）
Signal point 1-3 [1100] ... (R ₁ cos(π/4), R ₁ sin(π/4))
Signal point 1-4[0100]・・・（R ₂ cos(π/12), R ₂ sin(π/12)）
Signal point 2-1 [0010] ... (R ₂ cos(3π/4), R ₂ sin(3π/4))
Signal point 2-2[1010]・・・（R ₂ cos(7π/12), R ₂ sin(7π/12)）
Signal point 2-3[1110]・・・（R ₁ cos(3π/4), R ₁ sin(3π/4)）
Signal point 2-4[0110]・・・（R ₂ cos(11π/12), R ₂ sin(11π/12)）
Signal point 3-1 [0011] ... (R ₂ cos(-3π/4), R ₂ sin(-3π/4))
Signal point 3-2[1011]・・・（R ₂ cos(-7π/12), R ₂ sin(-7π/12)）
Signal point 3-3[1111]・・・（R ₁ cos(-3π/4), R ₁ sin(-3π/4)）
Signal point 3-4[0111]・・・（R ₂ cos(-11π/12), R ₂ sin(-11π/12)）
Signal point 4-1 [0001] ... (R ₂ cos(-π/4), R ₂ sin(-π/4))
Signal point 4-2[1001]・・・（R ₂ cos(-5π/12), R ₂ sin(-5π/12)）
Signal point 4-3[1101]・・・（R ₁ cos(-π/4), R ₁ sin(-π/4)）
Signal point 4-4[0101]・・・（R ₂ cos(-π/12), R ₂ sin(-π/12)）
The unit of phase is radian. So, for example, R ₂ cos(π/4)
, where the unit of π/4 is radians. The unit of phase is radian also in the following description.

Also, for example, above,
Signal point 1-1[0000]・・・（R ₂ cos(π/4), R ₂ sin(π/4)）
However, in the data input to mapping section 708, when _four bits [ _b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [0000], the in-phase component _I and the quadrature component of the baseband signal after mapping are Q means that (I, Q) = (R ₂ cos(π/4),R ₂ sin(π/4)). In another example,
Signal point 4-4[0101]・・・（R ₂ cos(-π/12), R ₂ sin(-π/12)）
However, when four bits [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0101] in the data to be input to mapping section 708, the in-phase component I and the quadrature component of the baseband signal after mapping are Q means that (I, Q) = (R ₂ cos(-π/12), R ₂ sin(-π/12)).

For this point, signal point 1-1, signal point 1-2, signal point 1-3, signal point 1-4, signal point 2-1, signal point 2-2, signal point 2-3, signal point 2 -4, signal point 3-1, signal point 3-2, signal point 3-3, signal point 3-4, signal point 4-1, signal point 4-2, signal point 4-3, signal point 4-4 are all the same.
As shown in FIG. 9, (8,8)16APSK mapping signal points are arranged on two concentric circles with different radii (amplitude components) on the IQ plane. Eight signal points are arranged on the circumference of the outer circle, and eight signal points are arranged on the circumference of the inner circle. (8, 8) (8, 8) in 16APSK means that there are 8 signal points each in the order of the outer circle and the inner circle. As in the case of (12,4)16APSK, among the concentric circles, the circle with the larger radius _R2 is called the "outer circle", and the circle with the smaller radius _R1 is called the "inner circle". The ratio of radius _R2 to radius _R1 is called the "radius ratio" (or "ring ratio"). Note that R ₁ is a real number,
R ₂ is a real number, and R ₁ >0 and R ₂ >0. R ₁ <R ₂ .

The coordinates of each signal point of (8,8)16APSK on the IQ plane are as follows.
Signal point 1-1 [0000] ... (R ₁ cos(π/8), R ₁ sin(π/8))
Signal point 1-2 [0010] ... (R ₁ cos(3π/8), R ₁ sin(3π/8))
Signal point 1-3[0110]・・・（R ₁ cos(5π/8), R ₁ sin(5π/8)）
Signal point 1-4 [0100] ... (R ₁ cos(7π/8), R ₁ sin(7π/8))
Signal points 1-5[1100]・・・（R ₁ cos(-7π/8), R ₁ sin(-7π/8)）
Signal points 1-6[1110]・・・（R ₁ cos(-5π/8), R ₁ sin(-5π/8)）
Signal point 1-7[1010]・・・（R ₁ cos(-3π/8), R ₁ sin(-3π/8)）
Signal points 1-8[1000]・・・（R ₁ cos(-π/8), R ₁ sin(-π/8)）
Signal point 2-1 [0001] ... (R ₂ cos(π/8), R ₂ sin(π/8))
Signal point 2-2 [0011] ... (R ₂ cos(3π/8), R ₂ sin(3π/8))
Signal point 2-3[0111]・・・（R ₂ cos(5π/8), R ₂ sin(5π/8)）
Signal point 2-4[0101]・・・（R ₂ cos(7π/8), R ₂ sin(7π/8)）
Signal point 2-5[1101]・・・（R ₂ cos(-7π/8), R ₂ sin(-7π/8)）
Signal point 2-6[1111]・・・（R ₂ cos(-5π/8), R ₂ sin(-5π/8)）
Signal point 2-7[1011]・・・（R ₂ cos(-3π/8), R ₂ sin(-3π/8)）
Signal point 2-8[1001]・・・（R ₂ cos(-π/8), R ₂ sin(-π/8)）
Note that, for example, in the above
Signal point 1-1 [0000] ... (R ₁ cos(π/8), R ₁ sin(π/8))
However, in the data input to mapping section 708, when _four bits [ _b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [0000], the in-phase component _I and the quadrature component of the baseband signal after mapping are Q means that (I, Q) = (R ₁ cos(π/8),R ₁ sin(π/8)). In another example,
Signal point 2-8[1001]・・・（R ₂ cos(-π/8), R ₂ sin(-π/8)）
However, in the data input to mapping section 708, when four bits [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1001], the in-phase component I and the quadrature component of the baseband signal after mapping are Q means that (I, Q) = (R ₂ cos(-π/8),R ₂ sin(-π/8)).

For this point, signal point 1-1, signal point 1-2, signal point 1-3, signal point 1-4, signal point 1-5, signal point 1-6, signal point 1-7, signal point 1 -8, signal point 2-1, signal point 2-2, signal point 2-3, signal point 2-4, signal point 2-5, signal point 2-6, signal point 2-7, signal point 2-8 are all the same.
<Transmission output>
In order to make the transmission powers of the two types of modulation schemes described above the same, the following normalization factors may be used.

Note that a _(12,4) is the normalization coefficient of (12,4)16APSK, and a _(8,8) is the coefficient of (8,8)16APSK.

Let I _b be the in-phase component of the baseband signal before normalization, and let Q _b be the quadrature component. Let I _n be the in-phase component of the normalized baseband signal, and Q _n be the quadrature component. Then, when the modulation method is (12,4)16APSK, (I _n , Q _n ) = (a _(12,4) × I _b , a _(12,4) × Q _b ) holds, and the modulation method is For (8,8)16APSK, (I _n , Q _n )=(a _(8,8) ×I _b , a _(8,8) ×Q _b ) holds.

In the case of (12,4)16APSK, I _b is the in-phase component of the baseband signal before normalization, and Q _b is the quadrature component of the baseband signal after mapping obtained by mapping based on FIG. It becomes an in-phase component I and a quadrature component Q. Therefore, when (12,4)16APSK, the following relationship holds.
Signal point 1-1[0000]・・・(I _n , Q _n )=(a _(12,4) ×R ₂ ×cos(π/4), a _(12,4) ×R ₂ ×sin(π /Four))
Signal point 1-2[1000]・・・(I _n , Q _n )=(a _(12,4) ×R ₂ ×cos(5π/12), a _(12,4) ×R ₂ ×sin(5π /12))
Signal point 1-3[1100]・・・(I _n , Q _n )=(a _(12,4) ×R ₁ ×cos(π/4), a _(12,4) ×R ₁ ×sin(π /Four))
Signal point 1-4[0100]・・・(I _n , Q _n )=(a _(12,4) ×R ₂ ×cos(π/12), a _(12,4) ×R ₂ ×sin(π /12))
Signal point 2-1[0010]・・・(I _n , Q _n )=(a _(12,4) ×R ₂ ×cos(3π/4), a _(12,4) ×R ₂ ×sin(3
π/4))
Signal point 2-2[1010]・・・(I _n , Q _n )=(a _(12,4) ×R ₂ ×cos(7π/12), a _(12,4) ×R ₂ ×sin(7π /12))
Signal point 2-3[1110]・・・(I _n , Q _n )=(a _(12,4) ×R ₁ ×cos(3π/4), a _(12,4) ×R ₁ ×sin(3
π/4))
Signal point 2-4[0110]・・・(I _n , Q _n )=(a _(12,4) ×R ₂ ×cos(11π/12), a _(12,4) ×R ₂ ×sin(11π /12))
Signal point 3-1[0011]・・・(I _n , Q _n )=(a _(12,4) ×R ₂ ×cos(-3π/4), a _(12,4) ×R ₂ ×sin( -3π/4))
Signal point 3-2[1011]・・・(I _n , Q _n )=(a _(12,4) ×R ₂ ×cos(-7π/12), a _(12,4) ×R ₂ ×sin( -7π/12))
Signal point 3-3[1111]・・・(I _n , Q _n )=(a _(12,4) ×R ₁ ×cos(-3π/4), a _(12,4) ×R ₁ ×sin( -3π/4))
Signal point 3-4 [0111] (I _n , Q _n ) = (a _(12,4) ×R ₂ ×cos(-11π/12), a _(12,4) ×R ₂ ×sin( -11π/12))
Signal point 4-1[0001]・・・(I _n , Q _n )=(a _(12,4) ×R ₂ ×cos(-π/4), a _(12,4) ×R ₂ ×sin( -
π/4))
Signal point 4-2[1001]・・・(I _n , Q _n )=(a _(12,4) ×R ₂ ×cos(-5π/12), a _(12,4) ×R ₂ ×sin( -5π/12))
Signal point 4-3[1101]・・・(I _n , Q _n )=(a _(12,4) ×R ₁ ×cos(-π/4), a _(12,4) ×R ₁ ×sin( -
π/4))
Signal point 4-4[0101]・・・(I _n , Q _n )=(a _(12,4) ×R ₂ ×cos(-π/12), a _(12,4) ×R ₂ ×sin( -π/12))
Also, for example, above,
Signal point 1-1[0000]・・・(I _n , Q _n )=(a _(12,4) ×R ₂ ×cos(π/4), a _(12,4) ×R ₂ ×sin(π /Four))
However, in the data input to the mapping unit 708, when _four bits [ _b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [0000], (In, _Qn ) ₌ ( _{a (12, 4)} ×R ₂ ×cos(π/4), a _(12,4) ×R ₂ ×sin(π/4)). In another example,
Signal point 4-4[0101]・・・(I _n , Q _n )=(a _(12,4) ×R ₂ ×cos(-π/12), a _(12,4) ×R ₂ ×sin( -π/12))
However, in the data input to the mapping unit 708, when _four bits [ _b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [0101], (In, _Qn ) ₌ ( _{a (12, 4)} ×R ₂ ×cos(-π/12), a _(12,4) ×R ₂ ×sin(-
π/12)).

For this point, signal point 1-1, signal point 1-2, signal point 1-3, signal point 1-4, signal point 2-1, signal point 2-2, signal point 2-3, signal point 2 -4, signal point 3-1, signal point 3-2, signal point 3-3, signal point 3-4, signal point 4-1, signal point 4-2, signal point 4-3, signal point 4-4 are all the same.

Mapping section 708 then outputs I _n and Q _n described above as baseband signal in-phase and quadrature components.

Similarly, for (8,8)16APSK, the in-phase component of the baseband signal before normalization is I _b , and the quadrature component Q _b is the baseband signal after mapping obtained by mapping based on FIG. , the in-phase component I and the quadrature component Q. Therefore, the following relationship holds for (8,8)16APSK.

Signal point 1-1[0000]・・・(I _n , Q _n )=(a _(8,8) ×R ₁ ×cos(π/8), a _(8,8) ×R ₁ ×sin(π /8))
Signal point 1-2[0010]・・・(I _n , Q _n )=(a _(8,8) ×R ₁ ×cos(3π/8), a _(8,8) ×R ₁ ×sin(3π /8))
Signal point 1-3 [0110] (I _n , Q _n ) = (a _(8,8) ×R ₁ ×cos(5π/8), a _(8,8) ×R ₁ ×sin(5π /8))
Signal point 1-4[0100]・・・(I _n , Q _n )=(a _(8,8) ×R ₁ ×cos(7π/8), a _(8,8) ×R ₁ ×sin(7π /8))
Signal point 1-5[1100]・・・（I _n , Q _n ）=（a _(8,8) ×R ₁ ×cos(-7π/8), a _(8,8) ×R ₁ ×sin( -7
π/8))
Signal point 1-6[1110]・・・(I _n , Q _n )=(a _(8,8) ×R ₁ ×cos(-5π/8), a _(8,8) ×R ₁ ×sin( -Five
π/8))
Signal point 1-7[1010]・・・(I _n , Q _n )=(a _(8,8) ×R ₁ ×cos(-3π/8), a _(8,8) ×R ₁ ×sin( -3
π/8))
Signal point 1-8[1000]・・・(I _n , Q _n )=(a _(8,8) ×R ₁ ×cos(-π/8), a _(8,8) ×R ₁ ×sin( -π/8))
Signal point 2-1[0001]・・・(I _n , Q _n )=(a _(8,8) ×R ₂ ×cos(π/8), a _(8,8) ×R ₂ ×sin(π /8))
Signal point 2-2[0011]・・・(I _n , Q _n )=(a _(8,8) ×R ₂ ×cos(3π/8), a _(8,8) ×R ₂ ×sin(3π /8))
Signal point 2-3 [0111] (I _n , Q _n ) = (a _(8,8) ×R ₂ ×cos(5π/8), a _(8,8) ×R ₂ ×sin(5π /8))
Signal point 2-4 [0101] (I _n , Q _n ) = (a _(8,8) ×R ₂ ×cos(7π/8), a _(8,8) ×R ₂ ×sin(7π /8))
Signal point 2-5[1101]・・・(I _n , Q _n )=(a _(8,8) ×R ₂ ×cos(-7π/8), a _(8,8) ×R ₂ ×sin( -7
π/8))
Signal point 2-6[1111]・・・(I _n , Q _n )=(a _(8,8) ×R ₂ ×cos(-5π/8), a _(8,8) ×R ₂ ×sin( -Five
π/8))
Signal point 2-7[1011]・・・(I _n , Q _n )=(a _(8,8) ×R ₂ ×cos(-3π/8), a _(8,8) ×R ₂ ×sin( -3
π/8))
Signal point 2-8[1001]・・・(I _n , Q _n )=(a _(8,8) ×R ₂ ×cos(-π/8), a _(8,8) ×R ₂ ×sin( -π/8))
Note that, for example, in the above
Signal point 1-1[0000]・・・(I _n , Q _n )=(a _(8,8) ×R ₁ ×cos(π/8), a _(8,8) ×R ₁ ×sin(π /8))
However, in the data input to the mapping unit 708, when the _four bits [ _b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [0000], (In, _Qn ) ₌ ( _{a (8, 8)} × _R1 ×cos(π/8), a _(8,8) × _R1 ×sin(π/8)
) means that In another example,
Signal point 2-8[1001]・・・(I _n , Q _n )=(a _(8,8) ×R ₂ ×cos(-π/8), a _(8,8) ×R ₂ ×sin( -π/8))
However, in the data to be input to the mapping unit 708, when the _four bits [ _b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [1001], (In, _Qn ) ₌ ( _{a (8, 8)} ×R ₂ ×cos(-π/8), a _(8,8) ×R ₂ ×sin(-π/8)).

For this point, signal point 1-1, signal point 1-2, signal point 1-3, signal point 1-4, signal point 1-5, signal point 1-6, signal point 1-7, signal point 1 -8, signal point 2-1, signal point 2-2, signal point 2-3, signal point 2-4, signal point 2-5, signal point 2-6, signal point 2-7, signal point 2-8 are all the same.

Mapping section 708 then outputs I _n and Q _n described above as baseband signal in-phase and quadrature components.

<Frame configuration of modulated signal>
Next, the frame configuration of a modulated signal when this embodiment is applied to advanced wideband satellite digital broadcasting will be described.

FIG. 10 is a block diagram of modulation signal generation. FIG. 11 shows the frame configuration of the modulated signal.
10 are redrawn by integrating the error correction encoding section 702, the control information generation and mapping section 704, the interleaving section 706, and the mapping section 708 in FIG.

A TMCC (Transmission and Multiplexing Configuration Control) signal is a control signal for controlling transmission and multiplexing such as a plurality of transmission modes (modulation scheme and error correction coding rate). Also, the TMCC signal indicates allocation of a modulation scheme for each symbol (or slot composed of a plurality of symbols).
The selector 1001 in FIG. 10 switches the contacts 1 and 2 so that the symbol string of the modulated wave output is arranged as shown in FIG. Specifically, switching is performed as listed below.

Synchronous transmission: contact 1=d, contact 2=e
When sending a pilot: contact 1 = c, contact 2 = selection of a to e according to the modulation scheme assigned to the slot (or symbol) (This point will be discussed in more detail later.)

When sending TMCC: contact 1=b, contact 2=e
When sending data: contact 1 = a, contact 2 = selection of a to e according to the modulation scheme assigned to the slot (or symbol) Alternatively, they may choose to do so on a regular basis, more on that later.)

It is assumed that information for making the arrangement shown in FIG. 11 is included in the control signal of FIG.

Interleaving section 706 performs bit interleaving (bit rearrangement) based on the information of the control signal.
Mapping section 708 performs mapping according to the method selected by selection section 1001 based on the information of the control signal.
Based on the information of the control signal, the modulation section 710 performs processing such as time-division multiplexing, quadrature modulation, and band limitation using a root roll-off filter, and outputs a modulated wave.

<Examples of data symbols related to the present invention>
As explained above, in the advanced wideband satellite digital broadcasting, (12,4)16APSK is used as a modulation method for transmitting 4 bits by 16 signal points, that is, 1 symbol, in the in-phase I-quadrature Q plane. We are hiring. One of the reasons is that (12,4)16APSK PAPR is smaller than, for example, 16QAM PAPR and (8,8)16APSK PAPR, and the average transmission power of radio waves transmitted from a broadcasting station, that is, a satellite, is increased. This is because it has the advantage of being able to Therefore, (12,4)16APSK has worse BER characteristics than 16QAM and (8,8)16APSK, but considering that the average transmission power can be set large, there is a high possibility that a wide receivable area can be secured. .
(This point has been explained above.)
Therefore, in the in-phase I-quadrature Q plane, a modulation scheme with 16 signal points (or
If the PAPR is small and the BER characteristic is good for the transmission method), there is a high possibility that a wide receivable area can be secured. The present invention is based on this point. (It should be noted that "good BER characteristics" corresponds to a smaller BER at a certain SNR.)
The gist of the data symbol configuration method, which is one of the present invention, is as follows.

"In a symbol group in which 3 or more (or 4 or more) symbols whose modulation scheme is either (12,4)16APSK or (8,8)16APSK are consecutive, (12,4)16APSK symbols There is no continuous portion, and there is no continuous portion of (8,8)16APSK symbols.
"
(However, as this modified example will be explained below, there are transmission methods that can obtain the same effect as the above example of symbol arrangement even with a method that does not satisfy this.)

A specific example of this point will be described below.

The 136 symbols of Data#7855 shown in FIG. 11 are, as shown in FIG. 11, "first symbol,""secondsymbol,""thirdsymbol," . . , “the 135th symbol” and “the 136th symbol” are arranged side by side.

At this time, it is assumed that the modulation scheme is (12,4)16APSK for odd-numbered symbols and (8,8)16APSK for even-numbered symbols.
FIG. 12 shows an example of data symbols in this case. FIG. 12 shows 6 symbols (“51st symbol” to “56th symbol”) out of 136 symbols. As shown in FIG. 12, adjacent It can be seen that the two types of modulation schemes are alternately used between symbols.

In addition, in FIG. 12, it is as follows.
4 bits [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1100] transmitted in the “51st symbol”, and as shown in FIG. The transmitting device transmits the components. (Modulation method: (12,4)16APSK)
4 bits [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0101] transmitted in the “52nd symbol”, and as shown in FIG. The transmitting device transmits the components. (Modulation method: (8,8)16APSK)
4 bits [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0011] transmitted in the “53rd symbol”, and as shown in FIG. The transmitting device transmits the components. (Modulation method: (12,4)16APSK)
4 bits [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0110] transmitted in the “54th symbol”, and the in-phase component and quadrature component of the baseband signal corresponding to the signal point ● as shown in FIG. The transmitting device transmits the components. (Modulation method: (8,8)16APSK)
4 bits [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1001] transmitted in the “55th symbol”, and as shown in FIG. The transmitting device transmits the components. (Modulation method: (12,4)16APSK)
4 bits [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0010] transmitted in the “56th symbol”, and as shown in FIG. The transmitting device transmits the components. (Modulation method: (8,8)16APSK)

In the above example, the explanation was given in "a configuration in which the odd-numbered symbols are (12,4)16APSK and the even-numbered symbols are (8,8)16APSK", but the "odd-numbered symbols is (8,8)16APSK, and even-numbered symbols are (12,4)16APSK.

As a result, a transmission method with a small PAPR and a good BER characteristic can be achieved, the average transmission power can be set large, and the BER characteristic is good, so there is a high possibility that a wide receivable area can be secured.

<Advantages of alternately arranging symbols of different modulation schemes>

In the present invention, among modulation schemes having 16 signal points in the IQ plane, (12,4)16APSK with a small PAPR and (8,8)16APSK with a slightly large PAPR,

"In a symbol group in which 3 or more (or 4 or more) symbols whose modulation scheme is either (12,4)16APSK or (8,8)16APSK are consecutive, (12,4)16APSK symbols There is no continuous portion, and there is no continuous portion of (8,8)16APSK symbols.
'I'm doing it.

When (8,8)16APSK symbols are arranged continuously, the PAPR increases because the (8,8)16APSK symbols are continuous. But to avoid continuation,
"In a symbol group in which 3 or more (or 4 or more) symbols whose modulation scheme is either (12,4)16APSK or (8,8)16APSK are consecutive, (12,4)16APSK symbols There is no continuous portion, and there is no continuous portion of (8,8)16APSK symbols.
, the signal points related to (8,8)16APSK do not continue, so that the effect of (12,4)16APSK with a small PAPR is obtained and the PAPR is suppressed.

Also, in terms of BER characteristics, when (12,4)16APSK is continuous, BER characteristics are poor in BICM (or BICM-ID),
"In a symbol group in which 3 or more (or 4 or more) symbols whose modulation scheme is either (12,4)16APSK or (8,8)16APSK are consecutive, (12,4)16APSK symbols There is no continuous portion, and there is no continuous portion of (8,8)16APSK symbols.
, it is possible to obtain the effect of being affected by (8,8)16APSK symbols and improving the BER characteristics.

In particular, setting the ring ratio of (12,4)16APSK and the ring ratio of (8,8)16APSK is important to obtain the small PAPR.
From R ₁ and R ₂ used to express the signal points in the IQ plane of (12,4)16APSK, the ring ratio R ₍ 12,4) of (12,4)16APSK is given by R _(12,4) = It shall be expressed as R ₂ /R ₁ .
Similarly, the ring ratio R _(8,8) of (8,8) _16APSK can be defined as R ( _{8 , 8)} Let =R ₂ /R ₁ be expressed.

At this time, it is possible to obtain the effect that "if R _(8,8) <R _(12,4) is established, the possibility that the PAPR can be further reduced increases".

"In a symbol group in which 3 or more (or 4 or more) symbols whose modulation scheme is either (12,4)16APSK or (8,8)16APSK are consecutive, (12,4)16APSK symbols There is no continuous portion and there is no continuous portion of (8,8)16APSK symbols.", the modulation scheme that is likely to dominate the peak power is (8,8)16APSK becomes.
At this time, the peak power generated in (8,8)16APSK is likely to increase as R _(8,8) increases. Therefore, in order not to increase the peak power, it is better to set R _{( 8,8)} small. There is a high degree of freedom. Therefore, it is highly likely that there is a relationship of R _(8,8) <R _(12,4) .
However, even if R _(8,8) >R _(12,4) , the effect of being able to make the PAPR smaller than that of (8,8)16APSK can be obtained. Therefore, when focusing on improving the BER characteristics, R _(8,8) >R _(12,4) may be good.
The relationship between the above ring ratios is the same in the case of the modified example (<pattern of switching of modulation method, etc.>) described below.
According to the embodiments described above, by alternately arranging symbols of different modulation schemes, it is possible to contribute to providing good data reception quality with small PAPR.
As described above, the gist of the present invention is
"In a symbol group in which 3 or more (or 4 or more) symbols whose modulation scheme is either (12,4)16APSK or (8,8)16APSK are consecutive, (12,4)16APSK symbols There is no continuous part and there is no continuous (8,8)16APSK symbol part.
"
is. In the following, the labeling and signal point arrangement of (12,4)16APSK and the labeling and signal point arrangement of (8,8)16APSK are used to increase the possibility that the receiving apparatus can obtain high data reception quality. Arrangement will be explained.

<(12,4)16APSK labeling and constellation>

[(12,4)16APSK labeling]

Here, the labeling of (12,4)16APSK will be explained. Note that the labeling is the relationship between the input 4 bits [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ] and the arrangement of signal points on the in-phase I-quadrature Q plane. Although an example of (12,4)16APSK labeling is shown in FIG. 8, any labeling that satisfies the following <Condition 1> and <Condition 2> may be used.

For illustration purposes, the following definitions are provided.
When the 4 bits to transmit are [b _a3 b _a2 b _a1 b _a0 ], let signal point A be given in the in-phase I-quadrature Q plane, and when the 4 bits to transmit are [b _b3 b _b2 b _b1 b _b0 ] , give a signal point B in the in-phase I-quadrature Q plane. At this time,
The number of different bits of labeling is defined as 0 when " _ba3 = b _b3 and b _a2 = b _b2 and b _a1 = b _b1 and b _a0 = b _b0 ".

Also defined as follows:
The number of bits with different labeling is defined as 1 when "b _a3 ≠b _b3 and b _a2 =b _b2 and b _a1 =b _b1 and b _a0 =b _b0 ".
The number of bits with different labeling is defined as 1 when "b _a3 =b _b3 and b _a2 ≠b _b2 and b _a1 =b _b1 and b _a0 =b _b0 ".

The number of bits with different labeling is defined as 1 when "b _a3 =b _b3 and b _a2 =b _b2 and b _a1 ≠b _b1 and b _a0 =b _b0 ".
The number of bits with different labeling is defined as 1 when "b _a3 =b _b3 and b _a2 =b _b2 and b _a1 =b _b1 and b _a0 ≠b _b0 ".
The number of bits with different labeling is defined as 2 when "b _a3 ≠b _b3 and b _a2 ≠b _b2 and b _a1 =b _b1 and b _a0 =b _b0 ".

When "b _a3 ≠b _b3 and b _a2 =b _b2 and b _a1 ≠b _b1 and b _a0 =b _b0 ", the number of bits with different labeling is defined as two.
When "b _a3 ≠b _b3 and b _a2 =b _b2 and b _a1 =b _b1 and b _a0 ≠b _b0 ", the number of bits with different labeling is defined as two.
The number of bits with different labeling is defined as 2 when "b _a3 =b _b3 and b _a2 ≠b _b2 and b _a1 ≠b _b1 and b _a0 = b _b0 ".

The number of bits with different labeling is defined as 2 when "b _a3 =b _b3 and b _a2 ≠b _b2 and b _a1 =b _b1 and b _a0 ≠b _b0 ".
The number of bits with different labeling is defined as 2 when "b _a3 =b _b3 and b _a2 =b _b2 and b _a1 ≠b _b1 and b _a0 ≠b _b0 ".

When "b _a3 =b _b3 and b _a2 ≠b _b2 and b _a1 ≠b _b1 and b _a0 ≠b _b0 ", the number of bits with different labeling is defined as 3.

When "b _a3 ≠b _b3 and _ba2 =b _b2 and _ba1 ≠b _b1 and _ba0 ≠b _b0 ", the number of bits with different labeling is defined as 3.
When "b _a3 ≠b _b3 and _ba2 ≠b _b2 and _{ba1=b b1 and ba0} ≠b _b0 ", the number of bits with different labeling is defined as 3.
The number of bits with different labeling is defined as 3 when "b _a3 ≠b _b3 and _ba2 ≠b _b2 and _ba1 ≠b _b1 and _ba0 =b _b0 ".

The number of bits with different labeling is defined as 4 when "b _a3 ≠b _b3 and _ba2 ≠b _b2 and _{ba1 ≠b b1 and ba0} ≠b _b0 ".
Then define the group. In the labeling and signal point arrangement of (12,4)16APSK on the in-phase I-quadrature Q plane in FIG. 1”. Similarly, "signal point 2-1, signal point 2-2, signal point 2-3, signal point 2-4 group 2", "signal point 3-1, signal point 3-2, signal point 3-3 , signal points 3-4 as group 3", and "signal points 4-1, 4-2, 4-3, and 4-4 as group 4".

Then, the following two conditions are given.
<Condition 1>:
X is 1,2,3,4, and for all X that satisfy this, the following holds.
The number of different bits in the labeling of signal point X-1 and signal point X-2 is 1
The number of different bits in the labeling of signal point X-2 and signal point X-3 is 1
The number of different bits in the labeling of signal point X-3 and signal point X-4 is 1
The number of bits with different labeling between signal point X-4 and signal point X-1 is 1

<Condition 2>:
For the outer circle,
The number of bits that differ in labeling between signal point 1-2 and signal point 2-2 is 1
The number of different bits in the labeling of signal point 3-2 and signal point 4-2 is 1
The number of different bits in the labeling of signal points 1-4 and 4-4 is 1
The number of different bits in the labeling of constellation points 2-4 and constellation points 3-4 is 1
holds, and for the inner circle,
The number of different bits in the labeling of signal points 1-3 and 2-3 is 1
The number of different bits in the labeling of signal points 2-3 and 3-3 is 1
The number of different bits in the labeling of signal point 3-3 and signal point 4-3 is 1
The number of different bits in the labeling of signal points 4-3 and 1-3 is 1
holds.

By satisfying the above, since the number of bits in which labeling differs from signal points at close distances for each signal point in the in-phase I-quadrature Q plane is small, the receiving apparatus may be able to obtain high data reception quality. becomes higher. This increases the possibility that high data reception quality can be obtained when the receiving apparatus performs iterative detection.

[(12,4)16APSK signal point arrangement]

Although the signal point arrangement and labeling on the in-phase I-quadrature Q plane of FIG. 14 have been described above, the method of signal point arrangement and labeling on the in-phase I-quadrature Q plane is not limited to this. For example, consider the following as the coordinates and labeling of each signal point of (12,4)16APSK on the IQ plane.

Coordinates of signal point 1-1 on the IQ plane: (cosθ× _R2 ×cos(π/4)-sinθ× _R2 ×sin(π/4), sinθ
× _R2 ×cos(π/4)+cosθ× _R2 ×sin(π/4))
Coordinates of signal points 1-2 on the IQ plane: (cosθ× _R2 ×cos(5π/12)-sinθ× _R2 ×sin(5π/12), sinθ× _R2 ×cos(5π/12)+cosθ ×R ₂ ×sin(5π/12) ）
Coordinates of signal points 1-3 on the IQ plane: (cosθ×R ₁ ×cos(π/4)-sinθ×R ₁ ×sin(π/4), sinθ
× _R1 ×cos(π/4)+cosθ× _R1 ×sin(π/4))
Coordinates of signal points 1-4 on the IQ plane: (cosθ×R ₂ ×cos(π/12)-sinθ×R ₂ ×sin(π/12), sin
θ× _R2 ×cos(π/12)+ cosθ× _R2 ×sin(π/12))
Coordinates of signal point 2-1 on the IQ plane: (cosθ× _R2 ×cos(3π/4)-sinθ× _R2 ×sin(3π/4), sin
θ× _R2 ×cos(3π/4)+cosθ× _R2 ×sin(3π/4))
Coordinates of signal point 2-2 on the IQ plane: ( _cosθR2 ×cos(7π/12)×-sinθ× _R2 ×sin(7π/12), sinθ× _R2 ×cos(7π/12)+ cosθ× _R2 ×sin(7π/12))
Coordinates of signal point 2-3 on the IQ plane: (cosθ×R ₁ ×cos(3π/4)-sinθ×R ₁ ×sin(3π/4), sin
θ× _R1 ×cos(3π/4)+cosθ× _R1 ×sin(3π/4))
Coordinates of signal points 2-4 on the IQ plane: (cosθ× _R2 ×cos(11π/12)-sinθ× _R2 ×sin(11π/12), sinθ× _R2 ×cos(11π/12)+cosθ ×R ₂ ×sin(11π/12) ）
Coordinates of signal point 3-1 on the IQ plane: (cosθ× _R2 ×cos(-3π/4)-sinθ× _R2 ×sin(-3π/4), sinθ× _R2 ×cos(-3π/4 )+ cosθ× _R2 ×sin(-3π/4) )
Coordinates of signal point 3-2 on the IQ plane: (cosθ× _R2 ×cos(-7π/12)-sinθ× _R2 ×sin(-7π/12), sinθ× _R2 ×cos(-7π/12 )+ cosθ× _R2 ×sin(-7π/12) )
Coordinates of signal point 3-3 on the IQ plane: (cosθ× _R1 ×cos(-3π/4)-sinθ× _R1 ×sin(-3π/4), sinθ× _R1 ×cos(-3π/4 )+ cosθ× _R1 ×sin(-3π/4) )
Coordinates of signal points 3-4 on the IQ plane: (cosθ× _R2 ×cos(-11π/12)-sinθ× _R2 ×sin(-11π/12), sinθ× _R2 ×cos(-11π/12 )+ cosθ× _R2 ×sin(-11π/12) )
Coordinates of signal point 4-1 on the IQ plane: (cosθ× _R2 ×cos(-π/4)-sinθ× _R2 ×sin(-π/4), sin
θ× _R2 ×cos(-π/4)+cosθ× _R2 ×sin(-π/4))
Coordinates of signal point 4-2 on the IQ plane: (cosθ× _R2 ×cos(-5π/12)-sinθ× _R2 ×sin(-5π/12), sinθ× _R2 ×cos(-5π/12 )+ cosθ× _R2 ×sin(-5π/12) )
Coordinates of signal point 4-3 on the IQ plane: (cosθ× _R1 ×cos(-π/4)-sinθ× _R1 ×sin(-π/4), sin
θ× _R1 ×cos(-π/4)+cosθ× _R1 ×sin(-π/4))
Coordinates of signal point 4-4 on the IQ plane: (cosθ× _R2 ×cos(-π/12)-sinθ× _R2 ×sin(-π/12), sinθ× _R2 ×cos(-π/12 )+ cosθ× _R2 ×sin(-π/12))
The unit of phase is radian. Therefore, the in-phase component I _n and the quadrature component Q _n of the normalized baseband signal are expressed as follows.

Coordinates of signal point 1-1 on the IQ plane: (I _n , Q _n ) = (a _(12,4) ×cosθ×R ₂ ×cos(π/4)- a _(12,4) ×sinθ×R ₂ ×sin(π/4), a _(12,4) ×sinθ× _R2 ×cos(π/4)+a _(12,4) ×cosθ× _R2 ×sin(
π/4) )
Coordinates of signal point 1-2 on IQ plane: (I _n , Q _n ) = (a _(12,4) ×cosθ×R ₂ ×cos(5π/12)- a _(12,4) ×sinθ×R ₂ ×sin(5π/12), a _(12,4) ×sinθ× _R2 ×cos(5π/12)+a _(12,4) ×cosθ× _R2
×sin(5π/12) ）
Coordinates of signal points 1-3 on the IQ plane: (I _n , Q _n ) = (a _(12,4) ×cosθ×R ₁ ×cos(π/4)- a _(12,4) ×sinθ×R ₁ ×sin(π/4), a _(12,4) ×sinθ× _R1 ×cos(π/4)+a _(12,4) ×cosθ× _R1 ×sin(
π/4) )
Coordinates of signal points 1-4 on the IQ plane: (I _n , Q _n )=(a _(12,4) ×cosθ×R ₂ ×cos(π/12)- a _(12,4
) ×sinθ× _R2 ×sin(π/12), a _(12,4) ×sinθ× _R2 ×cos(π/12)+a _(12,4) ×cosθ× _R2 ×sin(π/12 ) )
Coordinates of signal point 2-1 on the IQ plane: (I _n , Q _n ) = (a _(12,4) ×cosθ×R ₂ ×cos(3π/4)- a _(12,4) ×sinθ×R ₂ ×sin(3π/4), a _(12,4) ×sinθ× _R2 ×cos(3π/4)+a _(12,4) ×cosθ× _R2 ×sin(3π/4))
Coordinates of signal point 2-2 on the IQ plane: (I _n , Q _n ) = (a _(12,4) ×cosθR ₂ ×cos(7π/12)×- a _(12,4) ×sinθ×R ₂ ×sin(7π/12), a _(12,4) ×sinθ× _R2 ×cos(7π/12)+a _(12,4) ×cosθ× _R2 ×sin(7π/12))
Coordinates of signal point 2-3 on the IQ plane: (I _n , Q _n ) = (a _(12,4) ×cosθ×R ₁ ×cos(3π/4)- a _(12,4) ×sinθ×R ₁ ×sin(3π/4), a _(12,4) ×sinθ× _R1 ×cos(3π/4)+a _(12,4) ×cosθ× _R1 ×sin(3π/4))
Coordinates of signal points 2-4 on the IQ plane: (I _n , Q _n ) = (a _(12,4) ×cosθ×R ₂ ×cos(11π/12)- a _(12,4) ×sinθ×R ₂ ×sin(11π/12), a _(12,4) ×sinθ× _R2 ×cos(11π/12)+a ₍ 12,4)×cosθ× _R2 ×sin(11π/12))
Coordinates of signal point 3-1 on the IQ plane: (I _n , Q _n ) = (a _(12,4) ×cosθ×R ₂ ×cos(-3π/4)- a _(12,4) ×sinθ× _R2 ×sin(-3π/4), a _(12,4) ×sinθ× _R2 ×cos(-3π/4)+ a ₍ 12,4)×cosθ× _R2
×sin(-3π/4) )
Coordinates of signal point 3-2 on the IQ plane: (I _n , Q _n ) = (a _(12,4) ×cosθ×R ₂ ×cos(-7π/12)- a _(12,4) ×sinθ× _R2 ×sin(-7π/12), a _(12,4) ×sinθ× _R2 ×cos(-7π/12)+ a ₍ 12,4)×cosθ× _R2 ×sin(-7π/12) )
Coordinates of signal point 3-3 on the IQ plane: (I _n , Q _n ) = (a _(12,4) ×cosθ×R ₁ ×cos(-3π/4)- a _(12,4) ×sinθ× _R1 ×sin(-3π/4), a _(12,4) ×sinθ× _R1 ×cos(-3π/4)+a ₍ 12,4)×cosθ× _R1
×sin(-3π/4) )
Coordinates of signal points 3-4 on the IQ plane: (I _n , Q _n ) = (a _(12,4) ×cosθ×R ₂ ×cos(-11π/12)- a _(12,4) ×sinθ× _R2 ×sin(-11π/12), a _(12,4) ×sinθ× _R2 ×cos(-11π/12)+a _(12,4) ×cos
θ× _R2 ×sin(-11π/12))
Coordinates of signal point 4-1 on the IQ plane: (I _n , Q _n ) = (a _(12,4) ×cosθ×R ₂ ×cos(-π/4)- a _(12,4) ×sinθ× _R2 ×sin(-π/4), a _(12,4) ×sinθ× _R2 ×cos(-π/4)+ a _(12,4) ×cosθ× _R2 ×sin(-π/4) )
Coordinates of signal point 4-2 on IQ plane: (I _n , Q _n )=(a _(12,4) ×cosθ×R ₂ ×cos(-5π/12)- a _(12,4) ×sinθ× _R2 ×sin(-5π/12), a _(12,4) ×sinθ× _R2 ×cos(-5π/12)+ a ₍ 12,4)×cosθ× _R2 ×sin(-5π/12) )
Coordinates of signal point 4-3 on the IQ plane: (I _n , Q _n ) = (a _(12,4) ×cosθ×R ₁ ×cos(-π/4)- a _(12,4) ×sinθ× _R1 ×sin(-π/4), a _(12,4) ×sinθ× _R1 ×cos(-π/4)+ a _(12,4) ×cosθ× _R1 ×sin(-π/4) )
Coordinates of signal point 4-4 on the IQ plane: (I _n , Q _n ) = (a _(12,4) ×cosθ×R ₂ ×cos(-π/12)- a _(12,4) ×sinθ× _R2 ×sin(-π/12), a _(12,4) ×sinθ× _R2 ×cos(-π/12)+ a _(12,4) ×cosθ× _R2 ×sin(-π/12) )
Here, θ is the phase given on the in-phase I-quadrature Q plane, and a _(12,4) is as shown in equation (23). and,

"In a symbol group in which 3 or more (or 4 or more) symbols whose modulation scheme is either (12,4)16APSK or (8,8)16APSK are consecutive, (12,4)16APSK symbols There is no continuous portion and there is no continuous portion of (8,8)16APSK symbols.” In the method, the coordinates of each signal point of (12,4)16APSK on the IQ plane are given above. (12,4)16APSK that satisfies <Condition 1> and <Condition 2>.

FIG. 15 shows an example of (12,4)16APSK signal point constellation and labeling that satisfies the above. FIG. 15 is obtained by rotating all the signal points by .pi./6 radians with respect to FIG. 14, and .theta.=.pi./6 radians.

<(8,8)16APSK labeling and constellation>

[(8,8)16APSK labeling]

Here, the labeling of (8,8)16APSK is explained. Although an example of (8,8)16APSK labeling is shown in FIG. 9, any labeling that satisfies the following <Condition 3> and <Condition 4> may be used.

For illustration purposes, the following definitions are provided.
As shown in FIG. 16, eight signal points on the circumference of the inner circle, namely signal point 1-1, signal point 1-2, signal point 1-3, signal point 1-4, signal point 1-5, Signal points 1-6, Signal points 1-7, and Signal points 1-8” are defined as Group 1. Then, eight signal points on the circumference of the outer circle, signal point 2-1, signal point 2-2, signal point 2-3, signal point 2-4, signal point 2-5, signal point 2-6 , signal points 2-7, and signal points 2-8” are defined as group 2.

Then, the following two conditions are given.
<Condition 3>:
X is 1,2, and the following holds for all X that satisfy this.
The number of different bits in the labeling of signal point X-1 and signal point X-2 is 1
The number of different bits in the labeling of signal point X-2 and signal point X-3 is 1
The number of different bits in the labeling of signal point X-3 and signal point X-4 is 1
The number of different bits in the labeling of signal point X-4 and signal point X-5 is 1
The number of different bits in the labeling of signal point X-5 and signal point X-6 is 1
The number of different bits in the labeling of signal point X-6 and signal point X-7 is 1
The number of different bits in the labeling of signal point X-7 and signal point X-8 is 1
The number of different bits in the labeling of signal point X-8 and signal point X-1 is 1

The definition of the number of bits with different labeling is as described above.
<Condition 4>:
Z is 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, and for all Z satisfying this, the following holds.
The number of different bits in the labeling of signal point 1-Z and signal point 2-Z is 1

By satisfying the above, since the number of bits in which labeling differs from signal points at a short distance for each signal point in the in-phase I-quadrature Q plane is small, the receiving apparatus may be able to obtain high data reception quality. becomes higher. As a result, when the receiving apparatus performs iterative detection, the possibility of obtaining high data reception quality increases.

[(8,8)16APSK signal point arrangement]

Although the signal point arrangement and labeling on the in-phase I-quadrature Q plane of FIG. 16 have been described above, the method of signal point arrangement and labeling on the in-phase I-quadrature Q plane is not limited to this. For example, consider the following as the coordinates and labeling of each signal point of (8,8)16APSK on the IQ plane.

Coordinates of signal point 1-1 on the IQ plane: (cosθ× _R1 ×cos(π/8)-sinθ× _R1 ×sin(π/8), sinθ
× _R1 ×cos(π/8)+cosθ× _R1 ×sin(π/8))
Coordinates of signal points 1-2 on the IQ plane: (cosθ×R ₁ ×cos(3π/8)-sinθ×R ₁ ×sin(3π/8), sin
θ× _R1 ×cos(3π/8)+cosθ× _R1 ×sin(3π/8))
Coordinates of signal points 1-3 on the IQ plane: (cosθ× _R1 ×cos(5π/8)-sinθ× _R1 ×sin(5π/8), sin
θ× _R1 ×cos(5π/8)+cosθ× _R1 ×sin(5π/8))
Coordinates of signal points 1-4 on the IQ plane: (cosθ× _R1 ×cos(7π/8)-sinθ× _R1 ×sin(7π/8), sin
θ× _R1 ×cos(7π/8)+cosθ× _R1 ×sin(7π/8))
Coordinates of signal points 1-5 on the IQ plane: (cosθ× _R1 ×cos(-7π/8)-sinθ× _R1 ×sin(-7π/8), sinθ× _R1 ×cos(-7π/8 )+ cosθ× _R1 ×sin(-7π/8))
Coordinates of signal points 1-6 on the IQ plane: (cosθ× _R1 ×cos(-5π/8)-sinθ× _R1 ×sin(-5π/8), sinθ× _R1 ×cos(-5π/8 )+ cosθ× _R1 ×sin(-5π/8))
Coordinates of signal points 1-7 on the IQ plane: (cosθ× _R1 ×cos(-3π/8)-sinθ× _R1 ×sin(-3π/8), sinθ× _R1 ×cos(-3π/8 )+ cosθ× _R1 ×sin(-3π/8))
Coordinates of signal points 1-8 on the IQ plane: (cosθ× _R1 ×cos(-π/8)-sinθ× _R1 ×sin(-π/8), sin
θ× _R1 ×cos(-π/8)+cosθ× _R1 ×sin(-π/8))
Coordinates of signal point 2-1 on the IQ plane: (cosθ× _R2 ×cos(π/8)-sinθ× _R2 ×sin(π/8), sinθ
× _R2 ×cos(π/8)+cosθ× _R2 ×sin(π/8))
Coordinates of signal point 2-2 on the IQ plane: (cosθ× _R2 ×cos(3π/8)-sinθ× _R2 ×sin(3π/8), sin
θ× _R2 ×cos(3π/8)+cosθ× _R2 ×sin(3π/8))
Coordinates of signal point 2-3 on the IQ plane: (cosθ×R ₂ ×cos(5π/8)-sinθ×R ₂ ×sin(5π/8), sin
θ× _R2 ×cos(5π/8)+cosθ× _R2 ×sin(5π/8))
Coordinates of signal points 2-4 on the IQ plane: (cosθ× _R2 ×cos(7π/8)-sinθ× _R2 ×sin(7π/8), sin
θ× _R2 ×cos(7π/8)+cosθ× _R2 ×sin(7π/8))
Coordinates of signal points 2-5 on the IQ plane: (cosθ× _R2 ×cos(-7π/8)-sinθ× _R2 ×sin(-7π/8), sinθ× _R2 ×cos(-7π/8 )+ cosθ× _R2 ×sin(-7π/8))
Coordinates of signal points 2-6 on the IQ plane: (cosθ× _R2 ×cos(-5π/8)-sinθ× _R2 ×sin(-5π/8), sinθ× _R2 ×cos(-5π/8 )+ cosθ× _R2 ×sin(-5π/8))
Coordinates of signal points 2-7 on the IQ plane: (cosθ× _R2 ×cos(-3π/8)-sinθ× _R2 ×sin(-3π/8), sinθ× _R2 ×cos(-3π/8 )+ cosθ× _R2 ×sin(-3π/8))
Coordinates of signal points 2-8 on the IQ plane: (cosθ× _R2 ×cos(-π/8)-sinθ× _R2 ×sin(-π/8), sin
θ× _R2 ×cos(-π/8)+cosθ× _R2 ×sin(-π/8))
The unit of phase is radian. Therefore, the in-phase component I _n and the quadrature component Q _n of the normalized baseband signal are expressed as follows.

Coordinates of signal point 1-1 on IQ plane: (I _n , Q _n ) = (a _(8,8) ×cosθ×R ₁ ×cos(π/8)- a _(8,8) ×sinθ×R ₁ ×sin(π/8), a _(8,8) ×sinθ× _R1 ×cos(π/8)+a _(8,8) ×cosθ× _R1 ×sin(π/8))
Coordinates of signal points 1-2 on the IQ plane: (I _n , Q _n )=(a _(8,8) ×cosθ×R ₁ ×cos(3π/8)- a _(8,8)
×sinθ× _R1 ×sin(3π/8), a _(8,8) ×sinθ× _R1 ×cos(3π/8)+a _(8,8) ×cosθ× _R1 ×sin(3)
π/8))
Coordinates of signal points 1-3 on the IQ plane: (I _n , Q _n )=(a _(8,8) ×cosθ×R ₁ ×cos(5π/8)- a _(8,8)
×sinθ× _R1 ×sin(5π/8), a _(8,8) ×sinθ× _R1 ×cos(5π/8)+a _(8,8) ×cosθ× _R1 ×sin(5π/8) )
Coordinates of signal points 1-4 on the IQ plane: (I _n , Q _n )=(a _(8,8) ×cosθ×R ₁ ×cos(7π/8)- a _(8,8)
×sinθ× _R1 ×sin(7π/8), a _(8,8) ×sinθ× _R1 ×cos(7π/8)+a _(8,8) ×cosθ× _R1 ×sin(7π/8) )
Coordinates of signal points 1-5 on the IQ plane: (I _n , Q _n ) = (a _(8,8) ×cosθ×R ₁ ×cos(-7π/8)- a _(8,8) ×sinθ× _R1 ×sin(-7π/8), a _(8,8) ×sinθ× _R1 ×cos(-7π/8)+ a _(8,8) ×cosθ× _R1 ×sin(-7π/8) )
Coordinates of signal points 1-6 on the IQ plane: (I _n , Q _n ) = (a _(8,8) ×cosθ×R ₁ ×cos(-5π/8)- a _(8,8) ×sinθ× _R1 ×sin(-5π/8), a _(8,8) ×sinθ× _R1 ×cos(-5π/8)+ a _(8,8) ×cosθ× _R1 ×sin(-5π/8) )
Coordinates of signal points 1-7 on the IQ plane: (I _n , Q _n ) = (a _(8,8) ×cosθ×R ₁ ×cos(-3π/8)- a _(8,8) ×sinθ× _R1 ×sin(-3π/8), a _(8,8) ×sinθ× _R1 ×cos(-3π/8)+ a _(8,8) ×cosθ× _R1 ×sin(-3π/8) )
Coordinates of signal points 1-8 on the IQ plane: (I _n , Q _n ) = (a _{(8, 8)} × cos θ × R ₁ × cos (-π/8)- a _{(8, 8)}
×sinθ×R ₁ ×sin(-π/8), a _(8,8) ×sinθ×R ₁ ×cos(-π/8)+ a _(8,8) ×cosθ×R ₁ ×sin(-π /8))
Coordinates of signal point 2-1 on the IQ plane: (I _n , Q _n ) = (a _(8,8) ×cosθ×R ₂ ×cos(π/8)- a _(8,8) ×sinθ×R ₂ ×sin(π/8), a _(8,8) ×sinθ× _R2 ×cos(π/8)+a _(8,8) ×cosθ× _R2 ×sin(π/8))
Coordinates of signal point 2-2 on IQ plane: (I _n , Q _n )=(a _(8,8) ×cosθ×R ₂ ×cos(3π/8)- a _(8,8)
×sinθ× _R2 ×sin(3π/8), a _(8,8) ×sinθ× _R2 ×cos(3π/8)+a _(8,8) ×cosθ× _R2 ×sin(3π/8) )
Coordinates of signal point 2-3 on the IQ plane: (I _n , Q _n ) = (a _(8,8) ×cosθ×R ₂ ×cos(5π/8)- a _(8,8)
×sinθ× _R2 ×sin(5π/8), a _(8,8) ×sinθ× _R2 ×cos(5π/8)+a _(8,8) ×cosθ× _R2 ×sin(5π/8) )
Coordinates of signal points 2-4 on the IQ plane: (I _n , Q _n ) = (a _{(8, 8)} × cos θ × R ₂ × cos (7π/8)- a _{(8, 8)}
×sinθ× _R2 ×sin(7π/8), a _(8,8) ×sinθ× _R2 ×cos(7π/8)+a _(8,8) ×cosθ× _R2 ×sin(7π/8) )
Coordinates of signal points 2-5 on the IQ plane: (I _n , Q _n ) = (a _(8,8) ×cosθ×R ₂ ×cos(-7π/8)- a _(8,8) ×sinθ× _R2 ×sin(-7π/8), a _(8,8) ×sinθ× _R2 ×cos(-7π/8)+ a _(8,8) ×cosθ× _R2 ×sin(-7π/8) )
Coordinates of signal points 2-6 on the IQ plane: (I _n , Q _n ) = (a _(8,8) ×cosθ×R ₂ ×cos(-5π/8)- a _(8,8) ×sinθ× _R2 ×sin(-5π/8), a _(8,8) ×sinθ× _R2 ×cos(-5π/8)+ a _(8,8) ×cosθ× _R2 ×sin(-5π/8) )
Coordinates of signal points 2-7 on the IQ plane: (I _n , Q _n ) = (a _(8,8) ×cosθ×R ₂ ×cos(-3π/8)- a _(8,8) ×sinθ× _R2 ×sin(-3π/8), a _(8,8) ×sinθ× _R2 ×cos(-3π/8)+ a _(8,8) ×cosθ× _R2 ×sin(-3π/8) )
Coordinates of signal points 2-8 on the IQ plane: (I _n , Q _n ) = (a _{(8, 8)} × cos θ × R ₂ × cos (-π/8)- a _{(8, 8)}
×sinθ× _R2 ×sin(-π/8), a _(8,8) ×sinθ× _R2 ×cos(-π/8)+a _(8,8) ×cosθ× _R2 ×sin(-π /8))
θ is the phase given on the in-phase I-quadrature Q plane, and a _{(8, 8)} is as shown in equation (24). and,

"In a symbol group in which 3 or more (or 4 or more) symbols whose modulation scheme is either (12,4)16APSK or (8,8)16APSK are consecutive, (12,4)16APSK symbols There is no continuous portion, and there is no continuous portion of (8,8)16APSK symbols.
, the coordinates of each signal point of (8,8)16APSK on the IQ plane are given above, and <
It may be (8,8)16APSK that satisfies condition 3> and <condition 4>.

Further, for example, "in a symbol group in which three or more symbols (or four or more symbols) whose modulation scheme is either (12,4)16APSK or (8,8)16APSK are continuous, (12,4) There is no portion where 16APSK symbols are continuous, and there is no portion where (8,8)16APSK symbols are continuous.” In the above description, θ of (12,4)16APSK is set to θ= If (N×π)/2 radians (N is an integer) and θ of (8,8)16APSK is θ=π/8+(N×π)/4 radians (N is an integer), the PAPR can be slightly reduced. have a nature. FIG. 17 shows an example of signal point arrangement and labeling when θ=π/8 radians.

<Pattern for switching modulation method, etc.>
In the example of FIG. 12, (12,4)16APSK symbols and (8,8)16APSK symbols are alternately switched ((12,4)16APSK symbols are not consecutive and (8,8 ) 16APSK symbols are never consecutive). A modification of the above method will be described below.

23 and 24 are diagrams related to the modification. Features of the modified example are as follows.
• One period consists of M consecutive symbols. For the purpose of the following description, the consecutive M symbols forming one period are named (defined) as "a symbol group of period M". In addition, henceforth, it demonstrates using FIG.
- When the number of consecutive symbols is M+1 or more, a plurality of "period M symbol groups" are arranged. This point will be described later with reference to FIG. 24 .

FIG. 23 shows an example of the configuration of the symbol group in the case of "symbol group with period M=5". The feature in FIG. 23 is to satisfy the following two conditions.
・In the "symbol group with period M = 5", the number of symbols of (8,8)16APSK is 1 more than the number of symbols of (12,4)16APSK, that is, the number of symbols of (12,4)16APSK is 2. Yes, the number of symbols in (8,8)16APSK is three.
- In the "symbol group with period M=5", there is no place where two (8,8)16APSK symbols are consecutive, or there is one place where two (8,8)16APSK symbols are consecutive. (Therefore, there is no place where 3 or more (8,8)16APSK symbols are consecutive.)

When the above two conditions are satisfied, there are five methods of forming the "symbol group with period M=5" as shown in (a), (b), (c), (d), and (e) of FIG. In FIG. 23, the horizontal axis is time.

When the "symbol group with period M=5" is configured as shown in FIG. The symbols are arranged in the order of (8,8)16APSK symbols, (12,4)16APSK symbols, and (8,8)16APSK symbols. Then, the "symbol group with period M=5" configured in this manner is repeatedly arranged.

When the "symbol group with period M=5" is configured as shown in FIG. The symbols are arranged in the order of (12,4)16APSK symbols, (8,8)16APSK symbols, and (8,8)16APSK symbols. Then, the "symbol group with period M=5" configured in this manner is repeatedly arranged.

When the "symbol group with period M=5" is configured as shown in FIG. The symbols are arranged in the order of (8,8)16APSK symbols, (8,8)16APSK symbols, and (12,4)16APSK symbols. Then, the "symbol group with period M=5" configured in this manner is repeatedly arranged.

When the "symbol group with period M=5" is configured as shown in FIG. The symbols are arranged in the order of (8,8)16APSK symbols, (12,4)16APSK symbols, and (8,8)16APSK symbols. Then, the "symbol group with period M=5" configured in this manner is repeatedly arranged.

When the "symbol group with period M=5" is configured as shown in FIG. The symbols are arranged in the order of (12,4)16APSK symbols, (8,8)16APSK symbols, and (12,4)16APSK symbols. Then, the "symbol group with period M=5" configured in this manner is repeatedly arranged.

Note that FIG. 23 describes a method of forming a "symbol group with period M=5".
The period M is not limited to 5, but may be configured as follows.
・In the "symbol group of period M", the number of symbols of (8, 8) 16APSK is 1 more than the number of symbols of (12, 4) 16APSK, that is, the number of symbols of (12, 4) 16APSK is N, The number of symbols of (8,8)16APSK is N+1. Note that N is a natural number.
- In the "symbol group of period M", there is no place where two (8,8)16APSK symbols are consecutive, or there is one place where two (8,8)16APSK symbols are consecutive.
(Therefore, there is no place where 3 or more (8,8)16APSK symbols are consecutive.)
Therefore, the period M of the "symbol group with period M" is an odd number of 3 or more, but considering the increase from the PAPR when the modulation method is (12,4)16APSK, the period M is an odd number of 5 or more. Although this is preferable, even if the period M is set to 3, there is an advantage that the PAPR can be made smaller than the (8,8)16APSK PAPR.

In the above description, the configuration using the "symbol group of period M" has been described, but if the periodic configuration is not adopted, the following features should be provided.
・If the data symbol is either a (12,4)16APSK symbol or a (8,8)16APSK symbol, three or more (8,8)16APSK symbols continue in a group of consecutive data symbols. does not exist.

For (12,4)16APSK and (8,8)16APSK signal point arrangement, labeling, and ring ratio,
Similar effects can be obtained if the conditions described above are satisfied at the same time as described above.

In the case described above, although there are cases where two (8,8)16APSK symbols are consecutive, it is possible to obtain the effect that the PAPR can be made smaller than the PAPR of (8,8)16APSK. , (12, 4) 16APSK, it is possible to obtain the effect that the reception quality of data can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 24, a supplementary description of a symbol configuration method when other symbols are inserted into consecutive symbols composed of (12,4)16APSK symbols or (8,8)16APSK symbols. I do.

In FIG. 24(a), 2400 and 2409 are other symbol groups (they may be consecutive symbols or the number of symbols may be 1). Other symbol groups may be control symbols for transmitting transmission methods such as modulation schemes and error correction coding schemes, or pilots for channel estimation, frequency synchronization, and time synchronization by the receiving apparatus. Symbol, may be reference symbol, (12,4)16APSK, (8,8)16APSK
It may be a data symbol modulated by a modulation scheme other than . In other words, the other symbol groups are symbols of modulation schemes other than (12,4)16APSK and (8,8)16APSK.

In FIG. 24(a), 2401, 2404, 2407, and 2410 are the first symbols of the "period M symbol group" (in the "period M symbol group", they are symbols at the beginning of the period). 2403, 2406, and 2412 are the last symbols of the "period M symbol group" (in the "period M symbol group", they are the last symbols of the period).
2402, 2405, 2408, and 2411 are intermediate symbol groups of the "symbol group of period M" (symbol groups excluding the first symbol and the last symbol in the "symbol group of period M").

FIG. 24(a) shows an example of arrangement of symbols on the horizontal axis time. In FIG. 24( a ), the first symbol 2401 of the “symbol group with period M” is arranged immediately after the “other symbol group” 2400 . After that, the middle symbol group 2402 of the "symbol group of period M" and the last symbol 2403 of the "symbol group of period M" are arranged. Therefore, immediately after the "other symbol group" 2400, the "first symbol group of period M" is arranged.

Immediately after the "first symbol group of period M", the first symbol 2404 of the "symbol group of period M", the intermediate symbol group 2405 of the "symbol group of period M", and the "symbol group of period M" A “group of symbols of the second period M” consisting of the last symbol 2406 is arranged.
After the "second group of symbols of period M", the first symbol 2407 of the "group of symbols of period M" is arranged, followed by part 2408 of the intermediate symbols of the "group of symbols of period M". is placed.

After part of the intermediate symbol group 2408 of the "period M symbol group", the "other symbol group" 2409 is arranged.
The characteristic point of FIG. 24A is that after the "other symbol group" 2409, the first symbol 2410 of the "symbol group of period M", the intermediate symbol group 2411 of the "symbol group of period M", the "period The point is that the "periodic M symbol group" composed of the last symbol 2412 of the "M symbol group" is arranged.

FIG. 24(b) shows an example of arrangement of symbols on the horizontal axis of time. In FIG. 24B, the first symbol 2401 of the "symbol group with period M" is arranged immediately after the "other symbol group" 2400. In FIG. After that, the intermediate symbol group 2402 of the "symbol group of period M" and the last symbol 2403 of the "symbol group of period M" are arranged. Therefore, immediately after the "other symbol group" 2400, the "first symbol group of period M" is arranged.

Immediately after the "first symbol group of period M", the first symbol 2404 of the "symbol group of period M", the intermediate symbol group 2405 of the "symbol group of period M", and the "symbol group of period M" A “group of symbols of the second period M” consisting of the last symbol 2406 is arranged.
After the "second group of symbols of period M", the first symbol 2407 of the "group of symbols of period M" is arranged, followed by part 2408 of the intermediate symbol group of the "group of symbols of period M". is placed.

A part of the intermediate symbol group 2408 of the "period M symbol group" is followed by an "other symbol group" 2409. FIG.
The characteristic point of FIG. 24(b) is that after the “other symbol group” 2409, the remaining part 2408-2 of the intermediate symbol group of the “periodic M symbol group” is followed by the “periodic M symbol group”. This is the point where the last symbol 2413 of the "symbol group" is arranged. Note that the first symbol 2407 of the "symbol group of period M", the part 2408 of the intermediate symbol group of "symbol group of period M", the remaining part 2408-2 of the intermediate symbol group of "symbol group of period M" , the last symbol 2413 of the "group of symbols with period M" forms the "group of symbols with period M".
After the last symbol 2413 of the "group of periodic M symbols", the first symbol 2414 of the "group of periodic M symbols", the intermediate symbol group 2415 of the "group of periodic M symbols", the end of the "group of periodic M symbols" A “period M symbol group” composed of 2416 symbols of is arranged.

In FIG. 24, the configuration of the "symbol group of period M" may be the configuration of the "symbol group of period M" described above with reference to FIG. 16APSK or (8,8
) In a symbol group in which 3 or more (or 4 or more) 16APSK symbols are consecutive, there is no portion where (12,4)16APSK symbols are consecutive, and (8,8) There is no part where 16APSK symbols are continuous. ” configuration.

For (12,4)16APSK and (8,8)16APSK signal point constellations, labeling, and ring ratios,
Similar effects can be obtained if the conditions described above are satisfied at the same time as described above.

In the examples described so far, 16APSK was used as the modulation scheme used for switching, but 32APSK and 64APSK can be implemented in the same way.

The method of constructing consecutive symbols is as described above: Symbols of the first modulation scheme with the first signal constellation on the in-phase I-quadrature Q plane and symbols of the second signal constellation on the in-phase I-quadrature Q plane. 2 modulation schemes to form a "symbol group of period M". (However, the number of signal points on the in-phase I-quadrature Q plane of the first modulation method is equal to the number of signal points on the in-phase I-quadrature Q plane of the second modulation method.)
・A symbol that is either the first modulation scheme of the first constellation on the in-phase I-quadrature Q plane or the second modulation scheme of the second constellation on the in-phase I-quadrature Q plane is 3 symbols In the group of symbols that are consecutive (or four symbols or more), there is no portion in which the symbols of the first modulation method are consecutive, and there is no portion in which the symbols of the second modulation method are consecutive. (However, the number of signal points in the in-phase I-quadrature Q plane of the first modulation scheme is equal to the number of signal points in the in-phase I-quadrature Q plane of the second modulation scheme.)
and
FIG. 25 shows signal point arrangements on the in-phase I-quadrature Q plane for two 32APSK schemes with 32 signal points on the in-phase I-quadrature Q plane in the two types of consecutive symbol configuration methods described above.

FIG. 25(a) is a signal point constellation in the in-phase I-quadrature Q plane of (4,12,16)32APSK.
Centered on the origin, there are a=4 signal points on a circle with a radius of _R1 , b=12 signal points on a circle with a radius of _{R2 ,} and c=16 signal points on a circle with a radius of R3. Therefore, since (a,b,c)=(4,12,16), it is described as (4,12,16)32APSK. (It should be noted that R ₁ <R ₂ <R _3. )
FIG. 25(b) is a signal point constellation on the in-phase I-quadrature Q plane of (8,8,16)32APSK. A circle with radius R ₁ centered on the origin has a = 8 signal points, a circle with radius R ₂ has b = 8 signal points, and radius R ₃
There are c=16 signal points on the circle of . Therefore, since (a,b,c)=(8,8,16), it is described as (8,8,16)32APSK. (It should be noted that R ₁ <R ₂ <R _3. )
Then, (4,12,16)32APSK in FIG. 25(a) and (8,8,16)32APSK in FIG. 25(b) may be used to realize the two types of consecutive symbol forming methods. (In other words, in the two types of consecutive symbol configuration methods described above, the first modulation scheme and the second modulation scheme are (4,12,16)32APSK and (8,8,16)32APSK.)
Also, there are a = 16 signal points on a circle of radius R ₁ centered on the origin, and b = 16 signal points on a circle of radius R ₂ (a, b) = (16, 16) Therefore, it is described as (16,16)32APSK. (It should be noted that R ₁ <R ₂ .)
Then, (4,12,16)32APSK and (16,16)32APSK in FIG. 25(a) may be used to realize the above two types of consecutive symbol configuration methods. (That is, in the above two types of consecutive symbol configuration methods, the first modulation scheme and the second modulation scheme are (4,12,16)32APSK and (16,16)32APSK.)
In addition, γ-system 32APSK with different signal point arrangement from (4,12,16)32APSK, (8,8,16)32APSK, and (16,16)32APSK is considered. Then, (4,12,16) 32APSK of FIG. 25(a) and 32APSK of the γ system may be used to realize the above-mentioned two types of consecutive symbol forming methods. (That is, in the above two types of continuous symbol configuration methods, the first modulation scheme and the second modulation scheme are (4, 12, 16
) 32APSK and γ system 32APSK. )

The labeling method for the signal point constellation in the in-phase I-quadrature Q plane of (12,4)16APSK and the labeling method for the signal point constellation in the in-phase I-quadrature Q plane of the (8,8)16APSK labeling are described in this implementation. However, a labeling method for the signal point arrangement on the in-phase I-quadrature Q plane, which is different from that of this embodiment, may be applied. (There is a possibility that an effect similar to that of this embodiment can be obtained.)

(Embodiment 2)
<Example of pilot symbol>
With the present embodiment, a configuration example of pilot symbols in the transmission scheme described with the above Embodiment 1 will be described.

Note that the configuration of the transmitting apparatus in this embodiment is the same as that described in Embodiment 1, so description thereof will be omitted.

Inter-symbol (inter-symbol) interference occurs in the modulated signal due to the non-linearity of the power amplifier of the transmitter. A receiving apparatus can obtain high data reception quality by reducing this intersymbol interference.

In this pilot symbol configuration example, in the receiving device, in order to reduce inter-code (inter-symbol) interference, the transmitting device, in the data symbol,

"In a symbol group in which 3 or more (or 4 or more) symbols whose modulation scheme is either (12,4)16APSK or (8,8)16APSK are consecutive, (12,4)16APSK symbols There are no continuous parts, and there are no continuous parts of (8,8)16APSK symbols."
holds, the baseband signal corresponding to all signal points in the in-phase I-quadrature Q plane that (12,4)16APSK can take (that is, the 4 bits [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ] to be transmitted are [ 0000] to [1111]), and in-phase I-quadrature Q that can be taken by (8,8)16APSK
Baseband signal corresponding to all signal points on the plane (that is, baseband signal corresponding to 16 signal _points from [ ₀₀₀₀ ] to [1111] for ₄ bits [ _b3b2b1b0 ] to be transmitted) is generated and transmitted as pilot symbols. As a result, the receiving apparatus can detect all signal points on the in-phase I-quadrature Q plane that can be taken by (12,4)16APSK and all signal points on the in-phase I-quadrature Q plane that can be taken by (8,8)16APSK. Since it is possible to estimate the inter-symbol interference at , there is a high possibility that high data reception quality can be obtained.

In the example of FIG. 13, in order,
Symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0000] of (12,4)16APSK, [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ of (8,8)16APSK ]=symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [0000],
Symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0001] of (12,4)16APSK, [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ of (8,8)16APSK ]=symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [0001],
Symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0010] of (12,4)16APSK, [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ of (8,8)16APSK ]=symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [0010],
Symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0011] of (12,4)16APSK, [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ of (8,8)16APSK ]=symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [0011],
Symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0100] of (12,4)16APSK, [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ of (8,8)16APSK ]=symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [0100],
Symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0101] of (12,4)16APSK, [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ of (8,8)16APSK ]=symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [0101],
Symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0110] of (12,4)16APSK, [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ of (8,8)16APSK ]=symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [0110],
Symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0111] of (12,4)16APSK, [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ of (8,8)16APSK ]=symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [0111],
Symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1000] of (12,4)16APSK, [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ of (8,8)16APSK ]=[1000] corresponding signal point (baseband signal) symbol,
Symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1001] of (12,4)16APSK, [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ of (8,8)16APSK ]=symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [1001],
Symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1010] of (12,4)16APSK, [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ of (8,8)16APSK ]=[1010] corresponding signal point (baseband signal) symbol,
Symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1011] of (12,4)16APSK, [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ of (8,8)16APSK ]=symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [1011],
Symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1100] of (12,4)16APSK, [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ of (8,8)16APSK ]=symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [1100],
Symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1101] of (12,4)16APSK, [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ of (8,8)16APSK ]=symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [1101],
Symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1110] of (12,4)16APSK, [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ of (8,8)16APSK ]=symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [1110],
Symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1111] of (12,4)16APSK, [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ of (8,8)16APSK ]=symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [1111],
are transmitted as pilot symbols.

The above features are
<1> Symbols corresponding to all signal points in the in-phase I-quadrature Q plane that can be taken by (12,4)16APSK, that is,
(12,4) symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0000] of 16APSK,
(12,4) symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0001] of 16APSK,
(12,4) symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0010] of 16APSK,
(12,4) symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0011] of 16APSK,
(12,4) symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0100] of 16APSK,
(12,4) symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0101] of 16APSK,
(12,4) symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0110] of 16APSK,
(12,4) symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0111] of 16APSK,
(12,4) symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1000] of 16APSK,
(12,4) symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1001] of 16APSK,
(12,4) symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1010] of 16APSK,
(12,4) symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1011] of 16APSK,
(12,4) symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1100] of 16APSK,
(12,4) symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1101] of 16APSK,
(12,4) symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1110] of 16APSK,
(12,4) symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1111] of 16APSK,
along with sending
Symbols corresponding to all signal points in the in-phase I-quadrature Q plane that (8,8)16APSK can take, that is,
(8,8)16APSK [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0000] symbol of the signal point (baseband signal),
(8,8) _16APSK symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [ _b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [ ₀₀₀₁ ],
(8,8) _16APSK symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [ _b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [ ₀₀₁₀ ],
(8,8) _16APSK symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [ _b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [ ₀₀₁₁ ],
(8,8) _16APSK symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [ _b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [ ₀₁₀₀ ],
(8,8) _16APSK symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [ _b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [ ₀₁₀₁ ],
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0110] of (8,8)16APSK,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0111] of (8,8)16APSK,
(8,8) Symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1000] of 16APSK,
(8,8)16APSK [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1001] symbol of the signal point (baseband signal),
(8,8) Symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1010] of 16APSK,
(8,8) _16APSK symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [ _b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [ ₁₀₁₁ ],
(8,8)16APSK symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1100],
(8,8) _16APSK symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [ _b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [ ₁₁₀₁ ],
(8,8)16APSK symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1110],
(8,8) _16APSK symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [ _b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [ ₁₁₁₁ ],
to send.

<2> In a symbol group composed of continuous pilot symbols, there is no portion where (12,4)16APSK symbols are continuous and there is no portion where (8,8)16APSK symbols are continuous. Become. Due to the above <1>, the receiving apparatus can estimate the inter-symbol interference with high precision, so that high data reception quality can be obtained. Then, due to the above <2>, it is possible to obtain the effect that the PAPR can be reduced.

Note that pilot symbols are not only symbols for estimating inter-symbol interference, but using pilot symbols, the receiver may estimate the radio wave propagation environment (channel estimation) between the transmitter and the receiver. Also, frequency offset estimation and time synchronization may be performed.

The operation of the receiving device will be described with reference to FIG.

In FIG. 2, 210 is the configuration of the receiver. The demapping section 214 in FIG. 2 performs demapping on the mapping of the modulation scheme used by the transmitting apparatus, for example, obtains and outputs the logarithmic likelihood ratio of each bit. At this time, although not shown in FIG. 2, in order to perform demapping with high accuracy, intersymbol interference estimation, radio wave propagation environment estimation (channel estimation) between the transmitter and the receiver, and It is recommended to estimate the time synchronization and frequency offset of

Although not shown in FIG. 2, the receiving apparatus includes an intersymbol interference estimator, a channel estimator, a time synchronizer, and a frequency offset estimator. These estimators extract, for example, the pilot symbol portion from the received signal, and estimate intersymbol interference, estimate the radio wave propagation environment between the transmitter and the receiver (channel estimation), and time synchronization and frequency offset estimation. Then, the demapping unit 214 in FIG. 2 receives these estimated signals and performs demapping based on these estimated signals, thereby calculating, for example, a logarithmic likelihood ratio.

Also, the transmission method of the pilot symbols is not limited to the example of FIG. 13, and any transmission method that satisfies both <1> and <2> described above may be used. For example, the modulation scheme of the first symbol in FIG. 13 may be (8,8)16APSK, and the order of transmission of [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ] may be any order. Although the pilot symbols are composed of 32 symbols, it is preferable that <1> and <2> are satisfied, although not limited to this. Therefore, 32 × N
(where N is a natural number).
(12,4) symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0000] of 16APSK,
(12,4) symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0001] of 16APSK,
(12,4) symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0010] of 16APSK,
(12,4) symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0011] of 16APSK,
(12,4) symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0100] of 16APSK,
(12,4) symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0101] of 16APSK,
(12,4) symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0110] of 16APSK,
(12,4) symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0111] of 16APSK,
(12,4) symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1000] of 16APSK,
(12,4) symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1001] of 16APSK,
(12,4) symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1010] of 16APSK,
(12,4) symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1011] of 16APSK,
(12,4) symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1100] of 16APSK,
(12,4) symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1101] of 16APSK,
(12,4) symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1110] of 16APSK,
(12,4) symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1111] of 16APSK,
(8,8)16APSK [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0000] symbol of the signal point (baseband signal),
(8,8) _16APSK symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [ _b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [ ₀₀₀₁ ],
(8,8) _16APSK symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [ _b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [ ₀₀₁₀ ],
(8,8) _16APSK symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [ _b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [ ₀₀₁₁ ],
(8,8) _16APSK symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [ _b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [ ₀₁₀₀ ],
(8,8) _16APSK symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [ _b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [ ₀₁₀₁ ],
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0110] of (8,8)16APSK,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0111] of (8,8)16APSK,
(8,8) Symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1000] of 16APSK,
(8,8)16APSK [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1001] symbol of the signal point (baseband signal),
(8,8) _16APSK symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [ _b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [ ₁₀₁₀ ],
(8,8) _16APSK symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [ _b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [ ₁₀₁₁ ],
(8,8)16APSK symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1100],
(8,8) _16APSK symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [ _b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [ ₁₁₀₁ ],
(8,8)16APSK symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1110],
(8,8) _16APSK symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [ _b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [ ₁₁₁₁ ],
has the advantage of equalizing the number of occurrences of each symbol in .

(Embodiment 3)
<Signaling>
In the present embodiment, in order to enable smooth reception of transmission signals using the transmission schemes described in Embodiments 1 and 2 above on the receiving device side, various information signaled as TMCC information A configuration example will be described.

Note that the configuration of the transmitting apparatus in this embodiment is the same as that described in Embodiment 1, so description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 18 shows an image diagram of the frame structure of a transmission signal in advanced wideband satellite digital broadcasting. (However, it is not an accurate illustration of the frame structure of advanced wideband satellite digital broadcasting.)
FIG. 18(a) shows the frame configuration on the horizontal axis of time, arranged in the order of "symbol group #1", "symbol group #2", "symbol group #3", and so on. shall be At this time, each symbol group of "symbol group of #1", "symbol group of #2", "symbol group of #3", . . . ", "pilot symbol group", "TMCC information symbol group", and "slot composed of data symbol group". The "synchronization symbol group" is, for example, a symbol for the receiving device to perform time synchronization and frequency synchronization. "Pilot symbol group" will be used.

A “slot composed of data symbol groups” is composed of data symbols. It is also assumed that transmission methods such as error correction codes, coding rates, code lengths, and modulation schemes used to generate data symbols can be switched. Information about the transmission method such as the error correction code, coding rate, code length, modulation method, etc. used to generate the data symbol is transmitted to the receiving device by the "TMCC information symbol group".

FIG. 18(b) shows an example of the configuration of the "TMCC information symbol group". The configuration of "transmission mode/slot information" of "TMCC information symbol group", which is particularly related to this embodiment, will be described below.

FIG. 18(c) shows the configuration of the "transmission mode/slot information" of the "TMCC information symbol group". FIG. 18(c) shows that "transmission mode 1" to "transmission mode 8" exist, and "slots composed of data symbol groups of symbol group #1", "data symbols of symbol group #2 A slot composed of a symbol group", a "slot composed of a data symbol group of the symbol group #3", ... belong to any one of "transmission mode 1" to "transmission mode 8". Become.

Therefore, the symbols for transmitting the modulation scheme of each transmission mode in FIG. 18(c), (in FIG. ) transmits information of a modulation scheme for generating symbols of "slots composed of data symbol groups".
Also, symbols for transmitting the coding rate of each transmission mode in FIG. 18(c), (in FIG. coding rate"), information on the coding rate of the error correcting code for generating the symbols of the "slot consisting of data symbol groups" is transmitted.

Table 1 shows the configuration of information on modulation schemes. In Table 1, for example, when the 4 bits transmitted by the symbol for transmitting the modulation method of the transmission mode of the "transmission mode/slot information" of the "TMCC information symbol group" are "0001", "composed of the data symbol group The modulation scheme for generating the symbol of the "slot to be transmitted" is π/2 shift BPSK (Binary Phase Shift Keying).

When the 4 bits to be transmitted with the symbol for transmitting the modulation method of the transmission mode of the "transmission mode/slot information" of the "TMCC information symbol group" are "0010", the symbol of the "slot composed of data symbol groups" The modulation method for generating is QPSK (Quadrature Phase Shift Keying).
When the 4 bits to be transmitted with the symbol for transmitting the modulation method of the transmission mode of the "transmission mode/slot information" of the "TMCC information symbol group" are "0011", the symbol of the "slot composed of data symbol groups" The modulation method for generating is 8PSK (8 Phase Shift Keying).

When the 4 bits to be transmitted with the symbol for transmitting the modulation method of the transmission mode of the "transmission mode/slot information" of the "TMCC information symbol group" are "0100", the symbol of the "slot composed of data symbol groups" The modulation scheme for generating is (12,4)16APSK.
When the 4 bits to be transmitted with the symbol for transmitting the modulation method of the transmission mode of the "transmission mode/slot information" of the "TMCC information symbol group" are "0101", the symbol of the "slot composed of data symbol groups" The modulation scheme for generating is (8,8)16APSK.

When the 4 bits to be transmitted by the symbol for transmitting the modulation method of the transmission mode of the "transmission mode/slot information" of the "TMCC information symbol group" are "0110", the symbol of the "slot composed of data symbol groups" The modulation method for generating is 32APSK (32 Amplitude Phase Shift Keying).
When the 4 bits to be transmitted with the symbol for transmitting the modulation method of the transmission mode of the "transmission mode/slot information" of the "TMCC information symbol group" are "0111", the symbol of the "slot composed of data symbol groups" The modulation scheme for generating is a "transmission method in which (12,4)16APSK symbols and (8,8)16APSK symbols are mixed" (for example, the transmission method described in Embodiment 1, but this specification Then, other transmission methods (for example, Embodiment 4, etc.) are also explained.).
・・・

Table 2 shows the relationship between the coding rate of the error correcting code and the ring ratio when the modulation scheme is (12,4)16APSK. Note that the ring _ratio R _{( 12,4} ) of (12,4)16APSK is defined as R _{( 12,4)} = R ₂ /R ₁ . In Table 2, for example, when the 4 bits transmitted by the symbol for transmitting the coding rate of the transmission mode of the "transmission mode/slot information" of the "TMCC information symbol group" are "0000", "in the data symbol group The code rate of the error correction code for generating the symbols of the "configured slot" is 41/120 (≈ 1/3), and the symbols for transmitting the modulation scheme of the transmission mode are (12, 4) 16APSK , it means that the (12,4)16APSK ring ratio R _(12,4) =3.09.

When the 4 bits transmitted by the symbol for transmitting the coding rate of the transmission mode of the "transmission mode/slot information" of the "TMCC information symbol group" are "0001", the "slot composed of data symbol group" The coding rate of the error correction code for generating symbols is 49/120 (≈2/5), and the symbols for transmitting the modulation scheme of the transmission mode are (12,4)16APSK. , it means that the (12,4)16APSK ring ratio R _(12,4) =2.97.
When the 4 bits transmitted by the symbol for transmitting the coding rate of the transmission mode of the "transmission mode/slot information" of the "TMCC information symbol group" are "0010", the "slot composed of the data symbol group" The coding rate of the error correction code for generating symbols is 61/120 (≈ 1/2), and the symbols for transmitting the modulation scheme of the transmission mode are (12,4)16APSK. , it means that the (12,4)16APSK ring ratio R _(12,4) =3.93.
・・・

Table 3 shows the relationship between the coding rate of the error correcting code and the ring ratio when the modulation scheme is (8,8)16APSK. From R ₁ and R ₂ used to express the signal points on the IQ plane of (8,8)16APSK as described above, the ring ratio R _(8,8) of (8,8)16APSK is defined as R _{( 8,8)} = R ₂ /R ₁ . In Table 3, for example, when the 4 bits transmitted by the symbol for transmitting the coding rate of the transmission mode of the "transmission mode/slot information" of the "TMCC information symbol group" are "0000", "in the data symbol group The code rate of the error correction code for generating the symbols of the "configured slot" is 41/120 (≈ 1/3), and the symbols for transmitting the modulation scheme of the transmission mode are (8, 8) 16APSK , it means that the (8,8)16APSK ring ratio R _(8,8) =2.70.

When the 4 bits transmitted by the symbol for transmitting the coding rate of the transmission mode of the "transmission mode/slot information" of the "TMCC information symbol group" are "0001", the "slot composed of data symbol group" The coding rate of the error correction code for generating symbols is 49/120 (≈2/5), and the symbols for transmitting the modulation scheme of the transmission mode are (8, 8) 16APSK. , it means that the (8,8)16APSK ring ratio R _(8,8) =2.60.
When the 4 bits transmitted by the symbol for transmitting the coding rate of the transmission mode of the "transmission mode/slot information" of the "TMCC information symbol group" are "0010", the "slot composed of the data symbol group" The code rate of the error correction code for generating symbols is 61/120 (≈ 1/2), and the symbols for transmitting the modulation scheme of the transmission mode are (8, 8) 16APSK. If so, it means that the (8,8)16APSK ring ratio R _(8,8) =2.50.
・・・

Table 4 shows the relationship between the coding rate of the error correcting code and the ring ratio in a transmission method in which (12,4)16APSK symbols and (8,8)16APSK symbols are mixed.
In Table 4, for example, when the 4 bits transmitted by the symbol for transmitting the coding rate of the transmission mode of "transmission mode/slot information" of "TMCC information symbol group" are "0000", "data symbol group The encoding rate of the error correction code for generating the symbols of the "configured slot" is 41/120 (≈ 1/3), and the symbols for transmitting the modulation scheme of the transmission mode are (12, 4) 16APSK symbols and (8,8)16APSK symbols are mixed, the ring ratio R of (12,4)16APSK R _(12,4) = 4.20 , (8,8)16APSK It means that the ring ratio R _(8,8) =2.70.
When the 4 bits transmitted by the symbol for transmitting the coding rate of the transmission mode of the "transmission mode/slot information" of the "TMCC information symbol group" are "0001", the "slot composed of data symbol group" The coding rate of the error correction code for generating symbols is 49/120 (≈2/5), and the symbols for transmitting the modulation scheme of the transmission mode are (12,4)16APSK symbols and (8, 8) In the case of a transmission method in which 16APSK symbols are mixed, (12,4)16APSK ring ratio R _(12,4) =4.10, (8,8)16APSK ring ratio R _{(8, 8)} = 2.60.
When the 4 bits transmitted by the symbol for transmitting the coding rate of the transmission mode of the "transmission mode/slot information" of the "TMCC information symbol group" are "0010", the "slot composed of the data symbol group" The coding rate of the error correction code for generating symbols is 61/120 (≈1/2), and the symbols for transmitting the modulation scheme of the transmission mode are (12,4)16APSK symbols and (8, 8) In the case of a transmission method in which 16APSK symbols are mixed, (12,4) 16APSK ring ratio R _(12,4) = 4.00, (8,8) 16APSK ring ratio R _{(8, 8)} = 2.50.
・・・

Also, as shown in FIG. 22, the following transmission is performed with the "stream type/relative stream information" of the "TMCC information symbol group". showing. In FIG. 22(a), as an example, a configuration is adopted in which stream type information for each of stream 0 to stream 15 is transmitted. “Stream type of relative stream 0” in FIG.

Similarly, “stream type of relative stream 1” indicates stream type information of stream 1. FIG.
“Stream type of relative stream 2” indicates stream type information of stream 2. FIG.
・・・
“Stream type of relative stream 15 ” indicates stream type information of stream 15 .
It is assumed that the stream type information of each stream consists of 8 bits. (However, this is just an example.)
FIG. 22(b) shows an example of 8-bit stream type information and its allocation.

The 8-bit stream type information "00000000" is undefined.
When the 8-bit stream type information is "00000001", the stream is MPEG-2TS (Moving
Picture Experts Group - 2 Transport Stream).
When the 8-bit stream type information is "00000010", the stream is TLV (Type Length
Value).
When the 8-bit stream type information is "00000011", it means that the stream is a video (moving image) with approximately 4k horizontal pixels (eg 3840)×approximately 2k vertical pixels (eg 2160). In addition, the information of video encoding may be included.
When the 8-bit stream type information is "00000100", it means that the stream is a video (moving image) with approximately 8k horizontal pixels (eg 7680 pixels) x approximately 4k vertical pixels (eg 4320 pixels). In addition, the information of video encoding may be included.
When the 8-bit stream type information is "00000101", the stream is converted from a video (video) with a pixel count of approximately 4k horizontally (e.g. 3840) by approximately 2k vertically (e.g. 2160) to approximately 8k horizontally (e.g. It means that it is difference information for generating a video (video) of 4k (for example, 4320) pixels. In addition, the information of video encoding may be included. Also, this information will be explained later.
・・・
If the 8-bit stream type information is "11111111", there is no allocation type.
Next, how to use the 8-bit stream type information "00000101" will be described.
It is assumed that the stream of video #A is a video (moving image) with a pixel count of approximately 4k (eg, 3840) horizontally by approximately 2k (eg, 2160) vertical pixels, and is transmitted by the transmitting device. At this time, the transmitting device transmits 8-bit stream type information “00000011”.
In addition to this, the transmitting device converts a video (moving image) of approximately 4k horizontal (eg 3840) by approximately 2k vertical (eg 2160) pixels of video #A to approximately 8k horizontal (eg 7680) by approximately 4k vertical (eg 4320). ) to generate an image (moving image) having the number of pixels of ). At this time, the transmitting device transmits 8-bit stream type information “00000101”.
The receiving device obtains the stream type information "00000011", determines from this information that the stream is video (moving image) with a pixel count of approximately 4k horizontally (e.g. 3840) x approximately 2k vertically (e.g. 2160). An image #A having a pixel count of 4k (eg, 3840)×vertical about 2k (eg, 2160) can be obtained.
Further, the receiving device obtains the stream type information "00000011", determines from this information that the stream is a video (moving image) with a pixel count of about 4k horizontally (e.g. 3840) x about 2k vertically (e.g. 2160), In addition, the stream type information "00000101" is obtained, and from this information, the stream is converted from a video (video) with a pixel count of about 4k (e.g., 3840) horizontally by about 2k (e.g., 2160) vertically to about 8k (e.g., 7680) horizontally. It is determined that the information is difference information for generating a video (moving image) with approximately 4k (for example, 4320) pixels in the vertical direction. Then, the receiving device can obtain an image (moving image) of approximately 8k horizontal pixels (eg 7680 pixels) by approximately 4k vertical pixels (eg 4320 pixels) of image #A from both streams.

In order to transmit these streams, the transmission device uses, for example, the transmission methods described in the first and second embodiments. Also, as described in Embodiments 1 and 2, when the transmitting apparatus transmits these streams using both (12,4)16APSK and (8,8)16APSK modulation schemes, The effects described in the first and second embodiments can be obtained.

<Receiving device>
Next, the operation of the receiver that receives the radio signal transmitted by transmitter 700 will be described with reference to the block diagram of the receiver in FIG.

Receiving apparatus 1900 in FIG. 19 receives radio signals transmitted by transmitting apparatus 700 at antenna 1901 . The reception RF 1902 performs processing such as frequency conversion and quadrature demodulation on the received radio signal, and outputs a baseband signal.
Demodulation section 1904 performs processing such as root roll-off filtering, and outputs a filtered baseband signal.
Synchronization/channel estimation section 1914 receives the filtered baseband signal as input, and performs time synchronization, frequency synchronization, and channel estimation using, for example, "synchronization symbol group" and "pilot symbol group" transmitted by the transmitting apparatus. , outputs the estimated signal.
Control information estimation section 1916 receives the filtered baseband signal, extracts symbols including control information such as “TMCC information symbol group”, demodulates and decodes the symbols, and outputs a control signal. It should be noted that what is important in this embodiment is to transmit the symbol for transmitting the information of the transmission mode/slot information of the "TMCC information symbol group", the "transmission mode modulation scheme", and the "transmission mode coding rate". The receiving device demodulates and decodes the symbols to information, error-correcting code method (for example, error-correcting code coding rate, etc.) information, and modulation method (or transmission method) used by "slots composed of data symbol groups" are Ring ratio information for (12,4)16APSK, (8,8)16APSK, 32APSK, or transmission methods in which (12,4)16APSK symbols and (8,8)16APSK symbols are mixed is generated and output by the control information estimator 1916 as part of the control signal.

Demapping section 1906 receives the filtered baseband signal, control signal, and estimated signal as inputs, and based on the control signal, modulates the modulation scheme (or transmission method) used by the "slot consisting of data symbol groups". (In this case, if there is a ring ratio, the ring ratio is also judged.) Based on this judgment, from the filtered baseband signal and the estimated signal, the logarithmic likelihood of each bit contained in the data symbol is LLR (Log-Likelihood Ratio) is calculated and output. (However, instead of a soft decision value like LLR, a high decision value may be output, or a soft decision value instead of LLR may be output.)
Deinterleaving section 1908 receives log-likelihood ratios as input, accumulates them, performs deinterleaving (reordering of data) corresponding to the interleaving used by the transmitting apparatus, and outputs log-likelihood ratios after deinterleaving.

The error correction decoding unit 1912 receives the deinterleaved logarithmic likelihood ratio and the control signal as input, determines the error correction method used (code length, coding rate, etc.), and based on this determination, performs error correction decoding. to obtain the estimated information bits. In addition, when the error correction code used is the LDPC code, the decoding method includes belief propagation decoding (BP (Belief Propagation) decoding) such as sum-product decoding, Shuffled BP (Belief Propagation) decoding, and Layered BP decoding. etc. will be used.
The above is the operation when iterative detection is not performed. The following is a supplementary explanation of the operation when iterative detection is performed. Note that the receiving device does not necessarily need to perform iterative detection, and the receiving device does not have a part related to iterative detection described later, and performs initial detection and error correction decoding. It may be a receiving device.
When performing iterative detection, error correction decoding section 1912 outputs the log-likelihood ratio of each bit after decoding. (If only initial detection is performed, it is not necessary to output the log-likelihood ratio of each bit after decoding.)
Interleaving section 1910 interleaves (rearranges) the log-likelihood ratios of the decoded bits, and outputs the log-likelihood ratios after interleaving.

Demapping section 1906 performs iterative detection using the log-likelihood ratio after interleaving, the baseband signal after filtering, and the estimated signal, and outputs the log-likelihood ratio of each bit after iterative detection. .
After that, interleaving and error correction decoding operations are performed. Then, these operations are performed repeatedly. This increases the possibility of finally obtaining a good decoding result.
In the above description, symbols for transmitting the modulation scheme of the transmission mode of the "transmission mode/slot information" of the "TMCC information symbol group" and the transmission mode of the "transmission mode/slot information" of the "TMCC information symbol group" By obtaining the symbol for transmitting the coding rate, the receiving device obtains the symbols of the modulation scheme, the coding rate of the error correction code, and the modulation scheme of 16APSK, 32APSK, (12,4)16APSK and (8,8 ) In the case of a transmission method in which 16APSK symbols are mixed, the ring ratio is estimated, and the demodulation/decoding operation is enabled.
In the above description, the frame configuration of FIG. 18 was used, but the frame configuration to which the present invention is applied is not limited to this. Symbols used to transmit information on modulation schemes, information on error correction schemes (e.g., error correction code used, code length of error correction code, coding rate of error correction code, etc.) are present, the data symbols, the symbols for transmitting information on the modulation scheme, and the symbols for transmitting information on the error correction scheme may be arranged in any way in the frame. Also, symbols other than these symbols, such as preambles, symbols for synchronization, pilot symbols, reference symbols, etc., may exist in the frame.

Additionally, alternatively to the above description, there may be a symbol that conveys information about the ring ratio, and the transmitting device may transmit this symbol. Examples of symbols that convey information about the ring ratio are given below.

In Table 5, when "00000" is transmitted by the symbol transmitting information about the ring ratio, the data symbol becomes a symbol of "(12,4)16APSK ring ratio 4.00".
Also, it is as follows.
When "00001" is transmitted by the symbol transmitting information about the ring ratio, the data symbol becomes a symbol of "(12,4)16APSK ring ratio 4.10".
When "00010" is transmitted by the symbol transmitting information about the ring ratio, the data symbol becomes a symbol of "(12,4)16APSK ring ratio 4.20".
When "00011" is transmitted by the symbol transmitting information about the ring ratio, the data symbol becomes a symbol of "(12,4)16APSK ring ratio 4.30".

When "00100" is transmitted by the symbol transmitting information about the ring ratio, the data symbol becomes a symbol of "(8,8)16APSK ring ratio 2.50".
When "00101" is transmitted by the symbol transmitting information about the ring ratio, the data symbol becomes a symbol of "(8,8)16APSK ring ratio 2.60".
When "00110" is transmitted by the symbol transmitting information about the ring ratio, the data symbol becomes a symbol of "(8,8)16APSK ring ratio 2.70".
When "00111" is transmitted by the symbol transmitting information about the ring ratio, the data symbol becomes a symbol of "(8,8)16APSK ring ratio 2.80".

When "01000" is transmitted by the symbol transmitting information about the ring ratio, the data symbol is "a transmission method in which (12, 4) 16APSK symbols and (8, 8) 16APSK symbols are mixed, (12, 4 )16APSK ring ratio 4.00, (8,8)16APSK ring ratio 2.50”.
When '01001' is transmitted by the symbol transmitting information about the ring ratio, the data symbol is 'a transmission method in which (12, 4) 16APSK symbols and (8, 8) 16APSK symbols are mixed, (12, 4 ) 16APSK ring ratio 4.00 and (8,8) 16APSK ring ratio 2.60”.
When '01010' is transmitted by the symbol transmitting information about the ring ratio, the data symbol is 'a transmission method in which (12, 4) 16APSK symbols and (8, 8) 16APSK symbols are mixed, (12, 4 )16APSK ring ratio 4.00, (8,8)16APSK ring ratio 2.70”.
When "01011" is transmitted by the symbol transmitting information about the ring ratio, the data symbol is "a transmission method in which (12, 4) 16APSK symbols and (8, 8) 16APSK symbols are mixed, (12, 4 )16APSK ring ratio 4.00, (8,8)16APSK ring ratio 2.80”.

When '01100' is transmitted by the symbol transmitting information about the ring ratio, the data symbol is 'a transmission method in which (12, 4) 16APSK symbols and (8, 8) 16APSK symbols are mixed, (12, 4 )16APSK ring ratio 4.10, (8,8)16APSK ring ratio 2.50”.
When "01101" is transmitted by the symbol transmitting information about the ring ratio, the data symbol is "a transmission method in which (12,4)16APSK symbols and (8,8)16APSK symbols are mixed, (12,4 )16APSK ring ratio 4.10, (8,8)16APSK ring ratio 2.60”.
When "01110" is transmitted by the symbol transmitting information about the ring ratio, the data symbol is "a transmission method in which (12, 4) 16APSK symbols and (8, 8) 16APSK symbols are mixed, (12, 4 )16APSK ring ratio 4.10, (8,8)16APSK ring ratio 2.70”.
When "01111" is transmitted by the symbol transmitting information about the ring ratio, the data symbol is "a transmission method in which (12, 4) 16APSK symbols and (8, 8) 16APSK symbols are mixed, (12, 4 )16APSK ring ratio 4.10, (8,8)16APSK ring ratio 2.80”.
・・・・

Then, the receiving apparatus can estimate the ring ratio used in the data symbol by obtaining the symbol that transmits information about the ring ratio, thereby enabling demodulation and decoding of the data symbol.

Also, the symbol for transmitting the modulation scheme may contain ring ratio information. Examples are shown below.

In Table 6, when "00000" is transmitted as a symbol for transmitting modulation scheme information, the data symbol is a symbol of "(12,4)16APSK ring ratio 4.00".
Also, it is as follows.
When "00001" is transmitted as a symbol for transmitting modulation scheme information, the data symbol is a symbol of "(12,4)16APSK ring ratio 4.10".
When "00010" is transmitted as a symbol for transmitting modulation scheme information, the data symbol is a symbol of "(12,4)16APSK ring ratio 4.20".
When "00011" is transmitted as a symbol for transmitting modulation scheme information, the data symbol is a symbol of "(12,4)16APSK ring ratio 4.30".

When "00100" is transmitted as a symbol for transmitting modulation scheme information, the data symbol is a symbol of "(8,8)16APSK ring ratio 2.50".
When "00101" is transmitted as a symbol for transmitting modulation scheme information, the data symbol is a symbol of "(8,8)16APSK ring ratio 2.60".
When "00110" is transmitted as a symbol for transmitting modulation scheme information, the data symbol is a symbol of "(8,8)16APSK ring ratio 2.70".
When "00111" is transmitted as a symbol for transmitting modulation scheme information, the data symbol is a symbol of "(8,8)16APSK ring ratio 2.80".

When "01000" is transmitted by the symbol transmitting the information of the modulation scheme, the data symbol is "a transmission method in which (12,4)16APSK symbols and (8,8)16APSK symbols are mixed, (12,4 )16APSK ring ratio 4.00, (8,8)16APSK ring ratio 2.50”.
When "01001" is transmitted by the symbol transmitting the information of the modulation scheme, the data symbol is "a transmission method in which (12, 4) 16APSK symbols and (8, 8) 16APSK symbols are mixed, (12, 4 ) 16APSK ring ratio 4.00 and (8,8) 16APSK ring ratio 2.60”.
When "01010" is transmitted by the symbol transmitting the information of the modulation scheme, the data symbol is "a transmission method in which (12, 4) 16APSK symbols and (8, 8) 16APSK symbols are mixed, (12, 4 )16APSK ring ratio 4.00, (8,8)16APSK ring ratio 2.70”.
When "01011" is transmitted by the symbol transmitting the information of the modulation scheme, the data symbol is "a transmission method in which (12, 4) 16APSK symbols and (8, 8) 16APSK symbols are mixed, (12, 4 ) 16APSK ring ratio 4.00 and (8,8) 16APSK ring ratio 2.80”.

When "01100" is transmitted by the symbol transmitting the information of the modulation scheme, the data symbol is "a transmission method in which (12, 4) 16APSK symbols and (8, 8) 16APSK symbols are mixed, (12, 4 )16APSK ring ratio 4.10, (8,8)16APSK ring ratio 2.50”.
When "01101" is transmitted by the symbol transmitting the information of the modulation scheme, the data symbol is "a transmission method in which (12,4)16APSK symbols and (8,8)16APSK symbols are mixed, (12,4 )16APSK ring ratio 4.10, (8,8)16APSK ring ratio 2.60”.
When "01110" is transmitted by the symbol transmitting the information of the modulation scheme, the data symbol is "a transmission method in which (12,4)16APSK symbols and (8,8)16APSK symbols are mixed, (12,4 )16APSK ring ratio 4.10, (8,8)16APSK ring ratio 2.70”.
When "01111" is transmitted by the symbol transmitting the information of the modulation scheme, the data symbol is "a transmission method in which (12, 4) 16APSK symbols and (8, 8) 16APSK symbols are mixed, (12, 4 )16APSK ring ratio 4.10, (8,8)16APSK ring ratio 2.80”.
・・・・

When "11101" is transmitted by the symbol transmitting the information of the modulation scheme, the data symbol becomes the "8PSK" symbol.
When "11110" is transmitted by the symbol transmitting the information of the modulation scheme, the data symbol becomes a "QPSK" symbol.
When "11111" is transmitted by the symbol transmitting the information of the modulation scheme, the data symbol becomes a "π/2 shift BPSK" symbol.

Then, the receiving device can estimate the modulation scheme and the ring ratio used in the data symbol by obtaining the symbol that transmits the information of the modulation scheme, thereby demodulating and decoding the data symbol. It becomes possible.

In the above description, selectable modulation schemes (transmission methods) include "transmission method in which (12,4)16APSK symbols and (8,8)16APSK symbols are mixed, (12,4)16APSK ring ratio 4.10, (8,8)16APSK ring ratio 2.80", "(12,4)16APSK", and "(8,8)16APSK" are included in the examples, but the examples are not limited to these. For example, selectable modulation schemes (transmission methods) include "transmission method in which (12,4)16APSK symbols and (8,8)16APSK symbols are mixed, (12,4)16APSK ring ratio 4.10, (8, 8) A 16APSK ring ratio of 2.80" is included, or a selectable modulation method (transmission method) is a transmission method in which (12,4)16APSK symbols and (8,8)16APSK symbols are mixed, (12,4)16APSK ring ratio 4.10, (8,8)16APSK ring ratio 2.80", "(12,4)16APSK" are included or selectable as a modulation method (transmission method) "( Transmission method in which 12,4)16APSK symbols and (8,8)16APSK symbols are mixed, (12,4)16APSK ring ratio 4.10, (8,8)16APSK ring ratio 2.80”, “(8,8)16APSK ” may be included. At this time, if the selectable modulation schemes include a modulation scheme for which the ring ratio can be set, the transmission device transmits information on the ring ratio of the modulation scheme or a control symbol that can estimate the ring ratio. As a result, the receiving apparatus can estimate the modulation scheme and ring ratio of the data symbols and demodulate/decode the data symbols.

(Embodiment 4)
In this embodiment, the order of generating data symbols will be described.

FIG. 18(a) shows an image diagram of the frame configuration. In FIG. 18(a), "symbol group #1", "symbol group #2", "symbol group #3", . . . At this time, each symbol group of "symbol group of #1", "symbol group of #2", "symbol group of #3", . . . ', 'pilot symbol group', 'TMCC information symbol group', and 'slot composed of data symbol group'.
Here, for example, "#1 symbol group", "#2 symbol group", "#3 symbol group", ... "#N-1 symbol group", "#N symbol group" A method of forming a data symbol group that collects "slots constituted by data symbol groups" in the symbol groups will be described.

For generation of data symbol groups collected in "slots composed of data symbol groups" in N symbol groups from "#(β×N+1) symbol groups" to "#(β×N+N) symbol groups" , establish rules. The rule will be explained using FIG.

In FIG. 20, "(8,8)16APSK symbols and (12,4)16APSK symbols are mixed", but "(8,8)16APSK symbols and (12,4)16APSK symbols 3 or more (or 4 or more) consecutive symbols whose modulation scheme is either (12,4)16APSK or (8,8)16APSK. In the symbol group, there is no portion where the (12,4)16APSK symbols are continuous, and there is no portion where the (8,8)16APSK symbols are continuous.
・Taking FIG. 23 as an example, if the data symbol is either a (12,4)16APSK symbol or a (8,8)16APSK symbol, in the continuous data symbol group, the (8,8)16APSK symbol There is no place where is continuous for 3 or more symbols.
symbol group generated by any of the transmission methods of

Then, "(8,8)16APSK symbols and (12,4)16APSK symbols are mixed" in FIG. 20 satisfies the characteristics of FIGS. 20(a) to 20(f). In addition, in FIG. 20, the horizontal axis is the symbol.

Figure 20(a):
If there are 32APSK data symbols and no (8,8)16APSK data symbols,
As shown in FIG. 20(a), after the "32APSK data symbol", there is a "(8,8)16APSK symbol and (12,4)16APSK symbol mixed" symbol.

Figure 20(b):
When (8,8)16APSK data symbols exist, as shown in FIG. 20B, "(8,8)16APSK data symbols" are followed by "(8,8)16APSK symbols and (12 4) 16APSK symbols are mixed" symbols exist.

Figure 20(c):
When (12,4)16APSK data symbols are present, as shown in FIG. "(12,4)16APSK
data symbol of” exists.

Figure 20(d):
When 8PSK data symbols exist and (12,4)16APSK data symbols do not exist, as shown in FIG. mixed with
There is an "8PSK data symbol" after this symbol.

Figure 20(e):
When QPSK data symbols exist, 8PSK data symbols do not exist, and (12,4)16APSK data symbols do not exist, "(8,8)16APSK symbols and (12,4)16APSK symbols are mixed” symbols are followed by “QPSK data symbols”.

Figure 20(f):
When π/2-shifted BPSK data symbols exist, QPSK data symbols do not exist, 8PSK data symbols do not exist, and (12,4)16APSK data symbols do not exist, FIG. As shown in (f), "(8,8)16APSK symbols and (12,4)16APSK symbols are mixed" symbols are followed by "π/2 shift BPSK data symbols".

When the symbols are arranged as described above, they are arranged in the order of the signals of the modulation scheme (transmission method) with the highest peak power, so there is an advantage that the receiving apparatus can easily perform AGC (Automatic Gain Control) control.

FIG. 21 shows an example of a symbol configuration method for "(8,8)16APSK symbols and (12,4)16APSK symbols are mixed" described above.
Symbols of "(8,8)16APSK symbols and (12,4)16APSK symbols are mixed" for the error-correcting code coding rate X and "(8,8)16APSK" symbols for the error-correcting code coding rate Y It is assumed that there are symbols and (12,4)16APSK mixed symbols. Then, it is assumed that the relationship of X>Y is established.
At this time, after the symbol "(8,8)16APSK symbol and (12,4)16APSK symbol are mixed" of the error correction code encoding rate X, "(8 ,8) 16APSK symbols and (12,4)16APSK symbols are mixed.
As shown in FIG. 21, symbols of "(8,8)16APSK symbols and (12,4)16APSK symbols are mixed" with an error correction code coding rate of 1/2, and an error correction code with a coding rate of 2/2. Symbols of 3 "(8,8)16APSK symbols and (12,4)16APSK symbols are mixed", and "(8,8)16APSK symbols and (12,4)16APSK symbols with an error correction code coding rate of 3/4" 4) 16APSK symbols are assumed to exist. Then, from the above description, as shown in FIG. 21, the symbol of "(8, 8) 16APSK symbol and (12, 4) 16APSK symbol are mixed" with the coding rate of error correction code 3/4, error correction Symbols of "(8,8)16APSK symbols and (12,4)16APSK symbols are mixed" with a code rate of 2/3, and "(8,8)" with an error correction code rate of 1/2 16APSK symbols and (12,4)16APSK symbols are mixed" symbols are arranged in the order of "symbols".

(Embodiment 5)
In Embodiments 1 to 4, in a transmission frame, a method of switching between (12,4)16APSK symbols and (8,8)16APSK symbols, a pilot symbol configuration method associated therewith, and TMCC are included. A method of configuring control information and the like have been described.
The method of obtaining the same effect as in Embodiments 1 to 4 is not limited to the method of using (12,4)16APSK symbols and (8,8)16APSK symbols in the transmission frame. The method using (12,4)16APSK symbols and NU (Non-Uniform)-16QAM symbols also
Effects similar to those of the first to fourth embodiments can be obtained. That is, in Embodiments 1 to 4, instead of (8,8)16APSK symbols, NU-16QAM symbols should be used (the modulation scheme used in combination is (12,4 ) is 16APSK). Therefore, in this embodiment, the configuration of NU-16QAM symbols used instead of (8,8)16APSK symbols will be mainly described.

<Signal point arrangement>
NU-16QAM signal point arrangement and bit allocation (labeling) to each signal point performed by mapping section 708 in FIG. 7 will be described.

FIG. 26 shows an example of NU-16QAM signal point arrangement and labeling in the in-phase I-quadrature Q plane. Although the first to fourth embodiments have been described using the ring ratio, "amplitude ratio" is defined instead of the ring ratio. When R ₁ and R ₂ are defined as shown in FIG _.
is a real number and R ₁ >0, and R ₂ is a real number and R ₂ >0. Moreover, R ₁ <R ₂
becomes. ), and define the amplitude ratio A _r =R ₂ /R ₁ . And, from Embodiment 1 to Embodiment 4
, the amplitude ratio of NU-16QAM is applied instead of the ring ratio of (8,8)16APSK.

The coordinates of each NU-16QAM signal point on the IQ plane are as follows.
Signal point 1-1[0000]・・・(R ₂ ,R ₂ )
Signal point 1-2[0001]・・・(R ₂ ,R ₁ )
Signal point 1-3[0101]・・・(R ₂ ,-R ₁ )
Signal point 1-4[0100]・・・(R ₂ ,-R ₂ )
Signal point 2-1[0010]・・・(R ₁ ,R ₂ )
Signal point 2-2[0011]・・・(R ₁ ,R ₁ )
Signal point 2-3 [0111] ... (R ₁ ,-R ₁ )
Signal point 2-4[0110]・・・(R ₁ ,-R ₂ )
Signal point 3-1[1010]・・・(-R ₁ ,R ₂ )
Signal point 3-2[1011]・・・(-R ₁ ,R ₁ )
Signal point 3-3[1111]・・・(-R ₁ ,-R ₁ )
Signal point 3-4[1110]・・・(-R ₁ ,-R ₂ )
Signal point 4-1[1000]・・・(-R ₂ ,R ₂ )
Signal point 4-2[1001]・・・(-R ₂ ,R ₁ )
Signal point 4-3[1101]・・・(-R ₂ ,-R ₁ )
Signal point 4-4[1100]・・・(-R ₂ ,-R ₂ )
Also, for example, above,
Signal point 1-1[0000]・・・(R ₂ ,R ₂ )
However, in the data input to mapping section 708, when _four bits [ _b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [0000], the in-phase component _I and the quadrature component of the baseband signal after mapping are Q means that (I, Q) = (R ₂ , R ₂ ). In another example,
Signal point 4-4[1100]・・・(-R ₂ ,-R ₂ )
However, in the data input to mapping section 708, when four bits [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1100], the in-phase component I and the quadrature component of the baseband signal after mapping are Q means that (I, Q) = (-R ₂ ,-R ₂ ).

For this point, signal point 1-1, signal point 1-2, signal point 1-3, signal point 1-4, signal point 2-1, signal point 2-2, signal point 2-3, signal point 2 -4, signal point 3-1, signal point 3-2, signal point 3-3, signal point 3-4, signal point 4-1, signal point 4-2, signal point 4-3, signal point 4-4 are all the same.
<Transmission output>
In order to make the transmission powers of (12,4)16APSK symbols and NU-16QAM symbols the same, the following normalization factors may be used. (12,4)16APSK symbol normalization coefficients are as described in the first embodiment. The NU-16QAM symbol normalization factor is defined by the following equation.

Let I _b be the in-phase component of the baseband signal before normalization, and let Q _b be the quadrature component. Let I _n be the in-phase component of the normalized baseband signal, and Q _n be the quadrature component. Then, when the modulation scheme is NU-16QAM, (I _n , Q _n )=(a _NU-16QAM ×I _b , a _NU-16QAM ×Q _b ) holds.
In the case of NU-16QAM, I _b is the in-phase component of the baseband signal before normalization, and Q _b is the quadrature component of the baseband signal after mapping, which is the in-phase component I of the baseband signal after mapping obtained by mapping based on FIG. , is the orthogonal component Q. Therefore, the following relationship holds for NU-16QAM.

Signal point 1-1 [0000] ... (I _n , Q _n ) = (a _NU-16QAM × R ₂ , a _NU-16QAM × R ₂ )
Signal point 1-2 [0001] ... (I _n , Q _n ) = (a _NU-16QAM × R ₂ , a _NU-16QAM × R ₁ )
Signal point 1-3 [0101] ... (I _n , Q _n ) = (a _NU-16QAM × R ₂ ,- a _NU-16QAM × R ₁ )
Signal point 1-4 [0100] ... (I _n , Q _n ) = (a _NU-16QAM × R ₂ ,- a _NU-16QAM × R ₂ )
Signal point 2-1 [0010] ... (I _n , Q _n ) = (a _NU-16QAM × R ₁ , a _NU-16QAM × R ₂ )
Signal point 2-2 [0011] ... (I _n , Q _n ) = (a _NU-16QAM × R ₁ , a _NU-16QAM × R ₁ )
Signal point 2-3 [0111] ... (I _n , Q _n ) = (a _NU-16QAM × R ₁ ,- a _NU-16QAM × R ₁ )
Signal point 2-4 [0110] ... (I _n , Q _n ) = (a _NU-16QAM × R ₁ ,- a _NU-16QAM × R ₂ )
Signal point 3-1 [1010] (I _n , Q _n ) = (- a _NU-16QAM × R ₁ , a _NU-16QAM × R ₂ )
Signal point 3-2 [1011] (I _n , Q _n ) = (- a _NU-16QAM × R ₁ , a _NU-16QAM × R ₁ )
Signal point 3-3 [1111] (I _n , Q _n ) = (- a _NU-16QAM × R ₁ ,- a _NU-16QAM × R ₁ )
Signal point 3-4 [1110] (I _n , Q _n ) = (- a _NU-16QAM × R ₁ ,- a _NU-16QAM × R ₂ )
Signal point 4-1 [1000] (I _n , Q _n ) = (- a _NU-16QAM × R ₂ , a _NU-16QAM × R ₂ )
Signal point 4-2 [1001] (I _n , Q _n ) = (- a _NU-16QAM × R ₂ , a _NU-16QAM × R ₁ )
Signal point 4-3 [1101] (I _n , Q _n ) = (- a _NU-16QAM × R ₂ ,- a _NU-16QAM × R ₁ )
Signal point 4-4 [1100] (I _n , Q _n ) = (- a _NU-16QAM × R ₂ ,- a _NU-16QAM × R ₂ )
Also, for example, above,
Signal point 1-1 [0000] ... (I _n , Q _n ) = (a _NU-16QAM × R ₂ , a _NU-16QAM × R ₂ )
However, in the data input to the mapping unit 708, when the _four bits [ _b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [0000], (In, _Qn ) ₌ ( _{a NU-16QAM} ×R ₂ , a _NU-16QAM ×R ₂ ). In another example,
Signal point 4-4 [1100] (I _n , Q _n ) = (- a _NU-16QAM × R ₂ ,- a _NU-16QAM × R ₂ )
However, when _four bits [ _b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [1100] in the data to be input to the mapping unit 708, ( _In , _Qn ) ₌ (- _{aNU- 16QAM} ×R ₂ ,- a _NU-16QAM ×R ₂ ).

For this point, signal point 1-1, signal point 1-2, signal point 1-3, signal point 1-4, signal point 2-1, signal point 2-2, signal point 2-3, signal point 2 -4, signal point 3-1, signal point 3-2, signal point 3-3, signal point 3-4, signal point 4-1, signal point 4-2, signal point 4-3, signal point 4-4 are all the same.
Mapping section 708 then outputs I _n and Q _n described above as baseband signal in-phase and quadrature components.

From R ₁ and R ₂ used to express the signal points in the IQ plane of (12,4)16APSK, the ring ratio R ₍ 12,4) of (12,4)16APSK is given by R _(12,4) = It shall be expressed as R ₂ /R ₁ .

When R ₁ and R ₂ are defined as shown in FIG. 26, the amplitude ratio of NU-16QAM is defined as A _r =R ₂ /R ₁ .
At this time, it is possible to obtain the effect that "if A _r <R _{(12, 4)} holds, the possibility that the PAPR can be further reduced increases".
This is because the modulation scheme that is likely to dominate the peak power is NU-16QAM. At this time, the peak power generated in NU- _16QAM is likely to increase as Ar increases. Therefore, in order not to increase the peak power, it is better to set _{A r} small. High degree. Therefore, if there is a relationship of A _r <R _(12,4) , there is a high possibility that the PAPR can be reduced.
However, even if A _r >R _(12,4) , the effect of making the PAPR smaller than that of NU-16QAM can be obtained. Therefore, when focusing on improving the BER characteristic, A _r >R _(12,4) may be good.

<Regarding NU-16QAM labeling and signal point arrangement>

[About NU-16QAM labeling]

Here, the labeling of NU-16QAM is explained. Note that the labeling is the relationship between the input 4 bits [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ] and the arrangement of signal points on the in-phase I-quadrature Q plane. Figure 26 shows an example of NU-16QAM labeling.
Any labeling that satisfies the following <Condition 5> and <Condition 6> may be used.

For illustration purposes, the following definitions are provided.
When the 4 bits to be transmitted are [b _a3 b _a2 b _a1 b _a0 ], let signal point A be given in the in-phase I-quadrature Q plane, and when the 4 bits to be transmitted are [b _b3 b _b2 b _b1 b _b0 ] , give a signal point B in the in-phase I-quadrature Q plane. At this time,
The number of different bits of labeling is defined as 0 when " _ba3 = b _b3 and b _a2 = b _b2 and b _a1 = b _b1 and b _a0 = b _b0 ".

In addition, it is defined as follows.
The number of bits with different labeling is defined as 1 when "b _a3 ≠b _b3 and b _a2 =b _b2 and b _a1 =b _b1 and b _a0 =b _b0 ".
The number of bits with different labeling is defined as 1 when "b _a3 =b _b3 and b _a2 ≠b _b2 and b _a1 =b _b1 and b _a0 =b _b0 ".

The number of bits with different labeling is defined as 1 when "b _a3 =b _b3 and b _a2 =b _b2 and b _a1 ≠b _b1 and b _a0 =b _b0 ".
The number of bits with different labeling is defined as 1 when "b _a3 =b _b3 and b _a2 =b _b2 and b _a1 =b _b1 and b _a0 ≠b _b0 ".
The number of bits with different labeling is defined as 2 when "b _a3 ≠b _b3 and b _a2 ≠b _b2 and b _a1 =b _b1 and b _a0 =b _b0 ".

When "b _a3 ≠b _b3 and b _a2 =b _b2 and b _a1 ≠b _b1 and b _a0 =b _b0 ", the number of bits with different labeling is defined as two.
When "b _a3 ≠b _b3 and b _a2 =b _b2 and b _a1 =b _b1 and b _a0 ≠b _b0 ", the number of bits with different labeling is defined as two.
The number of bits with different labeling is defined as 2 when "b _a3 =b _b3 and b _a2 ≠b _b2 and b _a1 ≠b _b1 and b _a0 = b _b0 ".

The number of bits with different labeling is defined as 2 when "b _a3 =b _b3 and b _a2 ≠b _b2 and b _a1 =b _b1 and b _a0 ≠b _b0 ".
The number of bits with different labeling is defined as 2 when "b _a3 =b _b3 and b _a2 =b _b2 and b _a1 ≠b _b1 and b _a0 ≠b _b0 ".

When "b _a3 =b _b3 and b _a2 ≠b _b2 and b _a1 ≠b _b1 and b _a0 ≠b _b0 ", the number of bits with different labeling is defined as 3.

When "b _a3 ≠b _b3 and _ba2 =b _b2 and _ba1 ≠b _b1 and _ba0 ≠b _b0 ", the number of bits with different labeling is defined as 3.
When "b _a3 ≠b _b3 and _ba2 ≠b _b2 and _{ba1=b b1 and ba0} ≠b _b0 ", the number of bits with different labeling is defined as 3.
The number of bits with different labeling is defined as 3 when "b _a3 ≠b _b3 and _ba2 ≠b _b2 and _ba1 ≠b _b1 and _ba0 =b _b0 ".

When "b _a3 ≠b _b3 and _ba2 ≠b _b2 and _ba1 ≠b _b1 and _ba0 ≠b _b0 ", the number of bits with different labeling is defined as four.
Then define the group. Signal point 1-1, signal point 1-2, signal point 1-3, signal point 1-4, signal point 2-1, signal point 2-2, signal point 2-3 in the above explanation of NU-16QAM , signal point 2-4, signal point 3-1
, signal point 3-2, signal point 3-3, signal point 3-4, signal point 4-1, signal point 4-2, signal point 4-3, signal point 4-4, "signal point 1-1 , signal points 1-2, signal points 1-3, and signal points 1-4 are defined as Group 1. Similarly, "signal point 2-1, signal point 2-2, signal point 2-3, signal point 2-4 group 2", "signal point 3-1, signal point 3-2, signal point 3-3 , signal point 3-4 to group 3", "signal point 4-1, signal point 4-2, signal point 4-3,
Signal point 4-4 is defined as group 4.

Then, the following two conditions are given.
<Condition 5>:
X is 1,2,3,4, and for all X that satisfy this, the following holds.
The number of different bits in the labeling of signal point X-1 and signal point X-2 is 1
The number of different bits in the labeling of signal point X-2 and signal point X-3 is 1
The number of different bits in the labeling of signal point X-3 and signal point X-4 is 1
<Condition 6>:
u is 1,2,3 and v is 1,2,3,4, and for all u and all v satisfying this, the following holds.
The number of different bits in the labeling of signal point uv and signal point (u+1)-v is 1

By satisfying the above, since the number of bits in which labeling differs from signal points at close distances for each signal point in the in-phase I-quadrature Q plane is small, the receiving apparatus may be able to obtain high data reception quality. becomes higher. This increases the possibility that high data reception quality can be obtained when the receiving apparatus performs iterative detection.

In the case of forming symbols with NU-16QAM and (12,4)16APSK, for which the above is an example, any one of the following transmission methods can be considered if implemented in the same manner as in Embodiment 1.
・A portion where (12,4)16APSK symbols are continuous in a symbol group where 3 or more (or 4 or more) symbols whose modulation scheme is either (12,4)16APSK or NU-16QAM are continuous does not exist, and there is no continuous portion of NU-16QAM symbols.
・In the "symbol group of period M", the number of symbols of NU-16QAM is 1 more than the number of symbols of (12,4)16APSK, that is, the number of symbols of (12,4)16APSK is N, and NU-16QAM number of symbols is N+1. (N is a natural number.) Then, in the "symbol group of period M", there is no place where two NU-16QAM symbols are consecutive, or there is one place where two NU-16QAM symbols are consecutive. do. (Therefore, there is no place where 3 or more NU-16QAM symbols are consecutive.)
- When a data symbol is either a (12,4)16APSK symbol or a NU-16QAM symbol, there is no place where 3 or more NU-16QAM symbols continue in a group of consecutive data symbols.

Then, in Embodiments 1 to 4, the parts explained with the symbols of (12,4)16APSK and the symbols of (8,8)16APSK (for example, the transmission method, the pilot symbol configuration method, the configuration of the receiving apparatus , configuration of control information including TMCC, etc.), by replacing the explanation of (8,8)16APSK symbols with NU-16QAM, we can use (12,4)16APSK symbols and NU-16QAM symbols. Embodiments 1 to 4 can also be implemented in the transmission method described above.

(Embodiment 6)
In this embodiment, an example will be described in which the transmission method/transmitting device and the receiving method/receiving device described in Embodiments 1 to 5 are applied to broadband satellite digital broadcasting.

FIG. 27 shows an image diagram of broadband satellite digital broadcasting. Satellite 2702 in FIG. 27 transmits a transmission signal using the transmission method described in the first to fifth embodiments. This transmission signal is received by the receiver on the ground.
On the other hand, the ground station 2701 in FIG. 27 transmits the data to be transmitted by the modulated signal transmitted by the satellite 2702 . Thus, ground station 2701 will transmit a modulated signal containing data for the satellite to transmit. Satellite 2702 receives the modulated signal transmitted by ground station 2701 and transmits the data contained in this modulated signal using the transmission method described in the first to fifth embodiments.

(Embodiment 7)
In this embodiment, it is signaled as TMCC information so that the receiving side can smoothly receive the transmitting apparatus using the transmission methods described in Embodiments 1, 2, 5, etc. Configuration examples of various types of information will be described.

In order to reduce the distortion generated by the power amplifier provided in the radio section 712 in the transmission device of FIG. There is a method to secure the point output differential value).
In broadband satellite digital broadcasting, a transmission device transmits information of "satellite output backoff" in TMCC information in relation to distortion of a power amplifier.

The present embodiment further describes a method of transmitting advanced information related to power amplifier distortion and the associated configuration of TMCC information. By transmitting the information described below, the receiving apparatus can receive a modulated signal with little distortion, so that the effect of improving the reception quality of data can be obtained.
As new TMCC information, it is proposed to transmit information indicating whether power amplifier distortion compensation has been performed and information indicating the degree of effect of power amplifier distortion compensation.

Table 7 shows a specific example of the configuration of information on distortion compensation of the power amplifier. As shown in Table 7, the transmitting apparatus sets "0" when turning off the distortion compensation of the power amplifier and "1" when turning on the distortion compensation of the power amplifier. part).

Table 8 shows a specific example of the configuration of information relating to the index representing the degree of effect of distortion compensation of the power amplifier. If the inter-code (inter-symbol) interference becomes large, the transmitter transmits '00'. If the inter-symbol (inter-symbol) interference is moderate, the transmitter transmits "01". If the inter-symbol interference is small, the transmitter transmits '10'.
In Tables 2, 3 and 4 of Embodiment 3, the ring ratio is determined when the coding rate of the error correcting code is determined.

In the present embodiment, as a different method from this, information on distortion compensation of the power amplifier, and (or) information on an index representing the degree of effect of distortion compensation of the power amplifier, and (or) "satellite output Even if the ring ratio is determined based on the information of "backoff" and the coding rate of the error correction code is set to A (even if it is set to a certain value), the transmitting apparatus sets the ring ratio to a plurality of candidates. Suggest a way to choose from. At this time, as the TMCC information, use the "modulation scheme information" in Table 1 and (or), the "ring ratio information" in Table 5, and (or) the "modulation scheme information" in Table 6. Then, the transmitting device can notify the receiving device of the information of the modulation scheme and the information of the ring ratio.

FIG. 28 shows a block diagram for ring ratio determination related to the above. The ring ratio determination unit 2801 in FIG. A modulation method (or transmission method) that uses all or part of this information as an input and needs to set the ring ratio. (e.g., for (8,8)16APSK, or (12,4)APSK, or a combination of (8,8)16APSK and (12,4)APSK transmission methods), determine the ring ratio , output the information of the determined ring ratio. Then, based on the determined ring ratio information, the mapping unit of the transmitting device performs mapping, and the ring ratio information is sent to the receiving device as control information, for example, as shown in Tables 5 and 6. , the transmitter will transmit.

A characteristic point is that when modulation scheme A and coding rate B are selected, the ring ratio can be set from a plurality of candidates.
For example, if the modulation scheme is (12,4)16APSK and the coding rate of the error correction code is 61/129 (approximate value 1/2), there are three candidate ring ratios: C, D, and E. do. Then, it is preferable to determine which value of the ring ratio to use based on the back-off situation and information on distortion compensation of the power amplifier (ON/OFF information). For example, when the distortion compensation of the power amplifier is ON, the ring ratio should be selected so that the reception quality of the data of the receiving device is improved. A smaller ring ratio should be selected. (For other coding rates, the ring ratio can be determined in the same way.) Such a selection method is applicable when the modulation scheme is (8, 8)16APSK and the A transmission method using both (8,8)16APSK and (12,4)APSK can be similarly applied.

By operating as described above, it is possible to improve the data reception quality of the receiving device and to reduce the load on the transmission power amplifier.

(Embodiment 8)
Embodiment 7 describes the case of using NU-16QAM symbols instead of (8,8)16APSK symbols in Embodiments 1 to 4. FIG. In this embodiment, (4,8,4)16APSK is proposed as an extension of NU-16QAM (NU-16QAM is one example of (4,8,4)16APSK.), In Embodiment 4, a case will be described where (4,8,4)16APSK symbols are used instead of (8,8)16APSK symbols.

In Embodiments 1 to 4, in a transmission frame, a method of switching between (12,4)16APSK symbols and (8,8)16APSK symbols, a pilot symbol configuration method associated therewith, and TMCC are included. A method of configuring control information and the like have been described.
The method of obtaining the same effect as in Embodiments 1 to 4 is not limited to the method of using (12,4)16APSK symbols and (8,8)16APSK symbols in the transmission frame. A method using (12,4)16APSK symbols and (4,8,4)16APSK symbols can also provide the same effects as in the first to fourth embodiments. In other words, in Embodiments 1 to 4, (4,8,4)16APSK symbols should be used instead of (8,8)16APSK symbols (the modulation scheme used in combination is ( 12,4) 16APSK).

Therefore, in this embodiment, the configuration of (4,8,4)16APSK symbols used instead of (8,8)16APSK symbols will be mainly described.

<Signal point arrangement>
As shown in FIG. 30, (4,8,4)16APSK mapping signal points are arranged on three concentric circles with different radii (amplitude components) on the in-phase I-quadrature Q plane. In this specification, among these concentric circles, the circle with the largest radius of R ₃ is called the "outer circle", the circle with the middle size of the radius of R ₂ is called the "middle circle", and the circle with the smallest radius of R ₁ is called the "middle circle". is called the "inner circle". When R ₁ , R ₂ and R ₃ are defined as shown in FIG. 30 (R ₁ is a real number, R ₁ >0, R ₂ is a real number, R ₂ >0, R ₃ is is a real number, R ₃ > 0, and R ₁ < R ₂ < R _3. )
There are 4 signal points on the circumference of the outer circle, 8 signal points on the circumference of the middle circle, and 4 points on the circumference of the inner circle.
signal points are arranged. (4,8,4) of (4,8,4)16APSK means that there are 4, 12, and 4 signal points in the order of the outer circle, the middle circle, and the inner circle, respectively.

Next, (4,8,4)16APSK signal point arrangement and bit allocation (labeling) to each signal point performed by mapping section 708 in FIG. 7 will be described.
FIG. 30 shows an example of (4,8,4)16APSK signal point arrangement and labeling in the in-phase I-quadrature Q plane. In addition, in Embodiment 1 to Embodiment 4, explanations were given using ring ratios, but in the case of (4,8,4)16APSK, two ring ratios are defined. The first ring ratio r ₁ =R ₂ /R ₁ and the other ring ratio r ₂ =R ₃ /R ₁ . Then, in Embodiments 1 to 4, instead of the ring ratio of (8,8)16APSK, two ring ratios of (4,8,4)16APSK r ₁ =R ₂ /R ₁ , r ₂ = R ₃ /R ₁ will apply.

The coordinates of each signal point of (4,8,4)16APSK on the IQ plane are as follows.

Signal point 1-1[0000]・・・（R ₃ cos(π/4), R ₃ sin(π/4)）
Signal point 1-2 [0001] ... (R ₂ cos λ, R ₂ sin λ)
Signal point 1-3 [0101] ... (R ₂ cos(-λ), R ₂ sin(-λ))
Signal point 1-4[0100]・・・（R ₃ cos(-π/4), R ₃ sin(-π/4)）

Signal point 2-1 [0010] ... (R ₂ cos(-λ+π/2), R ₂ sin(-λ+π/2))
Signal point 2-2 [0011] ... (R ₁ cos(π/4), R ₁ sin(π/4))
Signal point 2-3 [0111] ... (R ₁ cos(-π/4), R ₁ sin(-π/4))
Signal point 2-4 [0110] ... (R ₂ cos(λ-π/2), R ₂ sin(λ-π/2))

Signal point 3-1 [1010] (R ₂ cos(λ+π/2), R ₂ sin(λ+π/2))
Signal point 3-2 [1011] ... (R ₁ cos(3π/4), R ₁ sin(3π/4))
Signal point 3-3[1111]・・・（R ₁ cos(-3π/4), R ₁ sin(-3π/4)）
Signal point 3-4 [1110] ... (R ₂ cos(-λ-π/2), R ₂ sin(-λ-π/2))

Signal point 4-1 [1000] ... (R ₃ cos(3π/4), R ₃ sin(3π/4))
Signal point 4-2 [1001] ... (R ₂ cos(π-λ), R ₂ sin(π-λ))
Signal point 4-3 [1101] ... (R ₂ cos(-π+λ), R ₂ sin(-π+λ))
Signal point 4-4[1100]・・・（R ₃ cos(-3π/4), R ₃ sin(-3π/4)）
The unit of phase is radian. So, for example, R ₃ cos(π/4
), the unit of π/4 is radians. The unit of phase is radian also in the following description. Also, λ is larger than 0 (zero) radian and smaller than π/4 (0 radian<λ<π/4 radian).

Also, for example, above,
Signal point 1-1[0000]・・・（R ₃ cos(π/4), R ₃ sin(π/4)）
However, in the data input to mapping section 708, when _four bits [ _b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [0000], the in-phase component _I and the quadrature component of the baseband signal after mapping are Q means that (I, Q) = (R ₃ cos(π/4),R ₃ sin(π/4)).

In another example,
Signal point 4-4[1100]・・・（R ₃ cos(-3π/4), R ₃ sin(-3π/4)）
However, in the data input to mapping section 708, when four bits [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1100], the in-phase component I and the quadrature component of the baseband signal after mapping are Q means that (I, Q) = (R ₃ cos(-3π/4),R ₃ sin(-3π/4)).

For this point, signal point 1-1, signal point 1-2, signal point 1-3, signal point 1-4, signal point 2-1, signal point 2-2, signal point 2-3, signal point 2 -4, signal point 3-1, signal point 3-2, signal point 3-3, signal point 3-4, signal point 4-1, signal point 4-2, signal point 4-3, signal point 4-4 are all the same.

<Transmission output>
In order to make the transmission powers of (12,4)16APSK symbols and (4,8,4)16APSK symbols the same, the following normalization factors may be used. (12,4)16APSK symbol normalization coefficients are as described in the first embodiment. The normalization factor of (4,8,4)16APSK symbols is defined by the following equation.

Let I _b be the in-phase component of the baseband signal before normalization, and let Q _b be the quadrature component. Let I _n be the in-phase component of the normalized baseband signal, and Q _n be the quadrature component. Then, when the modulation method is (4,8,4)16APSK, (I _n , Q _n ) = (a _(4,8,4) × I _b , a _(4,8,4) × Q _b ) is To establish.
In the case of (4,8,4)16APSK, I _b is the in-phase component of the baseband signal before normalization, and Q _b is the quadrature component of the baseband signal after mapping obtained by mapping based on FIG. It becomes the in-phase component I and the quadrature component Q of the signal. Therefore, the following relationship holds for (4,8,4)16APSK.

Signal point 1-1[0000]・・・(I _n , Q _n )=(a _(4,8,4) ×R ₃ cos(π/4), a _(4,8,4) ×R ₃ sin (π/4))
Signal point 1-2[0001]・・・(I _n , Q _n )=(a _(4,8,4) ×R ₂ cosλ, a _(4,8,4) ×R ₂ sinλ)
Signal point 1-3 [0101]・・・(I _n , Q _n )=(a _(4,8,4) ×R ₂ cos(－λ), a _(4,8,4) ×R ₂ sin( -λ))
Signal point 1-4[0100]・・・(I _n , Q _n )=(a _(4,8,4) ×R ₃ cos(-π/4), a _(4,8,4) ×R ₃ sin(-π/4))

Signal point 2-1 [0010] (I _n , Q _n ) = (a _(4,8,4) ×R ₂ cos(-λ+π/2), a _(4,8,4) ×R ₂ sin(-λ+π/2))
Signal point 2-2[0011]・・・(I _n , Q _n )=(a _(4,8,4) ×R ₁ cos(π/4), a _(4,8,4) ×R ₁ sin (π/4))
Signal point 2-3 [0111]・・・(I _n , Q _n )=(a _(4,8,4) ×R ₁ cos(-π/4), a _(4,8,4) ×R ₁ sin(-π/4))
Signal point 2-4[0110]・・・(I _n , Q _n )=(a _(4,8,4) ×R ₂ cos(λ－π/2), a _(4,8,4) ×R ₂ sin(λ-π/2))

Signal point 3-1[1010]・・・(I _n , Q _n )=(a _(4,8,4) ×R ₂ cos(λ+π/2), a _(4,8,4) ×R ₂ sin (λ+π/2))
Signal point 3-2[1011]・・・(I _n , Q _n )=(a _(4,8,4) ×R ₁ cos(3π/4), a _(4,8,4) ×R ₁ sin (3π/4))
Signal point 3-3[1111]・・・(I _n , Q _n )=(a _(4,8,4) ×R ₁ cos(-3π/4), a _(4,8,4) ×R ₁ sin(-3
π/4))
Signal point 3-4[1110]・・・(I _n , Q _n )=(a _(4,8,4) ×R ₂ cos(－λ－π/2), a _(4,8,4) × R2sin(-λ-π/ ₂ ))

Signal point 4-1[1000]・・・(I _n , Q _n )=(a _(4,8,4) ×R ₃ cos(3π/4), a _(4,8,4) ×R ₃ sin (3π/4))
Signal point 4-2[1001]・・・(I _n , Q _n )=(a _(4,8,4) ×R ₂ cos(π－λ), a _(4,8,4) ×R ₂ sin (π
-λ))
Signal point 4-3 [1101]・・・(I _n , Q _n )=(a _(4,8,4) ×R ₂ cos(－π＋λ), a _(4,8,4) ×R ₂ sin(
-π+λ))
Signal point 4-4[1100]・・・(I _n , Q _n )=(a _(4,8,4) ×R ₃ cos(-3π/4), a _(4,8,4) ×R ₃ sin(-3
π/4))

Also, for example, above,
Signal point 1-1[0000]・・・(I _n , Q _n )=(a _(4,8,4) ×R ₃ cos(π/4), a _(4,8,4) ×R ₃ sin (π/4))
However, in the data input to the mapping unit 708, when the _four bits [ _b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [0000], (In, _Qn ) ₌ ( _{a (4, 8,4)} ×R3 cos(π/ ₄ ), a _(4,8,4) ×R3 sin(π/ ₄ )
) means that In another example,
Signal point 4-4[1100]・・・(I _n , Q _n )=(a _(4,8,4) ×R ₃ cos(-3π/4), a _(4,8,4) ×R ₃ sin(-3
π/4))
However, in the data input to the mapping unit 708, when the _four bits [ _b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [1100], (In, _Qn ) ₌ ( _{a (4, 8,4)} ×R ₃ cos(-3π/4), a _(4,8,4) ×R ₃ sin(-3π/4)).

For this point, signal point 1-1, signal point 1-2, signal point 1-3, signal point 1-4, signal point 2-1, signal point 2-2, signal point 2-3, signal point 2 -4, signal point 3-1, signal point 3-2, signal point 3-3, signal point 3-4, signal point 4-1, signal point 4-2, signal point 4-3, signal point 4-4 are all the same.

Mapping section 708 then outputs I _n and Q _n described above as baseband signal in-phase and quadrature components.

<(4,8,4)16APSK labeling and constellation>

[(4,8,4)16APSK labeling]
Here, the labeling of (4,8,4)16APSK will be explained. In addition, labeling is
It is the relationship between the input 4 bits [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ] and the arrangement of signal points on the in-phase I-quadrature Q plane. An example of labeling of (4,8,4)16APSK is shown in FIG.
Any labeling that satisfies the following <Condition 7> and <Condition 8> may be used.

For illustration purposes, the following definitions are provided.
When the 4 bits to be transmitted are [b _a3 b _a2 b _a1 b _a0 ], let signal point A be given in the in-phase I-quadrature Q plane, and when the 4 bits to be transmitted are [b _b3 b _b2 b _b1 b _b0 ] , give a signal point B in the in-phase I-quadrature Q plane. At this time,
The number of different bits of labeling is defined as 0 when " _ba3 = b _b3 and b _a2 = b _b2 and b _a1 = b _b1 and b _a0 = b _b0 ".

In addition, it is defined as follows.
The number of bits with different labeling is defined as 1 when "b _a3 ≠b _b3 and b _a2 =b _b2 and b _a1 =b _b1 and b _a0 =b _b0 ".
The number of bits with different labeling is defined as 1 when "b _a3 =b _b3 and b _a2 ≠b _b2 and b _a1 =b _b1 and b _a0 =b _b0 ".

The number of bits with different labeling is defined as 1 when "b _a3 =b _b3 and b _a2 =b _b2 and b _a1 ≠b _b1 and b _a0 =b _b0 ".
The number of bits with different labeling is defined as 1 when "b _a3 =b _b3 and b _a2 =b _b2 and b _a1 =b _b1 and b _a0 ≠b _b0 ".
The number of bits with different labeling is defined as 2 when "b _a3 ≠b _b3 and _ba2 ≠b _b2 and _{ba1=b b1 and ba0} =b _b0 ".

When "b _a3 ≠b _b3 and b _a2 =b _b2 and b _a1 ≠b _b1 and b _a0 =b _b0 ", the number of bits with different labeling is defined as two.
When "b _a3 ≠b _b3 and b _a2 =b _b2 and b _a1 =b _b1 and b _a0 ≠b _b0 ", the number of bits with different labeling is defined as two.
The number of bits with different labeling is defined as 2 when "b _a3 =b _b3 and b _a2 ≠b _b2 and b _a1 ≠b _b1 and b _a0 = b _b0 ".

The number of bits with different labeling is defined as 2 when "b _a3 =b _b3 and b _a2 ≠b _b2 and b _a1 =b _b1 and b _a0 ≠b _b0 ".
The number of bits with different labeling is defined as 2 when "b _a3 =b _b3 and b _a2 =b _b2 and b _a1 ≠b _b1 and b _a0 ≠b _b0 ".

When "b _a3 =b _b3 and b _a2 ≠b _b2 and b _a1 ≠b _b1 and b _a0 ≠b _b0 ", the number of bits with different labeling is defined as 3.

When "b _a3 ≠b _b3 and _ba2 =b _b2 and _ba1 ≠b _b1 and _ba0 ≠b _b0 ", the number of bits with different labeling is defined as 3.
When "b _a3 ≠b _b3 and _ba2 ≠b _b2 and _{ba1=b b1 and ba0} ≠b _b0 ", the number of bits with different labeling is defined as 3.
The number of bits with different labeling is defined as 3 when "b _a3 ≠b _b3 and _ba2 ≠b _b2 and _ba1 ≠b _b1 and _ba0 =b _b0 ".

When "b _a3 ≠b _b3 and _ba2 ≠b _b2 and _ba1 ≠b _b1 and _ba0 ≠b _b0 ", the number of bits with different labeling is defined as four.

Then define the group. Signal point 1-1, signal point 1-2, signal point 1-3, signal point 1-4, signal point 2-1, signal point 2-2, Signal point 2-3, Signal point 2-4, Signal point 3-1, Signal point 3-2, Signal point 3-3, Signal point 3-4, Signal point 4-1, Signal point 4-2, Signal point At 4-3 and 4-4, "signal point 1-1, signal point 1-2, signal point 1-3, and signal point 1-4 are defined as group 1". Similarly, "signal point 2-1, signal point 2-2, signal point 2-3, signal point 2-4 group 2", "signal point 3-1, signal point 3-2, signal point 3-3 , signal points 3-4 as group 3", and "signal points 4-1, 4-2, 4-3, and 4-4 as group 4".

Then, the following two conditions are given.
<Condition 7>:
X is 1,2,3,4, and for all X that satisfy this, the following holds.
The number of different bits in the labeling of signal point X-1 and signal point X-2 is 1
The number of different bits in the labeling of signal point X-2 and signal point X-3 is 1
The number of different bits in the labeling of signal point X-3 and signal point X-4 is 1

<Condition 8>:
u is 1,2,3 and v is 1,2,3,4, and for all u and all v satisfying this, the following holds.
The number of different bits in the labeling of signal point uv and signal point (u+1)-v is 1

By satisfying the above, since the number of bits in which labeling differs from signal points at close distances for each signal point in the in-phase I-quadrature Q plane is small, the receiving apparatus may be able to obtain high data reception quality. becomes higher. This increases the possibility that high data reception quality can be obtained when the receiving apparatus performs iterative detection.

[(4,8,4)16APSK signal point arrangement]

Although the signal point arrangement and labeling on the in-phase I-quadrature Q plane of FIG. 30 have been described above, the method of signal point arrangement and labeling on the in-phase I-quadrature Q plane is not limited to this. For example, consider the following as the coordinates and labeling of each signal point of (4,8,4)16APSK on the IQ plane.

Coordinates of signal point 1-1[0000] on IQ plane: (cosθ×R ₃ ×cos(π/4)-sinθ×R ₃ ×sin(π/4),
sinθ×R3×cos(π/ ₄ )+cosθ×R3×sin(π/ ₄ ))
Coordinates of signal point 1-2 [0001] on IQ plane: (cosθ× _R2 ×cosλ-sinθ× _R2 ×sinλ, sinθ× _R2 ×cosλ+ cosθ× _R2 ×sinλ)
Coordinates of signal point 1-3 [0101] on IQ plane: (cosθ×R ₂ ×cos(－λ)-sinθ×R ₂ ×sin(－λ),
sinθ× _R2 ×cos(−λ)+ cosθ× _R2 ×sin(−λ))
Coordinates of signal points 1-4 [0100] on the IQ plane: (cosθ×R ₃ ×cos(-π/4)-sinθ×R ₃ ×sin(-π/4), sinθ×R ₃ ×cos(- π/ ₄ )+cosθ×R3×sin(-π/4))

Coordinates of signal point 2-1 [0010] on the IQ plane: (cosθ×R ₂ ×cos(-λ+π/2)-sinθ×R ₂ ×sin(-λ+π/2), sinθ×R ₂ ×cos(- λ+π/2)+cosθ× _R2 ×sin(−λ+π/2))
Coordinates of signal point 2-2 [0011] on the IQ plane: (cosθ× _R1 ×cos(π/4)-sinθ× _R1 ×sin(π/4),
sinθ× _R1 ×cos(π/4)+cosθ× _R1 ×sin(π/4))
Coordinates of signal point 2-3 [0111] on the IQ plane: (cosθ× _R1 ×cos(-π/4)-sinθ× _R1 ×sin(-π/4
), sinθ× _R1 ×cos(-π/4)+cosθ× _R1 ×sin(-π/4))
Coordinates of signal point 2-4 [0110] on the IQ plane: (cosθ× _R2 ×cos(λ－π/2)-sinθ× _R2 ×sin(λ－π/2), sinθ× _R2 ×cos (λ－π/2)+cosθ× _R2 ×sin(λ－π/2))

Coordinates of signal point 3-1 [1010] on the IQ plane: (cosθ× _R2 ×cos(λ+π/2)-sinθ× _R2 ×sin(λ+π/2), sinθ× _R2 ×cos(λ+π/2 ) + cosθ× _R2 ×sin(λ+π/2))
Coordinates of signal point 3-2 [1011] on the IQ plane: (cosθ× _R1 ×cos(3π/4)-sinθ× _R1 ×sin(3π/4), sinθ× _R1 ×cos(3π/4 )+ cosθ× _R1 ×sin(3π/4))
Coordinates of signal point 3-3 [1111] on the IQ plane: (cosθ× _R1 ×cos(-3π/4)-sinθ× _R1 ×sin(-3π/4), sinθ× _R1 ×cos(- 3π/4)+ cosθ× _R1 ×sin(-3π/4))
Coordinates of signal point 3-4 [1110] on IQ plane: (cosθ×R ₂ ×cos(－λ－π/2)-sinθ×R ₂ ×sin(－λ－π/2), sinθ×R ₂ ×cos(−λ−π/2)+cosθ×R ₂ ×sin(−λ−π/2))

Coordinates of signal point 4-1 [1000] on the IQ plane: (cosθ×R3×cos(3π/ ₄ ) _-sinθ ×R3×sin(3π/4), sinθ×R3×cos(3π/ ₄ )+ cosθ×R3×sin(3π/ ₄ ))
Coordinates of signal point 4-2 [1001] on the IQ plane: (cosθ× _R2 ×cos(π－λ)-sinθ× _R2 ×sin(π－λ), sinθ× _R2 ×cos(π－λ )+ cosθ× _R2 ×sin(π-λ))
Coordinates of signal point 4-3 [1101] on the IQ plane: (cosθ× _R2 ×cos(－π＋λ)-sinθ× _R2 ×sin(－π＋λ), sinθ× _R2 ×cos(－π＋λ)+cosθ ×R ₂ ×sin(−π+λ))
Coordinates of signal point 4-4 [1100] on IQ plane: (cosθ×R ₃ ×cos(-3π/4)-sinθ×R ₃ ×sin(-3π/4), sinθ×R ₃ ×cos(- 3π/4)+ cosθ×R3×sin( _-3π /4))

The unit of phase is radian. Therefore, the in-phase component I _n and the quadrature component Q _n of the normalized baseband signal are expressed as follows.

Coordinates of signal point 1-1[0000] on IQ plane: (I _n , Q _n )=(a _(4,8,4) ×cosθ×R ₃ ×cos(π/4)-
a _(4,8,4) ×sinθ×R3×sin(π/ ₄ ), a _(4,8,4) ×sinθ×R3×cos(π/ ₄ )+a _(4,8,4) ×cosθ×R3×sin(π/ ₄ ))
Coordinates of signal point 1-2 [0001] on IQ plane: (I _n , Q _n ) = (a _(4,8,4) ×cos θ ×R ₂ ×cosλ- a _(4,8,4) ×sin θ × _R2 ×sinλ,a _(4,8,4) ×sinθ× _R2 ×cosλ+a _(4,8,4) ×cosθ× _R2 ×sinλ
)
Coordinates of signal point 1-3[0101] on IQ plane: (I _n , Q _n )=(a _(4,8,4) ×cosθ×R ₂ ×cos(－λ)-
a _(4,8,4) ×sinθ× _R2 ×sin(－λ), a _(4,8,4) ×sinθ× _R2 ×cos(－λ)+a _(4,8,4) ×cosθ ×R ₂ ×sin(−λ))
Coordinates of signal points 1-4 [0100] on the IQ plane: (I _n , Q _n )=(a _(4,8,4) ×cosθ×R ₃ ×cos(-π/4)- a _{(4, 8,4)} ×sinθ×R3×sin(-π/ ₄ ),a _(4,8,4) ×sinθ×R3×cos(-π/ ₄ )+a _(4,8,4) ×cosθ ×R ₃ ×sin(-π/4))

Coordinates of signal point 2-1[0010] on IQ plane: (I _n , Q _n )=(a _(4,8,4) ×cos θ×R ₂ ×cos(-λ+π/2)- a _{(4, 8,4)} ×sinθ× _R2 ×sin(−λ+π/2), a _(4,8,4) ×sinθ× _R2 ×cos(−λ+π/2)+a _(4,8,4) ×cosθ ×R ₂ ×sin(−λ+π/2))
Coordinates of signal point 2-2 [0011] on the IQ plane: (I _n , Q _n ) = (a _(4,8,4) ×cos θ ×R ₁ ×cos(π/4)-
a _(4,8,4) ×sinθ× _R1 ×sin(π/4), a _(4,8,4) ×sinθ× _R1 ×cos(π/4)+a _(4,8,4) ×cosθ× _R1 ×sin(π/4))
Coordinates of signal point 2-3[0111] on IQ plane: (I _n , Q _n )=(a _(4,8,4) ×cosθ×R ₁ ×cos(-π/4)- a _{(4, 8,4)} ×sinθ× _R1 ×sin(-π/4),a _(4,8,4) ×sinθ× _R1 ×cos(-π/4)+a _(4,8,4) ×cosθ ×R ₁ ×sin(-π/4))
Coordinates of signal point 2-4 [0110] on IQ plane: (I _n , Q _n )=(a _(4,8,4) ×cosθ×R ₂ ×cos(λ－π/2)- a _{(4 ,8,4)} ×sinθ×R ₂ ×sin(λ－π/2), a _(4,8,4) ×sinθ×R ₂ ×cos(λ－π/2
)+a _(4,8,4) ×cosθ× _R2 ×sin(λ−π/2))

Coordinates of signal point 3-1[1010] on IQ plane: (I _n , Q _n )=(a _(4,8,4) ×cosθ×R ₂ ×cos(λ+π/2)- a _{(4,8 ,4)} ×sinθ× _R2 ×sin(λ＋π/2), a _(4,8,4) ×sinθ× _R2 ×cos(λ＋π/2)+a _(4,8,4) ×cosθ× _R2 ×sin(λ+π/2))
Coordinates of signal point 3-2[1011] on IQ plane: (I _n , Q _n )=(a _(4,8,4) ×cosθ×R ₁ ×cos(3π/4)- a _{(4,8 ,4)} ×sinθ×R ₁ ×sin(3π/4), a _(4,8,4) ×sinθ×R ₁ ×cos(3π/4)+ a _(4,8,4) ×cosθ×R ₁ ×sin(3π/4))
Coordinates of signal point 3-3[1111] on IQ plane: (I _n , Q _n )=(a _(4,8,4) ×cosθ×R ₁ ×cos(-3π/4)- a _{(4, 8,4)} ×sinθ× _R1 ×sin(-3π/4),a _(4,8,4) ×sinθ× _R1 ×cos(-3π/4)+a _(4,8,4)
×cosθ× _R1 ×sin(-3π/4))
Coordinates of signal point 3-4[1110] on IQ plane: (I _n , Q _n )=(a _(4,8,4) ×cosθ×R ₂ ×cos(－λ－π/2)- a _{( 4,8,4)} ×sinθ× _R2 ×sin(−λ−π/2), a _(4,8,4) ×sinθ× _R2 ×cos(−λ−π/2)+a _{(4, 8,4)} ×cosθ× _R2 ×sin(−λ−π/2))

Coordinates of signal point 4-1[1000] on IQ plane: (I _n , Q _n )=(a _(4,8,4) ×cosθ×R ₃ ×cos(3π/4)- a _{(4,8 ,4)} ×sinθ×R ₃ ×sin(3π/4), a _(4,8,4) ×sinθ×R ₃ ×cos(3π/4)+ a _(4,8,4) ×cosθ×R ₃ ×sin(3π/4))
Coordinates of signal point 4-2 [1001] on IQ plane: (I _n , Q _n )=(a _(4,8,4) ×cosθ×R ₂ ×cos(π－λ)- a _{(4,8 ,4)} ×sinθ× _R2 ×sin(π－λ), a _(4,8,4) ×sinθ× _R2 ×cos(π－λ)+ a _(4,8,4)
×cosθ× _R2 ×sin(π−λ))
Coordinates of signal point 4-3 [1101] on IQ plane: (I _n , Q _n )=(a _(4,8,4) ×cosθ×R ₂ ×cos(－π＋λ)- a _{(4,8, 4)} ×sinθ× _R2 ×sin(－π＋λ), a _(4,8,4) ×sinθ× _R2 ×cos(－π＋λ)+a _(4,8,4) ×cosθ× _R2 ×sin( -π+λ))
Coordinates of signal point 4-4[1100] on IQ plane: (I _n , Q _n )=(a _(4,8,4) ×cosθ×R ₃ ×cos(-3π/4)- a _{(4, 8,4)} ×sinθ×R3×sin( _-3π /4),a _(4,8,4) ×sinθ×R3×cos( _-3π /4)+a _(4,8,4)
×cosθ×R3×sin( _-3π /4))

Here, θ is the phase given on the in-phase I-orthogonal Q plane, and a _{(4, 8, 4)} is as shown in equation (26).

In addition, when forming symbols by (4,8,4)16APSK and (12,4)16APSK, taking the above as an example,
If implemented in the same manner as in Embodiment 1, one of the following transmission methods can be considered.
・In a symbol group where 3 or more (or 4 or more) symbols whose modulation scheme is either (12,4)16APSK or (4,8,4)16APSK are consecutive, (12,4)16APSK There is no portion where symbols are continuous, and there is no portion where (4,8,4)16APSK symbols are continuous.
・In the “symbol group of period M”, the number of symbols of (4,8,4)16APSK is 1 more than the number of symbols of (12,4)16APSK, that is, the number of symbols of (12,4)16APSK is N Yes, the number of symbols of (4,8,4)16APSK is N+1. (N is a natural number.) Then, in the "symbol group of period M", there is no place where two symbols of (4,8,4)16APSK are continuous, or (4,8,4)16APSK There is one place where two symbols are consecutive. (Therefore, there is no place where 3 or more symbols of (4,8,4)16APSK continue.)
・If the data symbol is either a (12,4)16APSK symbol or a (4,8,4)16APSK symbol, there are three (4,8,4)16APSK symbols in the continuous data symbol group. There is no place where there is more continuation.

Then, in Embodiments 1 to 4, (12,4)16APSK symbols and (8,8)16A
(8,8)16APSK symbols (e.g., transmission method, pilot symbol configuration method (Embodiment 2), receiver configuration, configuration of control information including TMCC, etc.) explained in terms of PSK symbols is replaced with (4,8,4)16APSK, even in the transmission method using the (12,4)16APSK symbols and the (4,8,4)16APSK symbols, from Embodiment 1 Embodiment 4 can be similarly implemented.

(Embodiment 9)
In Embodiment 8, the case where (4,8,4)16APSK symbols are used instead of (8,8)16APSK symbols in Embodiments 1 to 4 has been described. In the present embodiment, conditions regarding signal point arrangement for improving the reception quality of data in (4,8,4)16APSK explained in the ninth embodiment will be explained.

As described in Embodiment 8, FIG. 30 shows (4,8,4)16APSK
shows an arrangement example of 16 signal points of . At this time, the phase formed by the half line of Q=0 and I≧0 and the half line of Q=(tanλ)×I and Q≧0 is defined as λ (radian) (where 0 radian<λ<π/4 radians.)
In FIG. 30, 16 signal points of (4,8,4)16APSK are drawn with λ<π/8 radians.

In FIG. 31, 16 signal points of (4,8,4)16APSK are drawn with λ≧π/8 radians.
First, a circle with an intermediate size of radius R ₂ is defined by eight signal points existing in the "middle circle", that is, signal point 1-2, signal point 1-3, signal point 2-1, signal point 2-4, signal point 3-1, signal point 3-4, signal point 4-2, and signal point 4-3. Focusing on these eight signal points, in order to obtain high reception quality, it is possible to set λ to π/8 radians so that the same signal point arrangement as in 8PSK is obtained.

However, there are four signal points in the "outer circle" of the circle with the largest radius R ₃ , that is, signal point 1-1, signal point 1-4, signal point 4-1, and signal point 4-4. . In addition, there are four signal points in the "inner circle" of the circle with the smallest radius _R1 , that is, signal point 2-2, signal point 2-3, signal point 3-2, and signal point 3-3. . Focusing on the relationship between these signal points and the 8 signal points existing in the "middle circle",

<Condition 9>
λ<π/8 radians

(this is one condition for obtaining high data reception quality).

This point will be described with reference to FIGS. 30 and 31. FIG. In FIGS. 30 and 31, signal points 1-2 and 2-1 on the "middle circle" of the first quadrant, and signal points 1-1 and 2-1 on the "outer circle" and the "inner circle" of the first quadrant. Focus on the signal point 2-2 existing in . Note that the signal point 1-2, signal point 2-1, signal point 1-1, and signal point 2-2 in the first quadrant are focused on. The same discussion was made for the four signal points existing in the second quadrant, the four signal points existing in the third quadrant, and the four signal points existing in the fourth quadrant.

As can be seen from FIG. 31, when λ≧π/8 radians, signal points 1-2 and 2-1 existing on the "middle circle" are located on the "outer circle" signal point 1- The distance from 1 becomes shorter. As a result, resistance to noise is lowered, and the quality of data received by the receiver is lowered.
In the case of FIG. 31, attention was paid to the signal point _1-1 existing in the "outer circle" _, but signal point _2-2 existing in the "inner circle" Similarly, when λ≧π/8 radians, signal points 1-2 and 2-1 existing in the “middle circle” exist in the “inner circle”. The distance to the signal point 2-2 becomes shorter. As a result, resistance to noise is lowered, and the quality of data received by the receiver is lowered.

On the other hand, when λ<π/8 radians are set as shown in FIG. and signal point 1-2 and the distance between signal point 2-2 and signal point 2-1 can be set large, which is one of the conditions for obtaining high data reception quality.
From the above points, <Condition 9> is one of the important conditions for the receiving device to obtain high data reception quality.

Next, further conditions for the receiving device to obtain high data reception quality will be described.
In FIG. 32, attention is paid to signal points 1-2 and 2-2 in the first quadrant. Note that the signal points 1-2 and 2-2 in the first quadrant are focused on, so that the signal points 3-2 and 4-2 in the second quadrant and the signal points 3 in the third quadrant -3, signal point 4-3, and signal point 1-3 and signal point 2-3 in the fourth quadrant.

The coordinates of signal point 1-2 are (R ₂ cos λ, R ₂ sin λ), and the coordinates of signal point 2-2 are (R ₁ cos(
π/4), R ₁ sin(π/4)). At this time, the following conditions are given in order to increase the possibility that the receiving device can obtain high reception quality of data.

<Condition 10>
_R1sin (π/4)< _R2sinλ

Let α be the minimum Euclidean distance among the four signal points existing in the “inner circle”. (Euclidean distance between signal points 2-2 and 2-3, Euclidean distance between signal points 2-3 and 3-3, Euclidean distance between signal points 3-3 and 3-2, signal point 3- 2 and signal point 2-2 is α.)
Let β be the Euclidean distance between the signal points 1-2 and 1-3 among the eight signal points of the "middle circle". The Euclidean distance between signal points 2-1 and 3-1, the Euclidean distance between signal points 4-2 and 4-3, and the Euclidean distance between signal points 3-4 and 2-4 are also β. .

If <Condition 10> holds, then α<β holds.

Considering the above points, if both <Condition 9> and <Condition 10> hold, when considering the Euclidean distance obtained by extracting two different signal points out of the 16 signal points, any Even if two different signal points are extracted, the Euclidean distance is increased, which increases the possibility that the receiver can obtain high data reception quality.

However, even if both <Condition 9> and <Condition 10> are not satisfied, there is a possibility that the receiving apparatus can obtain high data reception quality. This is because the preferred conditions may differ depending on the distortion characteristics (for example, see FIG. 1) of the power amplifier of the transmission system included in the radio section 712 in the transmission apparatus shown in FIG.

In this case, considering the (4,8,4)16APSK signal point arrangement (coordinates of signal points) of in-phase I-quadrature Q described in Embodiment 8, in addition to <Condition 10>, the following conditions give.

The coordinates of signal point 1-2 are (R ₂ cos λ, R ₂ sin λ), and the coordinates of signal point 2-2 are (R ₁ cos(
π/4), R ₁ sin(π/4)). Then we give the following conditions:
<Condition 11>
_R1sin (π/4)≠ _R2sinλ

The coordinates of signal point 1-1 are (R ₃ cos(π/4), R ₃ sin(π/4)), and the coordinates of signal point 1-2 are (R ₂ cosλ, R ₂ sinλ). . Then we give the following conditions:
<Condition 12>
_R2cosλ ≠ _R3cos (π/4)

Then, consider the following nine (4,8,4)16APSK.
[1] <Condition 10> is satisfied for the (4,8,4)16APSK signal point arrangement (coordinates of signal points) of in-phase I-quadrature Q described in the eighth embodiment. (However, R ₁ <R ₂ <R ₃ )
[2] <Condition 11> is satisfied with respect to the (4,8,4)16APSK signal point arrangement (coordinates of signal points) of in-phase I-quadrature Q described in the eighth embodiment. (However, R ₁ <R ₂ <R ₃ )
[3] <Condition 12> is satisfied with respect to the (4,8,4)16APSK signal point arrangement (coordinates of signal points) of in-phase I-quadrature Q described in the eighth embodiment. (However, R ₁ <R ₂ <R ₃ )

[4] <Condition 9> and <Condition 10> are satisfied with respect to the (4,8,4)16APSK signal point arrangement (coordinates of the signal points) of the in-phase I-quadrature Q described in the eighth embodiment. (However, R ₁ <R ₂ <R ₃ ) [5] For the in-phase I-quadrature Q (4,8,4)16APSK signal point arrangement (coordinates of the signal points) described in the eighth embodiment, <Condition 9> and <Condition 11> are satisfied. (However, R ₁ <R ₂ <R ₃ ) [6] For the in-phase I-quadrature Q (4,8,4)16APSK signal point arrangement (coordinates of the signal points) described in the eighth embodiment, <Condition 9> and <Condition 12> are satisfied. (However, R ₁ <R ₂ <R ₃ )

[7] For the (4,8,4)16APSK signal point arrangement (coordinates of signal points) of in-phase I-quadrature Q described in Embodiment 8, <Condition 10> is satisfied, and λ=π/12 radians. (However, R ₁ <R ₂ <R ₃ )
[8] For the (4,8,4)16APSK signal point arrangement (coordinates of signal points) of in-phase I-quadrature Q described in Embodiment 8, <Condition 11> is satisfied, and λ=π/12 radians. (However, R ₁ <R ₂ <R ₃ )
[9] For the (4,8,4)16APSK signal point arrangement (coordinates of signal points) of in-phase I-quadrature Q described in Embodiment 8, <Condition 12> is satisfied, and λ=π/12 radians. (However, R ₁ <R ₂ <R ₃ )

These nine (4,8,4)16APSK in-phase I-quadrature Q signal point constellations (coordinates of signal points) are the NU-16QAM in-phase I-quadrature Q signal point constellations described in the seventh embodiment. (Coordinates of signal points) is a different signal point arrangement, which is a signal point arrangement unique to this embodiment.

Further, consider the following nine (4,8,4)16APSKs.

[10] For the in-phase I-quadrature Q (4,8,4)16APSK signal point arrangement (coordinates of the signal points) described in Embodiment 8, <Condition 10> is satisfied, and <Condition 7>> and <Condition 8> are satisfied. (However, R ₁ <R ₂ <R ₃ )
[11] For the in-phase I-quadrature Q (4,8,4)16APSK signal point arrangement (coordinates of the signal points) described in Embodiment 8, <Condition 11> is satisfied, and <Condition 7 > and <Condition 8> are satisfied.
(However, R ₁ <R ₂ <R ₃ )
[12] With respect to the in-phase I-quadrature Q (4,8,4)16APSK signal point arrangement (coordinates of the signal points) described in Embodiment 8, <Condition 12> is satisfied, and <Condition 7 > and <Condition 8> are satisfied. (However, R ₁ <R ₂ <R ₃ )

[13] For the in-phase I-quadrature Q (4,8,4)16APSK signal point arrangement (coordinates of the signal points) described in Embodiment 8, <Condition 9> and <Condition 10> are satisfied, Moreover, <Condition 7> and <Condition 8> are satisfied. (However, R ₁ <R ₂ <R ₃ )
[14] Satisfy <Condition 9> and <Condition 11> with respect to the (4,8,4)16APSK signal point arrangement (coordinates of signal points) of in-phase I-quadrature Q described in Embodiment 8, Moreover, <Condition 7> and <Condition 8> are satisfied. (However, R ₁ <R ₂ <R ₃ )
[15] For the in-phase I-quadrature Q (4,8,4)16APSK signal point arrangement (coordinates of the signal points) described in Embodiment 8, <Condition 9> and <Condition 12> are satisfied, Moreover, <Condition 7> and <Condition 8> are satisfied. (However, R ₁ <R ₂ <R ₃ )

[16] With respect to the in-phase I-quadrature Q (4,8,4)16APSK signal point arrangement (coordinates of the signal points) described in Embodiment 8, <Condition 10> is satisfied, and λ=π/12 radian and satisfy <Condition 7> and <Condition 8>. (However, R ₁ <R ₂ <R ₃ )
[17] For the (4,8,4)16APSK signal point arrangement (coordinates of signal points) of in-phase I-quadrature Q described in Embodiment 8, <Condition 11> is satisfied, and λ=π/12 radian and satisfy <Condition 7> and <Condition 8>. (However, R ₁ <R ₂ <R ₃ )
[18] With respect to the in-phase I-quadrature Q (4,8,4)16APSK signal point arrangement (coordinates of the signal points) described in Embodiment 8, <Condition 12> is satisfied, and λ=π/12 radian and satisfy <Condition 7> and <Condition 8>. (However, R ₁ <R ₂ <R ₃ )

As described above, in the in-phase I-quadrature Q plane, since the number of bits in which labeling differs from signal points at a short distance for each signal point is small, the possibility that the receiving apparatus can obtain high data reception quality increases. . This increases the possibility that high data reception quality can be obtained when the receiving apparatus performs iterative detection.

(Embodiment 10)
In Embodiments 1 to 4, in a transmission frame, a method of switching between (12,4)16APSK symbols and (8,8)16APSK symbols, a pilot symbol configuration method associated therewith, and TMCC are included. A method of configuring control information and the like have been described. Then, in Embodiment 7, a method using NU-16QAM instead of (8, 8) 16APSK for Embodiments 1 to 4, and in Embodiment 8, Embodiment 1 to Embodiment 1 for form 4 of (8,8)16APSK
A method using (4,8,4)16APSK instead of is described.
In Embodiment 9, in contrast to Embodiments 1 to 4, in a method using (4,8,4)16APSK instead of (8,8)16APSK, a receiving apparatus can achieve good data reception quality. (4,8,4)16APSK constellations to obtain are described.

For example, in a situation such as satellite broadcasting where the distortion characteristics of the transmission system power amplifier included in the radio unit 712 in the transmission apparatus shown in FIG. (4,8,4)16APSK has better signal point arrangement and labeling than (12,4)16APSK. Therefore, there is a high possibility that high data reception quality can be obtained in the receiving device.
In the present embodiment, this point, that is, a transmission method capable of designating (4,8,4)16APSK as the data symbol modulation scheme will be described.

For example, in the case of the frame configuration of the modulated signal as shown in FIG. 11, (4,8,4)16APSK can be designated as the modulation scheme for Data #1 to Data #7920.
Therefore, in FIG. 11, the time on the horizontal axis is "first symbol, second symbol, third symbol, . . . , 135th symbol, 136th symbol". Then, (4,8,4)16APSK is used as the modulation scheme for "the 1st symbol, the 2nd symbol, the 3rd symbol, ..., the 135th symbol, the 136th symbol". can be specified.

One of the features at this time is that "two or more (4,8,4)16APSK symbols are consecutive". Note that (4,8,4)16APSK symbols that are consecutive for two or more symbols are
For example, when a single carrier transmission system is used, they are continuous in the time axis direction. (See FIG. 33) In addition, when using a multi-carrier transmission system such as an OFDM (Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing) system, two or more consecutive (4, 8, 4) 16APSK symbols are (see FIG. 33), or may be continuous in the direction of the frequency axis (see FIG. 34).

FIG. 33 shows an example of arrangement of symbols when the horizontal axis is time, with (4,8,4)16APSK symbols at time #1, (4,8,4)16APSK symbols at time #2, (4,8,4)16APSK symbols, . . . are placed at time #3.
FIG. 34 shows an example of arrangement of symbols when the horizontal axis is frequency, where (4,8,4)16APSK symbols are used for carrier #1, (4,8,4)16APSK symbols are used for carrier #2, (4,8,4)16APSK symbols, . . . are arranged on carrier #3.

Further, FIGS. 35 and 36 show an example of "two or more (4,8,4)16APSK symbols continue".
FIG. 35 shows an example of arrangement of symbols when the horizontal axis is time, time #1 is other symbols, time #2 is (4,8,4)16APSK symbols, time #3 is (4, 8,4)16APSK symbols, (4,8,4)16APSK symbols at time #4, other symbols at time #5, and so on. The other symbols may be any symbols such as pilot symbols, symbols for transmitting control information, reference symbols, and symbols for frequency or time synchronization.

FIG. 36 shows an example of arrangement of symbols when the horizontal axis is frequency, carrier #1 is another symbol, carrier #2 is (4,8,4)16APSK symbols, carrier #3 is (4, 8,4)16APSK symbols, (4,8,4)16APSK symbols on carrier #4, other symbols on carrier #5, and so on. The other symbols may be any symbols such as pilot symbols, symbols for transmitting control information, reference symbols, and symbols for frequency or time synchronization.

The (4,8,4)16APSK symbols may be symbols for transmitting data, or may be pilot symbols described in Embodiment 2.
In the case of symbols for transmitting data, (4, 8, 4) 16APSK mapping described in Embodiment 8 is performed from 4-bit data b3, b2, b1, b0, and the in-phase component of the baseband signal and You will get the orthogonal components.

As described above, even if the data symbol modulation scheme is (4,8,4)16APSK, the PAPR is small and intersymbol interference is less likely to occur. 8, 4) 16APSK has better signal point arrangement and labeling, so there is a high possibility that high data reception quality can be obtained in the receiving apparatus.

At this time, by using the signal point arrangement described in Embodiment 9 for (4,8,4)16APSK, the possibility of obtaining higher data reception quality increases. Specific examples are as follows.
[1] <Condition 10> is satisfied for the (4,8,4)16APSK signal point arrangement (coordinates of signal points) of in-phase I-quadrature Q described in the eighth embodiment. (However, R ₁ <R ₂ <R ₃ )
[2] <Condition 11> is satisfied with respect to the (4,8,4)16APSK signal point arrangement (coordinates of signal points) of in-phase I-quadrature Q described in the eighth embodiment. (However, R ₁ <R ₂ <R ₃ )
[3] <Condition 12> is satisfied with respect to the (4,8,4)16APSK signal point arrangement (coordinates of signal points) of in-phase I-quadrature Q described in the eighth embodiment. (However, R ₁ <R ₂ <R ₃ )

[4] <Condition 9> and <Condition 10> are satisfied with respect to the (4,8,4)16APSK signal point arrangement (coordinates of the signal points) of the in-phase I-quadrature Q described in the eighth embodiment. (However, R ₁ <R ₂ <R ₃ ) [5] For the in-phase I-quadrature Q (4,8,4)16APSK signal point arrangement (coordinates of the signal points) described in the eighth embodiment, <Condition 9> and <Condition 11> are satisfied. (However, R ₁ <R ₂ <R ₃ ) [6] For the in-phase I-quadrature Q (4,8,4)16APSK signal point arrangement (coordinates of the signal points) described in the eighth embodiment, <Condition 9> and <Condition 12> are satisfied. (However, R ₁ <R ₂ <R ₃ )

[7] For the (4,8,4)16APSK signal point arrangement (coordinates of signal points) of in-phase I-quadrature Q described in Embodiment 8, <Condition 10> is satisfied, and λ=π/12 radians. (However, R ₁ <R ₂ <R ₃ )
[8] For the (4,8,4)16APSK signal point arrangement (coordinates of signal points) of in-phase I-quadrature Q described in Embodiment 8, <Condition 11> is satisfied, and λ=π/12 radians. (However, R ₁ <R ₂ <R ₃ )
[9] For the (4,8,4)16APSK signal point arrangement (coordinates of signal points) of in-phase I-quadrature Q described in Embodiment 8, <Condition 12> is satisfied, and λ=π/12 radians. (However, R ₁ <R ₂ <R ₃ )

[10] For the in-phase I-quadrature Q (4,8,4)16APSK signal point arrangement (coordinates of the signal points) described in Embodiment 8, <Condition 10> is satisfied, and <Condition 7>> and <Condition 8> are satisfied. (However, R ₁ <R ₂ <R ₃ )
[11] For the in-phase I-quadrature Q (4,8,4)16APSK signal point arrangement (coordinates of the signal points) described in Embodiment 8, <Condition 11> is satisfied, and <Condition 7 > and <Condition 8> are satisfied. (However, R ₁ <R ₂ <R ₃ )
[12] With respect to the in-phase I-quadrature Q (4,8,4)16APSK signal point arrangement (coordinates of the signal points) described in Embodiment 8, <Condition 12> is satisfied, and <Condition 7 > and <Condition 8> are satisfied. (However, R ₁ <R ₂ <R ₃ )

[13] For the in-phase I-quadrature Q (4,8,4)16APSK signal point arrangement (coordinates of the signal points) described in Embodiment 8, <Condition 9> and <Condition 10> are satisfied, Moreover, <Condition 7> and <Condition 8> are satisfied. (However, R ₁ <R ₂ <R ₃ )
[14] Satisfy <Condition 9> and <Condition 11> with respect to the (4,8,4)16APSK signal point arrangement (coordinates of signal points) of in-phase I-quadrature Q described in Embodiment 8, Moreover, <Condition 7> and <Condition 8> are satisfied. (However, R ₁ <R ₂ <R ₃ )
[15] For the in-phase I-quadrature Q (4,8,4)16APSK signal point arrangement (coordinates of the signal points) described in Embodiment 8, <Condition 9> and <Condition 12> are satisfied, Moreover, <Condition 7> and <Condition 8> are satisfied. (However, R ₁ <R ₂ <R ₃ )

[16] With respect to the in-phase I-quadrature Q (4,8,4)16APSK signal point arrangement (coordinates of the signal points) described in Embodiment 8, <Condition 10> is satisfied, and λ=π/12 radians, and <Condition 7>
and <Condition 8> are satisfied. (However, R ₁ <R ₂ <R ₃ )
[17] For the (4,8,4)16APSK signal point arrangement (coordinates of signal points) of in-phase I-quadrature Q described in Embodiment 8, <Condition 11> is satisfied, and λ=π/12 radian and satisfy <Condition 7> and <Condition 8>. (However, R ₁ <R ₂ <R ₃ )
[18] With respect to the in-phase I-quadrature Q (4,8,4)16APSK signal point arrangement (coordinates of the signal points) described in Embodiment 8, <Condition 12> is satisfied, and λ=π/12 radian and satisfy <Condition 7> and <Condition 8>. (However, R ₁ <R ₂ <R ₃ )

[19] <Condition 9> and <Condition 10> are satisfied with respect to the (4,8,4)16APSK signal point arrangement (coordinates of signal points) of in-phase I-quadrature Q described in the eighth embodiment. (However, R ₁ <R ₂ <R ₃ )

[20] satisfying <Condition 9> and <Condition 10> with respect to the (4,8,4)16APSK signal point arrangement (coordinates of signal points) of in-phase I-quadrature Q described in Embodiment 8; Moreover, <Condition 7> and <Condition 8> are satisfied. (However, R ₁ <R ₂ <R ₃ )


(Embodiment 11)
<Example of pilot symbol>
This embodiment will explain a configuration example of a pilot symbol in the transmission scheme (data symbol modulation scheme is (4,8,4)16APSK) explained in the above tenth embodiment.

Note that the configuration of the transmitting apparatus in this embodiment is the same as that described in Embodiment 1, so description thereof will be omitted. (However, (4,8,4)16APSK will be used instead of (8,8)16APSK.)

Intersymbol interference occurs in the modulated signal due to the nonlinearity of the power amplifier of the transmitter. A receiving apparatus can obtain high data reception quality by reducing this intersymbol interference.

In this pilot symbol configuration example, in order to reduce intersymbol interference in the receiving device, the transmitting device, in the data symbol,

"2 or more (4,8,4)16APSK symbols are consecutive"

holds, the baseband signal corresponding to all signal points in the in-phase I-quadrature Q plane that ( _4,8,4 ) _16APSK can take (that is, the ₄ bits to be transmitted [ _b3b2b1b0 ] is a baseband signal corresponding to 16 signal points from [0000] to [1111]), and we propose a method of transmitting it as a pilot symbol. As a result, the receiving device can obtain in-phase I-quadrature Q
Since intersymbol interference can be estimated at all signal points on the plane, there is a high possibility that high data reception quality can be obtained.

Specifically, in order:
(4,8,4)16APSK Symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0000] of 16APSK,
(4,8,4)16APSK Symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0001] of 16APSK,
(4,8,4)16APSK Symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0010] of 16APSK,
(4,8,4)16APSK Symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0011] of 16APSK,
(4,8,4)16APSK Symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0100] of 16APSK,
(4,8,4)16APSK Symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0101] of 16APSK,
(4,8,4)16APSK Symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0110] of 16APSK,
(4,8,4)16APSK Symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0111] of 16APSK,
(4,8,4)16APSK Symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1000] of 16APSK,
(4,8,4)16APSK Symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1001] of 16APSK,
(4,8,4)16APSK Symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1010] of 16APSK,
(4,8,4)16APSK Symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1011] of 16APSK,
(4,8,4)16APSK Symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1100] of 16APSK,
(4,8,4)16APSK Symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1101] of 16APSK,
(4,8,4)16APSK Symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1110] of 16APSK,
(4,8,4)16APSK Symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1111] of 16APSK,
is transmitted as a pilot symbol (reference symbol).

The above features are
<1> ((4,8,4) Symbols corresponding to all signal points in the in-phase I-quadrature Q plane that 16APSK can take, that is,
(4,8,4)16APSK Symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0000] of 16APSK,
(4,8,4)16APSK Symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0001] of 16APSK,
(4,8,4)16APSK Symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0010] of 16APSK,
(4,8,4)16APSK Symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0011] of 16APSK,
(4,8,4)16APSK Symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0100] of 16APSK,
(4,8,4)16APSK Symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0101] of 16APSK,
(4,8,4)16APSK Symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0110] of 16APSK,
(4,8,4)16APSK Symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0111] of 16APSK,
(4,8,4)16APSK Symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1000] of 16APSK,
(4,8,4)16APSK Symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1001] of 16APSK,
(4,8,4)16APSK Symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1010] of 16APSK,
(4,8,4)16APSK Symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1011] of 16APSK,
(4,8,4)16APSK Symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1100] of 16APSK,
(4,8,4)16APSK Symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1101] of 16APSK,
(4,8,4)16APSK Symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1110] of 16APSK,
(4,8,4)16APSK Symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1111] of 16APSK,
, and the order of transmission may be any order.

Note that pilot symbols are not only symbols for estimating inter-symbol interference, but using pilot symbols, the receiver may estimate the radio wave propagation environment (channel estimation) between the transmitter and the receiver. and may also estimate the frequency offset.

Also, the method of transmitting pilot symbols is not limited to the above example. In the above description, the pilot symbols are composed of 16 symbols.
(4,8,4)16APSK Symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0000] of 16APSK,
(4,8,4)16APSK Symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0001] of 16APSK,
(4,8,4)16APSK Symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0010] of 16APSK,
(4,8,4)16APSK Symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0011] of 16APSK,
(4,8,4)16APSK Symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0100] of 16APSK,
(4,8,4)16APSK Symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0101] of 16APSK,
(4,8,4)16APSK Symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0110] of 16APSK,
(4,8,4)16APSK Symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0111] of 16APSK,
(4,8,4)16APSK Symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1000] of 16APSK,
(4,8,4)16APSK Symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1001] of 16APSK,
(4,8,4)16APSK Symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1010] of 16APSK,
(4,8,4)16APSK Symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1011] of 16APSK,
(4,8,4)16APSK Symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1100] of 16APSK,
(4,8,4)16APSK Symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1101] of 16APSK,
(4,8,4)16APSK Symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1110] of 16APSK,
(4,8,4)16APSK Symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1111] of 16APSK,
has the advantage of equalizing the number of occurrences of each symbol in .

(Embodiment 12)
<Signaling>
In this embodiment, in order to smoothly receive a transmission signal using the transmission method described in the tenth embodiment above on the receiving device side, configuration examples of various information signaled as TMCC information will be explained.

Note that the configuration of the transmitting apparatus in this embodiment is the same as that described in Embodiment 1, so description thereof will be omitted. (However, (4,8,4)16APSK will be used instead of (8,8)16APSK.)

FIG. 18 shows an image diagram of the frame structure of a transmission signal in advanced wideband satellite digital broadcasting. (However, the frame configuration of the advanced wideband digital satellite broadcasting is not illustrated accurately.) Since the details have been described in the third embodiment, the description will be omitted here.

Table 9 shows the structure of information on the modulation scheme. In Table 9, for example, when the 4 bits transmitted by the symbol for transmitting the modulation method of the transmission mode of the "transmission mode/slot information" of the "TMCC information symbol group" are "0001", "composed of data symbol group The modulation scheme for generating the symbols of the "slot to be transmitted" is π/2 shift BPSK (Binary Phase Shift Keying).

When the 4 bits to be transmitted by the symbol for transmitting the modulation method of the transmission mode of the "transmission mode/slot information" of the "TMCC information symbol group" are "0010", the symbol of the "slot composed of data symbol groups" The modulation method for generating is QPSK (Quadrature Phase Shift Keying).
When the 4 bits to be transmitted with the symbol for transmitting the modulation method of the transmission mode of the "transmission mode/slot information" of the "TMCC information symbol group" are "0011", the symbol of the "slot composed of data symbol groups" The modulation method for generating is 8PSK (8 Phase Shift Keying).

When the 4 bits to be transmitted with the symbol for transmitting the modulation method of the transmission mode of the "transmission mode/slot information" of the "TMCC information symbol group" are "0100", the symbol of the "slot composed of data symbol groups" The modulation scheme for generating is (12,4)16APSK.
When the 4 bits to be transmitted with the symbol for transmitting the modulation method of the transmission mode of the "transmission mode/slot information" of the "TMCC information symbol group" are "0101", the symbol of the "slot composed of data symbol groups" The modulation scheme for generating is (4,8,4)16APSK.

When the 4 bits to be transmitted with the symbol for transmitting the modulation method of the transmission mode of the "transmission mode/slot information" of the "TMCC information symbol group" are "0110", the symbol of the "slot composed of data symbol groups" The modulation scheme for generating is 32APSK (32 Amplitude Pha
se Shift Keying).
・・・

Table 10 shows the relationship between the coding rate of the error correcting code and the ring ratio when the modulation scheme is (12,4)16APSK. From R ₁ and R ₂ used to express the signal points on the IQ plane of (12,4)16APSK as described above, the ring ratio R ₍ 12,4) of (12,4)16APSK is defined as R _{( 12,4)} = R ₂ /R ₁ . In Table 10, for example, when the 4 bits transmitted by the symbol for transmitting the coding rate of the transmission mode of "transmission mode/slot information" of "TMCC information symbol group" are "0000", "data symbol group The code rate of the error correction code for generating the symbols of the "configured slot" is 41/120 (≈ 1/3), and the symbols for transmitting the modulation scheme of the transmission mode are (12, 4) 16APSK , it means that the (12,4)16APSK ring ratio R _(12,4) =3.09.

When the 4 bits transmitted by the symbol for transmitting the coding rate of the transmission mode of the "transmission mode/slot information" of the "TMCC information symbol group" are "0001", the "slot composed of data symbol group" The coding rate of the error correction code for generating symbols is 49/120 (≈2/5), and the symbols for transmitting the modulation scheme of the transmission mode are (12,4)16APSK. , it means that the (12,4)16APSK ring ratio R _(12,4) =2.97.

When the 4 bits transmitted by the symbol for transmitting the coding rate of the transmission mode of the "transmission mode/slot information" of the "TMCC information symbol group" are "0010", the "slot composed of the data symbol group" The coding rate of the error correction code for generating symbols is 61/120 (≈ 1/2), and the symbols for transmitting the modulation scheme of the transmission mode are (12,4)16APSK. , it means that the (12,4)16APSK ring ratio R _(12,4) =3.93.
・・・

Table 11 shows the relationship between the coding rate of the error correcting code and the radius/phase when the modulation method is (4,8,4)16APSK.
In Table 11, for example, when the 4 bits transmitted by the symbol for transmitting the coding rate of the transmission mode of "transmission mode/slot information" of "TMCC information symbol group" are "0000", "data symbol group The coding rate of the error correction code for generating the symbols of the "configured slot" is 41/120 (≈ 1/3), and the symbols for transmitting the modulation scheme of the transmission mode are (4, 8, 4 )16APSK, then (4,8,4)16APSK has radius R ₁ =1.00, radius R ₂ =2.00, radius R ₃ =2.20, and phase λ=π/12 radians. It means.

When the 4 bits transmitted by the symbol for transmitting the coding rate of the transmission mode of the "transmission mode/slot information" of the "TMCC information symbol group" are "0001", the "slot composed of data symbol group" The coding rate of the error correction code for generating symbols is 49/120 (≈2/5), and the symbols for transmitting the modulation scheme of the transmission mode are (4,8,4)16APSK. If shown, it would mean that the radius R ₁ =1.00, radius R ₂ =2.10, radius R ₃ =2.20 and phase λ=π/12 radians for (4,8,4)16APSK.

When the 4 bits transmitted by the symbol for transmitting the coding rate of the transmission mode of the "transmission mode/slot information" of the "TMCC information symbol group" are "0010", the "slot composed of data symbol group" The coding rate of the error correction code for generating symbols is 61/120 (≈1/2), and the symbols for transmitting the modulation scheme of the transmission mode are (4,8,4)16APSK. If shown, it would mean that the 4,8,4)16APSK radius R ₁ =1.00, radius R ₂ =2.20, radius R ₃ =2.30 and phase λ=π/10 radians.
・・・

<Receiving device>
Next, the operation of the receiver that receives the radio signal transmitted by transmitter 700 will be described with reference to the block diagram of the receiver in FIG.
Receiving apparatus 1900 in FIG. 19 receives radio signals transmitted by transmitting apparatus 700 at antenna 1901 . The reception RF 1902 performs processing such as frequency conversion and quadrature demodulation on the received radio signal and outputs a baseband signal.
Demodulation section 1904 performs processing such as root roll-off filtering, and outputs a filtered baseband signal.
Synchronization/channel estimation section 1914 receives the filtered baseband signal as input, and performs time synchronization, frequency synchronization, and channel estimation using, for example, "synchronization symbol group" and "pilot symbol group" transmitted by the transmitting apparatus. , outputs the estimated signal.
Control information estimation section 1916 receives the filtered baseband signal, extracts symbols including control information such as “TMCC information symbol group”, demodulates and decodes the symbols, and outputs a control signal.

It should be noted that what is important in this embodiment is to transmit the symbol for transmitting the information of the transmission mode/slot information of the "TMCC information symbol group", the "transmission mode modulation scheme", and the "transmission mode coding rate". The receiving device demodulates and decodes the symbols, and based on Tables 9, 10, and 11, information on the modulation scheme used by the "slot composed of data symbol groups", error correction code scheme ( For example, the coding rate of error correction code, etc.) information, and the modulation scheme used by the "slot consisting of data symbol groups" is (12, 4) 16APSK, (4, 8, 4) 16APSK , 32APSK, information on the ring ratio and radius/phase is generated and output by the control information estimator 1916 as part of the control signal.

Demapping section 1906 receives the filtered baseband signal, the control signal, and the estimated signal, and based on the control signal, determines the modulation scheme (or transmission method) used by the "slot consisting of data symbol groups". (In this case, if there is a ring ratio, radius, and phase, the ring ratio, radius, and phase are also determined.) Based on this determination, from the filtered baseband signal and estimated signal, the data symbol A log-likelihood ratio (LLR) of each bit included in is calculated and output. (However, instead of a soft decision value like LLR, a high decision value may be output, or a soft decision value instead of LLR may be output.)
Deinterleaving section 1908 receives log-likelihood ratios as input, accumulates them, performs deinterleaving (reordering of data) corresponding to the interleaving used by the transmitting apparatus, and outputs log-likelihood ratios after deinterleaving.

The error correction decoding unit 1912 receives the deinterleaved logarithmic likelihood ratio and the control signal as input, determines the error correction method used (code length, coding rate, etc.), and based on this determination, performs error correction decoding. to obtain the estimated information bits. In addition, when the error correction code used is the LDPC code, the decoding method includes belief propagation decoding (BP (Belief Propagation) decoding) such as sum-product decoding, Shuffled BP (Belief Propagation) decoding, and Layered BP decoding. etc. will be used.

The above is the operation when iterative detection is not performed. The following is a supplementary explanation of the operation when iterative detection is performed. Note that the receiving device does not necessarily need to perform iterative detection, and the receiving device does not have a part related to iterative detection described later, and performs initial detection and error correction decoding. It may be a receiving device.

When performing iterative detection, error correction decoding section 1912 outputs the log-likelihood ratio of each bit after decoding. (If only initial detection is performed, it is not necessary to output the log-likelihood ratio of each bit after decoding.)

Interleaving section 1910 interleaves (rearranges) the log-likelihood ratios of the decoded bits, and outputs the log-likelihood ratios after interleaving.

Demapping section 1906 performs iterative detection using the log-likelihood ratio after interleaving, the baseband signal after filtering, and the estimated signal, and outputs the log-likelihood ratio of each bit after iterative detection. .
After that, interleaving and error correction decoding operations are performed. Then, these operations are performed repeatedly. This increases the possibility of finally obtaining a good decoding result.

In the above description, symbols for transmitting the modulation scheme of the transmission mode of the "transmission mode/slot information" of the "TMCC information symbol group" and the transmission mode of the "transmission mode/slot information" of the "TMCC information symbol group" By obtaining the symbol for transmitting the coding rate, the receiving device can determine the modulation scheme, the coding rate of the error correction code, and the modulation scheme of 16APSK, 32APSK,
, the ring ratio, radius and phase can be estimated, and demodulation and decoding operations can be performed.

In the above description, the frame configuration of FIG. 18 was used, but the frame configuration to which the present invention is applied is not limited to this. Symbols used to transmit information on modulation schemes, information on error correction schemes (e.g., error correction code used, code length of error correction code, coding rate of error correction code, etc.) are present, the data symbols, the symbols for transmitting information on the modulation scheme, and the symbols for transmitting information on the error correction scheme may be arranged in any way in the frame. Also, symbols other than these symbols, such as preambles, symbols for synchronization, pilot symbols, reference symbols, etc., may exist in the frame.

In addition, as a method different from the above description, there is a symbol that conveys information about the ring ratio, radius and phase, and the transmitting device may transmit this symbol. Examples of symbols that convey information about ring ratio, radius and phase are shown below.

In Table 12, when "00000" is transmitted by the symbol transmitting information about the ring ratio, radius and phase, the data symbol becomes a symbol of "(12,4)16APSK ring ratio 4.00".
Also, it is as follows.
When "00001" is transmitted by a symbol transmitting information on ring ratio, radius and phase, the data symbol becomes a symbol of "(12,4)16APSK ring ratio 4.10".
When "00010" is transmitted by a symbol transmitting information on ring ratio, radius and phase, the data symbol becomes a symbol of "(12,4)16APSK ring ratio 4.20".
When "00011" is transmitted by the symbol transmitting information about the ring ratio, radius and phase, the data symbol becomes a symbol of "(12,4)16APSK ring ratio 4.30".

When "00100" is transmitted by a symbol transmitting information on ring ratio, radius and phase, the data symbol is "(4,8,4)16APSK radius R ₁ =1.00, radius R ₂ =2.00, radius R ₃ = 2.20, phase λ = π/12 radians.
When "00101" is transmitted by a symbol transmitting information on ring ratio, radius and phase, the data symbol is "(4,8,4)16APSK Radius R ₁ =1.00, Radius R ₂ =2.10, Radius R ₃ = 2.20, phase λ = π/12 radians.
When "00110" is transmitted by a symbol transmitting information on ring ratio, radius and phase, the data symbol is "(4,8,4)16APSK Radius R ₁ =1.00, Radius R ₂ =2.20, Radius R ₃ = 2.30, phase λ = π/10 radians.
When "00111" is transmitted by a symbol transmitting information on ring ratio, radius and phase, the data symbol is "(4,8,4)16APSK Radius R ₁ =1.00, Radius R ₂ =2.20, Radius R ₃ = 2
.30, phase λ=π/12 radians”.

Then, the receiving device can estimate the ring ratio, radius, and phase used in the data symbol by obtaining the symbol that transmits information about the ring ratio, radius, and phase, thereby demodulating the data symbol.・Decryption becomes possible.

Also, the symbol for transmitting the modulation scheme may include ring ratio, radius and phase information. Examples are shown below.

In Table 13, when "00000" is transmitted as a symbol for transmitting modulation scheme information, the data symbol is a symbol of "(12,4)16APSK ring ratio 4.00".
Also, it is as follows.
When "00001" is transmitted as a symbol for transmitting modulation scheme information, the data symbol is a symbol of "(12,4)16APSK ring ratio 4.10".
When "00010" is transmitted as a symbol for transmitting modulation scheme information, the data symbol is a symbol of "(12,4)16APSK ring ratio 4.20".
When "00011" is transmitted as a symbol for transmitting modulation scheme information, the data symbol is a symbol of "(12,4)16APSK ring ratio 4.30".

When "00100" is transmitted by the symbol transmitting the information of the modulation scheme, the data symbol is "(4,8,4)16APSK Radius R ₁ =1.00, Radius R ₂ =2.00, Radius R ₃ =2.20, Phase λ=π/12 radians” symbol.
When '00101' is transmitted by the symbol transmitting the information of the modulation scheme, the data symbol is '4,8,4)16APSK Radius R ₁ =1.00, Radius R ₂ =2.10, Radius R ₃ =2.20, Phase λ = π/12 radians” symbol.
When "00110" is transmitted by the symbol transmitting the information of the modulation scheme, the data symbol is "(4,8,4)16APSK Radius R ₁ =1.00, Radius R ₂ =2.20, Radius R ₃ =2.30, Phase λ=π/10 radians” symbol.
When "00111" is transmitted by the symbol transmitting the information of the modulation scheme, the data symbol is "(4,8,4)16APSK Radius R ₁ =1.00, Radius R ₂ =2.20, Radius R ₃ =2.30, Phase λ=π/12 radians” symbol.
When "11101" is transmitted by the symbol transmitting the information of the modulation scheme, the data symbol becomes the "8PSK" symbol.
When "11110" is transmitted by the symbol transmitting the information of the modulation scheme, the data symbol becomes a "QPSK" symbol.
When "11111" is transmitted by the symbol transmitting the information of the modulation scheme, the data symbol becomes a "π/2 shift BPSK" symbol.

Then, the receiving device can estimate the modulation scheme used in the data symbol, the ring ratio, and the radius/phase by obtaining the symbol that transmits the information of the modulation scheme. Demodulation and decoding become possible.

In addition, in the above explanation, an example including "(12,4)16APSK" and "(4,8,4)16APSK" was explained as a selectable modulation method (transmission method), but it is limited to this. In other words, other modulation schemes may be selectable.

(Embodiment 13)
In this embodiment, the order of generating data symbols will be described.
FIG. 18(a) shows an image diagram of the frame configuration. In FIG. 18(a), "symbol group #1", "symbol group #2", "symbol group #3", . . . At this time, each symbol group of "symbol group of #1", "symbol group of #2", "symbol group of #3", . . . ', 'pilot symbol group', 'TMCC information symbol group', and 'slot composed of data symbol group'.
Here, for example, "#1 symbol group", "#2 symbol group", "#3 symbol group", ... "#N-1 symbol group", "#N symbol group" A method of forming a data symbol group that collects "slots constituted by data symbol groups" in the symbol groups will be described.

For generation of data symbol groups collected in "slots composed of data symbol groups" in N symbol groups from "#(β×N+1) symbol groups" to "#(β×N+N) symbol groups" , establish rules. The rule will be described with reference to FIG.

Then, the (4,8,4)16APSK data symbol group in FIG.
). In addition, in FIG. 37, the horizontal axis is the symbol.

Figure 37(a):
When 32APSK data symbols exist and (12,4)16APSK data symbols do not exist, as shown in FIG. 37(a), "(4,8,4)16APSK There exists a data symbol of
Figure 37(b):
When (12,4)16APSK data symbols exist, as shown in FIG. 37(b), "(4,8,4)16APSK data symbol exists.

Figure 37(c):
When (12,4)16APSK data symbols exist, as shown in FIG. 37(c), "(4,8,4)16APSK data symbols" are followed by "(12,4)16APSK data symbols ” exists.

Either FIG. 37(b) or FIG. 37(c) may be used.

Figure 37(d):
When 8PSK data symbols exist and (12,4)16APSK data symbols do not exist, "(4,8,4)16APSK data symbols" are followed by "8PSK There exists a data symbol of

Figure 37(e):
When QPSK data symbols exist, 8PSK data symbols do not exist, and (12,4)16APSK data symbols do not exist, "(4,8,4 ) 16APSK data symbols” are followed by “QPSK data symbols”.

Figure 37(f):
When π/2-shifted BPSK data symbols exist, QPSK data symbols do not exist, 8PSK data symbols do not exist, and (12,4)16APSK data symbols do not exist, FIG. As shown in (f), "(4,8,4)16APSK data symbol" is followed by "π/2 shift BPSK data symbol".

When the symbols are arranged as described above, they are arranged in the order of the signals of the modulation scheme (transmission method) with the highest peak power, so there is an advantage that the receiver can easily perform AGC (Automatic Gain Control) control.

FIG. 38 shows an example of a configuration method of the "(4,8,4)16APSK data symbol" described above.
In which "(4,8,4)16APSK data symbol" of error correction code encoding rate X and "(4,8,4)16APSK data symbol" of error correction code encoding rate Y exist and and X >
It is assumed that the relationship Y holds.
At this time, "(4,8,4)16APSK data symbol" of the encoding rate Y of the error correcting code is followed by "(4,8,4)16APSK data symbol" of the encoding rate X of the error correcting code. to place

As shown in FIG. 38, "(4,8,4)16APSK data symbols" with an error correction code rate of 1/2 and "(4,8,4) data symbols with an error correction code rate of 2/3" 16APSK data symbols” and “(4,8,4) 16APSK data symbols” with a coding rate of 3/4 of the error correction code are assumed to exist. Then, from the above description, as shown in FIG. 38, "(4,8,4)16APSK data symbol" with an error correction code coding rate of 3/4 and " (4,8,4) 16APSK data symbols" and "(4,8,4) 16APSK data symbols" with the coding rate of the error correction code of 1/2 are arranged in this order.

(Embodiment A)
In this embodiment, even if the coding rate of the error correction code is a certain value (for example, the coding rate is set to K), the ring ratio (for example, (12, 4) 16APSK ring ratio) will be described. This system can contribute to, for example, the enhancement of pattern variations for switching modulation schemes, etc., thereby enabling the receiver to obtain high data reception quality by setting a suitable ring ratio. .

Note that the definition of the ring ratio (for example, the ring ratio of (12,4)16APSK) was defined before this embodiment, and the ring ratio may be called a "radius ratio" as another name. .

<Transmitting station>
FIG. 39 is an example of a transmitting station.

A transmission system A101 in FIG. 39 receives video data and audio data, and generates a modulated signal according to a control signal A100.
The control signal A100 designates the code length, coding rate, modulation method, and ring ratio of the error correction code.
The amplifier A102 receives a modulated signal, amplifies the input modulated signal, and outputs an amplified transmission signal A103. Transmission signal A103 is transmitted via antenna A104.
<Selection of ring ratio>
Table 14 shows examples of coding rates and ring ratios of error correction codes when the modulation scheme is (12,4)16APSK.

A control signal generator (not shown) generates a control signal A100 for indicating the values in Table 14 in accordance with the designation of a predetermined coding rate and ring ratio in the transmitting device. The transmission system A101 generates a modulated signal according to the coding rate and ring ratio designated by this control signal A100.
For example, in the transmitting device, when (12,4)16APSK is specified as the modulation scheme, the coding rate of the error correction code is specified as 41/120 (≈1/3), and the ring ratio is specified as 2.99, the ring ratio is Assume that 4-bit control information is "0000". If (12,4)16APSK is specified as the modulation method, the coding rate of the error correction code is 41/120 (≈ 1/3), and the ring ratio is 3.09, 4-bit control for the ring ratio Assume that the information is "0001".

At this time, the transmitting device transmits "4-bit control information regarding the ring ratio" as part of the control information.
Also, on the terminal side that receives the data (control information) including the 4-bit value (4-bit control information related to the ring ratio) in Table 14, demapping (for example, , the log-likelihood ratio of each bit) is performed, and data demodulation and the like are performed.

The transmission of this 4-bit value (4-bit control information about the ring ratio) can be performed using 4 bits in the "transmission mode/slot information" in the "TMCC information symbol group".
This Table 14 shows that "in the case where the symbol for transmitting the modulation scheme of the transmission mode is (12,4)16APSK, when the 4-bit value is '0000', 'data symbol group The code rate of the error correcting code for generating the symbols of the "configured slot" is 41/120 (≈1/3), and the ring ratio of (12,4)16APSK is R _(12,4) =2.99 becomes.

In addition, ``when the symbol for transmitting the modulation scheme of the transmission mode indicates that it is (12,4)16APSK, when the 4-bit value is ``0001'', ``composed of a data symbol group The coding rate of the error correcting code for generating the symbols of the "slot" is 41/120 (≈ 1/3), and the ring ratio of (12,4)16APSK is R <sub>(12,4)</sub> = 3.09." , indicates that
Further, ``when the symbol for transmitting the modulation scheme of the transmission mode indicates that it is (12,4)16APSK, when the 4-bit value is ``0010'', ``composed of a data symbol group The coding rate of the error correction code for generating the symbols of the "slot" is 41/120 (≈ 1/3), and the ring ratio of (12,4)16APSK is R _(12,4) = 3.19." , indicates that

In Table 14, three types of ring ratios are associated with each coding rate of a certain value, but this is only an example. That is, it is conceivable that a plurality of types of ring ratios are associated with each coding rate of a certain value. It is also conceivable to associate one type of ring ratio with the coding rate of some values, and associate a plurality of types of ring ratios with the coding rate of the remaining values.

<Receiving device>
A receiving apparatus compatible with the transmission method of this embodiment will be described.

The receiving apparatus A200 (of the terminal) in FIG. 40 receives the radio signal transmitted by the transmitting station in FIG. 39 and relayed by the satellite (relay station) from the transmitting station at the antenna A201. (The relationship between the transmitting station, the relay station, and the receiving device (terminal) will be described in detail in the next embodiment.)
The reception RFA 202 performs processing such as frequency conversion and quadrature demodulation on the received radio signal, and outputs a baseband signal.

The demodulator A204 performs processing such as root roll-off filtering, and outputs a filtered baseband signal.
Synchronization/channel estimation unit A214 receives the filtered baseband signal as input, and performs time synchronization, frequency synchronization, and channel estimation using, for example, "synchronization symbol group" and "pilot symbol group" transmitted by the transmitting device. , outputs the estimated signal.

The control information estimation unit A216 receives the filtered baseband signal as input, extracts symbols including control information such as "TMCC information symbol group", demodulates and decodes the symbols, and outputs a control signal. What is important in the present embodiment is that receiving apparatus A200 demodulates and decodes symbols that transmit information of "transmission mode/slot information" in "TMCC information symbol group". Then, the receiver A10 generates information specifying the coding rate and the ring ratio from the decoded 4-bit value (4-bit control information regarding the ring ratio) based on a table similar to Table 14 held therein. and output by the control information estimation unit A216 as part of the control signal.

The demapping unit A206 receives the filtered baseband signal, the control signal, and the estimated signal, and based on the control signal, determines the modulation scheme (or transmission method) used by the "slot consisting of data symbol groups". and ring ratio, and based on this determination, the Log-Likelihood Ratio (LLR) of each bit included in the data symbol is calculated from the filtered baseband signal and the estimated signal, and output. (However, instead of a soft decision value like LLR, a high decision value may be output, or a soft decision value instead of LLR may be output.)
The deinterleaving unit A208 receives the log-likelihood ratio and the control signal, accumulates them, performs deinterleaving (reordering of data) corresponding to the interleaving used by the transmission device, and outputs the log-likelihood ratio after deinterleaving. do.

The error correction decoding unit A212 receives the deinterleaved logarithmic likelihood ratio and the control signal as inputs, determines the error correction method used (code length, coding rate, etc.), and based on this determination, performs error correction decoding. to obtain the estimated information bits. In addition, when the error correction code used is the LDPC code, the decoding method includes belief propagation decoding (BP (Belief Propagation) decoding) such as sum-product decoding, Shuffled BP (Belief Propagation) decoding, and Layered BP decoding. etc. will be used. The above is the operation when iterative detection is not performed, but a receiver that performs iterative detection as described in the receiver of FIG. 2 may also be used.

(Embodiment B)
In this embodiment, even if the coding rate of the error correction code is set to a certain value (for example, the coding rate is set to K), the selection of the (12,4)16APSK ring ratio for each channel is required. I will explain how it can be done. In the following, (12,4)16APSK is taken as an example of a modulation scheme for selecting a ring ratio, but it is not limited to this.
(By setting a suitable ring ratio for each channel, the receiving apparatus can obtain high data reception quality.)
Figures 41-43 show a terrestrial transmitting station transmitting a transmission signal towards a satellite. FIG. 44 shows the frequency allocation of each modulated signal. 45 and 46 show examples of configurations of satellites (repeaters) that receive signals transmitted by ground transmitting stations and transmit modulated signals of the received signals to receiving terminals on the ground.

Note that the definition of the ring ratio (for example, the ring ratio of (12,4)16APSK) was defined before this embodiment, and the ring ratio may be called a "radius ratio" as another name. .

<Transmitting station>
The transmitting station in FIG. 41 is an example of a transmitting station that performs common amplification.

The N transmission systems B101_1 to B101_N in FIG. 41 each receive video data, audio data, and a control signal A100.
The control signal A100 designates the code length, coding rate, modulation method, and ring ratio of the error correction code for each channel. Assume that this modulation scheme specifies, for example, (12,4)16APSK.
Transmission systems B101_1 to B101_N generate modulated signals according to control signal A100.

Common amplifier B102 receives modulated signals #1 to #N, amplifies the input modulated signals, and outputs amplified transmission signal B103 containing modulated signals #1 to #N.
This transmission signal B103 is composed of N channel signals of modulated signals #1 to #N, and includes a "TMCC information symbol group" for each channel (each modulated signal), and this "TMCC information symbol group" is used for error correction. In addition to the code length, coding rate, and modulation scheme of the code, it contains information on the ring ratio.

Specifically, modulated signal #1 includes a "TMCC information symbol group" in modulated signal #1 (channel #1), and modulated signal #2 includes a "TMCC information symbol group" in modulated signal #2 (channel #2). . . , modulated signal #N includes “TMCC information symbol group” in modulated signal #N (channel #N).
Then, the transmission signal B103 is transmitted via the antenna B104.

The transmitting station in FIG. 42 is an example of a transmitting station that individually amplifies each channel transmission system.
The N amplifiers B201_1 to B201_N amplify the input modulated signals and output transmission signals B202_1 to B202_N. Transmission signals B202_1 to B202_N are transmitted via antennas B203_1 to B203_N.

The transmitting station in FIG. 43 is an example of a transmitting station that amplifies each transmission system of a channel individually, but transmits after mixing in a mixer.
Mixer B301 mixes the modulated signals after amplification output from amplifiers B201_1 to B201_N, and transmits mixed transmission signal B302 via antenna B303.

<Frequency Allocation of Each Modulation Signal>
FIG. 44 shows an example of frequency allocation of signals (transmission signals or modulated signals) B401_1 to B401_N. In FIG. 44, the horizontal axis is frequency and the vertical axis is power. As shown in FIG. 44, B401_1 indicates the position on the frequency axis of transmission signal #1 (modulation signal #1) in FIGS. B401_N indicates the position on the frequency axis of signal #2 (modulated signal #2), and B401_N indicates the position on the frequency axis of transmission signal #N (modulated signal #N) in FIGS. showing.

<Satellite>
In the satellite of FIG. 45, a receiving antenna B501 receives a signal transmitted by a transmitting station and outputs a received signal B502. Received signal B502 contains the components of modulated signal #1 to modulated signal #N in FIGS.
B503 in FIG. 45 is a wireless processing unit. It is assumed that the radio processing unit B503 includes radio processing B503_1 to B503_N.
The radio processing B503_1 receives the received signal B502, performs signal processing such as amplification and frequency conversion on the component of the modulated signal #1 in FIGS. Output signal #1.
Similarly, the radio processing B503_2 receives the received signal B502, performs signal processing such as amplification and frequency conversion on the components of the modulated signal #2 in FIGS. It outputs a later modulated signal #2.
・・・
The radio processing B503_N receives the received signal B502, performs signal processing such as amplification and frequency conversion on the components of the modulated signal #N in FIGS. Output signal #N.
The amplifier B504_1 receives the modulated signal #1 after signal processing, amplifies it, and outputs the amplified modulated signal #1.
Amplifier B504_2 receives modulated signal #2 after signal processing, amplifies it, and outputs modulated signal #2 after amplification.
・・・
Amplifier B504_N receives modulated signal #2 after signal processing, amplifies it, and outputs modulated signal #N after amplification.

Then, each amplified modulated signal is transmitted via antennas B505_1 to B505_N. (The transmitted modulated signal will be received by a terminal on the ground.)
At this time, the frequency allocation of signals transmitted by satellites (repeaters) will be described with reference to FIG.
44, B401_1 indicates the position on the frequency axis of transmission signal #1 (modulation signal #1) in FIGS. 41, 42 and 43, and B401_2 indicates the position in FIGS. , B401_N indicates the position on the frequency axis of transmission signal #2 (modulation signal #2) of FIG. 41, FIG. 42, and FIG. 43 on the frequency axis of transmission signal #N (modulation signal #N) showing the position. At this time, it is assumed that the frequency band being used is the α GHz band.

44, B401_1 indicates the position on the frequency axis of the modulated signal #1 transmitted by the satellite (repeater) in FIG. 45, and B401_2 indicates the modulated signal #2 transmitted by the satellite (repeater) in FIG. , B401_N indicates the position on the frequency axis of the modulated signal #N transmitted by the satellite (repeater) in FIG. At this time, it is assumed that the frequency band being used is the β GHz band.

The satellite in FIG. 46 differs from that in FIG. 45 in that the signals are mixed in the mixer B601 before being transmitted. That is, the mixer B601 receives the amplified modulated signal #1, the amplified modulated signal #2, . . . , the amplified modulated signal #N, and generates the mixed modulated signal. The modulated signal after mixing includes the modulated signal #1 component, the modulated signal #2 component, . . . , the modulated signal #N component. shall be the signal of

<Selection of ring ratio>
In the satellite system described with reference to FIGS. 41 to 46, a manner of selecting a (12,4)16APSK ring ratio (radius ratio) for each channel from channel #1 to channel #N will be described.

For example, it is assumed that the code length (block length) of the error correction code is X bits, and the coding rate A (for example, 3/4) is selected from a plurality of selectable coding rates.
In the satellite system of Figures 45 and 46, amplifiers B504_1, B504_2, . . . , B504_N has a small distortion (high linearity of input/output), even if the ring ratio (radius ratio) of (12,4)16APSK is uniquely determined, if it is determined to a suitable value, the (ground) terminal The (receiving device) can obtain high data reception quality.

Since the satellite system transmits modulated signals to terminals on the earth, amplifiers capable of obtaining high power are used. For this reason, amplifiers with large distortion (low input/output linearity) are used, and there is a high possibility that the distortion varies greatly among amplifiers (amplifiers B504_1, B504_2, . B504_N has different distortion characteristics (input/output characteristics)).

In this case, using the preferred (12,4)16APSK ring ratio (radius ratio) for each amplifier, that is, setting the preferred (12,4)16APSK ring ratio (radius ratio) for each channel, the terminal can obtain high data reception quality on each channel. The transmitting stations in FIGS. 41, 42, and 43 use the control signal A100 to achieve such settings.
Therefore, control information such as TMCC included in each modulated signal (each channel) includes information about the ring ratio of (12,4)16APSK. (This point is as described in the previous embodiment.)
Therefore, when the (terrestrial) transmitting stations in FIGS. 41, 42, and 43 use (12, 4) 16APSK as the modulation scheme for the data symbols of modulated signal #1, they use (12, 4) 16APSK ring ratio information is transmitted as part of the control information.
Similarly, the (terrestrial) transmitting stations in FIGS. 41, 42, and 43 use (12,4 ) Send the 16APSK ring ratio information as part of the control information.
・・・
Similarly, when the (terrestrial) transmitting stations in FIGS. 41, 42, and 43 use (12, 4) 16APSK as the modulation scheme for the data symbols of modulated signal #N, they use (12, 4 ) Send the 16APSK ring ratio information as part of the control information.

The coding rate of the error correcting code used in modulated signal #1, the coding rate of the error correcting code used in modulated signal #2, . . . , the coding rate of the error correcting code used in modulated signal #N may be the same.

<Receiver>
A receiving apparatus compatible with the transmission method of this embodiment will be described.

The receiving apparatus A200 (at the terminal) in FIG. 40 receives, at the antenna A201, the radio signal transmitted by the transmitting station in FIGS. The reception RFA 202 performs processing such as frequency conversion and quadrature demodulation on the received radio signal, and outputs a baseband signal.
The demodulator A204 performs processing such as root roll-off filtering, and outputs a filtered baseband signal.

Synchronization/channel estimation unit A214 receives the filtered baseband signal as input, and performs time synchronization, frequency synchronization, and channel estimation using, for example, "synchronization symbol group" and "pilot symbol group" transmitted by the transmitting device. , outputs the estimated signal.
The control information estimation unit A216 receives the filtered baseband signal as input, extracts symbols including control information such as "TMCC information symbol group", demodulates and decodes the symbols, and outputs a control signal. What is important in this embodiment is that receiving apparatus A200 demodulates and decodes symbols that transmit information in the "TMCC information symbol group". Then, the receiver A10 generates information specifying the code length of the error correction code, the coding rate, the modulation scheme, and the ring ratio information for each channel from the decoded value, and outputs the control information as part of the control signal. The estimation unit A216 outputs.

The demapping unit A206 receives the filtered baseband signal, the control signal, and the estimated signal, and based on the control signal, determines the modulation scheme (or transmission method) used by the "slot consisting of data symbol groups". and ring ratio, and based on this determination, calculate and output the log-likelihood ratio (LLR) of each bit included in the data symbol from the filtered baseband signal and estimated signal. (However, instead of a soft decision value like LLR, a high decision value may be output, or a soft decision value instead of LLR may be output.)
The deinterleaving unit A208 receives the log-likelihood ratio and the control signal, accumulates them, performs deinterleaving (reordering of data) corresponding to the interleaving used by the transmission device, and outputs the log-likelihood ratio after deinterleaving. do.

The error correction decoding unit A212 receives the deinterleaved logarithmic likelihood ratio and the control signal as inputs, determines the error correction method used (code length, coding rate, etc.), and based on this determination, performs error correction decoding. to obtain the estimated information bits. In addition, when the error correction code used is the LDPC code, the decoding method includes belief propagation decoding (BP (Belief Propagation) decoding) such as sum-product decoding, Shuffled BP (Belief Propagation) decoding, and Layered BP decoding. etc. will be used. The above is the operation when iterative detection is not performed, but a receiver that performs iterative detection as described in the receiver of FIG. 2 may also be used.

Note that the method of generating ring ratio information included in the control information is not limited to the embodiment described before this embodiment, and information related to the ring ratio may be transmitted in any way. .

(Embodiment C)
This embodiment describes signaling (method of transmitting control information) for notifying the terminal of the ring ratio (for example, the ring ratio of (12,4)16APSK).

The definition of the ring ratio (for example, the (12,4)16APSK ring ratio) was defined before the present embodiment, and the ring ratio may be called a "radius ratio" as another name. .
Such signaling may be done using bits contained in the "TMCC Information Symbol Group" described herein.

In the present embodiment, an example of a method of configuring a "TMCC information symbol group" will be described based on "Transmission system standard for advanced wideband satellite digital broadcasting ARIB STD-B44 Version 1.0".
In order for the transmitting station to notify the terminal of information about the ring ratio via a satellite (repeater), it involves the use of 3614 bits of "extended information" in the "TMCC information symbol group" described in FIG. is also conceivable. (This point is also described in "Transmission Method Standard for Advanced Broadband Satellite Digital Broadcasting ARIB STD-B44 Version 1.0".) This is shown in FIG.

The extension information in FIG. 47 is a field used for future TMCC information extension, and consists of a 16-bit extension identification and a 3598-bit extension area. In the "extension information" of TMCC in FIG. 47, when adopting "method A", all extension identifications are set to "0" (all 16 bits are zero), and all 3598 bits of the extension area are set to "1". .
When "method B" is adopted, it is assumed that it is time to extend the TMCC information, and all extension identifications take values other than "0", that is, values other than "0000000000000000". It should be noted that which of the methods A and B is adopted is determined by user setting, for example.

"Scheme A" is a transmission scheme (for example, satellite digital broadcasting) in which the ring ratio is determined when the coding rate of the error correcting code is set to a certain value. (The ring ratio is uniquely determined when the coding rate of the error correction code to be used is determined.)
"System B" is a transmission system (for example, satellite digital broadcasting) that can select a ring ratio to be used from a plurality of ring ratios when the coding rate of the error correcting code is set to a certain value.

Examples of signaling performed by the transmitting station will be described below with reference to FIGS. 48 to 52. In all examples, the following bits are commonly used for signaling.
d ₀ : Indicates the satellite broadcasting system.
c ₀ c ₁ c ₂ c ₃ : Indicates a table.
b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ : Indicates coding rate (sometimes also indicates ring ratio).
x ₀ x ₁ x ₂ x ₃ x ₄ x ₅ : Indicates the ring ratio.
y ₀ y ₁ y ₂ y ₃ y ₄ y ₅ : Indicates the difference in ring ratio.
Further details regarding the above bits are provided below.

The "encoding rate" described in FIGS. 48, 49, 50, 51, and 52 is the encoding rate of the error correction code, specifically 41/120, 49/ Numerical values of 120, 61/120, and 109/120 are described, but when these numerical values are expressed approximately, 41/120 ≈ 1/3, 49/120 ≈ 2/5, 61/120 ≈ 1/ 2, 109/120≈9/10.

<Example 1> to <Example 5> will be described below.

In the extension information of FIG. 47, if all extension identifications are set to "0" (all 16 bits are zero) and all 3598 bits of the extension area are set to "1", the above "method A" is selected.

First, a case where a transmitting device (transmitting station) transmits a modulated signal using "scheme A" will be described.
When the transmitting apparatus (transmitting station) selects (12,4)16APSK as the modulation scheme, the relationship between the coding rate of the error correcting code and the ring ratio of (12,4)16APSK is as follows.

Therefore, by setting the TMCC extension identification to all "0" (all 16 bits are zero) and all the 3598 bits of the TMCC extension area to "1" (the transmitting device transmits these values), " The receiver can discriminate that "system A" has been selected, and the information of the coding rate of the error correction code being used is transmitted as part of the TMCC. From this information, the receiving device can determine the ring ratio of (12,4)16APSK when using (12,4)16APSK as the modulation scheme.
Specifically, b ₀ , b ₁ , b ₂ , and b ₃ described above are used. The relationship between b ₀ , b ₁ , b ₂ , b ₃ and the coding rate of the error correction code is as follows.

As shown in Table 16, when the transmitting device (transmitting station) uses 41/120 as the coding rate of the error correction code, set (b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ )=(0000). Also, when using 49/120 as the coding rate of the error correcting code, set (b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ )=(0001), . . . Using 120 would set (b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ )=(1001). It then transmits b ₀ , b ₁ , b ₂ , b ₃ as part of the TMCC.

Therefore, the following table can be created.

As can be seen from Table 17,
When the transmitting device (transmitting station) sets (b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ )=(0000), the coding rate of the error correction code is 41/120, and (12,4)16APSK is used. , the ring ratio (radius ratio) is 3.09.
When the transmitting device (transmitting station) sets (b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ )=(0001), the coding rate of the error correction code is 49/120, and (12,4)16APSK is used. , the ring ratio (radius ratio) is 2.97.
When the transmitting device (transmitting station) sets (b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ )=(0010), the coding rate of the error correction code is 61/120, and (12,4)16APSK is used. , the ring ratio (radius ratio) is 3.93.
When the transmitting device (transmitting station) sets (b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ )=(0011), the coding rate of the error correction code is 73/120, and (12,4)16APSK is used. , the ring ratio (radius ratio) is 2.87.
When the transmitting device (transmitting station) sets (b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ )=(0100), the coding rate of the error correction code is 81/120, and (12,4)16APSK is used. , the ring ratio (radius ratio) is 2.92.
When the transmitting device (transmitting station) sets (b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ )=(0101), the coding rate of the error correction code is 89/120, and (12,4)16APSK is used. , the ring ratio (radius ratio) is 2.97.
When the transmitting device (transmitting station) sets (b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ )=(0110), the coding rate of the error correction code is 97/120, and (12,4)16APSK is used. , the ring ratio (radius ratio) is 2.73.
When the transmitting device (transmitting station) sets (b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ )=(0111), the coding rate of the error correction code is 101/120, and (12,4)16APSK is used. , the ring ratio (radius ratio) is 2.67.
When the transmitting device (transmitting station) sets (b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ )=(1000), the coding rate of the error correction code is 105/120, and (12,4)16APSK is used. , the ring ratio (radius ratio) is 2.76.
When the transmitting device (transmitting station) sets (b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ )=(1001), the coding rate of the error correction code is 109/120, and (12,4)16APSK is used. , the ring ratio (radius ratio) is 2.69.

Therefore, the transmitting device (transmitting station) is
・Set all TMCC extension identifiers to "0" (all 16 bits are zero) and set all 3598 bits of the TMCC extension area to "1" in order to notify that "method A" is used. .
• Transmit b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ in order to estimate the coding rate of the error correction code and the ring ratio of (12,4)16APSK.
will be implemented.

Next, a case where a transmitting device (at a transmitting station) transmits data using "scheme B" will be described.
As described above, when "method B" is adopted, it is assumed that it is time to extend the TMCC information, and all extension identifiers are values other than "0", that is, values other than "0000000000000000". . Here, as an example, when "0000000000000001" is transmitted as the extended identification, the transmitting device (of the transmitting station) transmits data using "method B".

Note that the 16-bit extended identification is d₁₅, d₁₄, d₁₃, d₁₂, d₁₁, d₁₀, d₉, d₈, d₇, d₆, d₅, d₄, d₃, d₂, d₁, d₀When using "Method B", (d₁₅, d₁₄, d₁₃, d₁₂, d₁₁, d₁₀, d₉, d₈, d₇, d₆, d₅, d₄, d₃, d₂, d₁, d₀)=(0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 1). (As mentioned above, when adopting "method B", (d₁₅, d₁₄, d₁₃, d₁₂, d₁₁, d₁₀, d₉, d₈, d₇, d₆, d₅, d₄, d₃, d₂, d₁, d₀) to a value other than (0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0), so (d₁₅, d₁₄, d₁₃, d₁₂, d₁₁, d₁₀, d₉, d₈, d₇, d₆, d₅, d₄, d₃, d₂, d₁, d₀)=(0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 1). )

As specific examples, <Example 1> to <Example 5> will be described below.

<Example 1>
In Example 1, in "method B", a plurality of types of (12,4)16APSK ring ratio tables are prepared, so that different ring ratios can be set for one coding rate.
As an example, a case will be described in which "the satellite broadcasting system is set to 'system B', the coding rate is 41/120, and the ring ratio of (12,4)16APSK is 4.00". (However, it is assumed that (12,4)16APSK is selected as the modulation method.)
As shown in FIG. 48, 16 types of tables from table 1 to table 16 are prepared.

Each table is associated with (b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ ), the coding rate of the error correction code, and the ring ratio of (12,4)16APSK described above.
For example, in Table 1, when the coding rate of error correction code for generating data symbols is 41/120 and the ring ratio of (12,4)16APSK is 3.09, (b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ )=(0000). Similarly, when the coding rate of the error correction code for generating data symbols is 49/120 and the ring ratio of (12,4)16APSK is 2.97, (b ₀
b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ )=(0001). . . . When the coding rate of the error correction code for generating data symbols is 109/120 and the ring ratio of (12,4)16APSK is 3.09, (b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ )= (1001) is set.
In Table 2, when the coding rate of the error correction code for generating data symbols is 41/120 and the ring ratio of (12,4)16APSK is 4.00, (b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ ) = (0000). Similarly, when the coding rate of the error correction code for generating data symbols is 49/120 and the ring ratio of (12,4)16APSK is 3.91, (b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ )= (0001) is set. . . . When the coding rate of the error correction code for generating data symbols is 109/120 and the ring ratio of (12,4)16APSK is 3.60, (b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ )= (1001) is set.
・・・
In Table 16, when the coding rate of the error correction code for generating data symbols is 41/120 and the ring ratio of (12,4)16APSK is 2.59, (b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ ) = (0000). Similarly, when the coding rate of the error correction code for generating data symbols is 49/120 and the ring ratio of (12,4)16APSK is 2.50, (b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ )= (0001) is set. . . , when the coding rate of the error correction code for generating data symbols is 109/120 and the ring ratio of (12,4)16APSK is 2.23, (b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ )= (1001) is set.

In Tables 1 to 16, although not described above, the encoding rates of error correction codes are 41/120, 49/120, 61/120, 73/120, 81/120, 89/120, 97/ ₁₂₀ , _101/120 , 105/120, and _109/120 are associated with the values of _b0b1b2b3 and the ring ratio of (12,4)16APSK.

Also, as shown in FIG. 48, it is assumed that the values of c ₀ c ₁ c ₂ c ₃ are associated with the table to be selected. When selecting table 1, set (c ₀ , c ₁ , c ₂ , c ₃ )=(0, 0, 0, 0), and when selecting table 2, set (c ₀ , c ₁ , c ₂ , c ₃ ) = ( _{0 , 0} , 0, ₁ ), . set.

Next, as an example, a method of setting "the satellite broadcasting system to 'system B', the coding rate to 41/120, and the (12,4)16APSK ring ratio to 4.00" will be described.
First, as described above, "method B" is to be selected, so d0 ₌ "1" is set.

Also, as shown in FIG. 48, the first row of Table ₂ has a coding rate of 41/120 and a ring ratio of (12,4) _16APSK of 4.00, so _{b0b1b2b3 =} "0000". do.
Therefore, the value c ₀ c ₁ c ₂ c ₃ ="0001" is used to indicate table 2 of the 16 types of tables 1-16.
Therefore, when a transmitting device (transmitting station) transmits data symbols with "satellite broadcasting system 'system B', coding rate 41/120, and (12,4)16APSK ring ratio 4.00", d ₀ ="1", b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ ="0000", c ₀ c ₁ c ₂ c ₃ ="0001" Send control information (part of TMCC information) together with data symbols do. However, as control information, it is necessary to transmit control information indicating that the modulation scheme of data symbols is (12,4)16APSK.

That is, in <Example 1>,
・For each coding rate of error correction code 41/120, 49/120, 61/120, 73/120, 81/120, 89/120, 97/120, 101/120, 105/120, 109/120 , b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ and the ring ratio of (12,4)16APSK are associated with each other.
- The transmitting device (transmitting station) transmits c ₀ c ₁ c ₂ c ₃ indicating the information of the table used.
By doing so, the transmitting device transmits the information of the (12,4)16APSK ring ratio used to generate the data symbols.

Note that the method of setting the ring ratio of (12,4)16APSK when the transmitting device (transmitting station) uses "scheme A" is as described before <Example 1>.

<Example 2>
Example 2 is a modification of <Example 1>.

Here, a case where the transmitting device (transmitting station) selects "scheme B" will be described. At this time, the transmitting device (transmitting station) selects "scheme B", so as shown in FIG. 49, it sets _d0= "1".
Then, the transmitting device (transmitting station) newly sets _z0 . When determining the ring ratio of (12,4)16APSK by the same method as "scheme A", set z ₀ =0. When z ₀ is set to 0, b ₀ , b ₁ , b ₂ , and b ₃ specify the coding rate of the error correction code based on Table 16, and from Table 15, the (12, 4) 16APSK ring The ratio will determine. (See Table 17)
When determining the ring ratio for (12,4)16APSK in a manner similar to Example 1, set z ₀ =1. At this time, instead of determining the ring ratio of (12,4)16APSK based on Table 15, the ring ratio of (12,4)16APSK is determined in the same procedure as in Example 1.

As an example, a case will be described where "the satellite broadcasting system is set to 'system B', the coding rate is 41/120, and the ring ratio of (12,4)16APSK is 4.00". (However, it is premised that (12,4)16APSK is selected as the modulation method, and z ₀ =1.)
As shown in FIG. 49, table 1, table 2, .

Each table is associated with (b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ ), the coding rate of the error correction code, and the ring ratio of (12,4)16APSK described above.
For example, in Table 1, when the coding rate of error correction code for generating data symbols is 41/120 and the ring ratio of (12,4)16APSK is 3.09, (b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ )=(0000). Similarly, when the coding rate of the error correction code for generating data symbols is 49/120 and the ring ratio of (12,4)16APSK is 2.97, (b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ )= (0001) is set. . . . When the coding rate of the error correction code for generating data symbols is 109/120 and the ring ratio of (12,4)16APSK is 3.09, (b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ )= (1001) is set.
In Table 2, when the coding rate of the error correction code for generating data symbols is 41/120 and the ring ratio of (12,4)16APSK is 4.00, (b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ ) = (0000). Similarly, when the coding rate of the error correction code for generating data symbols is 49/120 and the ring ratio of (12,4)16APSK is 3.91, (b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ )= (0001) is set. . . . When the coding rate of the error correction code for generating data symbols is 109/120 and the ring ratio of (12,4)16APSK is 3.60, (b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ )= (1001) is set.
・・・
In Table 16, when the coding rate of the error correction code for generating data symbols is 41/120 and the ring ratio of (12,4)16APSK is 2.59, (b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ ) = (0000). Similarly, when the coding rate of the error correction code for generating data symbols is 49/120 and the ring ratio of (12,4)16APSK is 2.50, (b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ )= (0001) is set. . . , when the coding rate of the error correction code for generating data symbols is 109/120 and the ring ratio of (12,4)16APSK is 2.23, (b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ )= (1001) is set.

In Tables 1 to 16, although not described above, the encoding rates of error correction codes are 41/120, 49/120, 61/120, 73/120, 81/120, 89/120, 97/ ₁₂₀ , _101/120 , 105/120, and _109/120 are associated with the values of _b0b1b2b3 and the ring ratio of (12,4)16APSK.

Also, as shown in FIG. 49, it is assumed that the values of c ₀ c ₁ c ₂ c ₃ are associated with the table to be selected. When selecting table 1, set (c ₀ , c ₁ , c ₂ , c ₃ )=(0, 0, 0, 0), and when selecting table 2, set (c ₀ , c ₁ , c ₂ , c ₃ ) = ( _{0 , 0} , 0, ₁ ), . set.

Next, as an example, a method of setting "the satellite broadcasting system to 'system B', the coding rate to 41/120, and the (12,4)16APSK ring ratio to 4.00" will be described.

First, as described above, "method B" is to be selected, so d0 ₌ "1" is set. Also, set z ₀ =1.

Also, as shown in FIG. 49, since the first row of Table 2 has a coding rate of 41/120 and a ring ratio of (12,4)16APSK of 4.00, b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ ="0000". do.
Therefore, the value c ₀ c ₁ c ₂ c ₃ ="0001" is used to indicate table 2 of the 16 types of tables 1-16.

Therefore, when a transmitting device (transmitting station) transmits data symbols with "satellite broadcasting system 'system B', coding rate 41/120, and (12,4)16APSK ring ratio 4.00", d ₀ ="1", z ₀ = 1, b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ ="0000", c ₀ c ₁ c ₂ c ₃ ="0001" (a part of TMCC information) is data Transmit together with the symbol. However, as control information, it is necessary to transmit control information indicating that the modulation scheme of data symbols is (12,4)16APSK.

Note that the method of setting the ring ratio of (12,4)16APSK when the transmitting device (transmitting station) uses the "scheme A" is as described before <Example 1>.

<Example 3>
Example 3 is characterized in that signaling is performed by a value indicating the ring ratio.

First, as in <Example 1> and <Example 2>, the transmitting device (transmitting station) transmits a modulated signal by "method B", so d ₀ is set to ="1".
Then, as shown in FIG. 50, the values of x ₀ x ₁ x ₂ x ₃ x ₄ x ₅ are associated with the ring ratio of (12,4)16APSK. For example, as shown in FIG. 50, the transmitting device (transmitting station) sets (x ₀ , x ₁ , x ₂ , x ₃ , x ₄ , x ₅ )=(0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0) , set the ring _ratio of _{( 12,4} ) _16APSK to _{2.00 ,} . , 1, 1, 1), the ring ratio of (12,4)16APSK is set to 4.00.

As an example, a method of setting "the satellite broadcasting system to 'system B' and the (12,4)16APSK ring ratio to 2.00" will be described.
At this time, from the “relationship between the values of x _{0 x 1} x ₂ x ₃ x ₄ x ₅ and the ring _ratio of (12,4)16APSK” in _FIG . Set _{x3x4x5 =} " ₀₀₀₀₀₀ ".

Therefore, when the transmitting apparatus (transmitting station) transmits the data symbols with "satellite broadcasting system 'scheme B' and (12,4)16APSK ring ratio 2.00", d0 ₌ " ₁ ", x0 _{x1 x2 x3 x4}
Control information (part of TMCC information) with x ₅ =“000000” is transmitted together with data symbols. However, as control information, it is necessary to transmit control information indicating that the modulation scheme of data symbols is (12,4)16APSK.

Note that the method of setting the ring ratio of (12,4)16APSK when the transmitting device (transmitting station) uses "scheme A" is as described before <Example 1>.

<Example 4>
Example 4 is b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ indicating the coding rate of the error correcting code and the ring ratio of (12,4)16APSK in the main table, and y ₀ y ₁ y ₂ y ₃ indicating the ring ratio difference. y ₄ y ₅ realizes the desired (12,4)16APSK ring ratio signaling.

_One of the important points in Example ₄ is that the main table _shown in _FIG . The point is that it is composed of the relationship between the coding rate and the ring ratio of .
Further characteristic points of Example 4 are described below.
FIG. 51 shows the difference table. The difference table is a table for difference information from the (12,4)16APSK ring ratio set using the main table. Based on the main table, for example, the ring ratio of (12,4)16APSK is set to h.
Then, it becomes as follows.
・・・
When the transmitting device (transmitting station) sets (y ₀ y ₁ y ₂ y ₃ y ₄ y ₅ )=(011110), the ring ratio of (12,4)16APSK shall be set to h+0.4.
When the transmitting device (transmitting station) sets (y ₀ y ₁ y ₂ y ₃ y ₄ y ₅ )=(011111), the ring ratio of (12,4)16APSK shall be set to h+0.2.
When the transmitting device (transmitting station) sets (y ₀ y ₁ y ₂ y ₃ y ₄ y ₅ )=(100000), the ring ratio of (12,4)16APSK shall be set to h+0.
When the transmitting device (transmitting station) sets (y ₀ y ₁ y ₂ y ₃ y ₄ y ₅ )=(100001), the ring ratio of (12,4)16APSK shall be set to h-0.2. do.
When the transmitting device (transmitting station) sets (y ₀ y ₁ y ₂ y ₃ y ₄ y ₅ )=(100010), the ring ratio of (12,4)16APSK shall be set to h-0.4. do.
・・・
Therefore, the transmitting apparatus determines (y ₀ y ₁ y ₂ y ₃ y ₄ y ₅ ) to determine the correction value f for the (12,4)16APSK ring ratio h determined by the main table, and ( 12,4) Set the ring ratio of 16APSK to h+f.

As an example, a method of setting "the satellite broadcasting system to 'system B', the coding rate to 41/120, and the (12,4)16APSK ring ratio to 3.49" will be described.
First, since the transmitting device selects "method B", it sets _d0= "1".
Then, in order to select the coding rate of 41/120 from the main table of _FIG . 51, the transmitting device _{sets b0b1b2b3 =} "0000".

Since the ring ratio of ( _12,4 ) _16APSK corresponding to the value _{b0b1b2b3 =} "0000" in the main table is 3.09, the difference from the desired ring ratio of 3.49 is 3.49-3.09=+0.4. Become.
Therefore, the transmitting device sets y ₀ y ₁ y ₂ y ₃ y ₄ y ₅ ="011110" indicating "+0.4" in the difference table.
Therefore, when a transmitting device (transmitting station) transmits data symbols with "satellite broadcasting system 'system B', coding rate 41/120, and (12,4)16APSK ring ratio 3.49", d ₀ ="1", b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ ="0000", y ₀ y ₁ y ₂ y ₃ y ₄ y ₅ ="011110" (a part of TMCC information) is a data symbol Send together. However, as control information, it is necessary to transmit control information indicating that the modulation scheme of data symbols is (12,4)16APSK.

In this example 4, part of the main table of "method A" is used even in the case of "method B", so it is suitable when part of the specifications of "method A" is also used in "method B". ing.
Note that the method of setting the ring ratio of (12,4)16APSK when the transmitting device (transmitting station) uses the "scheme A" is as described before <Example 1>.

Although one difference table is prepared in FIG. 51, a plurality of difference tables may be prepared. For example, it is assumed that difference tables 1 to 16 are prepared. Then, as in FIGS. 48 and 49, the difference table to be used can be selected by c ₀ c ₁ c ₂ c ₃ . Therefore, the transmitting device sets c ₀ c ₁ c ₂ c ₃ in addition to d ₀ , b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ , y ₀ y ₁ y ₂ y ₃ y ₄ y ₅ , and d ₀ , b ₀ In addition to b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ , y ₀ y ₁ y ₂ y ₃ y ₄ y ₅ , c ₀ c ₁ c ₂ c ₃ is transmitted together with the data symbols as part of the control information.

Also, from the values of y ₀ y ₁ y ₂ y ₃ y ₄ y ₅ in the difference table used, the correction value f from the (12, 4) 16APSK ring ratio h determined using the main table is obtained. .

<Example 5>
Example 5 is b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ indicating the coding rate of the error correcting code and the ring ratio of (12,4)16APSK in the main table, and y ₀ y ₁ y ₂ y ₃ indicating the ring ratio difference. y ₄ y ₅ achieves the desired ring ratio signaling.

_One of the important points in Example ₅ is that the main _table shown in _FIG . The point is that it is composed of the relationship between the coding rate and the ring ratio of .
Further characteristic points of Example 5 are described below.
FIG. 52 shows the difference table. The difference table is a table for difference information from the (12,4)16APSK ring ratio set using the main table. Based on the main table, for example, the ring ratio of (12,4)16APSK is set to h.
Then, it becomes as follows.
・・・
When the transmitting device (transmitting station) sets (y ₀ y ₁ y ₂ y ₃ y ₄ y ₅ )=(011110), the ring ratio of (12,4)16APSK shall be set to h×1.2. do.
When the transmitting device (transmitting station) sets (y ₀ y ₁ y ₂ y ₃ y ₄ y ₅ )=(011111), the ring ratio of (12,4)16APSK shall be set to h×1.1. do.
When the transmitting device (transmitting station) sets (y ₀ y ₁ y ₂ y ₃ y ₄ y ₅ )=(100000), the ring ratio of (12,4)16APSK shall be set to h×1.0. do.
When the transmitting device (transmitting station) sets (y ₀ y ₁ y ₂ y ₃ y ₄ y ₅ )=(100001), the ring ratio of (12,4)16APSK shall be set to h×0.9. do.
When the transmitting device (transmitting station) sets (y ₀ y ₁ y ₂ y ₃ y ₄ y ₅ )=(100010), the ring ratio of (12,4)16APSK shall be set to h×0.8. do.
・・・
Therefore, the transmitting apparatus determines (y ₀ y ₁ y ₂ y ₃ y ₄ y ₅ ) to determine the correction coefficient g for the (12,4)16APSK ring ratio h determined by the main table, and ( 12,4) Set the ring ratio of 16APSK to h×g.

As an example, a method of setting "the satellite broadcasting system to 'system B', the coding rate to 41/120, and the (12,4)16APSK ring ratio to 2.78" will be described.
First, since the transmitting device selects "method B", it sets _d0= "1".
Then, in order to select the coding rate of 41/120 from the main table of _FIG . 52, the transmitting device _{sets b0b1b2b3 =} "0000".

In the main table, the ring ratio of ( _12,4 ) _16APSK corresponding to the value _{b0b1b2b3 =} "0000" is 3.09. 3.09=0.9.
For this reason, the transmitting device sets y ₀ y ₁ y ₂ y ₃ y ₄ y indicating "×0.9" in the difference table.
₅ Set to ="100001".

Therefore, when a transmitting device (transmitting station) transmits data symbols with "satellite broadcasting system 'system B', coding rate 41/120, and (12,4)16APSK ring ratio 2.78", d ₀ ="1", b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ ="0000", y ₀ y ₁ y ₂ y ₃ y ₄ y ₅ ="100001" (a part of TMCC information) is a data symbol Send together. However, as control information, it is necessary to transmit control information indicating that the modulation scheme of data symbols is (12,4)16APSK.

In this example 5, part of the main table of "method A" is used even in the case of "method B", so it is suitable when part of the specifications of "method A" is also used in "method B". ing.
Note that the method of setting the ring ratio of (12,4)16APSK when the transmitting device (transmitting station) uses the "scheme A" is as described before <Example 1>.

Although one difference table is prepared in FIG. 52, a plurality of difference tables may be prepared. For example, it is assumed that difference tables 1 to 16 are prepared. Then, as in FIGS. 48 and 49, the difference table to be used can be selected by c ₀ c ₁ c ₂ c ₃ . Therefore, the transmitting device sets c ₀ c ₁ c ₂ c ₃ in addition to d ₀ , b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ , y ₀ y ₁ y ₂ y ₃ y ₄ y ₅ , and d ₀ , b ₀ In addition to b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ , y ₀ y ₁ y ₂ y ₃ y ₄ y ₅ , c ₀ c ₁ c ₂ c ₃ is transmitted together with the data symbols as part of the control information.

Also, from the values of y ₀ y ₁ y ₂ y ₃ y ₄ y ₅ in the difference table used, the correction coefficient g from the (12, 4) 16APSK ring ratio h determined using the main table is obtained. .

<Receiving device>
After describing the configuration common to <Example 1> to <Example 5> of the receiving apparatus corresponding to the transmission method of the present embodiment, specific processing of each example will be described.

A ground receiving apparatus (terminal) A200 in FIG. 40 receives a radio signal transmitted by the transmitting station in FIG. 39 and relayed by a satellite (relay station) with an antenna A201. The reception RFA 202 performs processing such as frequency conversion and quadrature demodulation on the received radio signal, and outputs a baseband signal.
The demodulator A204 performs processing such as root roll-off filtering, and outputs a filtered baseband signal.

Synchronization/channel estimation unit A214 receives the filtered baseband signal as input, and performs time synchronization, frequency synchronization, and channel estimation using, for example, "synchronization symbol group" and "pilot symbol group" transmitted by the transmitting device. , outputs the estimated signal.
The control information estimation unit A216 receives the filtered baseband signal as input, extracts symbols including control information such as "TMCC information symbol group", demodulates and decodes the symbols, and outputs a control signal.
In addition, what is important in this embodiment is that the control information estimation unit A216 estimates the control information included in the "TMCC information symbol group" and outputs it as a control signal. , the above d ₀ , z ₀ , c ₀ c ₁ c ₂ c ₃ , b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ , x ₀ x ₁ x ₂ x ₃ x ₄ x ₅ , y ₀ y ₁ y ₂ y ₃ y ₄ The point is that it contains the information of _y5 .

The demapping unit A206 receives the filtered baseband signal, the control signal, and the estimated signal, and based on the control signal, determines the modulation scheme (or transmission method) used by the "slot consisting of data symbol groups". and ring ratio, and based on this determination, calculate and output the log-likelihood ratio (LLR) of each bit included in the data symbol from the filtered baseband signal and estimated signal. (However, instead of a soft decision value like LLR, a high decision value may be output, or a soft decision value instead of LLR may be output.)
The deinterleaving unit A208 receives the log-likelihood ratio and the control signal, accumulates them, performs deinterleaving (reordering of data) corresponding to the interleaving used by the transmission device, and outputs the log-likelihood ratio after deinterleaving. do.

The error correction decoding unit A212 receives the deinterleaved logarithmic likelihood ratio and the control signal as inputs, determines the error correction method used (code length, coding rate, etc.), and based on this determination, performs error correction decoding. to obtain the estimated information bits. In addition, when the error correction code used is the LDPC code, the decoding method includes belief propagation decoding (BP (Belief Propagation) decoding) such as sum-product decoding, Shuffled BP (Belief Propagation) decoding, and Layered BP decoding. etc. will be used. The above is the operation when iterative detection is not performed, but a receiver that performs iterative detection as described in the receiver of FIG. 2 may also be used.

Such a receiving device side holds a table similar to the tables shown in <Example 1> to <Example 5> described above, and performs the reverse procedure of <Example 1> to <Example 5>. By doing so, the system of satellite broadcasting, the coding rate of the error correction code, and the ring ratio of (12,4)16APSK are estimated, and demodulation/decoding operations are performed. Each example will be described separately below.
In the following description, it is assumed that the control information estimation unit A216 of the receiving apparatus has determined from the TMCC information that the modulation scheme of the data symbols is (12,4)16APSK symbols.

<<Receiving Device Corresponding to Example 1>>
・When the transmitting device (transmitting station) transmits a modulated signal with "method A":
The control information estimating unit A216 of the receiving apparatus determines that the data symbol is a symbol transmitted by "scheme A" when d0=" ₀ " is obtained. Then, by obtaining the values of b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ , the ring ratio of (12,4)16APSK is estimated when the data symbols are (12,4)16APSK symbols. Demapping section A206 then demodulates the data symbols based on these estimation information.

・When the transmitting device (transmitting station) transmits a modulated signal in "method B":
As shown in FIG. 53, the control information estimating unit _A216 of the receiving device converts d0 ₌ " ₁ " to "scheme _B " _{, c0c1c2c3 =} " ₀₀₀₁ " and _b0b1b2b3 . From ="0000", it is estimated that the coding rate of the error correcting code in the first row of Table 2 is 41/120 and the ring ratio of (12,4)16APSK is 4.00. Demapping section A206 then demodulates the data symbols based on these estimation information.

<<Receiving device corresponding to example 2>>
・When the transmitting device (transmitting station) transmits a modulated signal with "method A":
The control information estimating unit A216 of the receiving apparatus determines that the data symbol is a symbol transmitted by "scheme A" when d0=" ₀ " is obtained. Then, by obtaining the values of b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ , the ring ratio of (12,4)16APSK is estimated when the data symbols are (12,4)16APSK symbols. Demapping section A206 then demodulates the data symbols based on these estimation information.

・When the transmitting device (transmitting station) transmits a modulated signal in "method B":
As shown in FIG. 54, when the control information estimating unit A216 of the receiving device obtains d0="1" and _z0 = ₀ , "the ring ratio is set in the same manner as in scheme A". b ₀ , b ₁ , b ₂ and b ₃ are obtained, and the coding rate of the error correction code and the ring ratio of (12,4)16APSK are estimated from Table 17. Demapping section A206 then demodulates the data symbols based on these estimation information.

Also, as shown in FIG. 54, the control information estimating unit A216 of the receiving device converts d ₀ =1, z ₀ =1 to “scheme B”, c ₀ c ₁ c ₂ c ₃ ="0001" and b From ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ ="0000", the coding rate of the error correction code in the first row of Table 2 is 41/120 and the ring ratio of (12,4)16APSK is 4.00.
We estimate that Demapping section A206 then demodulates the data symbols based on these estimation information.

<<Receiving device corresponding to Example 3>>
・When the transmitting device (transmitting station) transmits a modulated signal with "method A":
The control information estimating unit A216 of the receiving apparatus determines that the data symbol is a symbol transmitted by "scheme A" when d0=" ₀ " is obtained. Then, by obtaining the values of b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ , the ring ratio of (12,4)16APSK is estimated when the data symbols are (12,4)16APSK symbols. Demapping section A206 then demodulates the data symbols based on these estimation information.

・When the transmitting device (transmitting station) transmits a modulated signal in "method B":
As shown in FIG. 55, the control information estimator A216 of the receiving apparatus converts d0 ₌ " ₁ " to "scheme B" _{, x0x1x2x3x4x5 =} "000000" to _{( 12,4} ) estimates the ring ratio of 16APSK to be 2.00. Demapping section A206 then demodulates the data symbols based on these estimation information.

<<Receiving device corresponding to Example 4>>
・When the transmitting device (transmitting station) transmits a modulated signal with "method A":
The control information estimating unit A216 of the receiving apparatus determines that the data symbol is a symbol transmitted by "scheme A" when d0=" ₀ " is obtained. By obtaining the values of b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ , the (12,4)16APSK ring ratio is estimated when the data symbols are (12,4)16APSK symbols. Demapping section A206 then demodulates the data symbols based on these estimation information.

・When the transmitting device (transmitting station) transmits a modulated signal in "method B":
As shown in FIG. 56, the control information estimating unit A216 of the receiving apparatus determines that the data symbol is a "scheme B" symbol from d0 ₌ "1". Also, the control information estimation unit A216 of the receiving device estimates the difference as +0.4 from y ₀ y ₁ y ₂ y ₃ y ₄ y ₅ ="011110". Also, b ₀ b ₁
Based _{on b2b3} ="0000", the ring ratio of (12,4)16APSK before considering the difference is estimated to be 3.09, and the coding rate of the error correction code is estimated to be 41/120. Then, the two are added and from 3.09+0.4=3.49, the ring ratio of (12,4)16APSK is estimated to be 3.49. Demapping section A206 then demodulates the data symbols based on these estimation information.

<<Receiving device corresponding to Example 5>>
・When the transmitting device (transmitting station) transmits a modulated signal with "method A":
The control information estimating unit A216 of the receiving apparatus determines that the data symbol is a symbol transmitted by "scheme A" when d0=" ₀ " is obtained. Then, by obtaining the values of b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ , the ring ratio of (12,4)16APSK is estimated when the data symbols are (12,4)16APSK symbols. Demapping section A206 then demodulates the data symbols based on these estimation information.

・When the transmitting device (transmitting station) transmits a modulated signal in "method B":
As shown in FIG. 57, the control information estimating unit A216 of the receiving apparatus determines that the data symbol is a "scheme B" symbol from d0 ₌ "1". Also, the control information estimation unit A216 of the receiving device estimates the difference as ×0.9 based on y ₀ y ₁ y ₂ y ₃ y ₄ y ₅ ="100001". Based on b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ ="0000", the ring ratio of (12, 4) 16APSK before considering the difference is estimated to be 3.09, and the coding rate of the error correction code is estimated to be 41/120. . Then, the two are multiplied, and from 3.09×0.9=2.78, the ring ratio of (12,4)16APSK is estimated to be 2.78. Demapping section A206 then demodulates the data symbols based on these estimation information.

(Embodiment D)
In this embodiment, a pilot symbol transmission method based on Embodiment C will be described.

The definition of the ring ratio (for example, the (12,4)16APSK ring ratio) was defined before the present embodiment, and the ring ratio may be called a "radius ratio" as another name. .

<Example of pilot symbol>
In this embodiment, a configuration example of a pilot symbol in the transmission scheme (data symbol modulation scheme is (12,4)16APSK) explained in the above Embodiment C will be explained.

Note that the configuration of the transmission apparatus in this embodiment is the same as that described in Embodiment 1, so description thereof will be omitted.

Due to the nonlinearity of the power amplifier of the transmitter, intersymbol (intersymbol) interference occurs in the modulated signal. A receiving apparatus can obtain high data reception quality by reducing this intersymbol interference.

In this pilot symbol configuration example, in order to reduce inter-code (inter-symbol) interference in the receiving device, the transmitting device transmits pilot symbols using the modulation scheme and ring ratio used in the data symbols. .

Therefore, when the transmitting apparatus (transmitting station) determines the data symbol modulation scheme and ring ratio by any of the methods of <Example 1> to <Example 5> of Embodiment C, the data symbols are A pilot symbol is generated and transmitted using the same modulation scheme and ring ratio.

Specific examples are given below. However, the description is continued on the assumption that (12,4)16APSK is selected as the modulation scheme.

In <Example 1> of Embodiment C:
When the transmitting device (transmitting station) transmits data symbols with "satellite broadcasting system 'system B', coding rate 41/120, and (12,4)16APSK ring ratio 4.00", d ₀ = " ₁ ", _{b0b1b2b3 =} " ₀₀₀₀ " _{, c0c1c2c3 =} " ₀₀₀₁ ". Then, based _on "d0 ₌ " ₁ " _{, b0b1b2b3 =} "0000" _{, c0c1c2c3 =} "0001"", the transmitting device (transmitting station) selects the pilot symbol Set the modulation method and ring ratio to (12,4)16APSK and the ring ratio to 4.00 ((12,4)16APSK).

Therefore, the transmitting device (transmitting station) in turn:
Signal point corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0000] with (12,4)16APSK ring ratio 4.00 (baseband signal)
symbol of
(12,4) symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0001] with 16APSK ring ratio 4.00,
the symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0010] with (12,4)16APSK ring ratio 4.00,
(12,4)16APSK ring ratio 4.00 symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0011],
the symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [ _b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [0100] with ( _12,4 ) _16APSK ring ratio 4.00,
(12,4) symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0101] with 16APSK ring ratio 4.00,
(12,4)16APSK ring ratio 4.00 symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0110],
the symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0111] with (12,4)16APSK ring ratio 4.00,
(12,4) symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1000] with 16APSK ring ratio 4.00,
(12,4) symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1001] with 16APSK ring ratio 4.00,
the symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1010] with (12,4)16APSK ring ratio 4.00,
(12,4) symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1011] with 16APSK ring ratio 4.00,
(12,4) symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1100] with 16APSK ring ratio 4.00,
the symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1101] with (12,4)16APSK ring ratio 4.00,
(12,4)16APSK ring ratio 4.00 symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1110],
(12,4) symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1111] with 16APSK ring ratio 4.00,
are transmitted as pilot symbols.

As a result, the receiving apparatus can estimate the inter-symbol interference with high precision, so that high data reception quality can be obtained.

Note that pilot symbols are not only symbols for estimating intersymbol interference. Using pilot symbols, a receiving device can estimate a radio wave propagation environment between a transmitting device and a receiving device (
channel estimation), frequency offset estimation, and time synchronization.

In addition, when the transmitting device sets the ring ratio of the data symbol to a different value, the pilot symbol is also changed to the same ring ratio as the data symbol (the value is set to L), and the transmitting device (transmitting station ) are, in turn,
( _12,4 ) symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [ _b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [0000] of _16APSK ring ratio L,
( _12,4 ) symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [ _b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [0001] of _16APSK ring ratio L,
( _12,4 ) symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [ _b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [0010] of _16APSK ring ratio L,
( _12,4 ) symbols of signal points (baseband signals) corresponding to [ _b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [0011] of _16APSK ring ratio L,
( _12,4 ) symbols of signal points (baseband signals) corresponding to [ _b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [0100] of _16APSK ring ratio L,
( _12,4 ) symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [ _b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [0101] of _16APSK ring ratio L,
( _12,4 ) symbols of signal points (baseband signals) corresponding to [ _b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [0110] of _16APSK ring ratio L,
( _12,4 ) symbols of signal points (baseband signals) corresponding to [ _b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [0111] of _16APSK ring ratio L,
( _12,4 ) symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [ _b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [1000] of _16APSK ring ratio L,
( _12,4 ) symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [ _b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [1001] of _16APSK ring ratio L,
( _12,4 ) symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [ _b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [1010] of _16APSK ring ratio L,
( _12,4 ) symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [ _b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [1011] of _16APSK ring ratio L,
( _12,4 ) symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [ _b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [1100] of _16APSK ring ratio L,
( _12,4 ) symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [ _b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [1101] of _16APSK ring ratio L,
( _12,4 ) symbols of signal points (baseband signals) corresponding to [ _b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [1110] of _16APSK ring ratio L,
( _12,4 ) symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [ _b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [1111] of _16APSK ring ratio L,
are transmitted as pilot symbols.

In <Example 2> of Embodiment C:
When the transmitting device (transmitting station) transmits data symbols with "satellite broadcasting system 'system B', coding rate 41/120, and (12,4)16APSK ring ratio 4.00", d ₀ = Control information (part of TMCC information) with " ₁ ", _{z0 = 1} , _{b0b1b2b3 =} "0000" _{, c0c1c2c3 =} "0001" is used as a data symbol. Send together. Then, based on "d0 ₌ " ₁ ", _{z0 = 1} , _{b0b1b2b3 =} "0000" _{, c0c1c2c3 =} "0001"", the transmitting device (transmitting station) sets the pilot symbol modulation scheme and ring ratio to (12,4)16APSK and the ring ratio to 4.00 ((12,4)16APSK), respectively.

Therefore, the transmitting device (transmitting station) in turn:
Signal point corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0000] with (12,4)16APSK ring ratio 4.00 (baseband signal)
symbol of
(12,4) symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0001] with 16APSK ring ratio 4.00,
the symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0010] with (12,4)16APSK ring ratio 4.00,
(12,4)16APSK ring ratio 4.00 symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0011],
the symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [ _b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [0100] with ( _12,4 ) _16APSK ring ratio 4.00,
(12,4) symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0101] with 16APSK ring ratio 4.00,
(12,4)16APSK ring ratio 4.00 symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0110],
the symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0111] with (12,4)16APSK ring ratio 4.00,
(12,4) symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1000] with 16APSK ring ratio 4.00,
(12,4) symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1001] with 16APSK ring ratio 4.00,
the symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1010] with (12,4)16APSK ring ratio 4.00,
(12,4) symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1011] with 16APSK ring ratio 4.00,
(12,4) symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1100] with 16APSK ring ratio 4.00,
the symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1101] with (12,4)16APSK ring ratio 4.00,
(12,4)16APSK ring ratio 4.00 symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1110],
the symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1111] with (12,4)16APSK ring ratio 4.00,
are transmitted as pilot symbols.

As a result, the receiving apparatus can estimate the inter-symbol interference with high precision, so that high data reception quality can be obtained.

Note that the pilot symbols are not only symbols for estimating intersymbol interference, but the pilot symbols may be used by the receiving device to estimate the radio wave propagation environment (channel estimation) between the transmitting device and the receiving device. Also, frequency offset estimation and time synchronization may be performed.

In addition, when the transmitting device sets the ring ratio of the data symbol to a different value, the pilot symbol is also changed to the same ring ratio as the data symbol (the value is set to L), and the transmitting device (transmitting station ) are, in turn,
( _12,4 ) symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [ _b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [0000] of _16APSK ring ratio L,
( _12,4 ) symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [ _b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [0001] of _16APSK ring ratio L,
( _12,4 ) symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [ _b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [0010] of _16APSK ring ratio L,
( _12,4 ) symbols of signal points (baseband signals) corresponding to [ _b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [0011] of _16APSK ring ratio L,
( _12,4 ) symbols of signal points (baseband signals) corresponding to [ _b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [0100] of _16APSK ring ratio L,
( _12,4 ) symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [ _b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [0101] of _16APSK ring ratio L,
( _12,4 ) symbols of signal points (baseband signals) corresponding to [ _b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [0110] of _16APSK ring ratio L,
( _12,4 ) symbols of signal points (baseband signals) corresponding to [ _b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [0111] of _16APSK ring ratio L,
( _12,4 ) symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [ _b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [1000] of _16APSK ring ratio L,
( _12,4 ) symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [ _b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [1001] of _16APSK ring ratio L,
( _12,4 ) symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [ _b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [1010] of _16APSK ring ratio L,
( _12,4 ) symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [ _b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [1011] of _16APSK ring ratio L,
( _12,4 ) symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [ _b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [1100] of _16APSK ring ratio L,
( _12,4 ) symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [ _b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [1101] of _16APSK ring ratio L,
( _12,4 ) symbols of signal points (baseband signals) corresponding to [ _b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [1110] of _16APSK ring ratio L,
( _12,4 ) symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [ _b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [1111] of _16APSK ring ratio L,
are transmitted as pilot symbols.

In <Example 3> of Embodiment C:
When the transmitting device (transmitting station) transmits the data symbols with "satellite broadcasting system "system B" and ring ratio of (12,4)16APSK 2.00", d0 ₌ " ₁ ", _x0x1 Control information (part of TMCC information) with x ₂ x ₃ x ₄ x ₅ =“000000” is transmitted together with data symbols. Based _on "d0 ₌ " ₁ " _{, x0x1x2x3x4x5 =} "000000", the transmitting device ₍ transmitting station) sets the pilot symbol modulation scheme and ring ratio to ( 12,4)16APSK・Set the ring ratio to 2.00 ((12,4)16APSK).

Therefore, the transmitting device (transmitting station) in turn:
Signal point corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0000] with (12,4)16APSK ring ratio 2.00 (baseband signal)
symbol of
the symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0001] with a (12,4)16APSK ring ratio of 2.00,
the symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0010] with a (12,4)16APSK ring ratio of 2.00,
the symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [ _b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [0011] with _a ( _12,4 )16APSK ring ratio of 2.00,
(12,4) symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0100] with 16APSK ring ratio 2.00,
the symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [ _b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [0101] with _a ( _12,4 )16APSK ring ratio of 2.00,
the symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0110] with (12,4)16APSK ring ratio 2.00,
the symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0111] with (12,4)16APSK ring ratio 2.00,
(12,4) symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1000] with 16APSK ring ratio 2.00,
(12,4) symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1001] with 16APSK ring ratio 2.00,
(12,4) symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1010] with 16APSK ring ratio 2.00,
(12,4)16APSK ring ratio 2.00 symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1011],
(12,4)16APSK ring ratio 2.00 symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1100],
(12,4) symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1101] with 16APSK ring ratio 2.00,
the symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1110] with (12,4)16APSK ring ratio 2.00,
the symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1111] with (12,4)16APSK ring ratio 2.00,
are transmitted as pilot symbols.

As a result, the receiving apparatus can estimate the inter-symbol interference with high precision, so that high data reception quality can be obtained.

Note that the pilot symbols are not only symbols for estimating intersymbol interference, but the pilot symbols may be used by the receiving device to estimate the radio wave propagation environment (channel estimation) between the transmitting device and the receiving device. Also, frequency offset estimation and time synchronization may be performed.

When the transmitting device sets the ring ratio of the data symbols to a different value, the pilot symbols are also changed to the same ring ratio as the data symbols (the value is set to L), and the transmitting device (transmitting station ) are, in turn,
( _12,4 ) symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [ _b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [0000] of _16APSK ring ratio L,
( _12,4 ) symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [ _b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [0001] of _16APSK ring ratio L,
( _12,4 ) symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [ _b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [0010] of _16APSK ring ratio L,
( _12,4 ) symbols of signal points (baseband signals) corresponding to [ _b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [0011] of _16APSK ring ratio L,
( _12,4 ) symbols of signal points (baseband signals) corresponding to [ _b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [0100] of _16APSK ring ratio L,
( _12,4 ) symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [ _b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [0101] of _16APSK ring ratio L,
( _12,4 ) symbols of signal points (baseband signals) corresponding to [ _b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [0110] of _16APSK ring ratio L,
( _12,4 ) symbols of signal points (baseband signals) corresponding to [ _b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [0111] of _16APSK ring ratio L,
( _12,4 ) symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [ _b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [1000] of _16APSK ring ratio L,
( _12,4 ) symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [ _b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [1001] of _16APSK ring ratio L,
( _12,4 ) symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [ _b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [1010] of _16APSK ring ratio L,
( _12,4 ) symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [ _b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [1011] of _16APSK ring ratio L,
( _12,4 ) symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [ _b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [1100] of _16APSK ring ratio L,
( _12,4 ) symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [ _b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [1101] of _16APSK ring ratio L,
( _12,4 ) symbols of signal points (baseband signals) corresponding to [ _b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [1110] of _16APSK ring ratio L,
( _12,4 ) symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [ _b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [1111] of _16APSK ring ratio L,
are transmitted as pilot symbols.

In <Example 4> of Embodiment C:
When the transmitting device (transmitting station) transmits data symbols with "satellite broadcasting system 'system B', coding rate 41/120, and (12,4)16APSK ring ratio 3.49", d ₀ = "1", b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ ="0000", y ₀ y ₁ y ₂ y ₃ y ₄ y ₅ ="011110" The control information (a part of the TMCC information) is combined with the data symbol. to send. Then, based _on "d0 ₌ " ₁ ", _{b0b1b2b3 =} " ₀₀₀₀ " _{, y0y1y2y3y4y5 =} " ₀₁₁₁₁₀ "", the transmitting device ₍ transmitting station) , the pilot symbol modulation scheme and ring ratio are set to (12,4)16APSK and the ring ratio to 3.49 (however, (12,4)16APSK).

Therefore, the transmitting device (transmitting station) in turn:
Signal point corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0000] with (12,4)16APSK ring ratio 3.49 (baseband signal)
symbol of
the symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [ _b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [0001] with ( _12,4 ) _16APSK ring ratio 3.49,
the symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [ _b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [0010] with ( _12,4 ) _16APSK ring ratio 3.49,
the symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [ _b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [0011] with ( _12,4 ) _16APSK ring ratio 3.49,
the symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [ _b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [0100] with ( _12,4 ) _16APSK ring ratio 3.49,
the symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [ _b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [0101] with ( _12,4 ) _16APSK ring ratio 3.49,
the symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [ _b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [0110] with ( _12,4 ) _16APSK ring ratio 3.49,
the symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [ _b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [0111] with ( _12,4 ) _16APSK ring ratio 3.49,
the symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1000] with (12,4)16APSK ring ratio 3.49,
the symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [ _b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [1001] with ( _12,4 ) _16APSK ring ratio 3.49,
the symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1010] with (12,4)16APSK ring ratio 3.49,
Signal point corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1011] with (12,4)16APSK ring ratio 3.49 (baseband signal)
symbol of
the symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1100] with (12,4)16APSK ring ratio 3.49,
the symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1101] with (12,4)16APSK ring ratio 3.49,
the symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1110] with (12,4)16APSK ring ratio 3.49,
the symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1111] with (12,4)16APSK ring ratio 3.49,
are transmitted as pilot symbols.

As a result, the receiving apparatus can estimate the inter-symbol interference with high precision, so that high data reception quality can be obtained.

Note that the pilot symbols are not only symbols for estimating intersymbol interference, but the pilot symbols may be used by the receiving device to estimate the radio wave propagation environment (channel estimation) between the transmitting device and the receiving device. Also, frequency offset estimation and time synchronization may be performed.

In addition, when the transmitting device sets the ring ratio of the data symbol to a different value, the pilot symbol is also changed to the same ring ratio as the data symbol (the value is set to L), and the transmitting device (transmitting station ) are, in turn,
( _12,4 ) symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [ _b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [0000] of _16APSK ring ratio L,
( _12,4 ) symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [ _b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [0001] of _16APSK ring ratio L,
( _12,4 ) symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [ _b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [0010] of _16APSK ring ratio L,
( _12,4 ) symbols of signal points (baseband signals) corresponding to [ _b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [0011] of _16APSK ring ratio L,
( _12,4 ) symbols of signal points (baseband signals) corresponding to [ _b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [0100] of _16APSK ring ratio L,
( _12,4 ) symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [ _b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [0101] of _16APSK ring ratio L,
( _12,4 ) symbols of signal points (baseband signals) corresponding to [ _b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [0110] of _16APSK ring ratio L,
( _12,4 ) symbols of signal points (baseband signals) corresponding to [ _b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [0111] of _16APSK ring ratio L,
( _12,4 ) symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [ _b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [1000] of _16APSK ring ratio L,
( _12,4 ) symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [ _b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [1001] of _16APSK ring ratio L,
( _12,4 ) symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [ _b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [1010] of _16APSK ring ratio L,
( _12,4 ) symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [ _b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [1011] of _16APSK ring ratio L,
( _12,4 ) symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [ _b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [1100] of _16APSK ring ratio L,
( _12,4 ) symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [ _b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [1101] of _16APSK ring ratio L,
( _12,4 ) symbols of signal points (baseband signals) corresponding to [ _b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [1110] of _16APSK ring ratio L,
( _12,4 ) symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [ _b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [1111] of _16APSK ring ratio L,
are transmitted as pilot symbols.

In <Example 5> of Embodiment C:
When the transmitting device (transmitting station) transmits data symbols with "satellite broadcasting system 'system B', coding rate 41/120, and (12,4)16APSK ring ratio 2.78", d ₀ = "1", b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ ="0000", y ₀ y ₁ y ₂ y ₃ y ₄ y ₅ ="100001" The control information (a part of the TMCC information) is combined with the data symbol. to send. Then, based _on "d0 ₌ " ₁ " _{, b0b1b2b3 =} "0000" _{, y0y1y2y3y4y5 =} " ₁₀₀₀₀₁ "", the transmitting device ₍ transmitting station) , the pilot symbol modulation scheme and ring ratio are set to (12,4)16APSK and the ring ratio to 2.78 ((12,4)16APSK).

Therefore, the transmitting device (transmitting station) in turn:
Signal point corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0000] with (12,4)16APSK ring ratio 2.78 (baseband signal)
symbol of
the symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[0001] with (12,4)16APSK ring ratio 2.78,
the symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [ _b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [0010] with _a ( _12,4 )16APSK ring ratio of 2.78,
the symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [ _b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [0011] with _a ( _12,4 )16APSK ring ratio of 2.78,
the symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [ _b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [0100] with ( _12,4 ) _16APSK ring ratio 2.78,
the symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [ _b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [0101] with _a ( _12,4 )16APSK ring ratio of 2.78,
the symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [ _b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [0110] with _a ( _12,4 )16APSK ring ratio of 2.78,
the symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [ _b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [0111] with _a ( _12,4 )16APSK ring ratio of 2.78,
the symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1000] with a (12,4)16APSK ring ratio of 2.78,
the symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1001] with (12,4)16APSK ring ratio 2.78,
the symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [ _b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [1010] with _a ( _12,4 )16APSK ring ratio of 2.78,
the symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1011] with (12,4)16APSK ring ratio 2.78,
the symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1100] with a (12,4)16APSK ring ratio of 2.78,
the symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1101] with (12,4)16APSK ring ratio 2.78,
the symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1110] with (12,4)16APSK ring ratio 2.78,
the symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[1111] with (12,4)16APSK ring ratio 2.78,
are transmitted as pilot symbols.

As a result, the receiving apparatus can estimate the inter-symbol interference with high precision, so that high data reception quality can be obtained.

Note that the pilot symbols are not only symbols for estimating intersymbol interference, but the pilot symbols may be used by the receiving device to estimate the radio wave propagation environment (channel estimation) between the transmitting device and the receiving device. Also, frequency offset estimation and time synchronization may be performed.

When the transmitting device sets the ring ratio of the data symbols to a different value, the pilot symbols are also changed to the same ring ratio as the data symbols (the value is set to L), and the transmitting device (transmitting station ) are, in turn,
( _12,4 ) symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [ _b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [0000] of _16APSK ring ratio L,
( _12,4 ) symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [ _b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [0001] of _16APSK ring ratio L,
( _12,4 ) symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [ _b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [0010] of _16APSK ring ratio L,
( _12,4 ) symbols of signal points (baseband signals) corresponding to [ _b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [0011] of _16APSK ring ratio L,
( _12,4 ) symbols of signal points (baseband signals) corresponding to [ _b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [0100] of _16APSK ring ratio L,
( _12,4 ) symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [ _b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [0101] of _16APSK ring ratio L,
( _12,4 ) symbols of signal points (baseband signals) corresponding to [ _b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [0110] of _16APSK ring ratio L,
( _12,4 ) symbols of signal points (baseband signals) corresponding to [ _b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [0111] of _16APSK ring ratio L,
( _12,4 ) symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [ _b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [1000] of _16APSK ring ratio L,
( _12,4 ) symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [ _b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [1001] of _16APSK ring ratio L,
( _12,4 ) symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [ _b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [1010] of _16APSK ring ratio L,
( _12,4 ) symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [ _b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [1011] of _16APSK ring ratio L,
( _12,4 ) symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [ _b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [1100] of _16APSK ring ratio L,
( _12,4 ) symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [ _b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [1101] of _16APSK ring ratio L,
( _12,4 ) symbols of signal points (baseband signals) corresponding to [ _b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [1110] of _16APSK ring ratio L,
( _12,4 ) symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [ _b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [1111] of _16APSK ring ratio L,
are transmitted as pilot symbols.

The operation of the receiving device will be explained using FIG.

In FIG. 2, 210 is the configuration of the receiver. The demapping section 214 in FIG. 2 performs demapping on the mapping of the modulation scheme used by the transmitting apparatus, for example, obtains and outputs the logarithmic likelihood ratio of each bit. At this time, although not shown in FIG. 2, in order to perform demapping with high accuracy, intersymbol interference estimation, radio wave propagation environment estimation (channel estimation) between the transmitter and the receiver, and It is recommended to estimate the time synchronization and frequency offset of

Although not shown in FIG. 2, the receiving apparatus includes an intersymbol interference estimator, a channel estimator, a time synchronizer, and a frequency offset estimator. These estimators extract, for example, the pilot symbol portion from the received signal, and estimate intersymbol interference, estimate the radio wave propagation environment between the transmitter and the receiver (channel estimation), and time synchronization and frequency offset estimation. Then, the demapping section 214 in FIG. 2 receives these estimated signals and performs demapping based on these estimated signals, thereby calculating, for example, a logarithmic likelihood ratio.

Information on the modulation scheme and ring ratio used to generate data symbols is transmitted using control information such as TMCC, as described in Embodiment C. Since the modulation scheme and ring ratio used to generate the pilot symbols are the same as the modulation scheme and ring ratio used to generate the data symbols, the receiving apparatus therefore includes a control information estimator. By estimating the modulation scheme and ring ratio from the control information, the demapping unit 214 obtains this information, thereby estimating the distortion of the propagation path due to the pilot symbols, etc., and demapping the information symbols. It will be.

Also, the method of transmitting pilot symbols is not limited to the above. for example,
A transmitting device (transmitting station) uses, as a pilot symbol,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [ _b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [0000] of the ( _12,4 ) _16APSK ring ratio L a plurality of times,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [ _b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [0001] of the ( _12,4 ) _16APSK ring ratio L a plurality of times,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [ _b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [0010] of the ( _12,4 ) _16APSK ring ratio L a plurality of times,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [ _b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [0011] of the ( _12,4 ) _16APSK ring ratio L a plurality of times,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [ _b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [0100] of the ( _12,4 ) _16APSK ring ratio L a plurality of times,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [ _b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [0101] of the ( _12,4 ) _16APSK ring ratio L a plurality of times,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [ _b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [0110] of the ( _12,4 ) _16APSK ring ratio L a plurality of times,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [ _b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [0111] of the ( _12,4 ) _16APSK ring ratio L a plurality of times,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [ _b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [1000] of the ( _12,4 ) _16APSK ring ratio L is repeated multiple times,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [ _b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [1001] of the ( _12,4 ) _16APSK ring ratio L a plurality of times,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [ _b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [1010] of the ( _12,4 ) _16APSK ring ratio L a plurality of times,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [ _b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [1011] of the ( _12,4 ) _16APSK ring ratio L is repeated multiple times,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [ _b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [1100] of the ( _12,4 ) _16APSK ring ratio L a plurality of times,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [ _b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [1101] of the ( _12,4 ) _16APSK ring ratio L a plurality of times,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [ _b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [1110] of the ( _12,4 ) _16APSK ring ratio L a plurality of times,
The symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [ _b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [1111] of the ( _12,4 ) _16APSK ring ratio L may be transmitted multiple times.

At this time,
( _12,4 ) symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [ _b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [0000] of _16APSK ring ratio L,
( _12,4 ) symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [ _b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [0001] of _16APSK ring ratio L,
( _12,4 ) symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [ _b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [0010] of _16APSK ring ratio L,
( _12,4 ) symbols of signal points (baseband signals) corresponding to [ _b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [0011] of _16APSK ring ratio L,
( _12,4 ) symbols of signal points (baseband signals) corresponding to [ _b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [0100] of _16APSK ring ratio L,
( _12,4 ) symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [ _b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [0101] of _16APSK ring ratio L,
( _12,4 ) symbols of signal points (baseband signals) corresponding to [ _b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [0110] of _16APSK ring ratio L,
( _12,4 ) symbols of signal points (baseband signals) corresponding to [ _b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [0111] of _16APSK ring ratio L,
( _12,4 ) symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [ _b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [1000] of _16APSK ring ratio L,
( _12,4 ) symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [ _b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [1001] of _16APSK ring ratio L,
( _12,4 ) symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [ _b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [1010] of _16APSK ring ratio L,
( _12,4 ) symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [ _b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [1011] of _16APSK ring ratio L,
( _12,4 ) symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [ _b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [1100] of _16APSK ring ratio L,
( _12,4 ) symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [ _b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [1101] of _16APSK ring ratio L,
( _12,4 ) symbols of signal points (baseband signals) corresponding to [ _b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [1110] of _16APSK ring ratio L,
( _12,4 ) symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [ _b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [1111] of _16APSK ring ratio L,
Equalizing the number of transmissions for each symbol in , has the advantage that the receiving apparatus can perform highly accurate propagation path distortion estimation.

Note that the frame configuration to which the present invention is applied is not limited to the above description. If there is a symbol for transmitting information about the error correction method (for example, the error correction code used, the code length of the error correction code, the coding rate of the error correction code, etc.), the data symbol, the modulation The symbols for transmitting the information on the scheme and the symbols for transmitting the information on the error correction scheme may be arranged in any way in the frame. Also, symbols other than these symbols, such as preambles, symbols for synchronization, pilot symbols, reference symbols, etc., may exist in the frame.

(Embodiment E)
In Embodiments B, C, and D, the method of changing the ring ratio of (12,4)16APSK, the method of transmitting control information, the method of transmitting pilot symbols, and the like have been described. Naturally, the contents described in Embodiments B, C, and D can also be applied to other modulation schemes.

In this embodiment, even if the coding rate of the error correcting code is set to a certain value (for example, the coding rate is set to K), a method will be described in which the ring ratio of 32APSK can be selected for each channel. .
(This enables the receiving device to obtain high data reception quality by setting a suitable ring ratio for each channel.)

Figures 41-43 show a terrestrial transmitting station transmitting a transmission signal towards a satellite. FIG. 44 shows the frequency allocation of each modulated signal. FIGS. 45 and 46 show examples of configurations of satellites (repeaters) that receive signals transmitted by terrestrial transmitting stations and transmit modulated signals of the received signals to terrestrial receiving terminals.

First, the ring ratio (radius ratio) of 32APSK is defined.
FIG. 58 shows the signal point arrangement on the in-phase I-quadrature Q plane of the 32APSK system with 32 signal points on the in-phase I-quadrature Q plane.

FIG. 58 is a signal point constellation in the in-phase I-quadrature Q plane of (4,12,16)32APSK. Centered on the origin, there are a=4 signal points on a circle with a radius of _R1 , b=12 signal points on a circle with a radius of _{R2 ,} and c=16 signal points on a circle with a radius of R3. Therefore, since (a,b,c)=(4,12,16), it is described as (4,12,16)32APSK. (It should be noted that 0<R ₁ <R ₂ <R ₃ .)
At this time, a first radius ratio (ring ratio) r ₁ =R ₂ /R ₁ and a second radius ratio (ring ratio) r ₂ =R ₃ /R ₁ are defined.

<Signal point arrangement>
Next, the (4,12,16)32APSK mapping signal point arrangement and bit allocation (labeling) to each signal point will be described.

FIG. 58 shows an example of labeling. (However, FIG. 58 is an example, and different labeling from FIG. 58 may be used.)
The coordinates of each signal point of (4,12,16)32APSK on the IQ plane are as follows.

Input bit [ _b4b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [00000] _{( R2cos} (π/ ₄ ), _{R2sin (} π/4))
Input bit [ _b4b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [00001] _{( R2cos} (π/ ₄ +π/6), _{R2sin (} π/4+π/6)
)
Input bit [ _b4b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [ ₀₀₀₁₀ ]...( _{R2cos (} (7*pi)/ ₄ ), _R2sin ((7*pi)/4))
Input bits [ _b4b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [00011] _{( R2cos} (( ₇ ×π)/4−π/6), _{R2sin (} (7×π)/4 ―π/6))
Input bit [ _b4b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [00100]...( _{R2cos (} ( ₃ *pi)/ ₄ ), _R2sin ((3*pi)/4))
Input bits [ _b4b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [00101]... _{( R2cos} (( ₃ ×π)/ ₄ −π/6), _R2sin ((3×π)/4 ―π/6))
Input bit [ _b4b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [00110]...( _{R2cos (} ( ₅ *pi)/ ₄ ), _R2sin ((5*pi)/4))
Input bits [ _b4b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [00111]... _{( R2cos} (( ₅ ×π)/4+π/6), _{R2sin (} (5×π)/4+π/6 ))
Input bit [ _b4b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [ ₀₁₀₀₀ ]...( _{R3cos (} π/8) _{, R3sin} (π/8))
Input bit [ _b4b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [ ₀₁₀₀₁ ]...( _R3cos (( ₃ *pi)/8), _R3sin (( ₃ *pi)/8))
Input bit [ _b4b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [01010]...( _{R3cos (} ( ₁₄ *π)/8) _{, R3sin} ((14*π)/
8))
Input bit [ _b4b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [01011]...( _{R3cos (} ( ₁₂ *pi)/8) _{, R3sin} ((12*pi)/
8))
Input bit [ _b4b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [ ₀₁₁₀₀ ]... _{( R3cos} ((6*pi)/8) _{, R3sin} ((6*pi)/8))
Input bit [ _b4b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [01101]...( _{R3cos (} ( ₄ *pi)/8), _R3sin (( ₄ *pi)/8))
Input bit [ _b4b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [01110]...( _{R3cos (} ( ₉ *pi)/8) _{, R3sin} ((9*pi)/8))
Input bit [ _b4b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [ ₀₁₁₁₁ ]... _{( R3cos} ((11*pi)/8) _{, R3sin} ((11*pi)/
8))

Input bit [ _b4b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [ ₁₀₀₀₀ ] _{( R2cos} (π/ ₄ -π/6), _R2sin (π/4-π/6))
Input bit [ _b4b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [ ₁₀₀₀₁ ] ( _R1 cos(π/ ₄ ), _R1 sin(π/ ₄ ))
Input bits [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ] = [10010] (R ₂ cos((7×π)/4+π/6), R ₂ sin((7×π)/4+π/6 ))
Input bit [ _b4b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [ ₁₀₀₁₁ ]...( _R1cos (( ₇ *pi)/ ₄ ), _R1sin ((7*pi)/4))
Input bits [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ] = [10100] (R ₂ cos((3×π)/4+π/6), R ₂ sin((3×π)/4+π/6 ))
Input bit [ _{b4b3b2b1b0 ] =} [ ₁₀₁₀₁ ]...( _R1 cos(( ₃ ×π)/4), _R1 sin((3×π)/4))
Input bits [ _b4b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [10110]... _{( R2cos} (( ₅ ×π)/4−π/6), _{R2sin (} (5×π)/4 ―π/6))
Input bit [ _b4b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [10111]...( _R1cos (( ₅ *pi)/ ₄ ), _R1sin (( ₅ *pi)/4))
Input bits [ _b4b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [ ₁₁₀₀₀ ]...( _{R3cos (} ( _0xπ )/8), _R3sin ((0xπ)/8))
Input bit [ _b4b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [11001]...( _{R3cos (} ( ₂ *pi)/8), _R3sin (( ₂ *pi)/8))
Input bits [ _b4b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [11010] _{( R3cos} (( ₁₅ ×π)/8) _{, R3sin} ((15×π)/
8))
Input bit [ _b4b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [11011] _{( R3cos} (( ₁₃ ×π)/8) _{, R3sin} ((13×π)/
8))
Input bit [ _b4b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [11100]...( _{R3cos (} ( ₇ *pi)/8) _{, R3sin} ((7*pi)/8))
Input bit [ _b4b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [11101]...( _{R3cos (} ( ₅ *pi)/8) _{, R3sin} ((5*pi)/8))
Input bit [ _b4b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [11110]...( _{R3cos (} ( ₈ *pi)/8) _{, R3sin} ((8*pi)/8))
Input bits [ _b4b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [11111]...( _{R3cos (} ( ₁₀ *π)/8) _{, R3sin} ((10*π)/
8))

The unit of phase is radian. So, for example, in R ₂ cos(π/4), π/4 is in radians. The unit of phase is radian also in the following description.

Also, for example, above,
Input bit [ _b4b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [00000] _{( R2cos} (π/ ₄ ), _{R2sin (} π/4))
However, for example, in the data input to the mapping unit 708, when _five bits [ _b4b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [ ₀₀₀₀₀ ], the in- _phase component of the baseband signal after mapping is I, the quadrature component Q, means that (I, Q)=(R ₂ cos(π/4), R ₂ sin(π/4)).

In another example,
Input bit [ _b4b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [ ₀₁₀₀₀ ]...( _{R3cos (} π/8) _{, R3sin} (π/8))
However, for example, in the data input to the mapping unit 708, when _five bits [ _b4b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [ ₀₁₀₀₀ ], the in- _phase component of the baseband signal after mapping is I, the quadrature component Q, means that (I, Q)=(R ₃ cos(π/8), R ₃ sin(π/8)).

_In this respect, input bits [ _b4b3b2b1b0 ] _{are all} the same for [ ₀₀₀₀₀ ] to [11111].

<Transmission output>
In (4,12,16)32APSK, the following normalization factors are sometimes used in order to make the transmission output the same as other modulation schemes.

Let I _b be the in-phase component of the baseband signal before normalization, and let Q _b be the quadrature component. Let I _n be the in-phase component of the normalized baseband signal, and Q _n be the quadrature component. Then, when the modulation method is (4,12,16)32APSK, (I _n , Q _n ) = (a _(4,12,16) × I _b , a _(4,12,16) × Q _b ) becomes To establish.

Therefore, in the case of (4,12,16)32APSK, the in-phase component of the baseband signal before normalization is I _b , and the quadrature component Q _b is the baseband signal after mapping obtained by mapping based on FIG. It becomes the in-phase component I and the quadrature component Q of the signal. Therefore, when (4,12,16)32APSK, the following relationship holds.

Input bits [ _b4b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [00000] (In, _Qn ) ₌ ( _a ( _{4,12,16 )} x _{R2 x} cos(π/4), a _(4,12,16) × _R2 ×sin(π/4))
Input bits [ _b4b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [00001] (In, _Qn ) ₌ ( _a ( _{4,12,16 )} x _{R2 x} cos(π/4+
π/6), a _(4,12,16) ×R ₂ ×sin(π/4+π/6))
Input bits [ _b4b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [00010] (In, _Qn ) ₌ ( _a ( _{4,12,16 )} x _{R2 x} cos((7 x π)/ 4), a _(4,12,16) × _R2 ×sin((7×π)/4))
Input bits [ _b4b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [00011] (In, _Qn ) ₌ ( _a ( _{4,12,16 )} x _{R2 x} cos((7 x π)/ 4-π/6), a _(4,12,16) ×R ₂ ×sin((7×π)/4-π/6))
Input bits [ _b4b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [00100] (In, Qn) ₌ ( _a ( _{4,12,16 )} x _{R2 x} cos(( ₃ x π)/ 4), a _(4,12,16) × _R2 ×sin((3×π)/4))
Input bits [ _b4b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [00101] (In, Qn) ₌ ( _a ( _{4,12,16 )} x _{R2 x} cos(( ₃ x π)/ 4-π/6), a _(4,12,16) × _R2 ×sin((3×π)/4-π/6))
Input bits [ _b4b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [00110] (In, _Qn ) ₌ ( _a ( _{4,12,16 )} x _{R2 x} cos((5 x π)/ 4), a _(4,12,16) × _R2 ×sin((5×π)/4))
Input bits [ _b4b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [00111] (In, _Qn ) ₌ ( _a ( _{4,12,16 )} x _{R2 x} cos((5 x π)/ 4+π/6), a _(4,12,16) × _R2 ×sin((5×π)/4+π/6))
Input bit [ _b4b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [01000] ( _In , _Qn ) ₌ ( _a ( _{4,12,16 )} x R3 x cos ₍ π/8), a _(4,12,16) ×R3 ×sin ₍ π/8))
Input bit [ _b4b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [ ₀₁₀₀₁ ] (In, Qn) ₌ ( _a ( _{4,12,16 )} x R3 x cos ₍ ( ₃ x π)/ 8), a _(4,12,16) ×R3×sin(( ₃ ×π)/8))
Input bits [ _b4b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [01010] ( _In , _Qn ) ₌ ( _a ( _{4,12,16 )} x R3 x cos ₍ (14 x
π)/8), a _(4,12,16) ×R ₃ ×sin((14×π)/8))
Input bits [ _b4b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [01011] ( _In , _Qn ) ₌ ( _a ( _{4,12,16 )} x R3 x cos(( ₁₂ x
π)/8), a _(4,12,16) ×R ₃ ×sin((12×π)/8))
Input bits [ _b4b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [ ₀₁₁₀₀ ] (In, _Qn ) ₌ ( _a ( _{4,12,16 )} x R3 x cos(( ₆ x π)/ 8), a _(4,12,16) ×R3×sin(( ₆ ×π)/8))
Input bit [ _b4b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [01101] (In, _Qn ) ₌ ( _a ( _{4,12,16 )} x R3 x cos ₍ ( ₄ x π)/ 8), a _(4,12,16) ×R3×sin(( ₄ ×π)/8))
Input bits [ _b4b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [01110] ( _In , _Qn ) ₌ ( _a ( _{4,12,16 )} x R3 x cos(( ₉ x π)/ 8), a _(4,12,16) ×R3×sin(( ₉ ×π)/8))
Input bits [ _b4b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [ ₀₁₁₁₁ ] (In, _Qn ) ₌ ( _a ( _{4,12,16 )} x R3 x cos(( ₁₁ x
π)/8), a _(4,12,16) ×R3 ×sin ₍ (11×π)/8))

Input bits [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ] = [10000] (I _n , Q _n ) = (a _{(4, 12, 16)} × R ₂ × cos(π/4―
π/6), a _(4,12,16) ×R ₂ ×sin(π/4-π/6))
Input bits [ _b4b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [10001] (In, _Qn ) ₌ ( _a ( _{4,12,16 )} x _{R1 x} cos(π/4), a _(4,12,16) × _R1 ×sin(π/4))
Input bits [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ] = [10010] (I _n , Q _n ) = (a _{(4, 12, 16)} x R ₂ x cos((7 x π)/ 4+π/6), a _(4,12,16) × _R2 ×sin((7×π)/4+π/6))
Input bits [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ] = [10011] (I _n , Q _n ) = (a _{(4, 12, 16)} x R ₁ x cos((7 x π)/ 4), a _(4,12,16) × _R1 ×sin((7×π)/4))
Input bits [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ] = [10100] (I _n , Q _n ) = (a _{(4, 12, 16)} x R ₂ x cos((3 x π)/ 4+π/6), a _(4,12,16) × _R2 ×sin((3×π)/4+π/6))
Input bits [ _b4b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [10101] (In, Qn) ₌ ( _a ( _{4,12,16 )} x _{R1 x} cos(( ₃ x π)/ 4), a _(4,12,16) × _R1 ×sin((3×π)/4))
Input bits [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ] = [10110] (I _n , Q _n ) = (a _{(4, 12, 16)} × R ₂ × cos((5 × π)/ 4-π/6), a _(4,12,16) ×R ₂ ×sin((5×π)/4-π/6))
Input bits [ _b4b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [10111] (In, _Qn ) ₌ (a( _{4,12,16 )} x _{R1 x} cos(( ₅ x π)/ 4), a _(4,12,16) × _R1 ×sin((5×π)/4))
Input bits [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ] = [11000] (I _n , Q _n ) = (a _{(4, 12, 16)} x R ₃ x cos((0 x π)/ 8), a _(4,12,16) ×R3×sin ₍ (0×π)/8))
Input bit [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ] = [11001] (I _n , Q _n ) = (a _{(4, 12, 16)} x R ₃ x cos((2 x π)/ 8), a _(4,12,16) ×R3×sin(( ₂ ×π)/8))
Input bits [ _b4b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [11010] ( _In , _Qn ) ₌ ( _a ( _{4,12,16 )} x R3 x cos ₍ (15 x
π)/8), a _(4,12,16) ×R3×sin ₍ (15×π)/8))
Input bits [ _b4b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [11011] ( _In , _Qn ) ₌ ( _a ( _{4,12,16 )} x R3 x cos ₍ (13 x
π)/8), a _(4,12,16) ×R ₃ ×sin((13×π)/8))
Input bits [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ] = [11100] (I _n , Q _n ) = (a _{(4, 12, 16)} x R ₃ x cos((7 x π)/ 8), a _(4,12,16) ×R3×sin(( ₇ ×π)/8))
Input bit [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ] = [11101] (I _n , Q _n ) = (a _{(4, 12, 16)} x R ₃ x cos((5 x π)/ 8), a _(4,12,16) ×R3×sin(( ₅ ×π)/8))
Input bits [ _b4b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [11110] ( _In , _Qn ) ₌ ( _a ( _{4,12,16 )} x R3 x cos(( ₈ x π)/ 8), a _(4,12,16) ×R3×sin(( ₈ ×π)/8))
Input bits [ _b4b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [11111] ( _In , _Qn ) ₌ ( _a ( _{4,12,16 )} x R3 x cos(( ₁₀ x
π)/8), a _(4,12,16) ×R ₃ ×sin((10×π)/8))

Also, for example, above,
Input bits [ _b4b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [00000] (In, _Qn ) ₌ ( _a ( _{4,12,16 )} x _{R2 x} cos(π/4), a _(4,12,16) × _R2 ×sin(π/4))
However, in the data input to the mapping unit 708, when the _five bits [ _b4b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [00000], ₍ In, _Qn ) ₌ ( _{a ( 4,12,16)} × _R2 ×cos(π/4),a _(4,12,16) × _R2
×sin(π/4)).

In another example,
Input bit [ _b4b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [01000] ( _In , _Qn ) ₌ ( _a ( _{4,12,16 )} x R3 x cos ₍ π/8), a _(4,12,16) ×R3 ×sin ₍ π/8))
However, in the data input to the mapping unit 708, when the _five bits [ _b4b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [01000], ₍ In, _Qn ) ₌ ( _{a ( 4,12,16)} ×R ₃ ×cos(π/8), a _(4,12,16) ×R ₃ ×sin(π/8)).

_In this respect, input bits [ _b4b3b2b1b0 ] _{are all} the same for [ ₀₀₀₀₀ ] to [11111].

<Transmitting station>
The transmitting station in FIG. 41 is an example of a transmitting station that performs common amplification.

The N transmission systems B101_1 to B101_N in FIG. 41 receive video data, audio data, and a control signal A100, respectively.

The control signal A100 designates the code length, coding rate, modulation method, and ring ratio of the error correction code for each channel. Assume that this modulation scheme specifies, for example, (4,12,16)32APSK.

Transmission systems B101_1 to B101_N generate modulated signals according to control signal A100.

Common amplifier B102 receives modulated signals #1 to #N, amplifies the input modulated signals, and outputs amplified transmission signal B103 containing modulated signals #1 to #N.

This transmission signal B103 is composed of N channel signals of modulated signals #1 to #N, and includes a "TMCC information symbol group" for each channel (each modulated signal), and this "TMCC information symbol group" is used for error correction. In addition to the code length, coding rate, and modulation scheme of the code, it contains information on the ring ratio.

Specifically, modulated signal #1 includes a "TMCC information symbol group" in modulated signal #1 (channel #1), and modulated signal #2 includes a "TMCC information symbol group" in modulated signal #2 (channel #2). . . , modulated signal #N includes “TMCC information symbol group” in modulated signal #N (channel #N).

Then, the transmission signal B103 is transmitted via the antenna B104.

The transmitting station in FIG. 42 is an example of a transmitting station that separately amplifies each channel transmission system.

The N amplifiers B201_1 to B201_N amplify the input modulated signals and output transmission signals B202_1 to B202_N. Transmission signals B202_1 to B202_N are transmitted via antennas B203_1 to B203_N.

The transmitting station in FIG. 43 is an example of a transmitting station that amplifies each transmission system of a channel individually, but transmits after mixing in a mixer.

Mixer B301 mixes the modulated signals after amplification output from amplifiers B201_1 to B201_N, and transmits mixed transmission signal B302 via antenna B303.

<Frequency Allocation of Each Modulation Signal>
FIG. 44 shows an example of frequency allocation of signals (transmission signals or modulated signals) B401_1 to B401_N. In FIG. 44, the horizontal axis is frequency and the vertical axis is power. As shown in FIG. 44, B401_1 indicates the position on the frequency axis of transmission signal #1 (modulation signal #1) in FIGS. B401_N indicates the position on the frequency axis of signal #2 (modulated signal #2), and B401_N indicates the position on the frequency axis of transmission signal #N (modulated signal #N) in FIGS. showing.

<Satellite>
In the satellite of FIG. 45, a receiving antenna B501 receives a signal transmitted by a transmitting station and outputs a received signal B502. Received signal B502 contains the components of modulated signal #1 to modulated signal #N in FIGS.
B503 in FIG. 45 is a wireless processing unit. It is assumed that the radio processing unit B503 includes radio processing B503_1 to B503_N.

The radio processing B503_1 receives the received signal B502, performs signal processing such as amplification and frequency conversion on the component of the modulated signal #1 in FIGS. Output signal #1.

Similarly, the radio processing B503_2 receives the received signal B502, performs signal processing such as amplification and frequency conversion on the components of the modulated signal #2 in FIGS. It outputs a later modulated signal #2.
・・・

The radio processing B503_N receives the received signal B502, performs signal processing such as amplification and frequency conversion on the components of the modulated signal #N in FIGS. Output signal #N.

The amplifier B504_1 receives the modulated signal #1 after signal processing, amplifies it, and outputs the amplified modulated signal #1.

Amplifier B504_2 receives modulated signal #2 after signal processing, amplifies it, and outputs modulated signal #2 after amplification.
・・・

Amplifier B504_N receives modulated signal #2 after signal processing, amplifies it, and outputs modulated signal #N after amplification.

Then, each amplified modulated signal is transmitted via antennas B505_1 to B505_N. (The transmitted modulated signal will be received by a terminal on the ground.)

At this time, the frequency allocation of signals transmitted by satellites (repeaters) will be described with reference to FIG.

44, B401_1 indicates the position on the frequency axis of transmission signal #1 (modulation signal #1) in FIGS. 41, 42 and 43, and B401_2 indicates the position in FIGS. , B401_N indicates the position on the frequency axis of transmission signal #2 (modulation signal #2) of FIG. 41, FIG. 42, and FIG. 43 on the frequency axis of transmission signal #N (modulation signal #N) showing the position. At this time, it is assumed that the frequency band being used is the α GHz band.

44, B401_1 indicates the position on the frequency axis of the modulated signal #1 transmitted by the satellite (repeater) in FIG. 45, and B401_2 indicates the modulated signal #2 transmitted by the satellite (repeater) in FIG. , B401_N indicates the position on the frequency axis of the modulated signal #N transmitted by the satellite (repeater) in FIG. At this time, it is assumed that the frequency band being used is the β GHz band.

The satellite in FIG. 46 differs from that in FIG. 45 in that the signals are mixed in the mixer B601 before being transmitted. That is, the mixer B601 receives the amplified modulated signal #1, the amplified modulated signal #2, . . . , the amplified modulated signal #N, and generates the mixed modulated signal. The modulated signal after mixing includes modulated signal #1 component, modulated signal #2 component, . It shall be a band signal.

<Selection of ring ratio>
In the satellite system described in FIGS. 41 to 46, two ring ratios (radius ratios) (r ₁ , r ₂ ) of (4,12,16)32APSK are set for each channel from channel #1 to channel #N. A mode of selection will be described.

For example, it is assumed that the code length (block length) of the error correction code is X bits and the coding rate A (for example, 3/4) is selected from a plurality of selectable coding rates.

In the satellite system of Figures 45 and 46, amplifiers B504_1, B504_2, . . . , B504_N has a small distortion (high input/output linearity), the two ring ratios (radius ratios) (r ₁ , r ₂ ) of (4,12,16)32APSK can be uniquely determined, but a suitable If the value is set, the (terrestrial) terminal (receiving device) can obtain high data reception quality.

Satellite systems transmit modulated signals to terminals on the earth, so amplifiers capable of obtaining high power are used. For this reason, amplifiers with large distortion (low input/output linearity) are used, and there is a high possibility that the distortion varies greatly among amplifiers (amplifiers B504_1, B504_2, . B504_N has different distortion characteristics (input/output characteristics)).

In this case, we use two ring ratios (radius ratios) (r ₁ , r ₂ ) of (4,12,16)32APSK preferred for each amplifier, i.e., (4,12,16) When two ring ratios (radius ratios) (r ₁ , r ₂ ) of 32APSK are set, the terminal can obtain high data reception quality in each channel. The transmitting stations in FIGS. 41, 42, and 43 use the control signal A100 to achieve such settings.

Therefore, the control information, such as TMCC, included in each modulated signal (each channel) contains information about the two ring ratios (radius ratios) (r ₁ , r ₂ ) of (4,12,16)32APSK. will be included. (This point is as described in other embodiments.)

Therefore, when the (terrestrial) transmitting stations in FIGS. 41, 42, and 43 use (4, 12, 16)32APSK as the modulation scheme for the data symbols of modulated signal #1, they use (4, 12, 16) Information on two ring ratios (radius ratios) (r ₁ , r ₂ ) of 32APSK is transmitted as part of the control information.

Similarly, the (terrestrial) transmitting stations in FIGS. 41, 42, and 43 use (4 , 12, 16) 32APSK two ring ratio (radius ratio) (r ₁ , r ₂ ) information is transmitted as part of the control information.
・・・

Similarly, the (terrestrial) transmitting stations in FIGS. 41, 42, and 43 use (4 , 12, 16) 32APSK two ring ratio (radius ratio) (r ₁ , r ₂ ) information is transmitted as part of the control information.

The coding rate of the error correcting code used in modulated signal #1, the coding rate of the error correcting code used in modulated signal #2, . . . , the coding rate of the error correcting code used in modulated signal #N may be the same.

<Receiving device>
A receiving apparatus compatible with the transmission method of this embodiment will be described.

The receiving apparatus A200 (at the terminal) in FIG. 40 receives, at the antenna A201, the radio signal transmitted by the transmitting station in FIGS. The reception RFA 202 performs processing such as frequency conversion and quadrature demodulation on the received radio signal, and outputs a baseband signal.

The demodulator A204 performs processing such as root roll-off filtering, and outputs a filtered baseband signal.

Synchronization/channel estimation unit A214 receives the filtered baseband signal as input, and performs time synchronization, frequency synchronization, and channel estimation using, for example, "synchronization symbol group" and "pilot symbol group" transmitted by the transmitting device. , outputs the estimated signal.

The control information estimation unit A216 receives the filtered baseband signal as input, extracts symbols including control information such as "TMCC information symbol group", demodulates and decodes the symbols, and outputs a control signal. What is important in this embodiment is that receiving apparatus A200 demodulates and decodes symbols that transmit information in the "TMCC information symbol group". Then, the receiver A10 generates information specifying the code length of the error correction code, the coding rate, the modulation scheme, and the ring ratio information for each channel from the decoded value, and outputs the control information as part of the control signal. The estimation unit A216 outputs.

The demapping unit A206 receives the filtered baseband signal, the control signal, and the estimated signal, and based on the control signal, determines the modulation scheme (or transmission method) used by the "slot consisting of data symbol groups". and ring ratio, and based on this determination, calculate and output the log-likelihood ratio (LLR) of each bit included in the data symbol from the filtered baseband signal and estimated signal. (However, instead of a soft decision value like LLR, a high decision value may be output, or a soft decision value instead of LLR may be output.)

The deinterleaving unit A208 receives the log-likelihood ratio and the control signal, accumulates them, performs deinterleaving (reordering of data) corresponding to the interleaving used by the transmission device, and outputs the log-likelihood ratio after deinterleaving. do.

The error correction decoding unit A212 receives the deinterleaved logarithmic likelihood ratio and the control signal as inputs, determines the error correction method used (code length, coding rate, etc.), and based on this determination, performs error correction decoding. to obtain the estimated information bits. In addition, when the error correction code used is the LDPC code, the decoding method includes belief propagation decoding (BP (Belief Propagation) decoding) such as sum-product decoding, Shuffled BP (Belief Propagation) decoding, and Layered BP decoding. etc. will be used. The above is the operation when iterative detection is not performed, but a receiver that performs iterative detection as described in the receiver of FIG. 2 may also be used.

Note that the method of generating ring ratio information included in the control information is not limited to the embodiment described before this embodiment, and information related to the ring ratio may be transmitted in any way. .

(Embodiment F)
This embodiment uses ring ratios (e.g. two ring ratios (radius ratios) of (4,12,16)32APSK)
) to the terminal (control information transmission method) will be described.

The definition of the ring ratio (for example, the two ring ratios (radius ratio) of (4, 12, 16) 32APSK) was defined before this embodiment, and the ring ratio is another name, It may also be called the "radius ratio".

Such signaling may be done using bits contained in the "TMCC Information Symbol Group" described herein.

In the present embodiment, an example of a method of configuring a "TMCC information symbol group" will be described based on "Transmission system standard for advanced wideband satellite digital broadcasting ARIB STD-B44 Version 1.0".

In order for the transmitting station to notify the terminal of information about the ring ratio via a satellite (repeater), it involves the use of 3614 bits of "extended information" in the "TMCC information symbol group" described in FIG. is also conceivable. (This point is also described in "Transmission Method Standard for Advanced Broadband Satellite Digital Broadcasting ARIB STD-B44 Version 1.0".) This is shown in FIG.

The extension information in FIG. 47 is a field used for future TMCC information extension, and consists of a 16-bit extension identification and a 3598-bit extension area. In the "extension information" of TMCC in FIG. 47, when adopting "method A", all extension identifications are set to "0" (all 16 bits are zero), and all 3598 bits of the extension area are set to "1". .

When "method B" is adopted, it is assumed that it is time to extend the TMCC information, and all extension identifications take values other than "0", that is, values other than "0000000000000000". It should be noted that which of the methods A and B is adopted is determined by user setting, for example.

"Scheme A" is a transmission scheme (for example, satellite digital broadcasting) in which the ring ratio is determined when the coding rate of the error correcting code is set to a certain value. (The ring ratio is uniquely determined when the coding rate of the error correction code to be used is determined.)

"System B" is a transmission system (for example, satellite digital broadcasting) that can select a ring ratio to be used from a plurality of ring ratios when the coding rate of the error correcting code is set to a certain value.

Examples of signaling performed by the transmitting station will be described below with reference to FIGS. 59 to 63. In all examples, the following bits are commonly used for signaling.
d ₀ : Indicates the satellite broadcasting system.
c ₀ c ₁ c ₂ c ₃ (c ₄ c ₅ c ₆ c ₇ ): indicates a table.
b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ : Indicates coding rate (sometimes also indicates ring ratio).
x ₀ x ₁ x ₂ x ₃ x ₄ x ₅ (x ₆ x ₇ x ₈ x ₉ x ₁₀ x ₁₁ ): indicates the ring ratio.
y ₀ y ₁ y ₂ y ₃ y ₄ y ₅ (y ₆ y ₇ y ₈ y ₉ y ₁₀ y ₁₁ ): Indicates the difference in ring ratio.
Further details regarding the above bits are provided below.

The "encoding rate" described in FIGS. 59 to 63 is the encoding rate of the error correction code, specifically 41/120, 49/120, 61/120, 109/120. These numerical values are approximately expressed as follows: 41/120 ≈ 1/3, 49/120 ≈ 2/5, 61/120 ≈ 1/2, 109/120 ≈ 9/10 becomes.

<Example 1> to <Example 5> will be described below.

In the extension information of FIG. 47, if all extension identifications are set to "0" (all 16 bits are zero) and all 3598 bits of the extension area are set to "1", the above "method A" is selected.

First, a case where a transmitting device (transmitting station) transmits a modulated signal using "scheme A" will be described.

When the transmitting device (transmitting station) selects (4,12,16)32APSK as the modulation method, the relationship between the coding rate of the error correction code and the ring ratio of (4,12,16)32APSK is as follows. Become.

Therefore, by setting all TMCC extension identifications to "0" (all 16 bits are zero) and all 3598 bits of the TMCC extension area to "1" (the transmitting device transmits these values), " The receiver can discriminate that "system A" has been selected, and information on the coding rate of the error correction code being used is transmitted as part of the TMCC. From this information, the receiver can determine the two ring ratios (radius ratios) of (4,12,16)32APSK when using (4,12,16)32APSK as the modulation scheme.

Specifically, b ₀ , b ₁ , b ₂ and b ₃ described above are used. The relationship between b ₀ , b ₁ , b ₂ , b ₃ and the coding rate of the error correction code is as follows.

As shown in Table 19, when the transmitting device (transmitting station) uses 41/120 as the coding rate of the error correction code, set (b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ )=(0000). Also, when 49/120 is used as the coding rate of the error correcting code, (b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ )=(0001) is set, . . . Using 120 would set (b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ )=(1001). It then transmits b ₀ , b ₁ , b ₂ , b ₃ as part of the TMCC.

Therefore, the following table can be created.

As can be seen from Table 20,
When the transmitting device (transmitting station) sets (b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ )=(0000), the coding rate of the error correction code is 41/120, and (4,12,16)32APSK is used. If so, the ring ratio (radius ratio) r ₁ is 3.09 and the ring ratio (radius ratio) r ₂ is 6.53.

When the transmitting device (transmitting station) sets (b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ )=(0001), the coding rate of the error correction code is 49/120, and (4,12,16)32APSK is used. If so, the ring ratio (radius ratio) r ₁ is 2.97 and the ring ratio (radius ratio) r ₂ is 7.17.

When the transmitting device (transmitting station) sets (b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ )=(0010), the coding rate of the error correction code is 61/120, and (4,12,16)32APSK is used. If so, the ring ratio (radius ratio) r ₁ is 3.93 and the ring ratio (radius ratio) r ₂ is 8.03.

When the transmitting device (transmitting station) sets (b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ )=(0011), the coding rate of the error correction code is 73/120, and (4,12,16)32APSK is used. If so, the ring ratio (radius ratio) r ₁ is 2.87 and the ring ratio (radius ratio) r ₂ is 5.61.

When the transmitting device (transmitting station) sets (b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ )=(0100), the coding rate of the error correction code is 81/120, and (4,12,16)32APSK is used. If so, the ring ratio (radius ratio) r ₁ is 2.92 and the ring ratio (radius ratio) r ₂ is 5.68.

When the transmitting device (transmitting station) sets (b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ )=(0101), the coding rate of the error correction code is 89/120, and (4,12,16)32APSK is used. If so, the ring ratio (radius ratio) r ₁ is 2.97 and the ring ratio (radius ratio) r ₂ is 5.57.

When the transmitting device (transmitting station) sets (b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ )=(0110), the coding rate of the error correction code is 97/120, and (4,12,16)32APSK is used. If so, the ring ratio (radius ratio) r ₁ is 2.73 and the ring ratio (radius ratio) r ₂ is 5.05.

When the transmitting device (transmitting station) sets (b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ )=(0111), the coding rate of the error correction code is 101/120, and (4,12,16)32APSK is used. If so, the ring ratio (radius ratio) r ₁ is 2.67 and the ring ratio (radius ratio) r ₂ is 4.80.

When the transmitting device (transmitting station) sets (b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ )=(1000), the coding rate of the error correction code is 105/120, and (4,12,16)32APSK is used. If so, the ring ratio (radius ratio) r ₁ is 2.76 and the ring ratio (radius ratio) r ₂ is 4.82.

When the transmitting device (transmitting station) sets (b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ )=(1001), the coding rate of the error correction code is 109/120, and (4,12,16)32APSK is used. If so, the ring ratio (radius ratio) r ₁ is 2.69 and the ring ratio (radius ratio) r ₂ is 4.66.

Therefore, the transmitting device (transmitting station) is
・Set all TMCC extension identifiers to "0" (all 16 bits are zero) and set all 3598 bits of the TMCC extension area to "1" in order to notify that "method A" is used. .
• Transmit b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ in order to estimate the coding rate of the error correction code and the ring ratio of (4,12,16)32APSK.
will be implemented.

Next, a case where a transmitting device (at a transmitting station) transmits data using "scheme B" will be described.

As described above, when "method B" is adopted, it is assumed that it is time to extend the TMCC information, and all extension identifications are values other than "0", that is, values other than "0000000000000000". . Here, as an example, when "0000000000000001" is transmitted as the extended identification, the transmitting device (of the transmitting station) transmits data using "method B".

The 16 bits of the extended identification are _d15 , _d14 , _d13 , _d12 , _d11 , _d10 , _d9 , _d8 , _d7 , _{d6 , d5} , _d4 , _d3 , d2, When "method B" is used, _{( d15} , _d14 , _d13 , _d12 , _d11 , _d10 , _d9 , _d8 , _d7 , _{d6 ,} d5, _d4 , _d3 , d2 _, d1, _d0 ) = ( ₀ , ₀ , 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 1). (As described above, when adopting "method B", ₍ d15, _d14 , _d13 , _d12 , _d11 , _d10 , _d9 , _d8 , _d7 , _d6 , _d5 , d ₄ , d ₃ , d ₂ , d ₁ , d ₀ ) other than (0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0) (d15, d14, _d13 , _d12 , _d11 , _d10 , _d9 , _d8 , _d7 , _d6 , _d5 , _d4 , _{d3 , d 2} , d ₁ , d ₀ ) = (0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 1) .)

As specific examples, <Example 1> to <Example 5> will be described below.

<Example 1>
In Example 1, in "method B", a plurality of types of tables of two ring ratios (radius ratios) of (4,12,16)32APSK are prepared, so that different ring ratios can be set for one coding rate. It is configurable.

For example, ``satellite broadcasting system is 'system B,' coding rate is 41/120, ( _4,12,16 ) _32APSK ring ratio r1 is 3.50, and ring ratio r2 is 7.21.' A case of setting will be described. (However, it is assumed that (4,12,16)32APSK is selected as the modulation method.)

As shown in FIG. 59, table 1, table 2, .

In each table, the above-described (b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ ), the coding rate of the error correction code, and the ring ratio r ₁ and the ring ratio r ₂ of (4,12,16)32APSK are related. It is

For example, in Table 1, the coding rate of the error correction code for generating data symbols is 41/120, the ( _4,12,16 ) _32APSK ring ratio r1 is 3.09, and the ring ratio r2 is 6.09. In the case of 58, (b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ )=(0000) is set. Similarly, the coding rate of the error correction code for generating data symbols is 49/120, the ( _4,12,16 ) _32APSK ring ratio r1 is 2.97, and the ring ratio r2 is 7.17. In this case, (b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ )=(0001) is set. . . . The coding rate of the error correction code for generating data symbols is 109/120, the (4,12,16)32APSK ring ratio r ₁ is 2.69, and the ring ratio r ₂ is 4.66.
Then, (b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ )=(1001) is set.

In Table 2, the coding rate of the error correction code for generating data symbols is 41/120, the ( _4,12,16 ) _32APSK ring ratio r1 is 3.50, and the ring ratio r2 is 7.21. If so, (b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ )=(0000) is set. Similarly, the coding rate of the error correction code for generating data symbols is 49/120, the ( _4,12,16 ) _32APSK ring ratio r1 is 3.20, and the ring ratio r2 is 7.15. In this case, (b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ )=(0001) is set. . . . Assume that the coding rate of the error correction code for generating data symbols is 109/120, the (4,12,16)32APSK ring ratio r ₁ is 3.00, and the ring ratio r ₂ is 5.22. In this case, (b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ )=(1001) is set.
・・・

In Table 16, the coding rate of the error correction code for generating data symbols is 41/120, the ( _4,12,16 ) _32APSK ring ratio r1 is 3.80, and the ring ratio r2 is 7.33. In this case, (b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ )=(0000) is set. Similarly, the coding rate of the error correction code for generating data symbols is 49/120, the ( _4,12,16 ) _32APSK ring ratio r1 is 3.50, and the ring ratio r2 is 7.28. In this case, (b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ )=(0001) is set. . . . Assume that the coding rate of the error correction code for generating data symbols is 109/120, the (4,12,16)32APSK ring ratio r ₁ is 3.20, and the ring ratio r ₂ is 5.33. In this case, (b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ )=(1001) is set.

In Tables 1 to 16, although not described above, the encoding rates of error correction codes are 41/120, 49/120, 61/120, 73/120, 81/120, 89/120, 97/ ₁₂₀ , _101/120 , 105/120, and 109/120 are associated with the values of _b0b1b2b3 and _two ring ratios (radius ratios) of (4,12,16)32APSK. ing.

Also, as shown in FIG. 59, it is assumed that the values of c ₀ c ₁ c ₂ c ₃ are associated with the table to be selected. When selecting table 1, set (c ₀ , c ₁ , c ₂ , c ₃ )=(0, 0, 0, 0), and when selecting table 2, set (c ₀ , c ₁ , c ₂ , c ₃ ) = ( _{0 , 0} , 0, ₁ ), . set.

Next, as an example, "the satellite broadcasting system is 'system B', the coding rate is 41/120, the ( _4,12,16 ) _32APSK ring ratio r1 is 3.50, and the ring ratio r2 is 7.50. 21” will be described.

First, as described above, "method B" is to be selected, so set _d0= "1".

Also, as shown in FIG. 59, the first row of Table 2 indicates that the coding rate 41/120 and (4,12,16)32APSK have a ring ratio r ₁ of 3.50 and a ring ratio r ₂ of 7.21. Therefore, b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ ="0000".

Therefore, the value c ₀ c ₁ c ₂ c ₃ ="0001" is used to indicate table 2 of the 16 types of tables 1-16.

Therefore, the transmitting device (transmitting station) sets the data symbol to "satellite broadcasting system"system B", coding rate to 41/120, (4,12,16) _32APSK ring ratio r1 to 3.50, _When transmitting with a ring ratio r2 of 7.21", control information with _{d0 =} " ₁ " _{, b0b1b2b3 =} "0000" _, and _{c0c1c2c3 =} "0001" (a part of TMCC information) is transmitted together with data symbols. However, as control information, it is necessary to transmit control information indicating that the modulation scheme of data symbols is (4,12,16)32APSK.

That is, in <Example 1>,
・For each coding rate of error correction code 41/120, 49/120, 61/120, 73/120, 81/120, 89/120, 97/120, 101/120, 105/120, 109/120 , b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ and the ring ratio of (12,4)16APSK are associated with each other.
- The transmitting device (transmitting station) transmits c ₀ c ₁ c ₂ c ₃ indicating the information of the used table.
As a result, the transmitting device transmits information on the two ring ratios (radius ratios) of (4,12,16)32APSK used to generate data symbols.

Note that the method of setting the ring ratio of (4,12,16)32APSK when the transmitting apparatus (transmitting station) uses the "scheme A" is as described before <Example 1>.

<Example 2>
Example 2 is a modification of <Example 1>.

Here, a case where the transmitting device (transmitting station) selects "scheme B" will be described. At this time, the transmitting device (transmitting station) selects "scheme B", so as shown in FIG. 60, it sets d ₀ =1.

Then, the transmitting device (transmitting station) newly sets _z0 . When determining the ring ratio of (12,4)16APSK by the same method as "method A", set z ₀ =0. When z ₀ is set to 0, b ₀ , b ₁ , b ₂ and b ₃ specify the coding rate of the error correction code based on Table 19, and from Table 18, (4, 12, 16) 32APSK will determine the ratio of the two rings (ratio of radii). (See Table 20)
When determining the two ring ratios (radius ratios) of (4,12,16)32APSK in the same manner as in Example 1, set z ₀ =1. At this time, instead of determining the two ring ratios (radius ratios) of (4,12,16)32APSK based on Table 18, two Determine the two ring ratios (radius ratios).

For example, ``satellite broadcasting system is 'system B,' coding rate is 41/120, ( _4,12,16 ) _32APSK ring ratio r1 is 3.50, and ring ratio r2 is 7.21.' A case of setting will be described. (However, it is assumed that (4, 12, 16) 32APSK is selected as the modulation method, and z ₀ =1.)

As shown in FIG. 60, table 1, table 2, .

In each table, the two ring ratios (radius ratios) of (4,12,16)32APSK (b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ ), the coding rate of the error correction code, and (4, 12, 16) 32APSK are associated with each other. ing.

For example, in Table 1, the coding rate of the error correction code for generating data symbols is 41/120, the ( _4,12,16 ) _32APSK ring ratio r1 is 3.09, and the ring ratio r2 is 6.09. In the case of 58, (b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ )=(0000) is set. Similarly, the coding rate of the error correction code for generating data symbols is 49/120, the ( _4,12,16 ) _32APSK ring ratio r1 is 2.97, and the ring ratio r2 is 7.17. In this case, (b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ )=(0001) is set. . . , the coding rate of the error correction code for generating data symbols is 109/120, the (4,12,16)32APSK ring ratio r ₁ is 2.69, and the ring ratio r ₂ is 4.66. In this case, (b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ )=(1001) is set.

In Table 2, the coding rate of the error correction code for generating data symbols is 41/120, the ( _4,12,16 ) _32APSK ring ratio r1 is 3.50, and the ring ratio r2 is 7.21. In this case, (b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ )=(0000) is set. Similarly, the coding rate of the error correction code for generating data symbols is 49/120, the ( _4,12,16 ) _32APSK ring ratio r1 is 3.20, and the ring ratio r2 is 7.15. In this case, (b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ )=(0001) is set. . . . Assume that the coding rate of the error correction code for generating data symbols is 109/120, the (4,12,16)32APSK ring ratio r ₁ is 3.00, and the ring ratio r ₂ is 5.22. In this case, (b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ )=(1001) is set.
・・・

In Table 16, the coding rate of the error correction code for generating data symbols is 41/120, the ( _4,12,16 ) _32APSK ring ratio r1 is 3.80, and the ring ratio r2 is 7.33. In this case, (b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ )=(0000) is set. Similarly, the coding rate of the error correction code for generating data symbols is 49/120, the ( _4,12,16 ) _32APSK ring ratio r1 is 3.50, and the ring ratio r2 is 7.28. In this case, (b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ )=(0001) is set. . . . Assume that the coding rate of the error correction code for generating data symbols is 109/120, the (4,12,16)32APSK ring ratio r ₁ is 3.20, and the ring ratio r ₂ is 5.33. In this case, (b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ )=(1001) is set.

In Tables 1 to 16, although not described above, the encoding rates of error correction codes are 41/120, 49/120, 61/120, 73/120, 81/120, 89/120, 97/ ₁₂₀ , _101/120 , 105/120, and 109/120 are associated with the values of _b0b1b2b3 and _two ring ratios (radius ratios) of (4,12,16)32APSK. ing.

Also, as shown in FIG. 60, it is assumed that the values of c ₀ c ₁ c ₂ c ₃ are associated with the table to be selected. When selecting table 1, set (c ₀ , c ₁ , c ₂ , c ₃ )=(0, 0, 0, 0), and when selecting table 2, set (c ₀ , c ₁ , c ₂ , c ₃ ) = ( _{0 , 0} , 0, ₁ ), . set.

Next, as an example, "the satellite broadcasting system is 'system B', the coding rate is 41/120, the ( _4,12,16 ) _32APSK ring ratio r1 is 3.50, and the ring ratio r2 is 7.50. 21” will be described.

First, as described above, "method B" is to be selected, so set _d0= "1". Also, set z ₀ =1.

Also, as shown in FIG. 60, the first row of Table 2 has an encoding rate of 41/120 and (4,12,1).
6) Since the ring ratio r ₁ of 32APSK is 3.50 and the ring ratio r ₂ is 7.21, b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ =0000.

Therefore, the value c ₀ c ₁ c ₂ c ₃ ="0001" is used to indicate table 2 of the 16 types of tables 1-16.

Therefore, the transmitting device (transmitting station) sets the data symbol to "satellite broadcasting system"system B", coding rate to 41/120, (4,12,16) _32APSK ring ratio r1 to 3.50, When transmitting with _a ring ratio r2 of 7.21", d0 ₌ " ₁ ", _{z0 = 1} , _{b0b1b2b3 =} "0000" _{, c0c1c2c3 =} "0001"" (a part of TMCC information) is transmitted together with the data symbol. However, as control information, it is necessary to transmit control information indicating that the modulation scheme of data symbols is (4,12,16)32APSK.

The method of setting the two ring ratios (radius ratios) of (4,12,16)32APSK when the transmitting device (transmitting station) uses "scheme A" will be explained before <Example 1>. As I did.

<Example 3>
Example 3 is characterized in that signaling is performed by a value indicating the ring ratio.

First, as in <Example 1> and <Example 2>, the transmitting device (transmitting station) transmits a modulated signal by "method B", so d ₀ =="1" is set.

Then, as shown in FIG. 61, the values of x ₀ x ₁ x ₂ x ₃ x ₄ x ₅ are associated with the ring ratio r ₁ of (4,12,16)32APSK, and x ₆ x ₇ x ₈ x ₉ Associate the values of x ₁₀ x ₁₁ with the ring ratio r ₂ of (4,12,16)32APSK.

For example, as shown in FIG. 61, the transmitting device (transmitting station) sets (x ₀ , x ₁ , x ₂ , x ₃ , x ₄ , x ₅ )=(0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0) When (4,12,16) _32APSK ring ratio r1 is set to 2.00, . . . ₍ x0, x1, x2, _x3 , x4, _x5 ) _{= ( 1} , 1, 1, 1, 1, 1), the ring ratio r ₁ of (4, 12, 16) 32APSK is set to 4.00.

Also, when ( _x6 , _x7 , _x8 , _x9 , x10, _x11 ) = ( ₀ , 0, 0, 0, 0, 0), the transmission device (transmission station) ₁₆ ) _Set the _{ring ratio r2} of _32APSK to _3.00 , . , 1), the ring ratio r ₂ of (4,12,16)32APSK is set to 7.00.

As an example, how to set the satellite broadcasting system to 'system B', (4,12,16)32APSK ring ratio r1 to 2.00, and _4,12,16 ) _32APSK ring ratio r2 to 7.00. explain.

At this time, from the “relationship between the values of x ₀ x ₁ x ₂ x ₃ x _{4 x 5} and the ring ratio r ₁ of (4,12,16)32APSK” in FIG. Set x1 _{x2 x3 x4 x5 =} "000000".

_In addition, from the "relationship between the value of _{x6x7x8x9x10x11} and the ring ratio _r2 of _{( 4,12,16} ) _32APSK ", the transmitting device _{( transmitting} station) _{uses x6x7x8} Set x ₉ x ₁₀ x ₁₁ = "111111".

Therefore, the transmitting device (transmitting station) sets the data symbol to "system B" for the satellite broadcasting system, (4,12,16) _32APSK ring ratio r1 to 2.00, (4,12,16)32APSK ring _When sending with a ratio r2 of _7.00 ", d0 ₌ " ₁ ", _x0 x1 _{x2 x3 x4 x5 =} "000000", _{x6 x7 x8} x9 x10 _x11 = "111111 " (a part of TMCC information) is transmitted together with the data symbol. However, as control information, it is necessary to transmit control information indicating that the modulation scheme of data symbols is (4,12,16)32APSK.

The method of setting the two ring ratios (radius ratios) of (4,12,16)32APSK when the transmitting device (transmitting station) uses "scheme A" will be explained before <Example 1>. As I did.

<Example 4>
Example 4 is the difference between b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ indicating the coding rate of the error correction code in the main table and the ring ratio (radius ratio) of 2 of (4,12,16)32APSK and the ring ratio r ₁ y ₀ y ₁ y ₂ y ₃ y ₄ y ₅ and y ₆ y ₇ y ₈ y ₉ y ₁₀ y ₁₁ indicating the difference between the ring ratio r ₂ and the desired (4, 12, 16) 32 APSK ring ratio r ₁ , r ₂ signaling.

_One of the important points in Example ₄ is that the main table _shown in _FIG . coding rate, ring ratio r ₁ , and ring ratio r ₂ .

Further characteristic points of Example 4 are described below.

FIG. 62 shows the difference table for ring ratio r ₁ and the difference table for ring ratio r ₂ . The difference table is a table for difference information from the (4,12,16)32APSK ring ratio set using the main table.

Based on the main table, for example, the ring ratio r ₁ of (4,12,16)32APSK is set to h ₁ .
Then, it becomes as follows.

・・・
When the transmitting device (transmitting station) _{sets ( y0y1y2y3y4y5} )= _{( 011110} ), the ring _ratio r1 of ( _4,12,16 ) _32APSK is h1+0.4. shall be set.
When the transmitting device (transmitting station) sets (y ₀ y ₁ y ₂ y ₃ y ₄ y ₅ )=(011111), the ring ratio r ₁ of (4,12,16)32APSK is h ₁ +0.2. shall be set.
When the transmitting device (transmitting station) _{sets ( y0y1y2y3y4y5} )= ₍ 100000), the ring _ratio r1 of ( _4,12,16 ) _32APSK is set to h1+ ₀ shall be
When the transmitting device (transmitting station) sets (y ₀ y ₁ y ₂ y ₃ y ₄ y ₅ )=(100001), the ring ratio r ₁ of (4,12,16)32APSK is h ₁ −0.2 shall be set as
When the transmitting device (transmitting station) sets (y ₀ y ₁ y ₂ y ₃ y ₄ y ₅ )=(100010), the ring ratio r ₁ of (4,12,16)32APSK is h ₁ −0.4 shall be set as
・・・

Also, based on the main table, for example, it is assumed that the ring ratio r ₂ of (4,12,16)32APSK is set to h ₂ .
Then, it becomes as follows.

・・・
When the transmitting device (transmitting station) sets (y ₆ y ₇ y ₈ y ₉ y ₁₀ y ₁₁ )=(011110), the ring ratio r ₂ of (4,12,16)32APSK is h ₂ +0.4. shall be set.
When the transmitting device (transmitting station) sets (y ₆ y ₇ y ₈ y ₉ y ₁₀ y ₁₁ )=(011111), the ring ratio r ₂ of (4,12,16)32APSK is h ₂ +0.2. shall be set.
When the transmitting device (transmitting station) sets (y ₆ y ₇ y ₈ y ₉ y ₁₀ y ₁₁ )=(100000), (4
, 12, 16) 32APSK ring ratio r ₂ shall be set to h ₂ +0.
When the transmitting device (transmitting station) sets (y ₆ y ₇ y ₈ y ₉ y ₁₀ y ₁₁ )=(100001), the ring ratio r ₂ of (4,12,16)32APSK is h ₂ −0.2 shall be set as
When the transmitting device (transmitting station) sets (y ₆ y ₇ y ₈ y ₉ y ₁₀ y ₁₁ )=(100010), the ring ratio r ₂ of (4,12,16)32APSK is h ₂ −0.4 shall be set as
・・・

Therefore, the transmitting apparatus determines (y ₀ y ₁ y ₂ y ₃ y ₄ y ₅ ) to correct the value h ₁ of the (4,12,16)32APSK ring ratio r ₁ determined by the main table. The value f ₁ is determined and the (4,12,16)32APSK ring ratio r ₁ is set to h ₁ +f ₁ .

Then, the transmitting device determines (y ₆ y ₇ y ₈ y ₉ y ₁₀ y ₁₁ ) to correct the value h ₂ of the (4,12,16)32APSK ring ratio r ₂ determined by the main table. The value f ₂ is determined and the (4,12,16)32APSK ring ratio r ₂ is set to h ₂ +f ₂ .

As an example, how to set the satellite broadcasting system to 'system B', the coding rate to 41/120, the ( _4,12,16 ) _32APSK ring ratio r1 to 3.49, and the ring ratio r2 to 6.73. explain.

First, the transmitting device sets _d0= "1" because "method B" is selected.

Then, in order to select the coding rate of 41/120 from the main table of FIG. 62, the transmitting device sets b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ ="0000".

Since the ring ratio r1 of ( _4,12,16 ) _32APSK corresponding to the value _{b0b1b2b3 =} "0000" in the _main table is 3.09, the difference from the desired ring ratio 3.49 is 3.49-3.09 = +0.40.

Therefore, the transmitting device sets y ₀ y ₁ y ₂ y ₃ y ₄ y ₅ ="011110" indicating "+0.40" in the difference table.

Since the ring ratio r2 of _{( 4,12,16} ) _32APSK corresponding to the value _{b0b1b2b3 =} "0000" in the main table is 6.53, the difference from the desired ring ratio of 6.73 is 6.73 -6.53=+0.20.

Therefore, the transmitting device sets y ₆ y ₇ y ₈ y ₉ y ₁₀ y ₁₁ ="011111" indicating "+0.20" in the difference table.

Therefore, the transmitting device (transmitting station) sets the data symbol to "satellite broadcasting system"system B", encoding rate as 41/120, (4,12,16) _32APSK ring ratio r1 as 3.49, ring ratio _When sending r2 with _6.73 ", _{d0 =} " ₁ ", _{b0b1b2b3 =} " ₀₀₀₀ " _{, y0y1y2y3y4y5 =} " ₀₁₁₁₁₀ ", _{y6y 7} y ₈ y ₉ y ₁₀ y ₁₁ ="011111" Control information (part of TMCC information) is transmitted together with data symbols. However, as control information, it is necessary to transmit control information indicating that the modulation scheme of data symbols is (4,12,16)32APSK.

In this example 4, part of the main table of "method A" is used even in the case of "method B", so it is suitable when part of the specifications of "method A" is also used in "method B". ing.

The method of setting the two ring ratios (radius ratios) of (4,12,16)32APSK when the transmitting device (transmitting station) uses "scheme A" will be explained before <Example 1>. As I did.

Although _one difference table is prepared for the ring ratio r1 in FIG. 62, _a plurality of difference tables may be prepared for the ring ratio r1. For example, it is assumed that difference tables ₁ to 16 are prepared for the ring ratio r1. Then, as in FIGS. 59 and 60, the difference table to be used can be selected by c ₀ c ₁ c ₂ c ₃ . _{Therefore ,} the _{transmitter sets c0c1c2c3 in addition} to _{d0 , b0b1b2b3 , y0y1y2y3y4y5 , and d0 , b0} In addition to b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ , y ₀ y ₁ y ₂ y ₃ y ₄ y ₅ , c ₀ c ₁ c ₂ c ₃ are transmitted together with the data symbols as part of the control information.

Also, from the values of y ₀ y ₁ y ₂ y ₃ y ₄ y ₅ in the difference table used, the correction from the value h ₁ of the (4,12,16)32APSK ring ratio r ₁ determined using the main table We will find the value f ₁ .

Similarly, in _FIG . 62, _one difference table is prepared for ring ratio r2, but a plurality of difference tables may be prepared for ring ratio r2. For example, it is assumed that difference tables ₁ to 16 are prepared for the ring ratio r2. 59 and 60, the difference table to be used can be selected from c ₄ c ₅ c ₆ c ₇ corresponding to c ₀ c ₁ c ₂ c ₃ . _Therefore , the _{transmitter sets c4c5c6c7 in addition to d0 , b0b1b2b3 , y6y7y8y9y10y11 , and d0 , b0} In addition to b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ , y ₆ y ₇ y ₈ y ₉ y ₁₀ y ₁₁ , c ₄ c ₅ c ₆ c ₇ are transmitted together with the data symbols as part of the control information.

Also, from the values of y ₆ y ₇ y ₈ y ₉ y ₁₀ y ₁₁ in the difference table used, the correction from the value h ₂ of the ring ratio r ₂ of (4,12,16)32APSK determined using the main table We will find the value f ₂ .

Note that when a plurality of differential tables for ring ratio r1 and _a plurality of differential tables for ring _{ratio r2 are} prepared, the _transmitting device will _{set d0} , _{b0b1b2b3 , y0y1y2 y3 y4 y5} , _{y6 y7 y8 y9 y10}
In addition to y ₁₁ , c ₀ c ₁ c ₂ c ₃ , c ₄ c ₅ c ₆ c ₇ are transmitted together with data symbols as part of the control information.

<Example 5>
Example 5 is b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ indicating the coding rate of the error correcting code and two ring ratios (radius ratios) of (4,12,16)32APSK in the main table, and the difference between the ring ratio r ₁ y ₀ y ₁ y ₂ y ₃ indicating
y ₆ y ₇ y ₈ y ₉ y ₁₀ y ₁₁ indicating the difference between y ₄ y ₅ and ring ratio r ₂ to realize the signaling of the desired (4,12,16)32APSK ring ratio r ₁ , r ₂ is.

_One of the important points in Example ₅ is that the main _table shown in _FIG . The point is that it is composed of the relationship between the coding rate and the ring ratio of .

Further characteristic points of Example 5 are described below.

FIG. 63 shows a difference table (multiplication factor table). The difference table is a table for difference information from the (4,12,16)32APSK ring ratio set using the main table. Based on the main table, for example, the ring ratio r ₁ of (4,12,16)32APSK is set to h ₁ .

Then, it becomes as follows.
・・・
When the transmitting device (transmitting station) sets (y ₀ y ₁ y ₂ y ₃ y ₄ y ₅ )=(011110), the ring ratio r ₁ of (4,12,16)32APSK is h ₁ ×1.2 shall be set as
When the transmitting device (transmitting station) sets (y ₀ y ₁ y ₂ y ₃ y ₄ y ₅ )=(011111), the ring ratio r ₁ of (4,12,16)32APSK is h ₁ ×1.1 shall be set as
When the transmitting device (transmitting station) sets (y ₀ y ₁ y ₂ y ₃ y ₄ y ₅ )=(100000), the ring ratio r ₁ of (4,12,16)32APSK is h ₁ ×1.0 shall be set as
When the transmitting device (transmitting station) sets (y ₀ y ₁ y ₂ y ₃ y ₄ y ₅ )=(100001), the ring ratio r ₁ of (4,12,16)32APSK is h ₁ ×0.9 shall be set as
When the transmitting device (transmitting station) sets (y ₀ y ₁ y ₂ y ₃ y ₄ y ₅ )=(100010), the ring ratio r ₁ of (4,12,16)32APSK is h ₁ ×0.8 shall be set as
・・・

Then, based on the main table, for example, the ring ratio r2 of ( _4,12,16 ) _32APSK is set to h2.
Then, it becomes as follows.
・・・
When the transmitting device (transmitting station) sets (y ₆ y ₇ y ₈ y ₉ y ₁₀ y ₁₁ )=(011110), the ring ratio r ₂ of (4,12,16)32APSK is h ₂ ×1.2 shall be set as
When the transmitting device (transmitting station) sets (y ₆ y ₇ y ₈ y ₉ y ₁₀ y ₁₁ )=(011111), the ring ratio r ₂ of (4,12,16)32APSK is h ₂ ×1.1 shall be set as
When the transmitting device (transmitting station) sets (y ₆ y ₇ y ₈ y ₉ y ₁₀ y ₁₁ )=(100000), the ring ratio r ₂ of (4,12,16)32APSK is h ₂ ×1.0 shall be set as
When the transmitting device (transmitting station) sets (y ₆ y ₇ y ₈ y ₉ y ₁₀ y ₁₁ )=(100001), the ring ratio r ₂ of (4,12,16)32APSK is h ₂ ×0.9 shall be set as
When the transmitting device (transmitting station) sets (y ₆ y ₇ y ₈ y ₉ y ₁₀ y ₁₁ )=(100010), the ring ratio r ₂ of (4,12,16)32APSK is h ₂ ×0.8 shall be set as
・・・

Therefore, the transmitting apparatus determines (y ₀ y ₁ y ₂ y ₃ y ₄ y ₅ ) to correct the value h ₁ of the (4,12,16)32APSK ring ratio r ₁ determined by the main table. Determine the coefficient g ₁ and set the (4,12,16)32APSK ring ratio r ₁ to h ₁ ×g ₁ .

Then, the transmitting device determines (y ₆ y ₇ y ₈ y ₉ y ₁₀ y ₁₁ ) to correct the value h ₂ of the (4,12,16)32APSK ring ratio r ₂ determined by the main table. Determine the coefficient g ₂ and set the ring ratio r ₂ for (4,12,16)32APSK to be h ₂ ×g ₂ .

As an example, how to set the satellite broadcasting system to 'system B', the coding rate to 41/120, the ( _4,12,16 ) _32APSK ring ratio r1 to 2.78, and the ring ratio r2 to 7.183. explain.

First, the transmitting device sets _d0= "1" because "method B" is selected.

Then, in order to select the coding rate of 41/120 from the main table of _FIG . 63, the transmitting device _{sets b0b1b2b3 =} "0000".

Since the ring ratio r1 of ( _4,12,16 ) _32APSK corresponding to the value _{b0b1b2b3 =} "0000" in the _main table is 3.09, the difference shown in the form of multiplication with the desired ring ratio of 2.78 is 2.78/3.09=0.9.

Therefore, the transmitting device sets y ₀ y ₁ y ₂ y ₃ y ₄ y ₅ ="100001" indicating "×0.9" in the difference table.

Also, in the main table, the ring ratio r2 of _{( 4,12,16} ) _32APSK corresponding to the value _{b0b1b2b3 =} "0000" is 6.53. The difference shown is 7.183/6.53=1.1.

Therefore, the transmitting device sets y ₆ y ₇ y ₈ y ₉ y ₁₀ y ₁₁ ="011111" indicating "×1.1" in the difference table.

Therefore, the transmitting device (transmitting station) sets the data symbol to "satellite broadcasting system" system B, coding rate as 41/120, (4,12,16) _32APSK ring ratio r1 as 2.78, ring ratio _When sending r2 with _7.183 ", d0 ₌ " ₁ " _{, b0b1b2b3 =} " ₀₀₀₀ " _{, y0y1y2y3y4y5 =} " ₁₀₀₀₀₁ ", _{y6y 7} y ₈ y ₉ y ₁₀ y ₁₁ ="011111" Control information (part of TMCC information) is transmitted together with data symbols. However, as control information, it is necessary to transmit control information indicating that the modulation scheme of data symbols is (4,12,16)32APSK.

In this example 5, part of the main table of "method A" is used even in the case of "method B", so it is suitable when part of the specifications of "method A" is also used in "method B". ing.

The method of setting the two ring ratios (radius ratios) of (4,12,16)32APSK when the transmitting device (transmitting station) uses "scheme A" will be explained before <Example 1>. As I said.

Although _one difference table is prepared for the ring ratio r1 in FIG. 63, _a plurality of difference tables may be prepared for the ring ratio r1. For example, difference tables ₁ to 16 are prepared for ring ratio r1. Then, as in FIGS. 59 and 60, the difference table to be used can be selected by c ₀ c ₁ c ₂ c ₃ . _Therefore , the _{transmitting device sets c0c1c2c3 in addition} to _{d0 , b0b1b2b3 , y0y1y2y3y4y5 , and d0 , b0} In addition to b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ , y ₀ y ₁ y ₂ y ₃ y ₄ y ₅ , c ₀ c ₁ c ₂ c ₃ is transmitted together with the data symbols as part of the control information.

Also, from the values of y ₀ y ₁ y ₂ y ₃ y ₄ y ₅ in the difference table used, the correction from the value h ₁ of the (4,12,16)32APSK ring ratio r ₁ determined using the main table We will find the value g ₁ .

Similarly, in _FIG . 63, _one difference table is prepared for ring ratio r2, but a plurality of difference tables may be prepared for ring ratio r2. For example, difference tables ₁ to 16 are prepared for the ring ratio r2. 59 and ₆₀ , the difference _table to be used can be _{selected from c4c5c6c7 corresponding to c0c1c2c3} . _Therefore , the _{transmitter sets c4c5c6c7 in addition to d0 , b0b1b2b3 , y6y7y8y9y10y11 , and d0 , b0} In addition to b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ , y ₆ y ₇ y ₈ y ₉ y ₁₀ y ₁₁ , c ₄ c ₅ c ₆ c ₇ are transmitted together with the data symbols as part of the control information.

Also, from the values of y ₆ y ₇ y ₈ y ₉ y ₁₀ y ₁₁ in the difference table used, the correction from the value h ₂ of the (4,12,16)32APSK ring ratio r ₂ determined using the main table We will find the value g ₂ .

Note that when a plurality of differential tables for ring ratio r1 and _a plurality of differential tables for ring _{ratio r2 are} prepared, the _transmitting device will _{set d0} , _{b0b1b2b3 , y0y1y2 y3 y4 y5} , _{y6 y7 y8 y9 y10}
In addition to y ₁₁ , c ₀ c ₁ c ₂ c ₃ , c ₄ c ₅ c ₆ c ₇ are transmitted together with data symbols as part of the control information.

<Receiver>
After describing the configuration common to <Example 1> to <Example 5> of the receiving apparatus corresponding to the transmission method of the present embodiment, specific processing of each example will be described.

The ground receiving apparatus (terminal) A200 in FIG. 40 receives the radio signal transmitted by the transmitting station in FIG. 39 and relayed by the satellite (relay station) at the antenna A201. The reception RFA 202 performs processing such as frequency conversion and quadrature demodulation on the received radio signal, and outputs a baseband signal.

The demodulator A204 performs processing such as root roll-off filtering, and outputs a filtered baseband signal.

Synchronization/channel estimation unit A214 receives the filtered baseband signal as input, and performs time synchronization, frequency synchronization, and channel estimation using, for example, "synchronization symbol group" and "pilot symbol group" transmitted by the transmitting device. , outputs the estimated signal.

The control information estimation unit A216 receives the filtered baseband signal as input, extracts symbols including control information such as "TMCC information symbol group", demodulates and decodes the symbols, and outputs a control signal.

In addition, what is important in this embodiment is that the control information estimation unit A216 estimates the control information included in the "TMCC information symbol group" and outputs it as a control signal. , the above d ₀ , z ₀ , c ₀ c ₁ c ₂ c ₃ , b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ , x ₀ x ₁ x ₂ x ₃ x ₄ x ₅ , y ₀ y ₁ y ₂ y ₃ y _{4 y5} , _{c4 c5 c6 c7} , _{x6 x7 x8 x9 x10 x11} , _{y6 y7 y8 y9 y10 y11} .

The demapping unit A206 receives the filtered baseband signal, the control signal, and the estimated signal, and based on the control signal, determines the modulation scheme (or transmission method) used by the "slot consisting of data symbol groups". and ring ratio, and based on this determination, calculate and output the log-likelihood ratio (LLR) of each bit included in the data symbol from the filtered baseband signal and estimated signal. (However, instead of a soft decision value like LLR, a high decision value may be output, or a soft decision value instead of LLR may be output.)

The deinterleaving unit A208 receives the log-likelihood ratio and the control signal, accumulates them, performs deinterleaving (reordering of data) corresponding to the interleaving used by the transmission device, and outputs the log-likelihood ratio after deinterleaving. do.

The error correction decoding unit A212 receives the deinterleaved logarithmic likelihood ratio and the control signal as inputs, determines the error correction method used (code length, coding rate, etc.), and based on this determination, performs error correction decoding. to obtain the estimated information bits. In addition, when the error correction code used is the LDPC code, the decoding method includes belief propagation decoding (BP (Belief Propagation) decoding) such as sum-product decoding, Shuffled BP (Belief Propagation) decoding, and Layered BP decoding. etc. will be used. The above is the operation when iterative detection is not performed, but a receiver that performs iterative detection as described in the receiver of FIG. 2 may also be used.

Such a receiving device side holds a table similar to the tables shown in <Example 1> to <Example 5> described above, and performs the reverse procedure of <Example 1> to <Example 5>. By doing so, the system of satellite broadcasting, the coding rate of the error correction code, and the ring ratio of (12,4)16APSK are estimated, and demodulation and decoding operations are performed. Each example will be described separately below.

In the following description, it is assumed that the control information estimation unit A216 of the receiving apparatus has determined from the TMCC information that the modulation scheme of the data symbols is (12,4)16APSK symbols.

<<Receiving Device Corresponding to Example 1>>
・When the transmitting device (transmitting station) transmits a modulated signal with "method A":
The control information estimating unit A216 of the receiving apparatus determines that the data symbol is a symbol transmitted by "scheme A" when d0=" ₀ " is obtained. Then, by obtaining the values of b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ , when the data symbols are symbols of (4,12,16)32APSK, two ring ratios of (4,12,16)32APSK (radius ratio ) (r ₁ , r ₂ ). Demapping section A206 then demodulates the data symbols based on these estimation information.

・When the transmitting device (transmitting station) transmits a modulated signal in "method B":
As shown in FIG. 64, the control information estimating unit _A216 of the receiving device converts d0 ₌ " ₁ " to "scheme _B " _{, c0c1c2c3 =} " ₀₀₀₁ " and _b0b1b2b3 From ="0000", the coding rate 41/120 and (4,12,16)32APSK of the error correcting code in the first row of Table ₂ have a ring ratio r1 of 3.50 and _a ring ratio r2 of 7.21. presume. Demapping section A206 then demodulates the data symbols based on these estimation information.

<<Receiving device corresponding to example 2>>
・When the transmitting device (transmitting station) transmits a modulated signal with "method A":
The control information estimating unit A216 of the receiving apparatus determines that the data symbol is a symbol transmitted by "scheme A" when d0=" ₀ " is obtained. Then, by obtaining the values of b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ , when the data symbols are symbols of (4,12,16)32APSK, two ring ratios of (4,12,16)32APSK (radius ratio ) (r ₁ , r ₂ ). Demapping section A206 then demodulates the data symbols based on these estimation information.

・When the transmitting device (transmitting station) transmits a modulated signal in "method B":
As shown in FIG. 65, when the control information estimating unit A216 of the receiving device obtains d ₀ =1 and z ₀ =0, it determines that "the ring ratio is set in the same way as in scheme A." b ₀ , b ₁ , b ₂ , b ₃ are obtained, and from Table 20, the coding rate of the error correction code and the two ring ratios (radius ratios) of (4, 12, 16)32APSK (r ₁ , r ₂ ) to estimate. Demapping section A206 then demodulates the data symbols based on these estimation information.

Also, as shown in FIG. 65, the control information estimating unit A216 of the receiving device sets d ₀ =1, z ₀ =1 to “scheme B”, c ₀ c ₁ c ₂ c ₃ =0001” and b From ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ ="0000", the coding rate of the error correcting code in the first row of Table 2 is 41/120 and the ring ratio r ₁ of (4,12,16)32APSK is set to 3.5.
0, the ring ratio r ₂ is estimated to be 7.21. Demapping section A206 then demodulates the data symbols based on these estimation information.

<<Receiving device corresponding to Example 3>>
・When the transmitting device (transmitting station) transmits a modulated signal with "method A":
The control information estimating unit A216 of the receiving apparatus determines that the data symbol is a symbol transmitted by "scheme A" when d0=" ₀ " is obtained. Then, by obtaining the values of b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ , when the data symbols are symbols of (4,12,16)32APSK, two ring ratios of (4,12,16)32APSK (radius ratio ) (r ₁ , r ₂ ). Demapping section A206 then demodulates the data symbols based on these estimation information.

・When the transmitting device (transmitting station) transmits a modulated signal in "method B":
As shown in FIG. 66, the control information estimator A216 of the receiving apparatus converts d ₀ =“1” to “scheme B”, x ₀ x ₁ x ₂ x ₃ x ₄ x ₅ =“000000” to (4,12 , ₁₆ ) estimate the ring ratio r1 of _32APSK to be 2.00, and estimate the ring ratio r2 of _32APSK to be _7.00 from _{x6x7x8x9x10x11 =} " ₁₁₁₁₁₁ " ( _4,12,16 ) . Demapping section A206 then demodulates the data symbols based on these estimation information.

<<Receiving device corresponding to Example 4>>
・When the transmitting device (transmitting station) transmits a modulated signal with "method A":
The control information estimating unit A216 of the receiving apparatus determines that the data symbol is a symbol transmitted by "scheme A" when d0=" ₀ " is obtained. Then, by obtaining the values of b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ , when the data symbols are symbols of (4,12,16)32APSK, two ring ratios of (4,12,16)32APSK (radius ratio ) (r ₁ , r ₂ ). Demapping section A206 then demodulates the data symbols based on these estimation information.

・When the transmitting device (transmitting station) transmits a modulated signal in "method B":
As shown in FIG. 67, the control information estimating unit A216 of the receiving apparatus determines that the data symbol is a "system B" symbol from d0 ₌ "1". Also, the control information _estimation unit _A216 of the receiving apparatus estimates the difference as _+0.4 from _{y0y1y2y3y4y5 =} " ₀₁₁₁₁₀ ". Also, based on b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ ="0000", the ring ratio r ₁ of (4, 12, 16) 32APSK before considering the difference is 3.09, and the coding rate of the error correction code is 41/ Estimate 120. Then, both are added and from 3.09+0.4=3.49, the ring ratio r1 of (4,12,16) _32APSK is estimated to be 3.49. Then, the control information _estimation unit _A216 of the receiving apparatus estimates the difference as _+0.2 from _{y6y7y8y9y10y11 =} " ₀₁₁₁₁₁ ". Also, based on b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ ="0000", the ring ratio r ₂ of (4, 12, 16) 32APSK before considering the difference is 6.53, and the coding rate of the error correction code is 41/ Estimate 120. Then, the _two are added and from 6.53+0.2=6.73, the ring ratio r2 of (4,12,16)32APSK is estimated to be 6.73. Demapping section A206 then demodulates the data symbols based on these estimation information.

<<Receiving device corresponding to Example 5>>
・When the transmitting device (transmitting station) transmits a modulated signal with "method A":
The control information estimating unit A216 of the receiving apparatus determines that the data symbol is a symbol transmitted by "scheme A" when d0=" ₀ " is obtained. Then, by obtaining the values of b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ , when the data symbols are ((4,12,16)32APSK symbols, the two ring ratios (radius ratio) (r ₁ , r ₂ ), and demapping section A 206 demodulates the data symbols based on this estimated information.

・When the transmitting device (transmitting station) transmits a modulated signal in "method B":
As shown in FIG. 68, the control information estimating unit A216 of the receiving apparatus determines that the data symbol is a "scheme B" symbol from d0 ₌ "1". Also, the control information estimation unit A216 of the receiving device estimates the difference as ×0.9 based on y ₀ y ₁ y ₂ y ₃ y ₄ y ₅ ="100001". Also, based on b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ ="0000", the ring ratio r ₁ of (4, 12, 16) 32APSK before considering the difference is 3.09, and the coding rate of the error correction code is 41/ Estimate 120. Then, both are multiplied, and from 3.09×0.9=2.78, the ring ratio r ₁ of ((4,12,16)32APSK is estimated to be 2.78. Then, the control information estimation unit A216 of the receiving apparatus calculates y ₆ y ₇ y Based on ₈ y ₉ y ₁₀ y ₁₁ ="011111", the difference is estimated to be ×1.1.Also, based on b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ ="0000", (4, 12 ,16) Estimate the ring ratio r2 of _32APSK to be 6.53 and the coding rate of the error correction code to be 41/120. The ring ratio r ₂ is estimated to be 7.183, and demapping section A 206 demodulates the data symbols based on this estimated information.

(Embodiment G)
In this embodiment, a pilot symbol transmission method based on Embodiment F is described.

Note that the definition of the ring ratio (for example, the ring ratio of (4,12,16)32APSK) was defined before the present embodiment, and the ring ratio is called a “radius ratio” as another name. It's okay.

<Example of pilot symbol>
In this embodiment, a configuration example of a pilot symbol in the transmission scheme (the data symbol modulation scheme is (4,12,16)32APSK) explained in the above Embodiment F will be explained.

Note that the configuration of the transmission apparatus in this embodiment is the same as that described in Embodiment 1, so description thereof will be omitted.

Due to the nonlinearity of the power amplifier of the transmitter, intersymbol (intersymbol) interference occurs in the modulated signal. A receiving apparatus can obtain high data reception quality by reducing this intersymbol interference.

In this pilot symbol configuration example, in order to reduce inter-code (inter-symbol) interference in the receiving device, the transmitting device transmits pilot symbols using the modulation scheme and ring ratio used in the data symbols. .

Therefore, when the transmitting apparatus (transmitting station) determines the data symbol modulation scheme and ring ratio by any of the methods of <Example 1> to <Example 5> of Embodiment F, the data symbols are A pilot symbol is generated and transmitted using the same modulation scheme and ring ratio.

Specific examples are given below. However, the description is continued on the assumption that (4,12,16)32APSK is selected as the modulation scheme.

<Example 1> of Embodiment F:
The transmitting device (transmitting station) converts the data symbols into "satellite broadcasting system" system B, coding rate 41/120, (4,12,16) _32APSK ring ratio r1 of 3.50, ring ratio _When r2 is to be transmitted at 7.21", d0 ₌ " ₁ " _{, b0b1b2b3 =} " ₀₀₀₀ " _, and _{c0c1c2c3 =} "0001". Then, based _on "d0 ₌ " ₁ " _{, b0b1b2b3 =} "0000" _{, c0c1c2c3 =} "0001"", the transmitting device (transmitting station)
sets the pilot symbol modulation scheme and ring ratio to (4,12,16) _32APSK and ring ratio r1 to 3.50 and ring ratio r2 to 7.21, _respectively .

Therefore, the transmitting device (transmitting station) in turn:
(4,12,16)32APSK, a signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[00000] with a ring ratio r ₁ of 3.50 and a ring ratio r ₂ of 7.21 (baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[00001] with ring ratio r ₁ of 3.50 and ring ratio r ₂ of 7.21 (baseband signal) symbol,
( _4,12,16 ) _32APSK , _a signal point corresponding to [ _b4b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [ ₀₀₀₁₀ ] with a ring ratio r1 of 3.50 and _a ring ratio r2 of 7.21 (baseband signal) symbol,
( _4,12,16 ) _32APSK , _a signal point corresponding to [ _b4b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [ ₀₀₀₁₁ ] with a ring ratio r1 of 3.50 and _a ring ratio r2 of 7.21 (baseband signal) symbol,
( _4,12,16 ) _32APSK , _a signal point corresponding to [ _b4b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [ ₀₀₁₀₀ ] with a ring ratio r1 of 3.50 and _a ring ratio r2 of 7.21 (baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, a signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[00101] with a ring ratio r ₁ of 3.50 and a ring ratio r ₂ of 7.21 (baseband signal) symbol,
( _4,12,16 ) _32APSK , _a signal point corresponding to [ _b4b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [ ₀₀₁₁₀ ] with a ring ratio r1 of 3.50 and _a ring ratio r2 of 7.21 (baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]= for ring ratio r ₁ value of 3.50 and ring ratio r ₂ value of 7.21
the symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [00111],
( _4,12,16 ) _32APSK , _a signal point corresponding to [ _b4b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [ ₀₁₀₀₀ ] with a ring ratio r1 of 3.50 and _a ring ratio r2 of 7.21 (baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16) _32APSK , _a signal point corresponding to [ _b4b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [ ₀₁₀₀₁ ] with _a ring ratio r1 of _3.50 and a ring ratio r2 of 7.21 (baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, a signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[01010] with a ring ratio r ₁ of 3.50 and a ring ratio r ₂ of 7.21 (baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, a signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[01011] with a ring ratio r ₁ of 3.50 and a ring ratio r ₂ of 7.21 (baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16) _32APSK , _a signal point corresponding to [ _b4b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [ ₀₁₁₀₀ ] with _a ring ratio r1 of _3.50 and a ring ratio r2 of 7.21 (baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, a signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[01101] with a ring ratio r ₁ of 3.50 and a ring ratio r ₂ of 7.21 (baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, a signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[01110] with a ring ratio r ₁ of 3.50 and a ring ratio r ₂ of 7.21 (baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, a signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[01111] with a ring ratio r ₁ of 3.50 and a ring ratio r ₂ of 7.21 (baseband signal) symbol,

(4,12,16)32APSK, a signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[10000] with a ring ratio r ₁ of 3.50 and a ring ratio r ₂ of 7.21 (baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[10001] with ring ratio r ₁ of 3.50 and ring ratio r ₂ of 7.21 (baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[10010] with ring ratio r ₁ of 3.50 and ring ratio r ₂ of 7.21 (baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, a signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[10011] with a ring ratio r ₁ of 3.50 and a ring ratio r ₂ of 7.21 (baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, a signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[10100] with a ring ratio r ₁ of 3.50 and a ring ratio r ₂ of 7.21 (baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, a signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[10101] with a ring ratio r ₁ of 3.50 and a ring ratio r ₂ of 7.21 (baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, a signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[10110] with a ring ratio r ₁ of 3.50 and a ring ratio r ₂ of 7.21 (baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, a signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[10111] with a ring ratio r ₁ of 3.50 and a ring ratio r ₂ of 7.21 (baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, a signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[11000] with a ring ratio r ₁ of 3.50 and a ring ratio r ₂ of 7.21 (baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, a signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[11001] with a ring ratio r ₁ of 3.50 and a ring ratio r ₂ of 7.21 (baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, a signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[11010] with a ring ratio r ₁ of 3.50 and a ring ratio r ₂ of 7.21 (baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, a signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[11011] with a ring ratio r ₁ of 3.50 and a ring ratio r ₂ of 7.21 (baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[11100] with ring ratio r ₁ of 3.50 and ring ratio r ₂ of 7.21 (baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, a signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[11101] with a ring ratio r ₁ of 3.50 and a ring ratio r ₂ of 7.21 (baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, a signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[11110] with a ring ratio r ₁ of 3.50 and a ring ratio r ₂ of 7.21 (baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, a signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[11111] with a ring ratio r ₁ of 3.50 and a ring ratio r ₂ of 7.21 (baseband signal) symbol,
are transmitted as pilot symbols.

As a result, the receiving apparatus can estimate the inter-symbol interference with high precision, so that high data reception quality can be obtained.

Note that the pilot symbols are not only symbols for estimating intersymbol interference, but the pilot symbols may be used by the receiving device to estimate the radio wave propagation environment (channel estimation) between the transmitting device and the receiving device. Also, frequency offset estimation and time synchronization may be performed.

If the transmitting device sets the ring ratio of the data symbols to a different value, the pilot symbols are also changed to the same ring ratio as the data symbols (the value of the ring ratio r ₁ is L ₁ , the ring ratio r ₂ is L ₂ ), the transmitting device (transmitting station), in turn,


(4,12,16)32APSK, L ₁ is the value of ring ratio r ₁ , L ₂ is the signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b _{2 b 1} b ₀ ]=[00000] band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, L ₁ is the value of ring ratio r ₁ , and L ₂ is the signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[00001] of ring ratio r ₂ (base band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, L ₁ is the value of ring ratio r ₁ , and L ₂ is the signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[00010] of ring ratio r ₂ (base band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, L ₁ is the value of ring ratio r ₁ , and L ₂ is the signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[00011] of ring ratio r ₂ (base band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, L ₁ is the value of ring ratio r ₁ , and L ₂ is the signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[00100] of ring ratio r ₂ (base band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, L ₁ is the value of ring ratio r ₁ , and L ₂ is the signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[00101] of ring ratio r ₂ (base band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, L ₁ is the value of ring ratio r ₁ , and L ₂ is the signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[00110] of ring ratio r ₂ (base band signal) symbol,
( _4,12,16 ) _32APSK , the value of ring _ratio r1 is L1, and the ring ratio r2 is L2 _, the signal _point corresponding to [ _b4b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [ ₀₀₁₁₁ ] ₍ base band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, L ₁ is the value of ring ratio r ₁ , and L ₂ is the signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[01000] of ring ratio r ₂ (base band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, L ₁ is the value of ring ratio r ₁ , and L ₂ is the signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[01001] of ring ratio r ₂ (base band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, L ₁ is the value of ring ratio r ₁ , and L ₂ is the signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[01010] of ring ratio r ₂ (base band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, L ₁ is the value of ring ratio r ₁ , and L ₂ is the signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[01011] of ring ratio r ₂ (base band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, L ₁ is the value of ring ratio r ₁ , and L ₂ is the signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[01100] of ring ratio r ₂ (base band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, L ₁ is the value of ring ratio r ₁ , and L ₂ is the signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[01101] of ring ratio r ₂ (base band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, L ₁ is the value of ring ratio r ₁ , and L ₂ is the signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[01110] of ring ratio r ₂ (base band signal) symbol,
( _4,12,16 ) _32APSK , the _value of ring _ratio r1 is L1, and the ring ratio r2 is L2, the signal _point corresponding to [ _b4b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [ ₀₁₁₁₁ ] ₍ base band signal) symbol,

_{( 4,12,16} ) _{32APSK ,} the _value of ring _{ratio r1} is L1, and the ring _{ratio r2} is L2. band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, L ₁ is the value of ring ratio r ₁ , and L ₂ is the signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[10001] of ring ratio r ₂ (base band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, L ₁ is the value of ring ratio r ₁ , and L ₂ is the signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[10010] of ring ratio r ₂ (base band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, L ₁ is the value of ring ratio r ₁ , and L ₂ is the signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[10011] of ring ratio r ₂ (base band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, L ₁ is the value of ring ratio r ₁ , and L ₂ is the signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[10100] of ring ratio r ₂ (base band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, L ₁ is the value of ring ratio r ₁ , L ₂ is the signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b _{2 b 1} b ₀ ]=[10101] band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, L ₁ is the value of ring ratio r ₁ , and L ₂ is the signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[10110] of ring ratio r ₂ (base band signal) symbol,
_{( 4,12,16} ) _{32APSK ,} ring _{ratio r1} is L1, ring _{ratio r2} is _L2 . band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, L ₁ is the value of ring ratio r ₁ , and L ₂ is the signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b _{2 b 1} b ₀ ]=[11000] band signal) symbol,
_{( 4,12,16} ) _{32APSK ,} ring _{ratio r1} is L1, ring _{ratio r2} is _L2 . band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, L ₁ is the value of ring ratio r ₁ , and L ₂ is the signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[11010] of ring ratio r ₂ (base band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, L ₁ is the value of ring ratio r ₁ , and L ₂ is the signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[11011] of ring ratio r ₂ (base band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, L ₁ is the value of ring ratio r ₁ , and L ₂ is the signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b _{2 b 1} b ₀ ]=[11100] band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, L ₁ is the value of ring ratio r ₁ , and L ₂ is the signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[11101] of ring ratio r ₂ (base band signal) symbol,
_{( 4,12,16} ) _{32APSK ,} ring _{ratio r1} is L1, ring _{ratio r2} is _L2 . band signal) symbol,
_{( 4,12,16} ) _{32APSK ,} ring _{ratio r1} is L1, ring _{ratio r2} is _L2 . band signal) symbol,
are transmitted as pilot symbols.

For <Example 2> of Embodiment F:
The transmitting device (transmitting station) converts the data symbols into "satellite broadcasting system" system B, coding rate 41/120, (4,12,16) _32APSK ring ratio r1 of 3.50, ring ratio _When sending r2 with 7.21", d0 ₌ " ₁ ", _{z0 = 1} , _{b0b1b2b3 =} "0000" _{, c0c1c2c3 =} "0001" and Control information (a part of TMCC information) is transmitted together with data symbols. Then, based on "d0 ₌ " ₁ ", _{z0 = 1} , _{b0b1b2b3 =} "0000" _{, c0c1c2c3 =} "0001"", the transmitting device (transmitting station) sets the pilot symbol modulation scheme and ring ratio to (4,12,16) _32APSK and ring ratio r1 to 3.50 and ring ratio r2 to 7.21, _respectively .

Therefore, the transmitting device (transmitting station) in turn:
(4,12,16)32APSK, a signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[00000] with a ring ratio r ₁ of 3.50 and a ring ratio r ₂ of 7.21 (baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[00001] with ring ratio r ₁ of 3.50 and ring ratio r ₂ of 7.21 (baseband signal) symbol,
( _4,12,16 ) _32APSK , _a signal point corresponding to [ _b4b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [ ₀₀₀₁₀ ] with a ring ratio r1 of 3.50 and _a ring ratio r2 of 7.21 (baseband signal) symbol,
( _4,12,16 ) _32APSK , _a signal point corresponding to [ _b4b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [ ₀₀₀₁₁ ] with a ring ratio r1 of 3.50 and _a ring ratio r2 of 7.21 (baseband signal) symbol,
( _4,12,16 ) _32APSK , _a signal point corresponding to [ _b4b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [ ₀₀₁₀₀ ] with a ring ratio r1 of 3.50 and _a ring ratio r2 of 7.21 (baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, a signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[00101] with a ring ratio r ₁ of 3.50 and a ring ratio r ₂ of 7.21 (baseband signal) symbol,
( _4,12,16 ) _32APSK , _a signal point corresponding to [ _b4b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [ ₀₀₁₁₀ ] with a ring ratio r1 of 3.50 and _a ring ratio r2 of 7.21 (baseband signal) symbol,
( _4,12,16 ) _32APSK , _a signal point corresponding to [ _b4b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [ ₀₀₁₁₁ ] with a ring ratio r1 of 3.50 and _a ring ratio r2 of 7.21 (baseband signal) symbol,
( _4,12,16 ) _32APSK , _a signal point corresponding to [ _b4b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [ ₀₁₀₀₀ ] with a ring ratio r1 of 3.50 and _a ring ratio r2 of 7.21 (baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16) _32APSK , _a signal point corresponding to [ _b4b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [ ₀₁₀₀₁ ] with _a ring ratio r1 of _3.50 and a ring ratio r2 of 7.21 (baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, a signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[01010] with a ring ratio r ₁ of 3.50 and a ring ratio r ₂ of 7.21 (baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, a signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[01011] with a ring ratio r ₁ of 3.50 and a ring ratio r ₂ of 7.21 (baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16) _32APSK , _a signal point corresponding to [ _b4b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [ ₀₁₁₀₀ ] with _a ring ratio r1 of _3.50 and a ring ratio r2 of 7.21 (baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, a signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[01101] with a ring ratio r ₁ of 3.50 and a ring ratio r ₂ of 7.21 (baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, a signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[01110] with a ring ratio r ₁ of 3.50 and a ring ratio r ₂ of 7.21 (baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, a signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[01111] with a ring ratio r ₁ of 3.50 and a ring ratio r ₂ of 7.21 (baseband signal) symbol,

(4,12,16)32APSK, a signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[10000] with a ring ratio r ₁ of 3.50 and a ring ratio r ₂ of 7.21 (baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[10001] with ring ratio r ₁ of 3.50 and ring ratio r ₂ of 7.21 (baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[10010] with ring ratio r ₁ of 3.50 and ring ratio r ₂ of 7.21 (baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, a signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[10011] with a ring ratio r ₁ of 3.50 and a ring ratio r ₂ of 7.21 (baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, a signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[10100] with a ring ratio r ₁ of 3.50 and a ring ratio r ₂ of 7.21 (baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, a signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[10101] with a ring ratio r ₁ of 3.50 and a ring ratio r ₂ of 7.21 (baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, a signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[10110] with a ring ratio r ₁ of 3.50 and a ring ratio r ₂ of 7.21 (baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, a signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[10111] with a ring ratio r ₁ of 3.50 and a ring ratio r ₂ of 7.21 (baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, a signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[11000] with a ring ratio r ₁ of 3.50 and a ring ratio r ₂ of 7.21 (baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, a signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[11001] with a ring ratio r ₁ of 3.50 and a ring ratio r ₂ of 7.21 (baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, a signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[11010] with a ring ratio r ₁ of 3.50 and a ring ratio r ₂ of 7.21 (baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, a signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[11011] with a ring ratio r ₁ of 3.50 and a ring ratio r ₂ of 7.21 (baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]= for ring ratio r ₁ value of 3.50 and ring ratio r ₂ value of 7.21
symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [11100],
(4,12,16)32APSK, a signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[11101] with a ring ratio r ₁ of 3.50 and a ring ratio r ₂ of 7.21 (baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, a signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[11110] with a ring ratio r ₁ of 3.50 and a ring ratio r ₂ of 7.21 (baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, a signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[11111] with a ring ratio r ₁ of 3.50 and a ring ratio r ₂ of 7.21 (baseband signal) symbol,
are transmitted as pilot symbols.

As a result, the receiving apparatus can estimate the inter-symbol interference with high precision, so that high data reception quality can be obtained.

Note that the pilot symbols are not only symbols for estimating intersymbol interference, but the pilot symbols may be used by the receiving device to estimate the radio wave propagation environment (channel estimation) between the transmitting device and the receiving device. Also, frequency offset estimation and time synchronization may be performed.

If the transmitting device sets the ring ratio of the data symbols to a different value, the pilot symbols are also changed to the same ring ratio as the data symbols (the value of the ring ratio r ₁ is L ₁ , the ring ratio r ₂ is L ₂ ), the transmitting device (transmitting station), in turn,

(4,12,16)32APSK, L ₁ is the value of ring ratio r ₁ , L ₂ is the signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b _{2 b 1} b ₀ ]=[00000] band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, L ₁ is the value of ring ratio r ₁ , and L ₂ is the signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[00001] of ring ratio r ₂ (base band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, L ₁ is the value of ring ratio r ₁ , and L ₂ is the signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[00010] of ring ratio r ₂ (base band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, L ₁ is the value of ring ratio r ₁ , and L ₂ is the signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[00011] of ring ratio r ₂ (base band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, L ₁ is the value of ring ratio r ₁ , and L ₂ is the signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[00100] of ring ratio r ₂ (base band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, L ₁ is the value of ring ratio r ₁ , and L ₂ is the signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[00101] of ring ratio r ₂ (base band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, L ₁ is the value of ring ratio r ₁ , and L ₂ is the signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[00110] of ring ratio r ₂ (base band signal) symbol,
( _4,12,16 ) _32APSK , the value of ring _ratio r1 is L1, and the ring ratio r2 is L2 _, the signal _point corresponding to [ _b4b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [ ₀₀₁₁₁ ] ₍ base band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, L ₁ is the value of ring ratio r ₁ , and L ₂ is the signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[01000] of ring ratio r ₂ (base band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, L ₁ is the value of ring ratio r ₁ , and L ₂ is the signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[01001] of ring ratio r ₂ (base band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, L ₁ is the value of ring ratio r ₁ , and L ₂ is the signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[01010] of ring ratio r ₂ (base band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, L ₁ is the value of ring ratio r ₁ , and L ₂ is the signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[01011] of ring ratio r ₂ (base band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, L ₁ is the value of ring ratio r ₁ , and L ₂ is the signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[01100] of ring ratio r ₂ (base band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, L ₁ is the value of ring ratio r ₁ , and L ₂ is the signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[01101] of ring ratio r ₂ (base band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, L ₁ is the value of ring ratio r ₁ , and L ₂ is the signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[01110] of ring ratio r ₂ (base band signal) symbol,
( _4,12,16 ) _32APSK , the _value of ring _ratio r1 is L1, and the ring ratio r2 is L2, the signal _point corresponding to [ _b4b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [ ₀₁₁₁₁ ] ₍ base band signal) symbol,

_{( 4,12,16} ) _{32APSK ,} the _value of ring _{ratio r1} is L1, and the ring _{ratio r2} is L2. band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, L ₁ is the value of ring ratio r ₁ , and L ₂ is the signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[10001] of ring ratio r ₂ (base band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, L ₁ is the value of ring ratio r ₁ , and L ₂ is the signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[10010] of ring ratio r ₂ (base band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, L ₁ is the value of ring ratio r ₁ , and L ₂ is the signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[10011] of ring ratio r ₂ (base band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, L ₁ is the value of ring ratio r ₁ , and L ₂ is the signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[10100] of ring ratio r ₂ (base band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, L ₁ is the value of ring ratio r ₁ , L ₂ is the signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b _{2 b 1} b ₀ ]=[10101] band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, L ₁ is the value of ring ratio r ₁ , and L ₂ is the signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[10110] of ring ratio r ₂ (base band signal) symbol,
_{( 4,12,16} ) _{32APSK ,} ring _{ratio r1} is L1, ring _{ratio r2} is _L2 . band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, L ₁ is the value of ring ratio r ₁ , and L ₂ is the signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b _{2 b 1} b ₀ ]=[11000] band signal) symbol,
_{( 4,12,16} ) _{32APSK ,} ring _{ratio r1} is L1, ring _{ratio r2} is _L2 . band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, L ₁ is the value of ring ratio r ₁ , and L ₂ is the signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[11010] of ring ratio r ₂ (base band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, L ₁ is the value of ring ratio r ₁ , and L ₂ is the signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[11011] of ring ratio r ₂ (base band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, L ₁ is the value of ring ratio r ₁ , and L ₂ is the signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b _{2 b 1} b ₀ ]=[11100] band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, L ₁ is the value of ring ratio r ₁ , and L ₂ is the signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[11101] of ring ratio r ₂ (base band signal) symbol,
_{( 4,12,16} ) _{32APSK ,} ring _{ratio r1} is L1, ring _{ratio r2} is _L2 . band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, L ₁ is the value of ring ratio r ₁ , and L ₂ is the signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[11111] of ring ratio r ₂ (base band signal) symbol,
are transmitted as pilot symbols.

For <Example 3> of Embodiment F:
The transmitting device (transmitting station) sets the data symbol as "satellite broadcasting system" system B, (4,12,16)32APSK ring ratio r1 to 2.00, _4,12,16 ) _32APSK ring ratio r2 _7.00 ", set d0 ₌ " ₁ ", _x0 x1 _{x2 x3 x4 x5 =} "000000", _{x6 x7 x8} x9 x10 _x11 = "111111" Control information (part of TMCC information) is transmitted together with data symbols. Then, based _on " _d0 =" ₁ " _{, x0x1x2x3x4x5 =} " ₀₀₀₀₀₀ " _{, x6x7x8x9x10x11 =} " ₁₁₁₁₁₁ "", the _{transmitter (} (4, 12, 16) _32APSK and ring ratio r1 of 2.00 and ring ratio r2 of 7.00, _respectively .

Therefore, the transmitting device (transmitting station) in turn:
(4,12,16)32APSK, a signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[00000] with a ring ratio r ₁ of 2.00 and a ring ratio r ₂ of 7.00 (baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, a signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[00001] with a ring ratio r ₁ of 2.00 and a ring ratio r ₂ of 7.00 (baseband signal) symbol,
( _4,12,16 ) _32APSK , _a signal point corresponding to [ _b4b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [00010] with a ring ratio r1 of _2.00 and _a ring ratio r2 of 7.00 (baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, a signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[00011] with a ring ratio r ₁ of 2.00 and a ring ratio r ₂ of 7.00 (baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, a signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[00100] with a ring ratio r ₁ of 2.00 and a ring ratio r ₂ of 7.00 (baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, a signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[00101] with a ring ratio r ₁ of 2.00 and a ring ratio r ₂ of 7.00 (baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, a signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[00110] with a ring ratio r ₁ of 2.00 and a ring ratio r ₂ of 7.00 (baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, a signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[00111] with a ring ratio r ₁ of 2.00 and a ring ratio r ₂ of 7.00 (baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, a signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[01000] with a ring ratio r ₁ of 2.00 and a ring ratio r ₂ of 7.00 (baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, a signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[01001] with a ring ratio r ₁ of 2.00 and a ring ratio r ₂ of 7.00 (baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, a signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[01010] with a ring ratio r ₁ of 2.00 and a ring ratio r ₂ of 7.00 (baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[01011] with ring ratio r ₁ of 2.00 and ring ratio r ₂ of 7.00 (baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, a signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[01100] with a ring ratio r ₁ of 2.00 and a ring ratio r ₂ of 7.00 (baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, a signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[01101] with a ring ratio r ₁ of 2.00 and a ring ratio r ₂ of 7.00 (baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, a signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[01110] with a ring ratio r ₁ of 2.00 and a ring ratio r ₂ of 7.00 (baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, a signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[01111] with a ring ratio r ₁ of 2.00 and a ring ratio r ₂ of 7.00 (baseband signal) symbol,

(4,12,16)32APSK, a signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[10000] with a ring ratio r ₁ of 2.00 and a ring ratio r ₂ of 7.00 (baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, a signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[10001] with a ring ratio r ₁ of 2.00 and a ring ratio r ₂ of 7.00 (baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, a signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[10010] with a ring ratio r ₁ of 2.00 and a ring ratio r ₂ of 7.00 (baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[10011] with ring ratio r ₁ of 2.00 and ring ratio r ₂ of 7.00 (baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, a signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[10100] with a ring ratio r ₁ of 2.00 and a ring ratio r ₂ of 7.00 (baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, a signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[10101] with a ring ratio r ₁ of 2.00 and a ring ratio r ₂ of 7.00 (baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, a signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[10110] with a ring ratio r ₁ of 2.00 and a ring ratio r ₂ of 7.00 (baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, a signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[10111] with a ring ratio r ₁ of 2.00 and a ring ratio r ₂ of 7.00 (baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, a signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[11000] with a ring ratio r ₁ of 2.00 and a ring ratio r ₂ of 7.00 (baseband signal) symbol,
( _4,12,16 ) _32APSK , [ _b4b3b2b1b0 ] _{= 2.00} for ring _ratio r1 and 7.00 for ring _ratio r2
symbol of the signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [11001],
(4,12,16)32APSK, signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[11010] with ring ratio r ₁ of 2.00 and ring ratio r ₂ of 7.00 (baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, a signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[11011] with a ring ratio r ₁ of 2.00 and a ring ratio r ₂ of 7.00 (baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, a signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[11100] with a ring ratio r ₁ of 2.00 and a ring ratio r ₂ of 7.00 (baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[11101] with ring ratio r ₁ of 2.00 and ring ratio r ₂ of 7.00 (baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[11110] with ring ratio r ₁ of 2.00 and ring ratio r ₂ of 7.00 (baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[11111] with ring ratio r ₁ of 2.00 and ring ratio r ₂ of 7.00 (baseband signal) symbol,
are transmitted as pilot symbols.

As a result, the receiving apparatus can estimate the inter-symbol interference with high precision, so that high data reception quality can be obtained.

Note that the pilot symbols are not only symbols for estimating intersymbol interference, but the pilot symbols may be used by the receiving device to estimate the radio wave propagation environment (channel estimation) between the transmitting device and the receiving device. Also, frequency offset estimation and time synchronization may be performed.

If the transmitting device sets the ring ratio of the data symbols to a different value, the pilot symbols are also changed to the same ring ratio as the data symbols (the value of the ring ratio r ₁ is L ₁ , the ring ratio r ₂ is L ₂ ), the transmitting device (transmitting station), in turn,

(4,12,16)32APSK, L ₁ is the value of ring ratio r ₁ , L ₂ is the signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b _{2 b 1} b ₀ ]=[00000] band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, L ₁ is the value of ring ratio r ₁ , and L ₂ is the signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[00001] of ring ratio r ₂ (base band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, L ₁ is the value of ring ratio r ₁ , and L ₂ is the signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[00010] of ring ratio r ₂ (base band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, L ₁ is the value of ring ratio r ₁ , and L ₂ is the signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[00011] of ring ratio r ₂ (base band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, L ₁ is the value of ring ratio r ₁ , and L ₂ is the signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[00100] of ring ratio r ₂ (base band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, L ₁ is the value of ring ratio r ₁ , and L ₂ is the signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[00101] of ring ratio r ₂ (base band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, L ₁ is the value of ring ratio r ₁ , and L ₂ is the signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[00110] of ring ratio r ₂ (base band signal) symbol,
( _4,12,16 ) _32APSK , the value of ring _ratio r1 is L1, and the ring ratio r2 is L2 _, the signal _point corresponding to [ _b4b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [ ₀₀₁₁₁ ] ₍ base band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, L ₁ is the value of ring ratio r ₁ , and L ₂ is the signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[01000] of ring ratio r ₂ (base band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, L ₁ is the value of ring ratio r ₁ , and L ₂ is the signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[01001] of ring ratio r ₂ (base band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, L ₁ is the value of ring ratio r ₁ , and L ₂ is the signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[01010] of ring ratio r ₂ (base band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, L ₁ is the value of ring ratio r ₁ , and L ₂ is the signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[01011] of ring ratio r ₂ (base band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, L ₁ is the value of ring ratio r ₁ , and L ₂ is the signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[01100] of ring ratio r ₂ (base band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, L ₁ is the value of ring ratio r ₁ , and L ₂ is the signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[01101] of ring ratio r ₂ (base band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, L ₁ is the value of ring ratio r ₁ , and L ₂ is the signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[01110] of ring ratio r ₂ (base band signal) symbol,
( _4,12,16 ) _32APSK , the _value of ring _ratio r1 is L1, and the ring ratio r2 is L2, the signal _point corresponding to [ _b4b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [ ₀₁₁₁₁ ] ₍ base band signal) symbol,

_{( 4,12,16} ) _{32APSK ,} the _value of ring _{ratio r1} is L1, and the ring _{ratio r2} is L2. band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, L ₁ is the value of ring ratio r ₁ , and L ₂ is the signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[10001] of ring ratio r ₂ (base band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, L ₁ is the value of ring ratio r ₁ , and L ₂ is the signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[10010] of ring ratio r ₂ (base band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, L ₁ is the value of ring ratio r ₁ , and L ₂ is the signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[10011] of ring ratio r ₂ (base band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, L ₁ is the value of ring ratio r ₁ , and L ₂ is the signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[10100] of ring ratio r ₂ (base band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, L ₁ is the value of ring ratio r ₁ , L ₂ is the signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b _{2 b 1} b ₀ ]=[10101] band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, L ₁ is the value of ring ratio r ₁ , and L ₂ is the signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[10110] of ring ratio r ₂ (base band signal) symbol,
_{( 4,12,16} ) _{32APSK ,} ring _{ratio r1} is L1, ring _{ratio r2} is _L2 . band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, L ₁ is the value of ring ratio r ₁ , and L ₂ is the signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b _{2 b 1} b ₀ ]=[11000] band signal) symbol,
_{( 4,12,16} ) _{32APSK ,} ring _{ratio r1} is L1, ring _{ratio r2} is _L2 . band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, L ₁ is the value of ring ratio r ₁ , and L ₂ is the signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[11010] of ring ratio r ₂ (base band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, L ₁ is the value of ring ratio r ₁ , and L ₂ is the signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[11011] of ring ratio r ₂ (base band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, L ₁ is the value of ring ratio r ₁ , and L ₂ is the signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b _{2 b 1} b ₀ ]=[11100] band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, L ₁ is the value of ring ratio r ₁ , and L ₂ is the signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[11101] of ring ratio r ₂ (base band signal) symbol,
_{( 4,12,16} ) _{32APSK ,} ring _{ratio r1} is L1, ring _{ratio r2} is _L2 . band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, L ₁ is the value of ring ratio r ₁ , and L ₂ is the signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[11111] of ring ratio r ₂ (base band signal) symbol,
are transmitted as pilot symbols.

In <Example 4> of Embodiment F:
The transmitting device (transmitting station) converts the data symbols into "satellite broadcasting system" system B, coding rate of 41/120, ( _4,12,16 ) _32APSK ring ratio r1 of 3.49, ring ratio r2 _6.73 ", _{d0 =} " ₁ ", _{b0b1b2b3 =} " ₀₀₀₀ " _{, y0y1y2y3y4y5 =} " ₀₁₁₁₁₀ " _{, y6y7y 8} y ₉ y ₁₀ y ₁₁ ="011111" Control information (part of TMCC information) is transmitted together with data symbols. Then, " _{d0 =} " ₁ ", _{b0b1b2b3 =} " ₀₀₀₀ " _{, y0y1y2y3y4y5 =} " _{011110 "} , _y6
y ₇ y ₈ y ₉ y ₁₀ y ₁₁ ="011111"", the transmitting apparatus (transmitting station) sets the pilot symbol modulation scheme and ring ratio to (4, 12, 16)32APSK and ring ratio r ₁ is set to 3.49 and the ring ratio r ₂ to 6.73.

Therefore, the transmitting device (transmitting station) in turn:
(4,12,16)32APSK, a signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[00000] with a ring ratio r ₁ of 3.49 and a ring ratio r ₂ of 6.73 (baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, a signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[00001] with a ring ratio r ₁ of 3.49 and a ring ratio r ₂ of 6.73 (baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, a signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[00010] with a ring ratio r ₁ of 3.49 and a ring ratio r ₂ of 6.73 (baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, a signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[00011] with a ring ratio r ₁ of 3.49 and a ring ratio r ₂ of 6.73 (baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, a signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[00100] with a ring ratio r ₁ of 3.49 and a ring ratio r ₂ of 6.73 (baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, a signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[00101] with a ring ratio r ₁ of 3.49 and a ring ratio r ₂ of 6.73 (baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, a signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[00110] with a ring ratio r ₁ of 3.49 and a ring ratio r ₂ of 6.73 (baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, a signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[00111] with a ring ratio r ₁ of 3.49 and a ring ratio r ₂ of 6.73 (baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, a signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[01000] with a ring ratio r ₁ of 3.49 and a ring ratio r ₂ of 6.73 (baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, a signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[01001] with a ring ratio r ₁ of 3.49 and a ring ratio r ₂ of 6.73 (baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, a signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[01010] with a ring ratio r ₁ of 3.49 and a ring ratio r ₂ of 6.73 (baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, a signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[01011] with a ring ratio r ₁ of 3.49 and a ring ratio r ₂ of 6.73 (baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, a signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[01100] with a ring ratio r ₁ of 3.49 and a ring ratio r ₂ of 6.73 (baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, a signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[01101] with a ring ratio r ₁ of 3.49 and a ring ratio r ₂ of 6.73 (baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, a signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[01110] with a ring ratio r ₁ of 3.49 and a ring ratio r ₂ of 6.73 (baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, a signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[01111] with a ring ratio r ₁ of 3.49 and a ring ratio r ₂ of 6.73 (baseband signal) symbol,

(4,12,16)32APSK, a signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[10000] with a ring ratio r ₁ of 3.49 and a ring ratio r ₂ of 6.73 (baseband signal) symbol,
( _4,12,16 ) _32APSK , _a signal point corresponding to [ _b4b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [ ₁₀₀₀₁ ] with a ring ratio r1 of 3.49 and _a ring ratio r2 of 6.73 (baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, a signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[10010] with a ring ratio r ₁ of 3.49 and a ring ratio r ₂ of 6.73 (baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, a signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[10011] with a ring ratio r ₁ of 3.49 and a ring ratio r ₂ of 6.73 (baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, a signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[10100] with a ring ratio r ₁ of 3.49 and a ring ratio r ₂ of 6.73 (baseband signal) symbol,
( _4,12,16 ) _32APSK , a signal point corresponding to [ _{b4b3b2b1b0 ] =} [ ₁₀₁₀₁ ] with a ring ratio r1 of 3.49 and _a ring ratio r2 of 6.73 (baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, a signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[10110] with a ring ratio r ₁ of 3.49 and a ring ratio r ₂ of 6.73 (baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, a signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[10111] with a ring ratio r ₁ of 3.49 and a ring ratio r ₂ of 6.73 (baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, a signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[11000] with a ring ratio r ₁ of 3.49 and a ring ratio r ₂ of 6.73 (baseband signal) symbol,
( _4,12,16 ) _32APSK , _a signal point corresponding to [ _b4b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [ ₁₁₀₀₁ ] with a ring ratio r1 of 3.49 and _a ring ratio r2 of 6.73 (baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, a signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[11010] with a ring ratio r ₁ of 3.49 and a ring ratio r ₂ of 6.73 (baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, a signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[11011] with a ring ratio r ₁ of 3.49 and a ring ratio r ₂ of 6.73 (baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, a signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[11100] with a ring ratio r ₁ of 3.49 and a ring ratio r ₂ of 6.73 (baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, a signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[11101] with a ring ratio r ₁ of 3.49 and a ring ratio r ₂ of 6.73 (baseband signal) symbol,
( _4,12,16 ) _32APSK , _a signal point corresponding to [ _b4b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [ ₁₁₁₁₀ ] with a ring ratio r1 of 3.49 and _a ring ratio r2 of 6.73 (baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, a signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[11111] with a ring ratio r ₁ of 3.49 and a ring ratio r ₂ of 6.73 (baseband signal) symbol,
are transmitted as pilot symbols.

As a result, the receiving apparatus can estimate the inter-symbol interference with high precision, so that high data reception quality can be obtained.

Note that the pilot symbols are not only symbols for estimating intersymbol interference, but the pilot symbols may be used by the receiving device to estimate the radio wave propagation environment (channel estimation) between the transmitting device and the receiving device. Also, frequency offset estimation and time synchronization may be performed.

If the transmitting device sets the ring ratio of the data symbols to a different value, the pilot symbols are also changed to the same ring ratio as the data symbols (the value of the ring ratio r ₁ is L ₁ , the ring ratio r ₂ is L ₂ ), the transmitting device (transmitting station), in turn,

(4,12,16)32APSK, L ₁ is the value of ring ratio r ₁ , L ₂ is the signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b _{2 b 1} b ₀ ]=[00000] band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, L ₁ is the value of ring ratio r ₁ , and L ₂ is the signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[00001] of ring ratio r ₂ (base band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, L ₁ is the value of ring ratio r ₁ , and L ₂ is the signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[00010] of ring ratio r ₂ (base band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, L ₁ is the value of ring ratio r ₁ , and L ₂ is the signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[00011] of ring ratio r ₂ (base band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, L ₁ is the value of ring ratio r ₁ , and L ₂ is the signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[00100] of ring ratio r ₂ (base band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, L ₁ is the value of ring ratio r ₁ , and L ₂ is the signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[00101] of ring ratio r ₂ (base band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, L ₁ is the value of ring ratio r ₁ , and L ₂ is the signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[00110] of ring ratio r ₂ (base band signal) symbol,
( _4,12,16 ) _32APSK , the value of ring _ratio r1 is L1, and the ring ratio r2 is L2 _, the signal _point corresponding to [ _b4b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [ ₀₀₁₁₁ ] ₍ base band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, L ₁ is the value of ring ratio r ₁ , and L ₂ is the signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[01000] of ring ratio r ₂ (base band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, L ₁ is the value of ring ratio r ₁ , and L ₂ is the signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[01001] of ring ratio r ₂ (base band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, L ₁ is the value of ring ratio r ₁ , and L ₂ is the signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[01010] of ring ratio r ₂ (base band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, L ₁ is the value of ring ratio r ₁ , and L ₂ is the signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[01011] of ring ratio r ₂ (base band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, L ₁ is the value of ring ratio r ₁ , and L ₂ is the signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[01100] of ring ratio r ₂ (base band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, L ₁ is the value of ring ratio r ₁ , and L ₂ is the signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[01101] of ring ratio r ₂ (base band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, L ₁ is the value of ring ratio r ₁ , and L ₂ is the signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[01110] of ring ratio r ₂ (base band signal) symbol,
( _4,12,16 ) _32APSK , the _value of ring _ratio r1 is L1, and the ring ratio r2 is L2, the signal _point corresponding to [ _b4b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [ ₀₁₁₁₁ ] ₍ base band signal) symbol,

_{( 4,12,16} ) _{32APSK ,} the _value of ring _{ratio r1} is L1, and the ring _{ratio r2} is L2. band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, L ₁ is the value of ring ratio r ₁ , and L ₂ is the signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[10001] of ring ratio r ₂ (base band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, L ₁ is the value of ring ratio r ₁ , and L ₂ is the signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[10010] of ring ratio r ₂ (base band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, L ₁ is the value of ring ratio r ₁ , and L ₂ is the signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[10011] of ring ratio r ₂ (base band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, L ₁ is the value of ring ratio r ₁ , and L ₂ is the signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[10100] of ring ratio r ₂ (base band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, L ₁ is the value of ring ratio r ₁ , L ₂ is the signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b _{2 b 1} b ₀ ]=[10101] band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, L ₁ is the value of ring ratio r ₁ , and L ₂ is the signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[10110] of ring ratio r ₂ (base band signal) symbol,
_{( 4,12,16} ) _{32APSK ,} ring _{ratio r1} is L1, ring _{ratio r2} is _L2 . band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, L ₁ is the value of ring ratio r ₁ , and L ₂ is the signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b _{2 b 1} b ₀ ]=[11000] band signal) symbol,
_{( 4,12,16} ) _{32APSK ,} ring _{ratio r1} is L1, ring _{ratio r2} is _L2 . band signal) symbol,
_{( 4,12,16} ) _{32APSK ,} ring _{ratio r1} is L1, ring _{ratio r2} is _L2 . band signal) symbol,
_{( 4,12,16} ) _{32APSK ,} ring _{ratio r1} is L1, ring _{ratio r2} is _L2 . band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, L ₁ is the value of ring ratio r ₁ , L ₂ is the signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b _{2 b 1} b ₀ ]=[11100] band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, L ₁ is the value of ring ratio r ₁ , and L ₂ is the signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[11101] of ring ratio r ₂ (base band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, L ₁ is the value of ring ratio r ₁ , and L ₂ is the signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b _{2 b 1} b ₀ ]=[11110] band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, L ₁ is the value of ring ratio r ₁ , and L ₂ is the signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[11111] of ring ratio r ₂ (base band signal) symbol,
are transmitted as pilot symbols.

In <Example 5> of Embodiment C:
The transmitting device (transmitting station) converts the data symbols into "satellite broadcasting system" system B, coding rate of 41/120, ( _4,12,16 ) _32APSK ring ratio r1 of 2.78, ring ratio r2 _7.183 ", _{d0 =} " ₁ ", _{b0b1b2b3 =} " ₀₀₀₀ " _{, y0y1y2y3y4y5 =} " ₁₀₀₀₀₁ " _{, y6y7y 8} y ₉ y ₁₀ y ₁₁ ="011111" Control information (part of TMCC information) is transmitted together with data symbols. and " _{d0 =} " ₁ " _{, b0b1b2b3 =} " _{0000 " , y0y1y2y3y4y5 = " 100001 " , y6y7y8y9y10} y ₁₁ ="011111"", the transmitting apparatus (transmitting station) sets the pilot symbol modulation scheme and ring ratio to (4, 12, 16) 32APSK and the ring ratio r ₁ value of 2.78, and the ring ratio r Set ₂ to 7.183.

Therefore, the transmitting device (transmitting station) in turn:
(4,12,16)32APSK, a signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[00000] with a ring ratio r ₁ of 2.78 and a ring ratio r ₂ of 7.183 (baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, a signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[00001] with a ring ratio r ₁ of 2.78 and a ring ratio r ₂ of 7.183 (baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, a signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[00010] with a ring ratio r ₁ of 2.78 and a ring ratio r ₂ of 7.183 (baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, a signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[00011] with a ring ratio r ₁ of 2.78 and a ring ratio r ₂ of 7.183 (baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, a signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[00100] with a ring ratio r ₁ of 2.78 and a ring ratio r ₂ of 7.183 (baseband signal) symbol,
( _4,12,16 ) _32APSK , _a signal point corresponding to [ _b4b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [00101] with a ring ratio r1 of 2.78 and _a ring ratio r2 of _7.183 (baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, a signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[00110] with a ring ratio r ₁ of 2.78 and a ring ratio r ₂ of 7.183 (baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, a signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[00111] with a ring ratio r ₁ of 2.78 and a ring ratio r ₂ of 7.183 (baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, a signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[01000] with a ring ratio r ₁ of 2.78 and a ring ratio r ₂ of 7.183 (baseband signal) symbol,
( _4,12,16 ) _32APSK , _a signal point corresponding to [ _b4b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [ ₀₁₀₀₁ ] with _a ring ratio r1 of 2.78 and a ring ratio r2 of 7.183 (baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, a signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[01010] with a ring ratio r ₁ of 2.78 and a ring ratio r ₂ of 7.183 (baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, a signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[01011] with a ring ratio r ₁ of 2.78 and a ring ratio r ₂ of 7.183 (baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, a signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[01100] with a ring ratio r ₁ of 2.78 and a ring ratio r ₂ of 7.183 (baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, a signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[01101] with a ring ratio r ₁ of 2.78 and a ring ratio r ₂ of 7.183 (baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, a signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[01110] with a ring ratio r ₁ of 2.78 and a ring ratio r ₂ of 7.183 (baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, a signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[01111] with a ring ratio r ₁ of 2.78 and a ring ratio r ₂ of 7.183 (baseband signal) symbol,

( _4,12,16 ) _32APSK , _a signal point corresponding to [ _b4b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [10000] with a ring ratio r1 of 2.78 and _a ring ratio r2 of _7.183 (baseband signal) symbol,
( _4,12,16 ) _32APSK , _a signal point corresponding to [ _b4b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [10001] with a ring ratio r1 of 2.78 and _a ring ratio r2 of _7.183 (baseband signal) symbol,
( _4,12,16 ) _{32APSK ,} [ _b4b3b2b1b0 ] with _a ring ratio r1 of 2.78 and _a ring ratio r2 of _7.183
]=symbol of signal point (baseband signal) corresponding to [10010],
( _4,12,16 ) _32APSK , _a signal point corresponding to [ _b4b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [10011] with a ring ratio r1 of 2.78 and _a ring ratio r2 of _7.183 (baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, a signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[10100] with a ring ratio r ₁ of 2.78 and a ring ratio r ₂ of 7.183 (baseband signal) symbol,
( _4,12,16 ) _32APSK , a signal point corresponding to [ _b4b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [ ₁₀₁₀₁ ] with a ring ratio r1 of 2.78 and _a ring ratio r2 of _7.183 (baseband signal) symbol,
( _4,12,16 ) _32APSK , _a signal point corresponding to [ _b4b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [10110] with a ring ratio r1 of 2.78 and _a ring ratio r2 of _7.183 (baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, a signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[10111] with a ring ratio r ₁ of 2.78 and a ring ratio r ₂ of 7.183 (baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, a signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[11000] with a ring ratio r ₁ of 2.78 and a ring ratio r ₂ of 7.183 (baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[11001] with ring ratio r ₁ of 2.78 and ring ratio r ₂ of 7.183 (baseband signal) symbol,
( _4,12,16 ) _32APSK , _a signal point corresponding to [ _b4b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [11010] with a ring ratio r1 of 2.78 and _a ring ratio r2 of _7.183 (baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, a signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[11011] with a ring ratio r ₁ of 2.78 and a ring ratio r ₂ of 7.183 (baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, a signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[11100] with a ring ratio r ₁ of 2.78 and a ring ratio r ₂ of 7.183 (baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, a signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[11101] with a ring ratio r ₁ of 2.78 and a ring ratio r ₂ of 7.183 (baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, a signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[11110] with a ring ratio r ₁ of 2.78 and a ring ratio r ₂ of 7.183 (baseband signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, a signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[11111] with a ring ratio r ₁ of 2.78 and a ring ratio r ₂ of 7.183 (baseband signal) symbol,
are transmitted as pilot symbols.

As a result, the receiving apparatus can estimate the inter-symbol interference with high precision, so that high data reception quality can be obtained.

Note that the pilot symbols are not only symbols for estimating intersymbol interference, but the pilot symbols may be used by the receiving device to estimate the radio wave propagation environment (channel estimation) between the transmitting device and the receiving device. Also, frequency offset estimation and time synchronization may be performed.

If the transmitting device sets the ring ratio of the data symbols to a different value, the pilot symbols are also changed to the same ring ratio as the data symbols (the value of the ring ratio r ₁ is L ₁ , the ring ratio r ₂ is L ₂ ), the transmitting device (transmitting station), in turn,

(4,12,16)32APSK, L ₁ is the value of ring ratio r ₁ , L ₂ is the signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b _{2 b 1} b ₀ ]=[00000] band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, L ₁ is the value of ring ratio r ₁ , and L ₂ is the signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[00001] of ring ratio r ₂ (base band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, L ₁ is the value of ring ratio r ₁ , and L ₂ is the signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[00010] of ring ratio r ₂ (base band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, L ₁ is the value of ring ratio r ₁ , and L ₂ is the signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[00011] of ring ratio r ₂ (base band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, L ₁ is the value of ring ratio r ₁ , and L ₂ is the signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[00100] of ring ratio r ₂ (base band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, L ₁ is the value of ring ratio r ₁ , and L ₂ is the signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[00101] of ring ratio r ₂ (base band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, L ₁ is the value of ring ratio r ₁ , and L ₂ is the signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[00110] of ring ratio r ₂ (base band signal) symbol,
( _4,12,16 ) _32APSK , the value of ring _ratio r1 is L1, and the ring ratio r2 is L2 _, the signal _point corresponding to [ _b4b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [ ₀₀₁₁₁ ] ₍ base band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, L ₁ is the value of ring ratio r ₁ , and L ₂ is the signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[01000] of ring ratio r ₂ (base band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, L ₁ is the value of ring ratio r ₁ , and L ₂ is the signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[01001] of ring ratio r ₂ (base band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, L ₁ is the value of ring ratio r ₁ , and L ₂ is the signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[01010] of ring ratio r ₂ (base band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, L ₁ is the value of ring ratio r ₁ , and L ₂ is the signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[01011] of ring ratio r ₂ (base band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, L ₁ is the value of ring ratio r ₁ , and L ₂ is the signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[01100] of ring ratio r ₂ (base band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, L ₁ is the value of ring ratio r ₁ , and L ₂ is the signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[01101] of ring ratio r ₂ (base band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, L ₁ is the value of ring ratio r ₁ , and L ₂ is the signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[01110] of ring ratio r ₂ (base band signal) symbol,
( _4,12,16 ) _32APSK , the _value of ring _ratio r1 is L1, and the ring ratio r2 is L2, the signal _point corresponding to [ _b4b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [ ₀₁₁₁₁ ] ₍ base band signal) symbol,

_{( 4,12,16} ) _{32APSK ,} the _value of ring _{ratio r1} is L1, and the ring _{ratio r2} is L2. band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, L ₁ is the value of ring ratio r ₁ , and L ₂ is the signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[10001] of ring ratio r ₂ (base band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, L ₁ is the value of ring ratio r ₁ , and L ₂ is the signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[10010] of ring ratio r ₂ (base band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, L ₁ is the value of ring ratio r ₁ , and L ₂ is the signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[10011] of ring ratio r ₂ (base band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, L ₁ is the value of ring ratio r ₁ , and L ₂ is the signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[10100] of ring ratio r ₂ (base band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, L ₁ is the value of ring ratio r ₁ , L ₂ is the signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b _{2 b 1} b ₀ ]=[10101] band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, L ₁ is the value of ring ratio r ₁ , and L ₂ is the signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[10110] of ring ratio r ₂ (base band signal) symbol,
_{( 4,12,16} ) _{32APSK ,} ring _{ratio r1} is L1, ring _{ratio r2} is _L2 . band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, L ₁ is the value of ring ratio r ₁ , and L ₂ is the signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b _{2 b 1} b ₀ ]=[11000] band signal) symbol,
_{( 4,12,16} ) _{32APSK ,} ring _{ratio r1} is L1, ring _{ratio r2} is _L2 . band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, L ₁ is the value of ring ratio r ₁ , and L ₂ is the signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[11010] of ring ratio r ₂ (base band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, L ₁ is the value of ring ratio r ₁ , and L ₂ is the signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[11011] of ring ratio r ₂ (base band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, L ₁ is the value of ring ratio r ₁ , and L ₂ is the signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b _{2 b 1} b ₀ ]=[11100] band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, L ₁ is the value of ring ratio r ₁ , and L ₂ is the signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[11101] of ring ratio r ₂ (base band signal) symbol,
_{( 4,12,16} ) _{32APSK ,} ring _{ratio r1} is L1, ring _{ratio r2} is _L2 . band signal) symbol,
_{( 4,12,16} ) _{32APSK ,} ring _{ratio r1} is L1, ring _{ratio r2} is _L2 . band signal) symbol,
are transmitted as pilot symbols.

The operation of the receiving device will be explained using FIG.

In FIG. 2, 210 is the configuration of the receiver. The demapping section 214 in FIG. 2 performs demapping on the mapping of the modulation scheme used by the transmitting apparatus, for example, obtains and outputs the logarithmic likelihood ratio of each bit. At this time, although not shown in FIG. 2, in order to perform demapping with high accuracy, intersymbol interference estimation, radio wave propagation environment estimation (channel estimation) between the transmitter and the receiver, and It is recommended to estimate the time synchronization and frequency offset of

Although not shown in FIG. 2, the receiving apparatus includes an intersymbol interference estimator, a channel estimator, a time synchronizer, and a frequency offset estimator. These estimators extract, for example, the pilot symbol portion from the received signal, and estimate intersymbol interference, estimate the radio wave propagation environment between the transmitter and the receiver (channel estimation), and time synchronization and frequency offset estimation. Then, the demapping section 214 in FIG. 2 receives these estimated signals and performs demapping based on these estimated signals, thereby calculating, for example, a logarithmic likelihood ratio.

Information on the modulation scheme and ring ratio used to generate data symbols is transmitted using control information such as TMCC, as described in Embodiment F. Since the modulation scheme and ring ratio used to generate the pilot symbols are the same as the modulation scheme and ring ratio used to generate the data symbols, the receiving apparatus therefore includes a control information estimator. By estimating the modulation scheme and ring ratio from the control information, the demapping unit 214 obtains this information, thereby estimating the distortion of the propagation path due to the pilot symbols, etc., and demapping the information symbols. It will be.

Also, the method of transmitting pilot symbols is not limited to the above. for example,
A transmitting device (transmitting station) uses, as a pilot symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, L ₁ is the value of ring ratio r ₁ , L ₂ is the signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b _{2 b 1} b ₀ ]=[00000] band signal) multiple times,
(4,12,16)32APSK, L ₁ is the value of ring ratio r ₁ , and L ₂ is the signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[00001] of ring ratio r ₂ (base band signal) multiple times,
(4,12,16)32APSK, L ₁ is the value of ring ratio r ₁ , and L ₂ is the signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[00010] of ring ratio r ₂ (base band signal) multiple times,
(4,12,16)32APSK, L ₁ is the value of ring ratio r ₁ , and L ₂ is the signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[00011] of ring ratio r ₂ (base band signal) multiple times,
(4,12,16)32APSK, L ₁ is the value of ring ratio r ₁ , and L ₂ is the signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[00100] of ring ratio r ₂ (base band signal) multiple times,
(4,12,16)32APSK, L ₁ is the value of ring ratio r ₁ , and L ₂ is the signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[00101] of ring ratio r ₂ (base band signal) multiple times,
(4,12,16)32APSK, L ₁ is the value of ring ratio r ₁ , and L ₂ is the signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[00110] of ring ratio r ₂ (base band signal) multiple times,
( _4,12,16 ) _32APSK , the value of ring _ratio r1 is L1, and the ring ratio r2 is L2 _, the signal _point corresponding to [ _b4b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [ ₀₀₁₁₁ ] ₍ base band signal) multiple times,
(4,12,16)32APSK, L ₁ is the value of ring ratio r ₁ , and L ₂ is the signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[01000] of ring ratio r ₂ (base band signal) multiple times,
(4,12,16)32APSK, L ₁ is the value of ring ratio r ₁ , and L ₂ is the signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[01001] of ring ratio r ₂ (base band signal) multiple times,
(4,12,16)32APSK, L ₁ is the value of ring ratio r ₁ , and L ₂ is the signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[01010] of ring ratio r ₂ (base band signal) multiple times,
(4,12,16)32APSK, L ₁ is the value of ring ratio r ₁ , and L ₂ is the signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[01011] of ring ratio r ₂ (base band signal) multiple times,
(4,12,16)32APSK, L ₁ is the value of ring ratio r ₁ , and L ₂ is the signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[01100] of ring ratio r ₂ (base band signal) multiple times,
(4,12,16)32APSK, L ₁ is the value of ring ratio r ₁ , and L ₂ is the signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[01101] of ring ratio r ₂ (base band signal) multiple times,
(4,12,16)32APSK, L ₁ is the value of ring ratio r ₁ , and L ₂ is the signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[01110] of ring ratio r ₂ (base band signal) multiple times,
( _4,12,16 ) _32APSK , the _value of ring _ratio r1 is L1, and the ring ratio r2 is L2, the signal _point corresponding to [ _b4b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [ ₀₁₁₁₁ ] ₍ base band signal) multiple times,

_{( 4,12,16} ) _{32APSK ,} the _value of ring _{ratio r1} is L1, and the ring _{ratio r2} is L2. band signal) multiple times,
(4,12,16)32APSK, L ₁ is the value of ring ratio r ₁ , and L ₂ is the signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[10001] of ring ratio r ₂ (base band signal) multiple times,
(4,12,16)32APSK, L ₁ is the value of ring ratio r ₁ , and L ₂ is the signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[10010] of ring ratio r ₂ (base band signal) multiple times,
(4,12,16)32APSK, L ₁ is the value of ring ratio r ₁ , and L ₂ is the signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[10011] of ring ratio r ₂ (base band signal) multiple times,
(4,12,16)32APSK, L ₁ is the value of ring ratio r ₁ , and L ₂ is the signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[10100] of ring ratio r ₂ (base band signal) multiple times,
(4,12,16)32APSK, L ₁ is the value of ring ratio r ₁ , L ₂ is the signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b _{2 b 1} b ₀ ]=[10101] band signal) multiple times,
(4,12,16)32APSK, L ₁ is the value of ring ratio r ₁ , and L ₂ is the signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[10110] of ring ratio r ₂ (base band signal) multiple times,
_{( 4,12,16} ) _{32APSK ,} ring _{ratio r1} is L1, ring _{ratio r2} is _L2 . band signal) multiple times,
(4,12,16)32APSK, L ₁ is the value of ring ratio r ₁ , and L ₂ is the signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b _{2 b 1} b ₀ ]=[11000] band signal) multiple times,
_{( 4,12,16} ) _{32APSK ,} ring _{ratio r1} is L1, ring _{ratio r2} is _L2 . band signal) multiple times,
(4,12,16)32APSK, L ₁ is the value of ring ratio r ₁ , and L ₂ is the signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[11010] of ring ratio r ₂ (base band signal) multiple times,
(4,12,16)32APSK, L ₁ is the value of ring ratio r ₁ , and L ₂ is the signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[11011] of ring ratio r ₂ (base band signal) multiple times,
(4,12,16)32APSK, L ₁ is the value of ring ratio r ₁ , and L ₂ is the signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b _{2 b 1} b ₀ ]=[11100] band signal) multiple times,
(4,12,16)32APSK, L ₁ is the value of ring ratio r ₁ , and L ₂ is the signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[11101] of ring ratio r ₂ (base band signal) multiple times,
_{( 4,12,16} ) _{32APSK ,} ring _{ratio r1} is L1, ring _{ratio r2} is _L2 . band signal) multiple times,
(4,12,16)32APSK, L ₁ is the value of ring ratio r ₁ , and L ₂ is the signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[11111] of ring ratio r ₂ (base band signal) multiple times,

You may send.

At this time,
(4,12,16)32APSK, L ₁ is the value of ring ratio r ₁ , L ₂ is the signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b _{2 b 1} b ₀ ]=[00000] band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, L ₁ is the value of ring ratio r ₁ , and L ₂ is the signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[00001] of ring ratio r ₂ (base band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, L ₁ is the value of ring ratio r ₁ , and L ₂ is the signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[00010] of ring ratio r ₂ (base band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, L ₁ is the value of ring ratio r ₁ , and L ₂ is the signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[00011] of ring ratio r ₂ (base band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, L ₁ is the value of ring ratio r ₁ , and L ₂ is the signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[00100] of ring ratio r ₂ (base band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, L ₁ is the value of ring ratio r ₁ , and L ₂ is the signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[00101] of ring ratio r ₂ (base band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, L ₁ is the value of ring ratio r ₁ , and L ₂ is the signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[00110] of ring ratio r ₂ (base band signal) symbol,
( _4,12,16 ) _32APSK , the value of ring _ratio r1 is L1, and the ring ratio r2 is L2 _, the signal _point corresponding to [ _b4b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [ ₀₀₁₁₁ ] ₍ base band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, L ₁ is the value of ring ratio r ₁ , and L ₂ is the signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[01000] of ring ratio r ₂ (base band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, L ₁ is the value of ring ratio r ₁ , and L ₂ is the signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[01001] of ring ratio r ₂ (base band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, L ₁ is the value of ring ratio r ₁ , and L ₂ is the signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[01010] of ring ratio r ₂ (base band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, L ₁ is the value of ring ratio r ₁ , and L ₂ is the signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[01011] of ring ratio r ₂ (base band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, L ₁ is the value of ring ratio r ₁ , and L ₂ is the signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[01100] of ring ratio r ₂ (base band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, L ₁ is the value of ring ratio r ₁ , and L ₂ is the signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[01101] of ring ratio r ₂ (base band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, L ₁ is the value of ring ratio r ₁ , and L ₂ is the signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[01110] of ring ratio r ₂ (base band signal) symbol,
( _4,12,16 ) _32APSK , the _value of ring _ratio r1 is L1, and the ring ratio r2 is L2, the signal _point corresponding to [ _b4b3b2b1b0 ] ₌ [ ₀₁₁₁₁ ] ₍ base band signal) symbol,

_{( 4,12,16} ) _{32APSK ,} the _value of ring _{ratio r1} is L1, and the ring _{ratio r2} is L2. band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, L ₁ is the value of ring ratio r ₁ , and L ₂ is the signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[10001] of ring ratio r ₂ (base band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, L ₁ is the value of ring ratio r ₁ , and L ₂ is the signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[10010] of ring ratio r ₂ (base band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, L ₁ is the value of ring ratio r ₁ , and L ₂ is the signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[10011] of ring ratio r ₂ (base band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, L ₁ is the value of ring ratio r ₁ , and L ₂ is the signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[10100] of ring ratio r ₂ (base band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, L ₁ is the value of ring ratio r ₁ , L ₂ is the signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b _{2 b 1} b ₀ ]=[10101] band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, L ₁ is the value of ring ratio r ₁ , and L ₂ is the signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[10110] of ring ratio r ₂ (base band signal) symbol,
_{( 4,12,16} ) _{32APSK ,} ring _{ratio r1} is L1, ring _{ratio r2} is _L2 . band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, L ₁ is the value of ring ratio r ₁ , and L ₂ is the signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b _{2 b 1} b ₀ ]=[11000] band signal) symbol,
_{( 4,12,16} ) _{32APSK ,} ring _{ratio r1} is L1, ring _{ratio r2} is _L2 . band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, L ₁ is the value of ring ratio r ₁ , and L ₂ is the signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[11010] of ring ratio r ₂ (base band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, L ₁ is the value of ring ratio r ₁ , and L ₂ is the signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[11011] of ring ratio r ₂ (base band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, L ₁ is the value of ring ratio r ₁ , and L ₂ is the signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b _{2 b 1} b ₀ ]=[11100] band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, L ₁ is the value of ring ratio r ₁ , and L ₂ is the signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[11101] of ring ratio r ₂ (base band signal) symbol,
_{( 4,12,16} ) _{32APSK ,} ring _{ratio r1} is L1, ring _{ratio r2} is _L2 . band signal) symbol,
(4,12,16)32APSK, L ₁ is the value of ring ratio r ₁ , and L ₂ is the signal point corresponding to [b ₄ b ₃ b ₂ b ₁ b ₀ ]=[11111] of ring ratio r ₂ (base band signal) symbol,
Equalizing the number of transmissions for each symbol in , has the advantage that the receiving apparatus can perform highly accurate propagation path distortion estimation.

In the above description, the frame configuration of FIG. 18 was used, but the frame configuration to which the present invention is applied is not limited to this. Symbols used to transmit information on modulation schemes, information on error correction schemes (e.g., error correction code used, code length of error correction code, coding rate of error correction code, etc.) are present, the data symbols, the symbols for transmitting information on the modulation scheme, and the symbols for transmitting information on the error correction scheme may be arranged in any way in the frame. Also, symbols other than these symbols, such as preambles, symbols for synchronization, pilot symbols, and reference symbols, may exist in the frame.

(Embodiment AA)
In this embodiment, a method for changing the roll-off rate of a band-limiting filter, which will be described later, will be described. In the present embodiment, a method for changing the roll-off rate of the band-limiting filter for a transmission system based on "Transmission system for advanced wideband digital satellite broadcasting ARIB STD-B44 Version 1.0" will be described.

First, in describing the present embodiment, a frame configuration and a TMCC configuration will be described.

FIG. 11 shows the configuration of one frame in the "transmission system for advanced wideband satellite digital broadcasting standard ARIB STD-B44 version 1.0". In FIG. 11, "FSync" and "!FSync" indicate frame synchronization signals. "PSync" indicates a slot synchronization signal. 'P' indicates a group of pilot symbols and 'T' indicates a group of TMCC symbols.

"Data" indicates a data symbol group (a symbol group for transmitting data), and the modulation scheme of the data symbol group is π/2 shift BPSK, QPSK, 8PSK, (12,4)16APSK, (4, 12,16)32APSK.

As shown in FIG. 11, one frame consists of 120 slots (modulation slot #1 to modulation slot #120). Each slot (slot or frame) consists of a synchronization signal, a pilot signal, a TMCC symbol group, and a data symbol group. Collecting the TMCC symbol group included in one frame results in 31680 bits. Next, a TMCC signal composed of 31680 bits will be described.

FIG. 69 is a configuration diagram of a TMCC signal composed of 31680 bits. The TMCC signal is composed of 9422-bit TMCC information, 192-bit BCH (Bose-Chaudhuri-Hocquenghem) parity, and 22066-bit LDPC code parity. Note that parity is parity generated by encoding BCH and LDPC codes.

FIG. 70 shows the configuration of 9422-bit TMCC information. As shown in FIG. 70, the TMCC information includes "change instruction", "transmission mode/slot information", "stream identification/relative stream", "packet format/relative stream", "pointer/slot information", "relative stream/slot information", " It consists of relative stream/transmission stream ID correspondence table information, transmission/reception control information, and extended information. Each element is briefly described below.

"Change instruction":
The change instruction shall be incremented by 1 each time the content of the TMCC information is changed, and when the pair becomes "11111111", it shall return to "00000000". However, only the pointer/slot information is changed. In this case, the addition of change instructions is not performed.

"Transmission mode/slot information":
The transmission mode/slot information indicates the modulation scheme of the transmission main signal, the coding rate of the error correction inner coding, the satellite output backoff, and the number of allocated slots.

"Stream identification/relative stream":
The stream type/relative stream information is an area indicating the correspondence relationship between the relative stream number and the stream type, and indicates the packet stream type for each relative stream number assigned to each slot indicated in the relative stream/slot information item.

"Packet Format/Relative Stream":
The packet format/relative stream information indicates the correspondence relationship between the relative stream number and the packet format, and indicates the packet format for each relative stream number assigned to each slot in the relative stream/slot information.

"Pointer/slot information":
The pointer/slot information indicates the starting position of the first packet and the ending position of the last packet contained in each slot.

"Relative stream/slot information":
The relative stream/slot information indicates the correspondence between slots and relative stream numbers, and indicates the relative stream numbers to be transmitted in each slot in order from slot 1 .

"Relative stream/transmission stream ID correspondence table information":
The relative stream/transmission stream ID correspondence table shows the correspondence relationship between relative stream numbers used in relative stream/slot information and transmission stream IDs.

"Transmit/receive control information":
The transmission/reception control information transmits signals and uplink control information for receiver start-up control in emergency warning broadcasting.

"Extended Information":
Extended information is a field used for future TMCC information extensions. When the TMCC information is extended, the extension identifier is set to a value other than the predefined "0000000000000000" to indicate that the subsequent fields are valid. When the extension identification is "0000000000000000", the extension field is stuffed with "1".

Next, a method for changing the roll-off rate will be described.

First, the configuration of the system will be explained.
As described in Embodiments B and E, consider a system composed of a transmitting station (earth station), a satellite (repeater), and a terminal.

The configuration of the ground transmitting station that transmits transmission signals to the satellite is as shown in FIGS. 41 to 43. FIG. 45 and 46 show the configuration of a satellite (repeater) that receives a signal transmitted by a transmitting station on the ground and transmits a modulated signal of the received signal to a receiving terminal on the ground. The detailed description of these configurations is given in the embodiment B and the embodiment E, so the description is omitted here.

The feature of this embodiment is to "change the roll-off rate". So, below, the characteristic part is demonstrated.

FIG. 71 shows a detailed configuration of channel #X (X is an integer of 1 or more and N or less) in a ground transmission station (ground station) that transmits transmission signals to the satellites of FIGS.

In FIG. 71, a transmission data generation unit AA000 receives video data, audio data, and a control signal AA004, performs BCH encoding and LDPC encoding processing based on the control signal AA004, and outputs transmission data AA001. do.

The data symbol generator AA002 receives the transmission data AA001 and the control signal AA004, maps the modulation scheme based on the control signal AA004, and outputs a data symbol signal AA003.

Pilot symbol generator AA005 receives control signal AA004, generates pilot symbols of a modulation scheme based on control signal AA004, and outputs pilot symbol signal AA006.

The TMCC signal generator AA007 receives the control signal AA004, generates the TMCC symbol based on the control signal AA004 as described above, and outputs a TMCC symbol signal AA008.

Switching section AA009 receives data symbol signal AA003, pilot symbol signal AA006, TMCC symbol signal AA008, and control signal AA004, and switches data symbol signal AA003, pilot symbol signal AA003, and pilot signal AA004 based on information on the frame configuration included in control signal AA004. A symbol signal AA006 and a TMCC symbol signal AA008 are selected, and a modulated signal AA010 is output.

The band-limiting filter AA0011 receives the modulated signal AA0010 and the control signal AA0004, sets a roll-off rate based on the control signal AA0004, performs band-limiting with the set roll-off rate, and converts the band-limited modulated signal AA012 to Output. Modulated signal AA012 after the band limitation corresponds to modulated signal #X (X is an integer equal to or greater than 1 and equal to or less than N) in FIGS.

At this time, the frequency characteristic of the band-limiting filter that performs band-limiting is expressed by the following equation.

In the above formula, F is the center frequency of the carrier wave, F _n is the Nyquist frequency, and α is the roll-off factor (or roll-off factor, root roll-off factor, or root roll-off factor).

FIG. 72 shows an example of frame changes in this embodiment, where the horizontal axis is time. In FIG. 72, AA101 is frame #MZ, which is the MZ-th frame. AA102 is frame #M-3, which is the M-3th frame.
AA103 is frame #M-2, which is the M-2th frame. AA 104 is frame #M-1, which is the M-1th frame. AA105 is frame #M, which is the Mth frame. AA 106 is frame #M+1, which is the M+1th frame. Each frame is composed of the frames shown in FIG.

Then, as shown in FIG. 72, the roll-off rate (roll-off coefficient) α of the band-limiting filter for frames before time U is 0.10, and the roll-off rate of the band-limiting filter for frames after time V is (Roll-off coefficient) α is assumed to be 0.05, and in the present embodiment, the roll-off rate (roll-off coefficient) is assumed to be a switchable system.

The baud rate (symbol rate (symbol transmission speed)) when the roll-off rate (roll-off coefficient) α is 0.10 is p, and the baud rate when the roll-off rate (roll-off coefficient) α is 0.05 ( When the symbol rate (symbol transmission speed)) is q, from the point of view of effective utilization of the frequency band, it is preferable that p < q holds (p = q may be satisfied, but effective utilization of the frequency band is is not.).

Here, as an example, an example in which the roll-off rate (roll-off coefficient) α is 0.10 and the roll-off rate (roll-off coefficient) α is 0.05 is described, but it is not limited to this. Absent. The baud rate (symbol rate (symbol transmission speed)) when the roll _- off rate (roll-off coefficient) α is A1 is p1, and the baud rate (symbol rate) when the roll _- off rate (roll-off coefficient) α is _A2 When A ₁ <A 2 holds when p ₂ is the rate _{(symbol transmission speed),} p ₁ >p ₂ should hold from the point of view of effective utilization of the frequency band (p ₁ =p ₂ , but it does not make effective use of the frequency band.).

Although FIG. 72 shows an example in which the roll-off rate switches from 0.10 to 0.05, the roll-off rate is not limited to this, and the roll-off rate may switch from 0.05 to 0.10. , the roll-off rate may be switched from A ₁ to A ₂ , or the roll-off rate may be switched from A ₂ to A ₁ . Also, the roll-off rate is not limited to switching between two values, and may be switched between three or more values. However, the baud rate (symbol rate (symbol transmission speed)) when the roll-off rate (roll-off coefficient) α is A _x is p _x , and the baud rate (symbol rate) when the roll-off rate (roll-off coefficient) α is A _y When A _x <A _y is satisfied, it is preferable that p _x > _py be _satisfied (p _x = _py , but it does not make effective use of the frequency band.).

FIG. 73 shows changes on the time axis when the roll-off rate α is switched from 0.10 to 0.05 in FIG. Frame #M-1 (AA104) is composed of symbols with a roll-off rate of 0.10, frame #M (AA105) is composed of symbols with a roll-off rate of 0.05, and time U is frame #M. -1 is the time when transmission was completed, and time V is the time when transmission of frame #M was started.

FIG. 73 shows an example of specific states of time U and time V. In FIG. A ramp down AA 201 is a section for gradually lowering the signal level. The guard section AA202 is a section in which the signal level is zero, and the in-phase component I of the baseband signal is 0 (zero) and the quadrature component Q of the baseband signal is 0 (zero). A ramp-up AA 203 is a section for gradually increasing the signal level. By doing so, out-of-band spurious can be reduced.

FIG. 74 shows changes on the time axis when the roll-off rate α is switched from 0.10 to 0.05, which is different from FIG.

In FIG. 74, a ramp down AA201 is a section for gradually lowering the signal level. The guard section AA202 is a section in which the signal level is zero, and the in-phase component I of the baseband signal is 0 (zero) and the quadrature component Q of the baseband signal is 0 (zero). By doing so, out-of-band spurious can be reduced.

As described above, the baud rate (symbol rate (symbol transmission speed)) may differ for each roll-off rate. (Alternatively, the symbol rate may change as the roll-off rate changes.)

Therefore, when the transmitting station (ground station) switches the roll-off rate, it switches the baud rate and the filter coefficients of the band-limiting filter (for example, when a digital filter is used). If the transmitting station does not notify the terminal (on the ground) of the switching timing, the terminal must estimate the baud rate and bandpass filter being used, which may take time. is high. (It is very difficult to continue receiving without switching the baud rate and the filter coefficients of the band-limiting filter (for example, when using a digital filter).)

As a result, when the transmitting station (ground station) switches the roll-off rate, it takes time for the (ground) terminal to make the above estimation, so there is a high possibility that video, video, audio, etc. will be disturbed. Therefore, it is desirable to switch the roll-off rate accurately.

Information to be transmitted in the above-described TMCC for solving this problem will be described below.

Table 21 shows the relationship between K ₀ K ₁ K ₂ K ₃ and the number of switching frames. As an example, K ₀ K ₁ K ₂ K ₃ shall be transmitted as part of TMCC extended information. (Incidentally, as explained in Embodiment F and the like, when TMCC information is extended, all extension identifiers assume values other than "0", that is, values other than "0000000000000000".)

A case where the roll-off rate α is switched from 0.10 to 0.05 as shown in FIG. 72 will be described as an example.

In FIG. 72, the roll-off rate α switches to 0.05 from frame #M (AA105). Therefore, frame #MZ (AA101) is the frame Z frames before the roll-off rate α is switched to 0.05 (Z frames before switching).

Similarly, frame #M-3 (AA102) is the frame three frames before the roll-off rate α is switched to 0.05 (three frames before switching).

Frame #M-2 (AA103) is a frame two frames before the roll-off rate α is switched to 0.05 (two frames before switching).

Frame #M-1 (AA104) is the frame one frame before the roll-off rate α is switched to 0.05 (one frame before switching).

Therefore, in frame #M-Z, the frame with Z=15 is the frame before Z=15 frames (Z=15 frames before switching) where the roll-off rate α is switched to 0.05. The transmitting station transmits ₀ K ₁ K ₂ K ₃ = '1110'.

Similarly, in frame #M-Z, the frame of Z=14 is the frame before Z=14 frames (switching Z=14 frames before) where the roll-off rate α is switched to 0.05, so in this frame, The transmitting station transmits K ₀ K ₁ K ₂ K ₃ ='1101'.
・・・

Frame #M-3 (AA102) is the frame three frames before the roll-off rate α is switched to 0.05 (three frames before the switch), so in this frame, K ₀ K ₁ K ₂ K ₃ ='0010 ' is transmitted by the transmitting station.

Frame #M _{- 2} ( _AA103 ) is the frame _two frames before the roll-off rate α is switched to 0.05 (two frames before the switch). ' is transmitted by the transmitting station.

Frame #M-1 (AA104) is the frame one frame before the roll-off rate α is switched to 0.05 (one frame before the switch), so in this frame, K ₀ K ₁ K ₂ K ₃ ='0000 ' is transmitted by the transmitting station.

Then, in frame #M (AA105) where the roll-off rate is switched to 0.05, the change of the roll _- off rate is completed _, so the transmitting station transmits _{K0K1K2K3 =} '1111' in this frame. do. If the roll-off rate does not change thereafter, the transmitting station transmits K ₀ K ₁ K ₂ K ₃ ='1111' in each frame after frame #M (AA105).

In the above description, the case where the roll-off rate is switched from 0.10 to 0.05 has been described as an example, but it is not limited to this. Therefore, in FIG. 72, consider the case where the roll-off rate is switched to β ₂ at frame #M (AA105). In this case, . . . frame #M-Z (AA101), . is β ₁ , and the roll-off rate of frame #M (AA105), frame #M+1 (AA106), . . . is β ₂ . (However, β ₁ ≠ β _2. )

At this time, in the frame #MZ, the frame of Z=15 is the frame Z=15 frames before the roll-off rate α is switched to β2 ₍ Z=15 frames before the switch). The transmitting station transmits ₀ K ₁ K ₂ K ₃ = '1110'.

Similarly, in frame #M-Z, the frame of Z=14 is the frame Z=14 frames before the roll-off rate α is switched to β2 ₍ Z=14 frames before switching), so in this frame, K The transmitting station transmits ₀ K ₁ K ₂ K ₃ = '1101'.
・・・

Frame #M-3 (AA102) is the frame three frames before the roll-off rate α is switched to β ₂ (three frames before the switch), so in this frame, K ₀ K ₁ K ₂ K ₃ ='0010' is transmitted by the transmitting station.

Frame #M-2 (AA103) is the frame two frames before the roll-off rate α is switched to β ₂ (two frames before the switch), so in this frame, K ₀ K ₁ K ₂ K ₃ ='0001' is transmitted by the transmitting station.

In frame #M-1 (AA104), the frame is one frame before the roll-off rate α is switched to β2 ( _one frame before switching), so in this frame, K ₀ K ₁ K ₂ K ₃ ='0000' is transmitted by the transmitting station.

Then, in frame #M (AA105) where the roll _- off rate is switched to β2, the change of the roll-off rate is completed, so the transmitting station transmits K ₀ K ₁ K ₂ K ₃ ='1111' in this frame. . Note that if the change in roll-off rate does not occur thereafter, frame #M (AA105
) In subsequent frames, the transmitting station transmits K ₀ K ₁ K ₂ K ₃ ='1111' in each frame.

Therefore, in frame #MZ, Z=G (G is an integer of 16 or more), Z=G frames before the roll-off rate α is switched to β2 ₍ switching Z=G frames before). Therefore, in this frame, the transmitting station transmits K ₀ K ₁ K ₂ K ₃ ='1111'.

In frame #M-Z, Z=H (H is an integer from 1 to 15) is Z=H frames before the roll-off rate α is switched to β2 ₍ switching Z=H frames before). So, in this frame, the transmitting station transmits K ₀ K ₁ K ₂ K ₃ ='binary representation of H'.

As described above, the (terrestrial) transmitting station transmits K ₀ K ₁ K ₂ K ₃ , and the terminal obtains K ₀ K ₁ K ₂ K ₃ , so that the frame in which the roll-off rate will switch can be known in advance. has the advantage of being able to In the above description, as an example, the transmitting station notifies the terminal from 15 frames before the roll-off rate is switched. The transmitting station may notify the terminal before one frame, or the transmitting station may notify the terminal seven frames before. The timing of the frame in which the transmitting station starts notifying the terminal of the roll-off rate change may be any timing.

Then, when there are two switchable roll-off rates, such as _0.10 and 0.05, the terminal can easily estimate the switching value of the roll _- off rate. By obtaining K ₂ K ₃ , it is possible to accurately respond to changes in the roll-off rate.

If there are three or more switchable roll-off rates, in addition to K ₀ K ₁ K ₂ K ₃ , new information should be transmitted as control information such as TMCC. This point will be explained below. However, even with two switchable roll-off ratio values, the embodiments described below may be implemented.

Table 22 shows the relationship between L ₀ L ₁ and roll-off rate. As an example, it is assumed that L ₀ L ₁ is transmitted as part of TMCC extended information. (As described in Embodiment F and the like, when TMCC information is extended, all extension identifiers assume values other than "0", that is, values other than "0000000000000000".) It is assumed that K ₀ K ₁ K ₂ K ₃ described above is transmitted at the same time as L ₀ L ₁ as part of the extension information of TMCC.

A case where the roll-off rate α is switched from 0.10 to 0.05 as shown in FIG. 72 will be described as an example.

In FIG. 72, the roll-off rate α switches to 0.05 from frame #M (AA105). Therefore, frame #MZ (AA101) is the frame Z frames before the roll-off rate α is switched to 0.05 (Z frames before switching).

Similarly, frame #M-3 (AA102) is the frame three frames before the roll-off rate α is switched to 0.05 (three frames before switching).

Frame #M-2 (AA103) is a frame two frames before the roll-off rate α is switched to 0.05 (two frames before switching).

Frame #M-1 (AA104) is the frame one frame before the roll-off rate α is switched to 0.05 (one frame before switching).

For example, in frame #M-Z, the frame of Z=15 is the frame before Z=15 frames (switching Z=15 frames before) where the roll-off rate α is switched to 0.05. The transmitting station transmits ₀ K ₁ K ₂ K ₃ = '1110'. In addition, since the roll-off rate is switched to 0.05, based on Table 22, the transmitting station transmits L ₀ L ₁ ='01'.

Similarly, in frame #M-Z, the frame of Z=14 is the frame before Z=14 frames (switching Z=14 frames before) where the roll-off rate α is switched to 0.05, so in this frame, The transmitting station transmits K ₀ K ₁ K ₂ K ₃ ='1101'. In addition to this, since the roll-off rate is switched to 0.05, based on Table 22, the transmitting station transmits L ₀ L ₁ ='01'.
・・・

Frame #M _{- 3} ( _AA102 ) is the frame _three frames before the roll-off rate α is switched to 0.05 (three frames before the switch). ' is transmitted by the transmitting station. In addition to this, since the roll-off rate is switched to 0.05, based on Table 22, the transmitting station transmits L ₀ L ₁ ='01'.

Frame #M _{- 2} ( _AA103 ) is the frame _two frames before the roll-off rate α is switched to 0.05 (two frames before the switch). ' is transmitted by the transmitting station. In addition to this, since the roll-off rate is switched to 0.05, based on Table 22, the transmitting station transmits L ₀ L ₁ ='01'.

Frame #M-1 (AA104) is the frame one frame before the roll-off rate α is switched to 0.05 (one frame before the switch), so in this frame, K ₀ K ₁ K ₂ K ₃ ='0000 ' is transmitted by the transmitting station. In addition, since the roll-off rate is switched to 0.05, based on Table 22, the transmitting station transmits L ₀ L ₁ ='01'.

Then, in frame #M (AA105) where the roll-off rate is switched to 0.05, the change of the roll _- off rate is completed _, so the transmitting station transmits _{K0K1K2K3 =} '1111' in this frame. do. In addition to this, the transmitting station transmits L ₀ L ₁ ='11' based on Table 22 because the roll-off rate change has been completed. It should be noted that if the roll-off rate does not change thereafter, K ₀ K ₁ K ₂ K ₃ ='1111' and L ₀ L ₁ ='11 in each frame after frame #M (AA105). ' is transmitted by the transmitting station.

In the above description, the case where the roll-off rate is switched from 0.10 to 0.05 has been described as an example, but it is not limited to this.

In FIG. 72, consider the case where the roll-off rate is switched to β ₂ at frame #M (AA105). In this case, . . . frame #M-Z (AA101), . is β ₁ , and the roll-off rate of frame #M (AA105), frame #M+1 (AA106), . . . is β ₂ . (However, β ₁ ≠ β _2. )

At this time, in the frame #MZ, the frame of Z=15 is the frame Z=15 frames before the roll-off rate α is switched to β2 ₍ Z=15 frames before the switch). The transmitting station transmits ₀ K ₁ K ₂ K ₃ = '1110'. In addition, since the roll-off factor is switched to β ₂ , the transmitting station transmits the bits corresponding to β ₂ as L ₀ L ₁ . (For example, when β ₂ =0.03, L ₀ L ₁ ='00' based on Table 22.)

Similarly, in frame #M-Z, the frame of Z=14 is the frame Z=14 frames before the roll-off rate α is switched to β2 ₍ Z=14 frames before switching), so in this frame, K The transmitting station transmits ₀ K ₁ K ₂ K ₃ = '1101'. In addition, since the roll-off factor is switched to β ₂ , the transmitting station transmits the bits corresponding to β ₂ as L ₀ L ₁ . (For example, when β ₂ =0.03, L ₀ L ₁ ='00' based on Table 22.)
・・・

Frame #M-3 (AA102) is the frame three frames before the roll-off rate α is switched to β ₂ (three frames before the switch), so in this frame, K ₀ K ₁ K ₂ K ₃ ='0010' is transmitted by the transmitting station. In addition, since the roll-off factor is switched to β ₂ , the transmitting station transmits the bits corresponding to β ₂ as L ₀ L ₁ . (For example, when β ₂ =0.03, L ₀ L ₁ ='00' based on Table 22.)

In frame #M _{- 2} ( _AA103 ), the frame is _two frames before the roll-off rate α is switched to β ₂ (two frames before the switch). is transmitted by the transmitting station. In addition, since the roll-off factor is switched to β ₂ , the transmitting station transmits the bits corresponding to β ₂ as L ₀ L ₁ . (For example, when β ₂ =0.03, L ₀ L ₁ ='00' based on Table 22.)

In frame #M-1 (AA104), the frame is one frame before the roll-off rate α is switched to β2 ( _one frame before switching), so in this frame, K ₀ K ₁ K ₂ K ₃ ='0000' is transmitted by the transmitting station. In addition, since the roll-off factor is switched to β ₂ , the transmitting station transmits the bits corresponding to β ₂ as L ₀ L ₁ . (For example, when β ₂ =0.03, L ₀ L ₁ ='00' based on Table 22.)

Then, in frame #M (AA105) where the roll _- off rate is switched to β2, the change of the roll-off rate is completed, so the transmitting station transmits K ₀ K ₁ K ₂ K ₃ ='1111' in this frame. . If the roll-off rate does not change thereafter, the transmitting station transmits K ₀ K ₁ K ₂ K ₃ ='1111' in each frame after frame #M (AA105). In addition, based on Table 22, the transmitting station transmits L ₀ L ₁ ='11' because the roll-off rate change has been completed. It should be noted that if the roll-off rate does not change thereafter, K ₀ K ₁ K ₂ K ₃ ='1111' and L ₀ L ₁ ='11 in each frame after frame #M (AA105). ' is transmitted by the transmitting station.

Therefore, in frame #MZ, Z=G (G is an integer of 16 or more), Z=G frames before the roll-off rate α is switched to β2 ₍ switching Z=G frames before). Therefore, in this frame, the transmitting station transmits K ₀ K ₁ K ₂ K ₃ ='1111'. Additionally, based on Table 22, the transmitting station transmits L ₀ L ₁ ='11'.

In frame #M-Z, Z=H (H is an integer from 1 to 15) is Z=H frames before the roll-off rate α is switched to β2 ₍ switching Z=H frames before). So, in this frame, the transmitting station transmits K ₀ K ₁ K ₂ K ₃ ='binary representation of H'. In addition, since the roll-off factor is switched to β ₂ , the transmitting station transmits the bits corresponding to β ₂ as L ₀ L ₁ . (For example, when β ₂ =0.03, L ₀ L ₁ ='00' based on Table 22.)

As described above, the (terrestrial) transmitting station transmits K ₀ K ₁ K ₂ K ₃ and L ₀ L ₁ , and the terminal obtains K ₀ K ₁ K ₂ K ₃ , so that the roll-off rate is switched frame can be known in advance, and in addition, by obtaining L ₀ L ₁ , the value of the roll-off rate of the frame where the roll-off rate is switched can be known, so the terminal can accurately respond to changes in the roll-off rate It is possible to obtain the effect of being able to respond.

In the above description, as an example, the transmitting station notifies the terminal from 15 frames before the roll-off rate is switched. The transmitting station may notify the terminal before one frame, or the transmitting station may notify the terminal seven frames before. The timing of the frame in which the transmitting station starts notifying the terminal of the roll-off rate change may be any timing.

In addition, in Table 22, three types of roll-off rate values that can be set have been described as an example, but the value is not limited to this. Alternatively, the value of the roll-off rate that can be set may be two.

The timing at which the transmitting station transmits L ₀ L ₁ corresponding to the value of the roll-off rate to be switched is not limited to the above description. Just send L ₀ L ₁ corresponding to the rate.

Next, a method different from Table 22 will be described.

Table 23 shows the relationship between M ₀ M ₁ and roll-off ratio during use. As an example, it is assumed that M ₀ M ₁ is transmitted as part of the TMCC extension information. Also, Table 24 shows the relationship between M ₂ M ₃ and the roll-off rate to be switched. As an example, M ₂ M ₃ shall be transmitted as part of TMCC extension information.

As described in the embodiment F and the like, it is assumed that the TMCC information is extended, and all extension identifiers are values other than "0", that is, values other than "0000000000000000". Also, it is assumed that K ₀ K ₁ K ₂ K ₃ described above is transmitted at the same time as M ₀ M ₁ and M ₂ M ₃ as a part of TMCC extended information.

A case where the roll-off rate α is switched from 0.10 to 0.05 as shown in FIG. 72 will be described as an example.

In FIG. 72, the roll-off rate α switches to 0.05 from frame #M (AA105). Therefore, frame #MZ (AA101) is the frame Z frames before the roll-off rate α is switched to 0.05 (Z frames before switching).

Similarly, frame #M-3 (AA102) is the frame three frames before the roll-off rate α is switched to 0.05 (three frames before switching).

Frame #M-2 (AA103) is a frame two frames before the roll-off rate α is switched to 0.05 (two frames before switching).

Frame #M-1 (AA104) is the frame one frame before the roll-off rate α is switched to 0.05 (one frame before switching).

For example, in frame #M-Z, the frame of Z=15 is the frame before Z=15 frames (switching Z=15 frames before) where the roll-off rate α is switched to 0.05. The transmitting station transmits ₀ K ₁ K ₂ K ₃ = '1110'. In addition, since the roll-off rate of this frame is 0.10, based on Table 23, M ₀ M ₁ ='11', and since the roll-off rate is switched to 0.05, based on Table 24, M ₂ M ₃ ='01', and the transmitting station transmits M ₀ M ₁ ='11' and M ₂ M ₃ ='01'.

Similarly, in frame #M-Z, the frame of Z=14 is the frame before Z=14 frames (switching Z=14 frames before) where the roll-off rate α is switched to 0.05, so in this frame, The transmitting station transmits K ₀ K ₁ K ₂ K ₃ ='1101'. In addition, since the roll-off rate of this frame is 0.10, based on Table 23, M ₀ M ₁ ='11', and since the roll-off rate is switched to 0.05, based on Table 24, M ₂ M ₃ ='01', and the transmitting station transmits M ₀ M ₁ ='11' and M ₂ M ₃ ='01'.
・・・

Frame #M-3 (AA102) is the frame three frames before the roll-off rate α is switched to 0.05 (three frames before the switch), so in this frame, K ₀ K ₁ K ₂ K ₃ ='0010 ' is transmitted by the transmitting station. In addition to this, the frame has a rolloff factor of 0.10.
Therefore, based on Table 23, M ₀ M ₁ ='11' and the roll-off rate is switched to 0.05, so based on Table 24, M ₂ M ₃ ='01' and M ₀ M ₁ = The transmitting station transmits '11', M ₂ M ₃ ='01'.

Frame #M _{- 2} ( _AA103 ) is the frame _two frames before the roll-off rate α is switched to 0.05 (two frames before the switch). ' is transmitted by the transmitting station. In addition to this, the frame has a roll-off factor of 0.10.
Therefore, based on Table 23, M ₀ M ₁ ='11' and the roll-off rate is switched to 0.05, so based on Table 24, M ₂ M ₃ ='01' and M ₀ M ₁ = The transmitting station transmits '11', M ₂ M ₃ ='01'.

Frame #M-1 (AA104) is the frame one frame before the roll-off rate α is switched to 0.05 (one frame before the switch), so in this frame, K ₀ K ₁ K ₂ K ₃ ='0000 ' is transmitted by the transmitting station. In addition to this, the frame has a roll-off factor of 0.10.
Therefore, based on Table 23, M ₀ M ₁ ='11' and the roll-off rate is switched to 0.05, so based on Table 24, M ₂ M ₃ ='01' and M ₀ M ₁ = The transmitting station transmits '11', M ₂ M ₃ ='01'.

Then _, in frame #M _{( AA105} ) where the roll _- off rate is switched to 0.05, the change of the roll-off rate is completed. do. In addition, since the roll-off rate of this frame is 0.05, based on Table 23, M ₀ M ₁ ='01'. Note that if the roll-off rate does not change thereafter, K ₀ K ₁ K ₂ K ₃ ='1111' and M ₂ M ₃ ='01 in each frame after frame #M (AA105). ' (based on Table 24) is transmitted by the transmitting station.

In the above description, the case where the roll-off rate is switched from 0.10 to 0.05 has been described as an example, but it is not limited to this.

In FIG. 72, consider the case where the roll-off rate is switched to β ₂ at frame #M (AA105). In this case, . . . frame #MZ (AA101), . is β ₁ , and the roll-off rate of frame #M (AA105), frame #M+1 (AA106), . . . is β ₂ . (However, β ₁ ≠ β _2. )

At this time, in the frame #MZ, the frame of Z=15 is the frame Z=15 frames before the roll-off rate α is switched to β2 ₍ Z=15 frames before the switch). The transmitting station transmits ₀ K ₁ K ₂ K ₃ = '1110'. In addition to this, since the roll-off factor of this frame is β ₁ , the transmitting station transmits the bits corresponding to β ₁ as M ₀ M ₁ and further switches the roll-off factor to β ₂ , so M ₂ M The transmitting station transmits the bit corresponding to β ₂ as ₃ .

Similarly, in frame #M-Z, the frame of Z=14 is the frame Z=14 frames before the roll-off rate α is switched to β2 ₍ Z=14 frames before switching), so in this frame, K The transmitting station transmits ₀ K ₁ K ₂ K ₃ = '1101'. In addition to this, since the roll-off factor of this frame is β ₁ , the transmitting station transmits the bits corresponding to β ₁ as M ₀ M ₁ and further switches the roll-off factor to β ₂ , so M ₂ M The transmitting station transmits the bit corresponding to β ₂ as ₃ .
・・・

Frame #M-3 (AA102) is the frame three frames before the roll-off rate α is switched to β ₂ (three frames before the switch), so in this frame, K ₀ K ₁ K ₂ K ₃ ='0010' is transmitted by the transmitting station. In addition to this, since the roll-off factor of this frame is β ₁ , the transmitting station transmits the bits corresponding to β ₁ as M ₀ M ₁ and further switches the roll-off factor to β ₂ , so M ₂ M The transmitting station transmits the bit corresponding to β ₂ as ₃ .

Frame #M-2 (AA103) is the frame two frames before the roll-off rate α is switched to β ₂ (two frames before the switch), so in this frame, K ₀ K ₁ K ₂ K ₃ ='0001' is transmitted by the transmitting station. In addition to this, since the roll-off factor of this frame is β ₁ , the transmitting station transmits the bits corresponding to β ₁ as M ₀ M ₁ and further switches the roll-off factor to β ₂ , so M ₂ M The transmitting station transmits the bit corresponding to β ₂ as ₃ .

In frame #M-1 (AA104), the frame is one frame before the roll-off rate α is switched to β2 ( _one frame before switching), so in this frame, K ₀ K ₁ K ₂ K ₃ ='0000' is transmitted by the transmitting station. In addition to this, since the roll-off factor of this frame is β ₁ , the transmitting station transmits the bits corresponding to β ₁ as M ₀ M ₁ and further switches the roll-off factor to β ₂ , so M ₂ M The transmitting station transmits the bit corresponding to β ₂ as ₃ .

Then, in frame #M (AA105) where the roll _- off rate is switched to β2, the change of the roll-off rate is completed, so the transmitting station transmits K ₀ K ₁ K ₂ K ₃ ='1111' in this frame. . If the roll-off rate does not change thereafter, the transmitting station transmits K ₀ K ₁ K ₂ K ₃ ='1111' in each frame after frame #M (AA105). In addition, since the roll-off rate of this frame is β ₂ , let M ₀ M ₁ be the bit corresponding to β ₂ . Note that if the roll-off rate does not change thereafter, in each frame after frame #M (AA105), K ₀ K ₁ K ₂ K ₃ ='1111' and β ₂ as M ₂ M ₃ The transmitting station transmits the bits corresponding to .

Therefore, in frame #M-Z, in a frame where Z=G (G is an integer of 16 or more), Z=G frames before the roll-off rate α is switched to β2 ₍ switching Z=G frames before). Therefore, in this frame, the transmitting station transmits K ₀ K ₁ K ₂ K ₃ ='1111'. In addition, since the roll-off factor for this frame is β ₁ , the transmitting station transmits the bits corresponding to β ₁ as M ₀ M ₁ . Also, the roll-off rate is switched to β ₂ , but since G is an integer of 16 or more, the transmitting station transmits the bit corresponding to β ₁ as M ₂ M ₃ .

In frame #M-Z, Z=H (H is an integer from 1 to 15) is Z=H frames before the roll-off rate α is switched to β2 ₍ switching Z=H frames before). So, in this frame, the transmitting station transmits K ₀ K ₁ K ₂ K ₃ ='binary representation of H'. In addition, since the roll-off factor for this frame is β ₁ , the transmitting station transmits the bits corresponding to β ₁ as M ₀ M ₁ . Also, since the roll _- off rate is switched to β2 _, the transmitting station transmits the bits corresponding to _β2 as _M2M3 .

As above, the transmitting station (on the ground) transmits K ₀ K ₁ K ₂ K ₃ , M ₀ M ₁ , M ₂ M ₃ and the terminal obtains K ₀ K ₁ K ₂ K ₃ so that the roll Since it is possible to know in advance the frame in which the off rate is switched, and in addition, by obtaining _{M2M3 ,} it is possible to know the value of the roll-off rate of the frame in which the roll-off rate is switched, the terminal can change the roll-off rate. It is possible to obtain the effect of being able to accurately deal with

In the above description, as an example, the transmitting station notifies the terminal from 15 frames before the roll-off rate is switched. The transmitting station may notify the terminal before one frame, or the transmitting station may notify the terminal seven frames before. The timing of the frame in which the transmitting station starts notifying the terminal of the roll-off rate change may be any timing.

In addition, in Tables 23 and 24, four types of roll-off rate values that can be set have been described as examples. , or the value of the roll-off rate that can be set may be 2.

The timing at which the transmitting station transmits M ₂ M ₃ corresponding to the value of the roll-off rate to be switched is not limited to the above description. Just send M ₂ M ₃ corresponding to the rate.

Several examples have been described above, but important points in this embodiment are as follows.
- The transmitting station transmits in advance to the terminal control information regarding the timing of the frame for which the roll-off rate is to be changed.
- The transmitting station transmits control information to the terminal so that the roll-off rate to be changed can be determined.

Next, the operation of the receiving device will be explained using FIG.

FIG. 75 shows an example of the configuration of a receiving device of a terminal. A radio section AA301 receives a signal received by an antenna, performs processing such as frequency conversion and orthogonal demodulation, and outputs a baseband signal AA302.

The band-limiting filter AA303 receives the baseband signal AA302 and control information AA320 as inputs, and sets the roll-off rate of the band-limiting filter AA303 based on the control information AA320. Then, the band-limiting filter AA303 outputs a band-limited baseband signal AA304.

Demapping section AA305 receives band-limited baseband signal AA304, synchronization/channel estimation signal AA318, and control information AA320 as inputs, extracts information such as a modulation scheme from control information AA320, and extracts information such as a modulation scheme from control information AA320. removes the frequency offset, synchronizes the time, and obtains the channel estimate. Demapping section AA305 demaps (demodulates) band-limited baseband signal AA304 based on these pieces of information, and outputs, for example, log-likelihood ratio signal AA306.

Deinterleaving section AA307 receives log-likelihood ratio signal AA306 and control information AA320 as inputs, performs deinterleaving (reordering) on log-likelihood ratio information based on control information AA320, and deinterleaves the logarithm after deinterleaving. A likelihood ratio signal AA 308 is output.

Error correction decoding unit AA309 receives deinterleaved log-likelihood ratio signal AA308 and control information AA320 as inputs, extracts information on the error correction method (for example, coding rate, etc.) from control information AA320, and converts the information to Based on this, error correction decoding is performed and received data AA310 is output.

A synchronization/channel estimation unit AA317 receives the band-limited baseband signal AA304 as an input, extracts a synchronization signal/pilot signal, etc., performs time synchronization, frame synchronization, frequency synchronization, channel estimation, etc., and generates a synchronization/channel estimation signal. Output AA318.

A control information estimator (TMCC information estimator) AA319 receives the band-limited baseband signal AA304 as input, and obtains TMCC information from the band-limited baseband signal AA304, for example. A control information estimating unit (TMCC information estimating unit) AA319 outputs control information AA320 including information such as an error correction coding scheme and a modulation scheme.

In particular, the control information AA 320 includes information about the change timing of the roll-off rate and the change value of the roll-off rate described above. Therefore, the control information estimating unit (TMCC information estimating unit) AA 319 is, for example, the information (K ₀ K ₁ K ₂ K ₃ ) described above, or
_Given the _{information of ( K0K1K2K3L0L1 ) or ( K0K1K2K3M0M1M2M3 ) ,} as _{explained above ,} The change timing of the roll-off rate and the change value of the roll-off rate are estimated, and control information AA320 including this estimated information is output.

Then, the band-limiting filter AA 303 changes the roll-off rate of the band-limiting filter at appropriate timing based on this estimation information.

_An example of transmitting _K0K1K2K3 , _{L0L1 , M0M1 ,} and _M2M3 as part of the _TMCC extension information has been described, but this is not the _{only option} . Instead, the transmitting station transmits K ₀ K ₁ K ₂ K ₃ , L ₀ L ₁ , M ₀ M ₁ , M ₂ M ₃ as control information such as TMCC, and the terminal obtains this information, so that the terminal can accurately respond to changes in the roll-off rate.

Also, in the present embodiment, a system composed of a transmitting station, a repeater, and a terminal has been described as an example, but it is natural that a system composed of a transmitting station and a terminal can be similarly implemented. . At this time, the transmitting station transmits K ₀ K ₁ K ₂ K ₃ , L ₀ L ₁ , M ₀ M ₁ , and M ₂ M ₃ , and the terminal obtains this information, so that the terminal can use the roll-off rate It is possible to accurately respond to changes in

As the band-limiting filter, the filter having the frequency characteristic of equation (28) was used, but the filter is not limited to this, and may be a filter having another frequency characteristic. At this time, a filter with a narrow passband and a filter with a wide passband are prepared, and using a filter with a large α in Equation (28) is equivalent to using a filter with a wide passband. Using a filter with a small α is equivalent to using a filter with a narrow passband, and using this relationship, it is possible to implement the above-described embodiments.

By implementing as described above, there is an advantage that the receiving apparatus can change the roll-off rate accurately. By changing the roll-off rate, the transmitting device can apply a high-speed baud rate, so that the effect of improving the data transmission efficiency can be obtained.

(Embodiment BB)
Embodiment AA has explained the method of changing the roll-off rate of the band-limiting filter and the method of configuring control information such as TMCC (Transmission and Multiplexing Configuration Control).

In this embodiment, a method of transmitting control information such as TMCC at the time of emergency warning broadcasting will be described. In the present embodiment, a case will be described in which emergency warning broadcasting is performed in a transmission system based on "Transmission system standard for advanced wideband digital satellite broadcasting ARIB STD-B44 Version 1.0".

The configuration of the TMCC, the configuration of the transmitting device, the configuration of the receiving device, etc. are the same as those described in Embodiment AA, and the description thereof will be omitted.
Further, in this embodiment, as described in Embodiment B, Embodiment C, Embodiment D, Embodiment E, Embodiment F, and Embodiment G, the (terrestrial) transmitting station, A system composed of repeaters (satellites) and terminals will be described as an example.

In the present embodiment, message information (for example, text information displayed on display devices such as televisions and displays) and/or emergency warning (emergency bulletin) information composed of video and still image information (For example, emergency earthquake information (information on the epicenter, information on the magnitude of the earthquake, information on the tremors (seismic intensity) of each region), information on the predicted seismic intensity of each region, predicted arrival time of the tremors of each region , arrival time of tsunami, scale of tsunami (height of tsunami, information on volcanic eruption, etc.) is transmitted from a transmitting station (ground station).

Satellite broadcasting, such as advanced wideband satellite digital broadcasting, is characterized by the distribution of broadcast signals over a wide area. For example, the importance of emergency warning (emergency bulletin) information such as information on the occurrence of an earthquake described above varies depending on the region. It is undesirable for the transmitting station to transmit the information of , given the needs of each user of the information. (Broadcast signals (transmission signals) are signals transmitted by satellites (repeaters). However, signals corresponding to broadcast signals are transmitted by transmission stations as described in other embodiments. (Earth station).)

Therefore, when transmitting emergency warning (early warning) information, information on the target area of the emergency warning (early warning) information is added and transmitted, and by specifying the target area, the emergency warning (Emergency bulletin) information can be accurately transmitted to users who are likely to want the information.

When the receiving device (terminal) obtains the information about the area transmitted together with the emergency warning (early warning) information, if it corresponds to the designated area, it receives (demodulates) the emergency warning (early warning) information. signal processing (reception processing) for

The region setting of the receiving device (terminal) may be specified by the GPS (Global Positioning System) or the region setting at the time of installation of the receiving device (terminal), but it is not limited to this. . Then, "applicability or non-applicability of the designated area" is performed by comparing the area information obtained by this setting method and the information about the area transmitted together with the information of the emergency warning (emergency bulletin).

Further, it is more preferable for the receiver (terminal) if the broadcast signal (transmission signal) (for example, control information such as TMCC) includes a "flag indicating the presence/absence of area-related information". For example, if there is no area-related information, the flag is set to "0" and the area-related information is not transmitted, and if there is area-related information, the flag is set to "1" and the area-related information is transmitted. When there is a "flag indicating the presence/absence of information about an area", the configuration of control information related to an "emergency warning (emergency bulletin)" is, for example, as shown in FIG. ”, “Regional Information”, and “Emergency Warning (Early Warning) Information”.

The receiving device (terminal) identifies a flag indicating the presence or absence of information on the region (included in control information such as TMCC), and if there is information on the region (that is, the above-described flag is "1") , acquires information about the area, and if it corresponds to the designated area, performs signal processing (reception processing) for receiving (demodulating) information of an emergency warning (emergency bulletin). An example of determination as to whether the designated area is applicable or not is as described above.

As described above, for example, the control information such as TMCC is added with information about the target area of the emergency warning (emergency bulletin) information, and the (terrestrial) transmitting station transmits it, thereby using satellite broadcasting. It is possible to distribute information with different degrees of importance depending on the region. Further, by providing a flag indicating the presence/absence of area-related information in control information such as TMCC, it is possible to obtain the effect of being able to transmit emergency warning (emergency bulletin) information more accurately.

If the (terrestrial) transmitting station transmits the above-described flag as "0" (no information about the area), the receiving device (terminal) sends an emergency warning (emergency bulletin) to all areas. ), or the importance of emergency warning (emergency bulletin) information may not be determined.

“A broadcast signal (transmission signal) is a signal transmitted by a satellite (repeater). However, even in a system in which a satellite generates a broadcast signal (transmission signal) and transmits it to a (terrestrial) terminal, the control information transmission method described above can be used. , the effect of being able to accurately transmit emergency warning (emergency bulletin) information can be obtained.

(Embodiment CC)
Embodiment AA has explained the method of changing the roll-off rate of the band-limiting filter and the method of configuring control information such as TMCC (Transmission and Multiplexing Configuration Control).

In this embodiment, a method of transmitting control information such as TMCC at the time of emergency warning broadcasting will be described. In the present embodiment, a case will be described in which emergency warning broadcasting is performed in a transmission system based on "Transmission system standard for advanced wideband digital satellite broadcasting ARIB STD-B44 Version 1.0".
The configuration of the TMCC, the configuration of the transmitting device, the configuration of the receiving device, etc. are the same as those described in Embodiment AA, and the description thereof will be omitted.

Further, in this embodiment, as described in Embodiment B, Embodiment C, Embodiment D, Embodiment E, Embodiment F, and Embodiment G, the (terrestrial) transmitting station, A system composed of repeaters (satellites) and terminals will be described as an example.

In the present embodiment, message information (e.g., text information displayed on a display device such as a television or display), and (or) video or still image information, and (or) graphics (e.g., map, etc.) information and/or emergency warning (emergency bulletin) information consisting of voice information (e.g., emergency earthquake information (epicenter information, magnitude information indicating the scale of the earthquake, earthquake tremors in each region ( information on seismic intensity), information on predicted seismic intensity in each region, predicted arrival time of earthquake shaking in each region, arrival time of tsunami, scale of tsunami (height of tsunami), information on volcanic eruption, etc.) Consider the case where a ground station) transmits.

Satellite broadcasting, such as advanced wideband satellite digital broadcasting, is characterized by the distribution of broadcast signals over a wide area. For example, the importance of emergency warning (emergency bulletin) information such as information on the occurrence of an earthquake described above varies depending on the region. It is undesirable for the transmitting station to transmit the information of , given the needs of each user of the information. (Broadcast signals (transmission signals) are signals transmitted by satellites (repeaters). However, signals corresponding to broadcast signals are transmitted by transmission stations as described in other embodiments. (Earth station).)

Therefore, when transmitting emergency warning (early warning) information, information on the target area of the emergency warning (early warning) information is added and transmitted, and by specifying the target area, the emergency warning (Emergency bulletin) information can be accurately transmitted to users who are likely to want the information.

When the receiving device (terminal) obtains the information about the area transmitted together with the emergency warning (early warning) information, if it corresponds to the designated area, it receives (demodulates) the emergency warning (early warning) information. signal processing (reception processing) for

The region setting of the receiving device (terminal) may be specified by the GPS (Global Positioning System) or the region setting at the time of installation of the receiving device (terminal), but it is not limited to this. . Then, "applicability or non-applicability of the designated area" is performed by comparing the area information obtained by this setting method and the information about the area transmitted together with the information of the emergency warning (emergency bulletin).

Further, it is more preferable for the receiver (terminal) if the broadcast signal (transmission signal) (for example, control information such as TMCC) includes a "flag indicating the presence/absence of area-related information". For example, if there is no area-related information, the flag is set to "0" and the area-related information is not transmitted, and if there is area-related information, the flag is set to "1" and the area-related information is transmitted. When there is a "flag indicating the presence/absence of information about an area", the configuration of control information related to an "emergency warning (emergency bulletin)" is, for example, as shown in FIG. ”, “Regional Information”, and “Emergency Warning (Early Warning) Information”.

The receiving device (terminal) identifies a flag indicating the presence or absence of information on the region (included in control information such as TMCC), and if there is information on the region (that is, the above-described flag is "1") , acquires information about the area, and if it corresponds to the designated area, performs signal processing (reception processing) for receiving (demodulating) information of an emergency warning (emergency bulletin). An example of determination as to whether the designated area is applicable or not is as described above.

As described above, for example, the control information such as TMCC is added with information about the target area of the emergency warning (emergency bulletin) information, and the (terrestrial) transmitting station transmits it, thereby using satellite broadcasting. It is possible to distribute information with different degrees of importance depending on the region. Further, by providing a flag indicating the presence/absence of area-related information in control information such as TMCC, it is possible to obtain the effect of being able to transmit emergency warning (emergency bulletin) information more accurately.

If the (terrestrial) transmitting station transmits the above-described flag as "0" (no information about the area), the receiving device (terminal) sends an emergency warning (emergency bulletin) to all areas. ), or the importance of emergency warning (emergency bulletin) information may not be determined.

“A broadcast signal (transmission signal) is a signal transmitted by a satellite (repeater). However, even in a system in which a satellite generates a broadcast signal (transmission signal) and transmits it to a (terrestrial) terminal, the control information transmission method described above can be used. , the effect of being able to accurately transmit emergency warning (emergency bulletin) information can be obtained.

(Embodiment DD)
Embodiment AA has explained the method of changing the roll-off rate of the band-limiting filter and the method of configuring control information such as TMCC (Transmission and Multiplexing Configuration Control).

In this embodiment, a method for changing the roll-off rate of the band-limiting filter during emergency warning broadcasting will be described in detail. In addition, in this embodiment, the method for changing the roll-off rate of the band-limiting filter at the time of emergency warning broadcasting is described for the transmission system based on the "transmission system standard for advanced wideband digital satellite broadcasting ARIB STD-B44 version 1.0". explain.

The configuration of the TMCC, the configuration of the transmitting device, the configuration of the receiving device, etc. are the same as those described in Embodiment AA, and the description thereof will be omitted.
Further, in this embodiment, as described in Embodiment B, Embodiment C, Embodiment D, Embodiment E, Embodiment F, and Embodiment G, the (terrestrial) transmitting station, A system composed of repeaters (satellites) and terminals will be described as an example.

First, as a prerequisite for the broadcasting system, the transmitting station (ground station) described in Embodiment AA can select the value of the roll-off rate of the band-limiting filter from a plurality of values, as in Embodiment AA. shall be (As a matter of course, the receiver (terminal) also changes the roll-off rate value in accordance with the change in the roll-off rate value of the band-limiting filter of the transmitting station.)

In the present embodiment, message information (e.g., text information displayed on a display device such as a television or display), and (or) video or still image information, and (or) graphics (e.g., map, etc.) and/or emergency warning (emergency bulletin) information consisting of voice information (e.g., emergency earthquake information (epicenter information, magnitude information indicating the scale of the earthquake, local earthquake tremors (seismic intensity)) ), information on predicted seismic intensity in each region, predicted arrival time of earthquake tremors in each region, arrival time of tsunami, scale of tsunami (height of tsunami), information on volcanic eruptions, etc.) station) transmits. (In the case of graphic information, earthquake information may be included on a map, and in the case of audio information, evacuation instruction information for each region may be included.)

The present invention transmits emergency alert (emergency bulletin) information composed of telegram information, and/or video or still image information, and/or graphic information, and/or audio information. In this case, a transmission method, a reception method, a transmission device, and a reception device in which the roll-off rate of the band-limiting filter described in Embodiment AA is set to β (the roll-off rate is set to a certain value).

(Example 1)
FIG. 77 shows that when the transmitting station (earth station) is transmitting frames using the roll-off rate α=γ _i (where i is an integer equal to or greater than 1), an emergency warning broadcast is performed. It illustrates the state of the frame on the time axis when there is an interrupt. It also describes the state of _Q0 in each frame, which will be explained later.

Note that j is an integer equal to or greater than 1, and γ _i ≠β is established for all j satisfying this. Then, j and k are integers equal to or greater than 1, j≠k holds, and γ _j ≠γ _k holds for all j and all k that satisfy these conditions.
In FIG. 77, it is assumed that frame #M (BB105) has a roll-off rate α ₌ β, and that the roll-off rate of the frames before frame #M (BB105) is α=γi. Then, in frame #M (BB105), an emergency warning (emergency bulletin) composed of message information, and/or video and still image information, and/or graphic information, and/or audio information. information is transmitted.

Frame #MZ (BB101) is a frame Z frames before frame #M (BB105), and has a roll-off rate α ₌ γi. (However, Z is an integer greater than or equal to K+1.)
Frame #MK (BB102) is a frame that is K frames before frame #M (BB105) and has a roll-off rate α ₌ γi.
Frame #M-2 (BB103) is a frame two frames before frame #M (BB105) and has a roll-off rate α ₌ γi.
Frame #M-1 (BB104) is a frame preceding frame #M (BB105) by one frame, and has a roll-off rate α ₌ γi.
Frame #M+1 (BB106) has a roll-off rate α=β and is composed of telegram information, and/or video and still image information, and/or graphic information, and/or audio information. It is assumed that the information of emergency warning (emergency bulletin) is transmitted.

The configuration of each frame is as described in Embodiment AA, and each frame is composed of the frame shown in FIG. 11, for example.
As a feature of FIG. 77, the transmitting station transmits message information, and/or video and still image information, and/or graphic information, and/or audio information in frames with a roll-off rate α=β. It is to transmit the information of the emergency warning (emergency bulletin) composed of. As a result, the receiving device reliably receives an emergency alert (emergency bulletin) consisting of message information, and/or video and still image information, and/or graphic information, and/or audio information. information can be obtained, so that the effect of increasing the possibility of ensuring the safety of the user can be obtained.

Next, a method of transmitting control information such as TMCC in this embodiment will be described.
The transmitting station (terrestrial station) shall transmit Q0 as part of the _TMCC information. _At this time, Table 25 shows the relationship between Q0 and the activation flag for emergency warning broadcasting.

As shown in Table 25, when Q ₀ =“1”, it means that no emergency warning is broadcast. (In Table 25, it is described as "no activation control".) Then, when Q ₀ = "0", "an emergency broadcast will be implemented (that is, an announcement that an emergency broadcast will be )” or “implementing an emergency broadcast”. (Table 25 describes "with start control".)

In FIG. 77, as shown in the figure, the transmitting station changes Q0, which is part of the TMCC of frame #MK (BB102), to " ₀ ". (Q ₀ is "1" in frame #MK-1, and Q ₀ is also "1" in the previous frames.) And F is an integer equal to or greater than MK , Q0 is set to "1" in frame _#F .

As described above, frame #M (BB105) in FIG. It transmits emergency warning (emergency bulletin) information composed of information, and in subsequent frames, telegram information, and (or) video and still image information, and (or) graphic information, and ( or), information of an emergency warning (emergency bulletin) composed of voice information is transmitted.

In FIG. 77, the frame end time of frame #M-1 (BB104) does not match the start time of frame #M (BB105). This is because the roll-off rate is changed. At this time, there is a symbol configuration between time U and time V, for example, ramp-up, ramp-down, and guard intervals as described in the embodiment AA. Between time U and time V, other symbols (for example, symbols for transmitting control information, pilot symbols, reference symbols, preambles, symbols for synchronization, signals for the receiver to detect symbols, symbols for estimating frequency offset, symbols for estimating phase, etc.) may be inserted.

Next, the operation of the receiver when the transmitting station transmits frames as shown in FIG. 77 will be described.
FIG. 78 shows an example of the configuration of a receiver. In addition, in FIG. 78, the same numbers are given to the parts that operate in the same manner as in FIG. 75, and the explanation of the operation is omitted.

When frame #M-1 (BB104) in FIG. 77 and the frames before it are received, the band-limiting filter _AA303 sets the roll-off factor α to γi.

When the receiving device receives frame #MZ in FIG. 77 (where Z is an integer equal to or greater than K+1), the control information estimator (TMCC information estimator) AA319 receives the input band limit Control information (TMCC information) for frames #MZ is obtained from the subsequent baseband signal AA304. Then, Q0 described above is obtained from the control information ( _TMCC information). At this time, since Q ₀ =“1”, the receiving device determines that the emergency warning broadcast is not activated, and continuously performs demapping, deinterleaving, and error correction decoding on each frame, Obtaining received data AA310 (demapping unit AA305, synchronization/channel estimation unit AA317, control information estimation unit (TMCC information estimation unit) AA319) handles the band-limited baseband signal and performs each process. Become. ).

When the receiver receives frame #MK (BB102) in FIG. 77, the control information estimator (TMCC information estimator) AA319 extracts frame #M from the input baseband signal AA304 after band limitation. - Obtain K control information (TMCC information). Then, Q0 described above is obtained from the control information ( _TMCC information). At this time, since Q ₀ =“0”, the receiving device determines that the emergency warning broadcast has started. Note that Q ₀ =“1” in frame #MK-1 and previous frames, and Q ₀ =“0” for the first time in frame #MK. Therefore, there is a possibility that the information of the emergency alert (emergency bulletin) is transmitted from the frame #MK+1, which is the next frame of the frame #MK. (However, even if the emergency warning (emergency bulletin) information is transmitted in the frame #MK, there is no problem in the operation of the receiver. In this case, when the receiver receives the frame #MK, Telegram information, and/or video and still image information, and/or graphic information, and/or voice information for emergency warnings (emergency bulletins) can be obtained.)

As described above, in the present embodiment, "emergency warning composed of telegram information, and/or video and still image information, and/or graphic information, and/or audio information When transmitting information of (emergency bulletin), the roll-off rate of the band-limiting filter described in Embodiment AA is set to β (the roll-off rate is set to a certain value) Transmission method, reception method, transmission apparatus, reception device”. Therefore, since the band-limiting filter BB201 in FIG. 78 is a band-limiting filter for receiving the emergency warning broadcast, the roll-off rate is set to β.

Also, the roll-off factor used by the transmitting station when transmitting frame #M−K+1 may be β. (Because Q ₀ =“0” for the first time in frame #MK (BB102).)

Therefore, the band-limiting filter BB201 of FIG. 78 receives the control information AA320 and the baseband signal AA302, and based on the information of Q ₀ included in the control information AA320, the base band corresponding to the frame #M−K+1 and subsequent frames. The band signal is subjected to signal processing corresponding to the band-limiting filter, and a baseband signal BB202 after band-limiting the roll-off rate β is output.

The synchronization unit _BB203 for emergency warning broadcasting in FIG. The band-limited baseband signal BB202 is subjected to processing such as frame synchronization, time synchronization, and symbol synchronization, and a synchronization signal BB204 including information indicating whether or not synchronization has been achieved is output.

In the frame state of FIG. 77, Q ₀ =“0” in frame #MK, and subsequent frames, that is, frame #MK+1, frame #MK+2, . . . -1, frame #M, frame #M+ ₁ , . It is also assumed that the transmission of emergency alert (emergency bulletin) information starts from frame #M.

Therefore, from frame #M−K+1 to frame #M−1, the synchronization unit BB203 for emergency warning broadcast in FIG. Since frame synchronization, time synchronization, and symbol synchronization cannot be achieved with the baseband signal BB202 after band-limiting with the rate β, a synchronization signal BB204 indicating that synchronization has not been achieved is output.

Then, in frame #M (BB105), the synchronization unit BB203 for emergency warning broadcast in FIG. In the subsequent baseband signal BB202, frame synchronization, time synchronization, and symbol synchronization can be achieved, and therefore a synchronization signal BB204 indicating that synchronization has been achieved is output.

In frame #M+1 (BB106) and subsequent frames, the emergency warning broadcast synchronization unit BB203 in FIG. Frame synchronization, time synchronization, and symbol synchronization can be achieved with the baseband signal BB202 after the band limitation of β, and therefore a synchronization signal BB204 indicating that synchronization has been achieved is output.

Accordingly, demapping section AA305 in FIG. 78 generates band-limited baseband signal AA304, band-limited baseband signal BB202 with roll-off rate β, synchronization signal BB204, synchronization/channel estimation signal AA318, and control information AA320. is input, and frame #M (BB105) and subsequent frames are synchronized, so demapping of baseband signal BB202 after band-limiting with roll-off rate β is performed, and log-likelihood ratio signal AA306 is converted to Output.

Note that demapping section AA305 in FIG. 78 is out of synchronization in frame #M−1 and frames prior to it, so demapping baseband signal AA304 after band limitation is performed, and log-likelihood ratio signal AA306 to output
The synchronization/channel estimation unit AA317 in FIG. 78 receives the band-limited baseband signal AA304, the band-limited baseband signal BB202 with the roll-off rate β, and the synchronization signal BB204, and receives frame #M (BB105) and thereafter. Since synchronization is achieved in the frame , time synchronization, frequency synchronization, and channel estimation are performed using the baseband signal BB202 after band limitation with the roll-off rate β, and a synchronization/channel estimation signal AA318 is output.

Note that the synchronization/channel estimation unit AA317 in FIG. 78 is not synchronized in frame #M-1 and the frames before it, so it uses the band-limited baseband signal AA304 to perform time synchronization, frequency synchronization, It performs channel estimation and outputs synchronization and channel estimation signal AA 318 .

(Example 2)
FIGS. 79 and 80 show frames different from FIG. It also describes the state of _Q0 in each frame. FIG. 79 and FIG. 80 differ from FIG. 77 in that there is an interruption of emergency warning broadcasting when information is being transmitted with a roll-off rate α=β.

In FIGS. 79 and 80, frame #M (BB105) has a roll-off rate α=β, and the roll-off rates of frames before frame #M (BB105) are also β. Then, in frame #M (BB105), an emergency warning (emergency bulletin) composed of message information, and/or video and still image information, and/or graphic information, and/or audio information. information is transmitted.

Frame #MZ (BB101) is a frame Z frames before frame #M (BB105), and has a roll-off rate α=β. (However, Z is an integer greater than or equal to K+1.)
Frame #MK (BB102) is a frame that is K frames before frame #M (BB105), and has a roll-off rate α=β.
Frame #M-2 (BB103) is a frame two frames before frame #M (BB105) and has a roll-off rate α=β.
Frame #M-1 (BB104) is a frame preceding frame #M (BB105) by one frame, and has a roll-off rate α=β.
Frame #M+1 (BB106) has a roll-off rate α=β and is composed of telegram information, and/or video and still image information, and/or graphic information, and/or audio information. It is assumed that the information of emergency warning (emergency bulletin) is transmitted.
The configuration of each frame is as described in Embodiment AA, and each frame is composed of the frame shown in FIG. 11, for example.

In FIGS. 79 and 80, as in FIG. 77, the transmitting station transmits message information, and/or video or still image information, and/or graphic information, and/or (or) It is transmitting emergency alert (emergency bulletin) information composed of voice information. As a result, the receiving device reliably receives an emergency alert (emergency bulletin) consisting of message information, and/or video and still image information, and/or graphic information, and/or audio information. information can be obtained, so that the effect of increasing the possibility of ensuring the safety of the user can be obtained.

Next, a method for transmitting control information such as TMCC will be described.
The transmitting station (terrestrial station) shall transmit Q0 as part of the _TMCC information. _At this time, Table 25 shows the relationship between Q0 and the activation flag for emergency warning broadcasting.

79 and 80, the transmitting station changes Q0, which is part of the TMCC of frame #MK (BB102), to " ₀ ", as shown in the figures. (Q ₀ is "1" in frame #MK-1, and Q ₀ is also "1" in the previous frames.) And F is an integer equal to or greater than MK , Q0 is set to "1" in frame _#F .

79 and 80, in frame #M (BB105), message information, and/or video or still image information, and/or graphic information, and/or ), and information of an emergency warning (emergency bulletin) consisting of voice information is transmitted. and/or to transmit emergency alert (emergency bulletin) information composed of voice information.

Note that FIG. 79 shows an example in which the frame end time of frame #M-1 (BB104) and the start time of frame #M (BB105) match. In FIG. 80, the frame end time of frame #M-1 (BB104) and the start time of frame #M (BB105) do not match. For example, there are ramp-up, ramp-down, and guard sections as described in the embodiment AA. Between time U and time V, other symbols (for example, symbols for transmitting control information, pilot symbols, reference symbols, preambles, symbols for synchronization, signals for the receiver to detect symbols, symbols for estimating frequency offset, symbols for estimating phase, etc.) may be inserted. 79 and 80 differ from each other in this point, and the transmitting station may transmit by either method.

Next, the operation of the receiver when the transmitting station transmits frames as shown in FIG. 79 or 80 will be described.
FIG. 78 shows an example of the configuration of a receiver. In addition, in FIG. 78, the same numbers are given to the parts that operate in the same manner as in FIG. 75, and the explanation of the operation is omitted.

When frame #M-1 (BB104) in FIG. 79 or FIG. 80 and the frames before it are received, the roll-off rate α is set to β in the band-limiting filter AA303.

When the receiving device receives frame #MZ in FIG. 79 or FIG. 80 (where Z is an integer equal to or greater than K+1), the control information estimator (TMCC information estimator) AA 319 inputs Control information (TMCC information) for frame #MZ is obtained from the baseband signal AA304 after a certain band limitation. Then, Q0 described above is obtained from the control information ( _TMCC information). At this time, since Q ₀ =“1”, the receiving device determines that the emergency warning broadcast is not activated, and continuously performs demapping, deinterleaving, and error correction decoding on each frame, Obtain received data AA310. (Demapping section AA305, synchronization/channel estimating section AA317, control information estimating section (TMCC information estimating section) AA319) handle the band-limited baseband signal and perform various processes. )

When the receiving device receives frame #MK (BB102) in FIG. 79 or FIG. Obtain control information (TMCC information) for frame #MK. Then, Q0 described above is obtained from the control information ( _TMCC information). At this time, since Q ₀ =“0”, the receiving device determines that the emergency warning broadcast has started. Note that Q ₀ =“1” in frame #MK-1 and previous frames, and Q ₀ =“0” for the first time in frame #MK. Therefore, there is a possibility that the information of the emergency alert (emergency bulletin) is transmitted from the frame #MK+1, which is the next frame of the frame #MK. (However, even if the emergency warning (emergency bulletin) information is transmitted in the frame #MK, there is no problem in the operation of the receiver. In this case, when the receiver receives the frame #MK, It is possible to obtain emergency warning (emergency bulletin) information composed of message information, and/or video and still image information, and/or graphic information, and/or audio information.)

As described above, in the present embodiment, "emergency warning composed of telegram information, and/or video and still image information, and/or graphic information, and/or audio information When transmitting information of (emergency bulletin), the roll-off rate of the band-limiting filter described in Embodiment AA is set to β (the roll-off rate is set to a certain value) Transmission method, reception method, transmission apparatus, reception device”. Therefore, since the band-limiting filter BB201 in FIG. 78 is a band-limiting filter for receiving the emergency warning broadcast, the roll-off rate is set to β.

The band-limiting filter BB201 of FIG. 78 receives control information AA320 and baseband signal AA302, and based on the information of Q0 included in control information _AA320 , baseband signals corresponding to frame #M−K+1 and subsequent frames. is subjected to signal processing corresponding to the band-limiting filter, and the baseband signal BB202 after band-limiting the roll-off rate β is output.

The synchronization unit _BB203 for emergency warning broadcasting in FIG. The band-limited baseband signal BB202 is subjected to processing such as frame synchronization, time synchronization, and symbol synchronization, and a synchronization signal BB204 including information indicating whether or not synchronization has been achieved is output.

79 or 80, Q ₀ =“0” in frame #MK, and subsequent frames, that is, frame #MK+1, frame #MK+2, . . . In frame #M−1, frame #M, frame #M+1, . . . , the transmitting station also transmits information of Q ₀ =“0”. It is also assumed that the transmission of emergency alert (emergency bulletin) information starts from frame #M.

From frame #M−K+1 to frame #M−1, the emergency warning broadcast synchronization unit BB203 in FIG. The band-limited baseband signal BB202 enables frame synchronization, time synchronization, and symbol synchronization. Therefore, the synchronization section BB203 for emergency warning broadcast in FIG. 78 outputs a synchronization signal BB204 indicating that synchronization has been achieved. However, in frames #M−K+1 to #M−1, no emergency alert (emergency bulletin) information is transmitted.

The demapping unit AA305 in FIG. 78 receives the band-limited baseband signal AA304, the band-limited baseband signal BB202 with the roll-off rate β, the synchronization signal BB204, the synchronization/channel estimation signal AA318, and the control information AA320, Since frames #M−K+1 to #M−1 are synchronized, demapping is performed on the baseband signal BB202 after band-limiting the roll-off rate β, and a log-likelihood ratio signal AA306 is output. (However, in frames #M-K+1 to #M-1, emergency alert (emergency bulletin) information is not transmitted.)

Then, in frame #M (BB105), the synchronization unit BB203 for emergency warning broadcast in FIG. In the subsequent baseband signal BB202, frame synchronization, time synchronization, and symbol synchronization can be achieved, and therefore a synchronization signal BB204 indicating that synchronization has been achieved is output.

In frame #M+1 (BB106) and subsequent frames, the emergency warning broadcast synchronization unit BB203 in FIG. Frame synchronization, time synchronization, and symbol synchronization can be achieved with the baseband signal BB202 after the band limitation of β, and therefore a synchronization signal BB204 indicating that synchronization has been achieved is output.

The demapping unit AA305 in FIG. 78 receives the band-limited baseband signal AA304, the band-limited baseband signal BB202 with the roll-off rate β, the synchronization signal BB204, the synchronization/channel estimation signal AA318, and the control information AA320, Frame #M (BB105) and subsequent frames are synchronized, so demapping is performed on baseband signal BB202 after band-limiting with roll-off rate β, and log-likelihood ratio signal AA306 is output. (In frame #M (BB105) and subsequent frames, emergency alert (emergency bulletin) information is transmitted.)

The synchronization/channel estimation unit AA317 in FIG. 78 receives the band-limited baseband signal AA304, the band-limited baseband signal BB202 with the roll-off rate β, and the synchronization signal BB204. At −1, synchronization is achieved, so time synchronization, frequency synchronization, and channel estimation are performed using the baseband signal BB202 after band limitation with the roll-off rate β, and a synchronization/channel estimation signal AA318 is output.

The synchronization/channel estimation unit AA317 in FIG. 78 receives the band-limited baseband signal AA304, the band-limited baseband signal BB202 with the roll-off rate β, and the synchronization signal BB204, and receives frame #M (BB105) and thereafter. Since synchronization is achieved in the frame , time synchronization, frequency synchronization, and channel estimation are performed using the baseband signal BB202 after band limitation with the roll-off rate β, and a synchronization/channel estimation signal AA318 is output.

(Example 3)
FIG. 81 shows that an emergency warning is broadcast when a transmission station (ground station) transmits frames using a roll-off rate α=γ _i (where i is an integer equal to or greater than 1). It illustrates the state of the frame on the time axis when there is an interrupt. It also describes the state of _Q0 in each frame.

Note that j is an integer equal to or greater than 1, and γ _i ≠β is established for all j satisfying this. Then, j and k are integers equal to or greater than 1, j≠k holds, and γ _j ≠γ _k holds for all j and all k that satisfy these conditions.
In FIG. 81, the frame #M (BB105) has a roll-off rate α ₌ β, and the roll-off rates of the frames before the frame #M (BB105) are α=γi. Then, in frame #M (BB105), an emergency warning (emergency bulletin) composed of message information, and/or video and still image information, and/or graphic information, and/or audio information. information is transmitted.

Frame #MZ (BB101) is a frame Z frames before frame #M (BB105), and has a roll-off rate α ₌ γi. (However, Z is an integer greater than or equal to K+1.)
Frame #MK (BB102) is a frame that is K frames before frame #M (BB105) and has a roll-off rate α ₌ γi.

Frame #MY (BB501) is a frame that is Y frames before frame #M (BB105), and has a roll-off rate α ₌ γi. Frame #MY (BB501) is an emergency warning (emergency This is the frame from which the information on the "Bulletin" (Bulletin) is started. It should be noted that Y is any value among integers of 1 or more and K or less.
Frame #MX is a frame X frames before frame #M (BB105), and has a roll-off rate α ₌ γi. The frame #MX is an emergency alert (emergency bulletin) composed of electronic message information, video or still image information, graphic information, and/or voice information. Assume that you are transmitting information. Note that X is an integer of 1 or more and Y or less.

Frame #M+1 (BB106) has a roll-off rate α=β and is composed of telegram information, and/or video and still image information, and/or graphic information, and/or audio information. It is assumed that the information of emergency warning (emergency bulletin) is transmitted.
The configuration of each frame is as described in Embodiment AA, and each frame is composed of the frame shown in FIG. 11, for example.

As a feature of FIG. 81, the transmitting station uses frames with a roll-off rate α = β to transmit message information, and/or video and still image information, and/or graphic information, and/or In addition to transmitting emergency warning (emergency bulletin) information composed of voice information, telegram information and/or video and still image information and/or graphic information are transmitted at other roll-off rates. And/or, it is possible to obtain the information of an emergency warning (emergency bulletin) composed of voice information, thereby increasing the possibility of ensuring the safety of the user.

Next, a method for transmitting control information such as TMCC will be described.
The transmitting station (terrestrial station) shall transmit Q0 as part of the _TMCC information. _At this time, Table 25 shows the relationship between Q0 and the activation flag for emergency warning broadcasting.
In FIG. 81, as shown in the figure, the transmitting station sends the TM of frame #MK (BB102).
Change Q0, which is part of CC, to " ₀ ". (It is assumed that Q ₀ is "1" in frame #MK-1, and that Q ₀ is also "1" in the previous frames.) And F is MK
Given the above integers, it is assumed that Q0 is set to "1" in frame _#F .

As described above, frame #MY (BB501) in FIG. , and transmits emergency warning (emergency bulletin) information composed of voice information, and in the subsequent frames, telegram information, and (or) video and still image information, and (or) graphic information, And (or) information of an emergency alert (emergency bulletin) composed of voice information is transmitted.

In FIG. 81, the frame end time of frame #M-1 (BB104) does not match the start time of frame #M (BB105). This is because the roll-off rate is changed. At this time, there is a symbol configuration between time U and time V, for example, ramp-up, ramp-down, and guard intervals as described in the embodiment AA. Between time U and time V, other symbols (for example, symbols for transmitting control information, pilot symbols, reference symbols, preambles, symbols for synchronization, signals for the receiver to detect symbols, symbols for estimating frequency offset, symbols for estimating phase, etc.) may be inserted.

Next, the operation of the receiver when the transmitting station transmits frames as shown in FIG. 81 will be described.
FIG. 78 shows an example of the configuration of a receiver. In addition, in FIG. 78, the same numbers are given to the parts that operate in the same manner as in FIG. 75, and the explanation of the operation is omitted.

When frame #M-1 (BB104) in FIG. 81 and the frames before it are received, the band-limiting filter _AA303 sets the roll-off factor α to γi.

When the receiving device receives frame #MZ in FIG. 81 (however, Z is an integer greater than or equal to K+1), the control information estimator (TMCC information estimator) AA319 receives the band limit Control information (TMCC information) for frames #MZ is obtained from the subsequent baseband signal AA304. Then, Q0 described above is obtained from the control information ( _TMCC information). At this time, since Q ₀ =“1”, the receiving device determines that the emergency warning broadcast is not activated, and continuously performs demapping, deinterleaving, and error correction decoding on each frame, Obtaining received data AA310 (demapping unit AA305, synchronization/channel estimation unit AA317, control information estimation unit (TMCC information estimation unit) AA319) handles the band-limited baseband signal and performs each process. Become. ).

When the receiving device is receiving frame #MK (BB102) in FIG. 81, the control information estimator (TMCC information estimator) AA319 extracts frame #M from the input baseband signal AA304 after band limitation. - Obtain K control information (TMCC information). Then, Q0 described above is obtained from the control information ( _TMCC information). At this time, since Q ₀ =“0”, the receiving device determines that the emergency warning broadcast has started. Note that Q ₀ =“1” in frame #MK-1 and previous frames, and Q ₀ =“0” for the first time in frame #MK. Therefore, there is a possibility that the information of the emergency alert (emergency bulletin) is transmitted from the frame #MK+1, which is the next frame of the frame #MK. (However, even if the emergency warning (emergency bulletin) information is transmitted in the frame #MK, there is no problem in the operation of the receiver. In this case, when the receiver receives the frame #MK, It is possible to obtain emergency warning (emergency bulletin) information composed of message information, and/or video and still image information, and/or graphic information, and/or audio information.)

In this example, unlike (Example 1), the roll-off rate is _γi , and telegram information and/or video or The point is that it transmits emergency alert (emergency bulletin) information composed of still image information and/or graphic information and/or audio information. (However, even when the frame has a roll-off rate of β, it is composed of message information, and (or) video and still image information, and (or) graphic information, and (or) audio information. It is assumed that the information of emergency warning (emergency bulletin) is transmitted.)

In this example, "emergency warning (emergency bulletin) information consisting of message information, and/or video and still image information, and/or graphic information, and/or audio information is Even frames with an off rate of β are transmitted." Therefore, since the band-limiting filter BB201 in FIG. 78 is a band-limiting filter for receiving the emergency warning broadcast, the roll-off rate is set to β.

Also, the roll-off factor used by the transmitting station when transmitting frame #M−K+1 may be β. (Because Q ₀ =“0” for the first time in frame #MK (BB102).)

Therefore, the band-limiting filter BB201 of FIG. 78 receives the control information AA320 and the baseband signal AA302, and based on the information of Q ₀ included in the control information AA320, the base band corresponding to the frame #M−K+1 and subsequent frames. The band signal is subjected to signal processing corresponding to the band-limiting filter, and a baseband signal BB202 after band-limiting the roll-off rate β is output.

The synchronization unit _BB203 for emergency warning broadcasting in FIG. The band-limited baseband signal BB202 is subjected to processing such as frame synchronization, time synchronization, and symbol synchronization, and a synchronization signal BB204 including information indicating whether or not synchronization has been achieved is output.

In the frame state of FIG. 81, Q ₀ =“0” in frame #MK, and subsequent frames, that is, frame #MK+1, frame #MK+2, . . . -1, frame #M, frame #M+ ₁ , . Also, it is assumed that the transmission of emergency alert (emergency bulletin) information starts from frame #MY.

Therefore, from frame #M−K+1 to frame #M−1, the synchronization unit BB203 for emergency warning broadcast in FIG. Since frame synchronization, time synchronization, and symbol synchronization cannot be achieved with the baseband signal BB202 after band-limiting with the rate β, a synchronization signal BB204 indicating that synchronization has not been achieved is output.

Then, in frame #M (BB105), the synchronization unit BB203 for emergency warning broadcast in FIG. In the subsequent baseband signal BB202, frame synchronization, time synchronization, and symbol synchronization can be achieved, and therefore a synchronization signal BB204 indicating that synchronization has been achieved is output.

In frame #M+1 (BB106) and subsequent frames, the emergency warning broadcast synchronization unit BB203 in FIG. Frame synchronization, time synchronization, and symbol synchronization can be achieved with the baseband signal BB202 after the band limitation of β, and therefore a synchronization signal BB204 indicating that synchronization has been achieved is output.

The demapping unit AA305 in FIG. 78 receives the band-limited baseband signal AA304, the band-limited baseband signal BB202 with the roll-off rate β, the synchronization signal BB204, the synchronization/channel estimation signal AA318, and the control information AA320, Frame #M (BB105) and subsequent frames are synchronized, so demapping is performed on baseband signal BB202 after band-limiting with roll-off rate β, and log-likelihood ratio signal AA306 is output. (By this, it is possible to obtain emergency warning (emergency bulletin) information consisting of message information, and/or video and still image information, and/or graphic information, and/or audio information. can.)

Note that demapping section AA305 in FIG. 78 is out of synchronization in frame #M−1 and frames prior to it, so demapping baseband signal AA304 after band limitation is performed, and log-likelihood ratio signal AA306 to output Note that the frames from frame #MY to frame #M-1 consist of message information, and/or video and still image information, and/or graphic information, and/or audio information. You can get information on emergency alerts (emergency bulletins) that are issued.

The synchronization/channel estimation unit AA317 in FIG. 78 receives the band-limited baseband signal AA304, the band-limited baseband signal BB202 with the roll-off rate β, and the synchronization signal BB204, and receives frame #M (BB105) and thereafter. Since synchronization is achieved in the frame , time synchronization, frequency synchronization, and channel estimation are performed using the baseband signal BB202 after band limitation with the roll-off rate β, and a synchronization/channel estimation signal AA318 is output.

Note that the synchronization/channel estimation unit AA317 in FIG. 78 is not synchronized in frame #M-1 and the frames before it, so it uses the band-limited baseband signal AA304 to perform time synchronization, frequency synchronization, It performs channel estimation and outputs synchronization and channel estimation signal AA 318 .

(Example 4)
82 and 83 show frames different from FIG. 81. FIG. It also describes the state of _Q0 in each frame. FIG. 82 and FIG. 83 differ from FIG. 81 in that there is an interruption of emergency warning broadcasting when information is being transmitted with a roll-off rate α=β.

In FIGS. 82 and 83, it is assumed that frame #M (BB105) has a roll-off rate α=β, and the roll-off rates of frames before frame #M (BB105) are also β. Then, in frame #M (BB105), an emergency warning (emergency bulletin) composed of message information, and/or video and still image information, and/or graphic information, and/or audio information. information is transmitted.

Frame #MZ (BB101) is a frame Z frames before frame #M (BB105), and has a roll-off rate α=β. (However, Z is an integer greater than or equal to K+1.)
Frame #MK (BB102) is a frame that is K frames before frame #M (BB105), and has a roll-off rate α=β.

Frame #MY (BB501) is a frame that is Y frames before frame #M (BB105), and has a roll-off rate α=β. Frame #MY (BB501) is an emergency warning (emergency This is the frame from which the information on the "Bulletin" (Bulletin) is started. It should be noted that Y is any value among integers of 1 or more and K or less.
Frame #MX is a frame X frames before frame #M (BB105), and has a roll-off rate α=β. The frame #MX is an emergency alert (emergency bulletin) composed of electronic message information, video or still image information, graphic information, and/or voice information. Assume that you are transmitting information. Note that X is an integer of 1 or more and Y or less.

Frame #M+1 (BB106) has a roll-off rate α=β and is composed of telegram information, and/or video and still image information, and/or graphic information, and/or audio information. It is assumed that the information of emergency warning (emergency bulletin) is transmitted.
The configuration of each frame is as described in Embodiment AA, and each frame is composed of the frame shown in FIG. 11, for example.

In FIGS. 82 and 83, as in FIG. 81, the transmitting station transmits message information, and/or video or still image information, and/or graphic information, and/or (or) It is transmitting emergency alert (emergency bulletin) information composed of voice information. As a result, the receiving device reliably receives an emergency alert (emergency bulletin) consisting of message information, and/or video and still image information, and/or graphic information, and/or audio information. information can be obtained, so that the effect of increasing the possibility of ensuring the safety of the user can be obtained.

Next, a method for transmitting control information such as TMCC will be described.
The transmitting station (terrestrial station) shall transmit Q0 as part of the _TMCC information. _At this time, Table 25 shows the relationship between Q0 and the activation flag for emergency warning broadcasting.
In FIGS. 82 and 83, the transmitting station changes Q0, which is part of the TMCC of frame #MK (BB102), to " ₀ ", as shown in the figures. (Q ₀ is "1" in frame #MK-1, and Q ₀ is also "1" in the previous frames.) And F is an integer equal to or greater than MK , Q0 is set to "1" in frame _#F .

Then, as described above, in FIGS. 82 and 83, in frame #MY (BB501), message information, and/or video or still image information, and/or graphic information, and (or) Transmits emergency warning (emergency bulletin) information composed of voice information, and in subsequent frames, message information, and (or) video and still image information, and (or), It will transmit emergency alert (emergency bulletin) information consisting of graphic information and/or audio information.

Note that FIG. 82 shows an example in which the last time of the frame #M-1 (BB104) and the start time of the frame #M (BB105) match. In FIG. 83, the frame end time of frame #M-1 (BB104) and the start time of frame #M (BB105) do not match. For example, there are ramp-up, ramp-down, and guard sections as described in the embodiment AA. Between time U and time V, other symbols (for example, symbols for transmitting control information, pilot symbols, reference symbols, preambles, symbols for synchronization, signals for the receiver to detect symbols, symbols for estimating frequency offset, symbols for estimating phase, etc.) may be inserted. 82 and 83 differ from each other in this point, and the transmitting station may transmit by either method.

Next, the operation of the receiver when the transmitting station transmits frames as shown in FIG.82 or FIG.83 will be described.
FIG. 78 shows an example of the configuration of a receiver. In addition, in FIG. 78, the same numbers are given to the parts that operate in the same manner as in FIG. 75, and the explanation of the operation is omitted.

When frame #M-1 (BB104) in FIG. 82 or FIG. 83 and the frames before it are received, the band-limiting filter AA303 sets the roll-off rate α to β.

When the receiving device receives frame #MZ in FIG. 82 or FIG. 83 (where Z is an integer greater than or equal to K+1), the control information estimator (TMCC information estimator) AA319 can input Control information (TMCC information) for frame #MZ is obtained from the baseband signal AA304 after a certain band limitation. Then, Q0 described above is obtained from the control information ( _TMCC information). At this time, since Q ₀ =“1”, the receiving device determines that the emergency warning broadcast is not activated, and continuously performs demapping, deinterleaving, and error correction decoding on each frame, Obtain received data AA310. (Demapping section AA305, synchronization/channel estimating section AA317, control information estimating section (TMCC information estimating section) AA319) handle the band-limited baseband signal and perform various processes. )

When the receiving device receives frame #MK (BB102) in FIG. 82 or FIG. Obtain control information (TMCC information) for frame #MK. Then, Q0 described above is obtained from the control information ( _TMCC information). At this time, since Q ₀ =“0”, the receiving device determines that the emergency warning broadcast has started. Note that Q ₀ =“1” in frame #MK-1 and previous frames, and Q ₀ =“0” for the first time in frame #MK. Therefore, there is a possibility that the information of the emergency alert (emergency bulletin) is transmitted from the frame #MK+1, which is the next frame of the frame #MK. (However, even if the emergency warning (emergency bulletin) information is transmitted in the frame #MK, there is no problem in the operation of the receiver. In this case, when the receiver receives the frame #MK, It is possible to obtain emergency warning (emergency bulletin) information composed of message information, and/or video and still image information, and/or graphic information, and/or audio information.)

As described above, in the present embodiment, "emergency warning composed of telegram information, and/or video and still image information, and/or graphic information, and/or audio information When transmitting information of (emergency bulletin), the roll-off rate of the band-limiting filter described in Embodiment AA is set to β (the roll-off rate is set to a certain value) Transmission method, reception method, transmission apparatus, reception device”. Therefore, since the band-limiting filter BB201 in FIG. 78 is a band-limiting filter for receiving the emergency warning broadcast, the roll-off rate is set to β.

The band-limiting filter BB201 of FIG. 78 receives control information AA320 and baseband signal AA302, and based on the information of Q0 included in control information _AA320 , baseband signals corresponding to frame #M−K+1 and subsequent frames. is subjected to signal processing corresponding to the band-limiting filter, and the baseband signal BB202 after band-limiting the roll-off rate β is output.

The synchronization unit _BB203 for emergency warning broadcasting in FIG. The band-limited baseband signal BB202 is subjected to processing such as frame synchronization, time synchronization, and symbol synchronization, and a synchronization signal BB204 including information indicating whether or not synchronization has been achieved is output.

82 or 83, Q ₀ =“0” in frame #MK, and subsequent frames, that is, frame #MK+1, frame #MK+2, . . . In frame #M−1, frame #M, frame #M+1, . . . , the transmitting station also transmits information of Q ₀ =“0”. Also, it is assumed that the transmission of emergency alert (emergency bulletin) information starts from frame #MY.

From frame #MK+1 to frame #MY-1, the synchronization unit BB203 for emergency warning broadcast in FIG. Frame synchronization, time synchronization, and symbol synchronization can be achieved by the baseband signal BB202 after band-limiting with rate β. Therefore, the synchronization section BB203 for emergency warning broadcast in FIG. 78 outputs a synchronization signal BB204 indicating that synchronization has been achieved. However, in frames #MK+1 to #MY-1, no emergency alert (emergency bulletin) information is transmitted.

The demapping unit AA305 in FIG. 78 receives the band-limited baseband signal AA304, the band-limited baseband signal BB202 with the roll-off rate β, the synchronization signal BB204, the synchronization/channel estimation signal AA318, and the control information AA320, Since frames #M−K+1 to frame #M−Y−1 are synchronized, demapping is performed on the baseband signal BB202 after band-limiting the roll-off rate β, and a log-likelihood ratio signal AA306 is output. . (However, in frames #MK+1 to #MY-1, no emergency alert (emergency bulletin) information is transmitted.)

Then, in frame #MY (BB501), the synchronization unit BB203 for emergency warning broadcast in FIG. Frame synchronization, time synchronization, and symbol synchronization can be achieved with the band-limited baseband signal BB202, and therefore a synchronization signal BB204 indicating that synchronization has been achieved is output.

In frame #M−Y+1 and subsequent frames as well, the synchronization unit BB203 for emergency warning broadcast in FIG. With the band-limited baseband signal BB202, frame synchronization, time synchronization, and symbol synchronization can be achieved, and therefore a synchronization signal BB204 indicating that synchronization has been achieved is output.

The demapping unit AA305 in FIG. 78 receives the band-limited baseband signal AA304, the band-limited baseband signal BB202 with the roll-off rate β, the synchronization signal BB204, the synchronization/channel estimation signal AA318, and the control information AA320, Frame #MY (BB501) and subsequent frames are synchronized, so demapping of baseband signal BB202 after band-limiting with roll-off rate β is performed, and log-likelihood ratio signal AA306 is output. . (Emergency warning (emergency bulletin) information is transmitted in frame #MY (BB501) and subsequent frames.)

The synchronization/channel estimation unit AA317 in FIG. 78 receives the band-limited baseband signal AA304, the band-limited baseband signal BB202 with the roll-off rate β, and the synchronization signal BB204. At -Y-1, synchronization is achieved, so time synchronization, frequency synchronization, and channel estimation are performed using the baseband signal BB202 after band limitation with the roll-off rate β, and synchronization/channel estimation signal AA318 is output. .

The synchronization/channel estimation unit AA317 in FIG. 78 receives the band-limited baseband signal AA304, the band-limited baseband signal BB202 with the roll-off rate β, and the synchronization signal BB204, and receives frame #MY (BB501) and frame #MY (BB501). In subsequent frames, since synchronization is achieved, time synchronization, frequency synchronization, and channel estimation are performed using baseband signal BB202 after band limitation with roll-off rate β, and synchronization/channel estimation signal AA318 is output. .

The operation of the (terrestrial) transmitting station will now be described. FIG. 7 shows the configuration of the transmitting station, and the operation of each unit has been described in other embodiments, so the description is omitted here. In FIG. 7, the detailed configuration of mapping section 708 is as shown in FIG. Since the operation of each unit in FIG. 10 has been described in another embodiment, the description is omitted here.

A control information generation and mapping unit 704 of FIG. 7 receives a control signal, performs mapping for transmitting information related to TMCC in the control signal, and outputs a control information signal. The control signal includes the information of _Q0 shown in Table 25.

The mapping unit 708 in FIG. 7 receives a control signal and switches the roll-off rate when it is necessary to switch the roll-off rate based on the information of _Q0 included in the control signal. Note that the specific configuration of the mapping unit 708 is as shown in FIG. 10, as described above.

Telegram information, and/or video or still image information, and/or graphic information, and/or voice information for emergency alerts (emergency bulletins) are transmitted. . As a result, the receiving device reliably receives an emergency alert (emergency bulletin) consisting of message information, and/or video and still image information, and/or graphic information, and/or audio information. information may be transmitted using TMCC "extended information", as described in other embodiments, or may be transmitted by being included in the transmission main signal (stream).

In the above description, regarding the frames in FIGS. 77, 79, 80, 81, 82, and 83, ``The configuration of each frame is as described in Embodiment AA, and each frame includes, for example, , is composed of the frames in FIG. 11.", but it is not limited to this. For example, a frame for transmitting emergency alert (emergency bulletin) information composed of message information, and/or video or still image information, and/or graphic information, and/or audio information. consists of frames conforming to the "Transmission Method Standard for Satellite Digital Broadcasting ARIB STD-B20 Version 3.0, or the Transmission Method Standard for Satellite Digital Broadcasting Standard ARIB STD-B20 Version 3.0 or later ARIB STD-B20 standard". may At this time, to transmit emergency warning (emergency bulletin) information composed of message information, and/or video or still image information, and/or graphic information, and/or audio information. The roll-off factor used would be 0.35.

In addition, frames for transmitting emergency alert (emergency bulletin) information composed of message information and/or video and still image information and/or graphic information and/or voice information You can switch between them.

For example, after Q ₀ =“0”, telegram information, and/or video or still image information, and/or graphic information, and (or) transmits emergency warning (emergency bulletin) information composed of audio information, and then telegram information, and (or) video or still image information, and (or) graphic information, and (or) Information for emergency warnings (emergency bulletins) composed of voice information is specified in the "Transmission Method of Satellite Digital Broadcasting Standard ARIB STD-B20 Version 3.0" or "Transmission Method of Satellite Digital Broadcasting Standard ARIB STD-B20 3.0 It may be transmitted in a frame conforming to the "ARIB STD-B20 Standard" version or later.

As described above, the transmitting station consists of message information, video and still image information, and (or) graphic information, and (or) audio information in frames with a roll-off rate α = β. It is transmitting information on emergency alerts (emergency bulletins) to be issued. As a result, the receiving device reliably receives an emergency alert (emergency bulletin) consisting of message information, and/or video and still image information, and/or graphic information, and/or audio information. information can be obtained, so that the effect of increasing the possibility of ensuring the safety of the user can be obtained.

In this embodiment, a system configured by a transmitting station, a repeater, and a terminal in Embodiments B, C, D, E, F, and G is Although explained as an example, it is of course possible to implement the same in a system composed of a transmitting station and a terminal.

(Embodiment EE)
In the embodiment CC and the embodiment DD, it has been explained that voice information can be selected as the information of the emergency alert (early warning). In the present embodiment, when voice information is selected as emergency alert (emergency bulletin) information, a method for reliably transmitting emergency alert (emergency bulletin) information to a user having a receiving device (terminal) is described. explain.

Note that the configuration of the TMCC, the configuration of the transmitting device, the configuration of the receiving device, etc. are as described in Embodiment AA, and descriptions thereof will be omitted.
Further, in this embodiment, as described in Embodiment B, Embodiment C, Embodiment D, Embodiment E, Embodiment F, and Embodiment G, the (terrestrial) transmitting station, A system composed of repeaters (satellites) and terminals will be described as an example.

As described in embodiment DD, as shown in Table 25, the transmitting station (ground station) shall transmit Q0 as part of the _TMCC information.
However, in embodiment DD,
"The transmitting station shall issue an emergency warning consisting of telegraphic information, and/or video and still image information, and/or graphic information, and/or audio information in frames with a roll-off rate of α = β. (Emergency Bulletin) information is being transmitted."
However, it is not limited to this. For example, in the state of Q ₀ = 1, normal information transmission is transmitted with a roll-off rate γi, and then Q _{0 =} 0, even if Even if the transmission method is such that the information of the emergency warning (emergency bulletin) is transmitted with the roll-off rate _γi , the contents described below may be implemented.

Also, for example, as part of control information such as TMCC, information R ₂ R ₁ R ₀ relating to the information medium of an emergency alert (emergency bulletin) shall be transmitted. At that time, the relationship between R ₂ R ₁ R ₀ and the type of emergency warning broadcast information is shown in the table below.

As shown in Table 26, when R ₂ R ₁ R ₀ =“000”, it is assumed that the emergency warning broadcast information is transmitted as message information. When R ₂ R ₁ R ₀ =“001”, it is assumed that the emergency warning broadcast information is transmitted as video, and when R ₂ R ₁ R ₀ =“010”, the emergency warning broadcast information is transmitted as a still image. When R ₂ R ₁ R ₀ = "011" Emergency warning broadcast information is assumed to be transmitted by voice and when R ₂ R ₁ R ₀ = "100" to "111" is undefined.

As an example, it is assumed that emergency warning (emergency bulletin) information is transmitted using TMCC "extended information".
It is assumed that the configuration of a transmission station that transmits control information such as TMCC is as shown in FIG. 7, for example, as described in the embodiment DD. A detailed description has been given in another embodiment, so the description is omitted here.

Next, the configuration of the receiving device (of the terminal) will be described.
FIG. 84 shows an example of the configuration of a receiving device, and components that operate in the same manner as in FIG.
In FIG. 84, the decoder EE102 is a decoder related to moving images and audio, receives received data AA310, and outputs audio data and video data.

The emergency warning (early warning) information analysis unit EE101 in FIG. 84 receives control information _AA320 and determines whether or not emergency warning (early warning) information is being transmitted based on the value of Q0. In addition, the value of R ₂ R ₁ R ₀ determines the medium of the information of the emergency alert (emergency bulletin), and based on the determination, decodes the message, video, still image, or audio, From the emergency warning (early warning) information included in the control information AA320, emergency warning (early warning) message information, emergency warning (early warning) video and still images, or emergency warning (early warning) voice information is generated. ,Output.

The audio controller EE103 in FIG. 84 receives an audio volume control signal and can adjust the audio volume. Therefore, the audio volume will be set to some value. Let G be that value.
The audio controller EE103 in FIG. 84 receives audio data, emergency alert (emergency bulletin) audio information, and control information _AA320 in addition to an audio volume control signal, and controls the value of Q0 and _R2R1 included in the control information _AA320 . From the value of _R0 , it is determined whether emergency warning (emergency bulletin) voice information is present. When it is determined that emergency alert (emergency bulletin) voice information exists, the voice data output from the decoder EE 102 is muted so that it is not included in the output voice, and priority is given to the emergency alert (emergency alert). (Breaking news) Output the sound based on the sound information as the output sound. Note that the output sound is converted into sound by a speaker, an earphone, or a headphone.

However, the control method is not limited to this. For example, there is also the following method.
The audio controller EE103 in FIG. 84 receives audio data, emergency alert (emergency bulletin) audio information, and control information _AA320 in addition to an audio volume control signal, and controls the value of Q0 and _R2R1 included in the control information _AA320 . From the value of _R0 , it is determined whether emergency warning (emergency bulletin) voice information is present. When it is determined that emergency warning (emergency bulletin) voice information exists, the sound volume of the voice data, which is the output of the decoder EE102, is set to a volume smaller than the set value G, and priority is given to the emergency warning. The sound based on the (emergency bulletin) audio information and the sound of the audio data output from the decoder EE102 and the sound based on the emergency alert (emergency bulletin) audio information are output as output audio so as to increase the volume of the audio based on the (emergency bulletin) audio information.

As described above, by making the emergency warning (emergency bulletin) voice information preferentially output sound, the emergency warning (emergency bulletin) information can be reliably transmitted to the user having the receiving device (terminal). Therefore, it is possible to obtain the effect of increasing the possibility that the user's safety can be ensured.

In addition to Q ₀ and R ₂ R ₁ R ₀ , the transmitting station transmits "information on the target area" of emergency alert (emergency bulletin) information as described in Embodiment BB and Embodiment CC. sometimes The operation in this case will be described.
The audio controller EE103 in FIG. 84 receives audio data, emergency alert (emergency bulletin) audio information, and control information _AA320 in addition to an audio volume control signal, and controls the value of Q0 and _R2R1 included in the control information _AA320 . From the value of _R0 , it is determined whether emergency warning (emergency bulletin) voice information is present. In addition, the audio controller EE103 in FIG. 84 obtains “information on the target area” of the emergency warning (early warning) information included in the control information AA320, and the receiving device (terminal) receives the emergency warning (early warning). Judge whether it corresponds to the "target area" of the information. (The determination method is as described in Embodiment BB and Embodiment CC.)

Then, when the audio controller EE103 in FIG. 84 determines that there is emergency warning (emergency bulletin) audio information and that it is the "target area" of the emergency warning (emergency bulletin) information, the decoder EE102 The audio data to be output is muted so that it is not included in the output audio, and the audio based on the emergency alert (emergency bulletin) audio information is preferentially output as the output audio. Note that the output sound is converted into sound by a speaker, an earphone, or a headphone. As another method, when the voice controller EE103 in FIG. 84 determines that there is emergency alert (emergency bulletin) voice information and that it is the "target area" of the emergency alert (emergency bulletin) information, The output of the decoder EE102 is such that the sound volume of the audio data, which is the output of the decoder EE102, is set to a volume smaller than the set value G, and priority is given to increasing the volume of the sound based on the emergency warning (emergency bulletin) audio information. The sound of the voice data and the sound based on the emergency warning (early warning) voice information are output as the output voice.

Then, when the audio controller EE103 in FIG. 84 determines that the emergency warning (early warning) voice information exists and is not in the "target area" of the emergency warning (early warning) information, the decoder EE102 outputs is output as the output sound.

As described above, by controlling the voice output of the emergency alert (early warning) voice information, the emergency alert (early warning) information can be reliably transmitted to the user who has the receiving device (terminal). In addition to increasing the possibility of ensuring safety, it is possible to obtain the effect that the user can continue to listen to the voice of the transmission main signal (stream) if the area is not the target area of the emergency warning (early warning) information.

In the above description, telegram information, video, still image, or audio information is described as being for an emergency alert (emergency bulletin), but it is not limited to this, and an emergency alert ( Telegram information, video, still image, or audio information may be transmitted for purposes other than emergency alerts. However, in this case, the transmitting station may transmit a flag indicating an emergency alert (emergency bulletin) as part of control information such as TMCC. For example, the transmitting station may _{transmit S2S1S0} as part of control information such as _TMCC . At this time, Table 27 shows the relationship between S ₂ S ₁ S ₀ and the purpose of use of information.

As shown in Table 27, when S ₂ S ₁ S ₀ =“000”, it means that the telegram information, video, still image, or audio information is emergency alert (early warning) information. are doing. When S ₂ S ₁ S ₀ =“001”, it means that the message information, video, still image, or audio information is information other than an emergency alert (emergency bulletin). . Undefined when _{S2S1S0 =} “010” to “ ₁₁₁ ”.

Note that even if _S2S1S0 does not exist as control information (even if the transmitting station does not _{transmit S2S1S0} ), the receiving device ₍ terminal) can determine _message information from the _value of _Q0 . _{Alternatively} , since the video, still picture, or audio information can be emergency alert (emergency bulletin) information, the transmitting station _need not transmit _S2S1S0 .

In the above description, "Emergency alert (emergency bulletin) information is transmitted using TMCC "extended information" as an example", but the emergency alert (emergency bulletin) information is A transmitting station may transmit using a transmission main signal (stream). At this time, the method of transmitting control information such as TMCC is performed in the same manner as the above-mentioned "Emergency alert (emergency bulletin) information is transmitted using TMCC "extended information" as an example". can do. FIG. 85 shows an example of the configuration of a receiving device (terminal) when the transmitting station transmits emergency warning (emergency bulletin) information using a transmission main signal (stream).

In FIG. 85, the same numbers are attached to the same configurations as in FIGS. FIG. 85 differs from FIG. 84 in that the emergency warning (emergency bulletin) information analyzing section EE101 receives received data AA310. The rest of the configuration is the same, and the operation is the same as described above, so the description is omitted.

The emergency warning (early warning) information analysis unit EE101 in FIG. 85 receives control information _AA320 and determines whether or not emergency warning (early warning) information is being transmitted based on the value of Q0. In addition, the value of R ₂ R ₁ R ₀ determines the medium of the information of the emergency alert (emergency bulletin), and based on the determination, decodes the message, video, still image, or audio, From the emergency warning (early warning) information contained in the received data AA310, emergency warning (early warning) message information, emergency warning (early warning) video and still images, or emergency warning (early warning) audio information is generated. ,Output.

In this embodiment, a system configured by a transmitting station, a repeater, and a terminal in Embodiments B, C, D, E, F, and G is Although explained as an example, it is of course possible to implement the same in a system composed of a transmitting station and a terminal.

(Embodiment FF)
In Embodiment EE, transmission of emergency alerts using voice using TMCC has been described. In this embodiment, an application example of the embodiment EE will be described.
As described in the embodiment EE, a method of transmitting emergency alert (emergency bulletin) information and other information using TMCC has been described. In this embodiment, an audio output method to which the embodiment EE is applied will be described.

Note that the configuration of the TMCC, the configuration of the transmitting device, the configuration of the receiving device, etc. are as described in Embodiment AA, and descriptions thereof will be omitted.
Further, in this embodiment, as described in Embodiment B, Embodiment C, Embodiment D, Embodiment E, Embodiment F, and Embodiment G, the (terrestrial) transmitting station, A system composed of repeaters (satellites) and terminals will be described as an example.

As an example of this embodiment, Q ₀ (emergency warning broadcast activation flag) in Table 25 described in the embodiment, and R ₂ , R ₁ , R ₀ in Table 26 described in the embodiment EE (Information about the type of information (in the embodiment EE, it is described as the type of information for emergency warning broadcasts, but it is not limited to emergency warning broadcasts))) is transmitted by the transmitting station (ground station). It is assumed that there is
_At this time, the terminal can identify from Q0 whether the information transmitted by the TMCC is the information of the emergency warning broadcast or the information other than the emergency warning broadcast.

As another example, Q ₀ (emergency warning broadcast activation flag) in Table 25 described in the embodiment, and R ₂ , R ₁ , R ₀ in Table 26 described in the embodiment EE (information type information (although it is described as the type of information for emergency warning broadcasts in Embodiment EE, it is not limited to emergency warning broadcasts)), and S ₂ and S in Table 27 described in Embodiment EE. ₁ , S ₀ (Information about the purpose of use of the information (however, the purpose of use may not include emergency alerts (emergency bulletins))) is assumed to be transmitted by the (terrestrial) transmitting station. do.

_At this time, the terminal can identify from Q0 and S2, S1, and S0 whether the information transmitted by _TMCC is emergency alert broadcast information or information _{other than} emergency alert broadcast. can.
By any of the above methods, the terminal can identify whether the information transmitted using the TMCC area is emergency alert broadcast information or information other than emergency alert broadcast. think. Then, consider a system that can designate "voice" (Audio) as information transmitted using the TMCC area by means of R ₂ , R ₁ , R ₀ (information on the type of information).

FIG. 86 shows an example of the configuration of a terminal according to this embodiment, and components that operate in the same manner as in FIG. 84 are assigned the same numbers. FIG. 86 differs from FIG. 84 in that the audio controller (EE 103) receives the setting signal. This part will be described in detail below.
This embodiment is characterized in that the method of outputting sound can be controlled by a setting signal that is input to the sound controller (EE103) in FIG.

In the embodiment EE, the transmission of emergency warning (emergency bulletin) information is handled, but in the present embodiment, TMCC is used to transmit "telegram information" or "video" or It deals with systems that can transmit information belonging to 'still pictures' or 'sounds' (Audio). Therefore, in FIG. 86, control information AA320 includes information belonging to "telegram information" or "video" or "still picture" or "audio" (audio) other than emergency warnings (emergency bulletins). It is assumed that there is Therefore, the audio controller EE103 in FIG. 86 can obtain "audio" other than the emergency alert (emergency bulletin) from the input control information AA320. Note that this point also applies to FIG. 88, which will be described later.

FIG. 87 shows an example of a setting screen displayed on, for example, a television or monitor, regarding an audio output method that can be set by a setting signal.
In FIG. 87, for example, it is assumed that there are modes of "priority for program audio", "priority for TMCC information audio", and "priority for TMCC information audio during emergency broadcasting (emergency bulletin)". (However, when displayed on the actual screen, different expressions may be used even if the content is the same. In addition, the mode displayed on the screen is "prioritize program audio", "TMCC information It is not limited to "voice priority" and "TMCC information voice priority in case of emergency broadcast (emergency bulletin)", and there may be other modes such as "program voice priority" and "TMCC information voice priority". It is not necessary to have all the modes of "TMCC information voice priority during emergency broadcast (emergency bulletin)".The important point is that the voice output method can be set.) Details of each mode are as follows. That's right.

"Prioritize program audio":
When the terminal selects this mode, priority is given to outputting audio information transmitted by the transmission main signal (stream) as audio from speakers, earphones, headphones, and the like. Therefore, audio information transmitted using the TMCC area is not given priority as output from speakers, earphones, headphones, and the like. As described in the embodiment EE, in the case of "priority", a method of not outputting one of the sounds and a method of giving a magnitude relation between the volumes of the two sounds are conceivable.

"TMCC information voice priority":
When the terminal selects this mode, priority is given to outputting audio information transmitted using the TMCC area from speakers, earphones, headphones, etc. over audio information transmitted by the transmission main signal (stream). As described in the embodiment EE, in the case of "priority", a method of not outputting one of the sounds and a method of giving a magnitude relation between the volumes of the two sounds are conceivable.

"TMCC information voice priority during emergency broadcast (emergency bulletin)":
If the terminal selects this mode, it behaves as follows.
When the TMCC area is used to transmit audio information for an emergency broadcast (emergency bulletin), priority is given to outputting this audio information from speakers, earphones, headphones, and the like. (Therefore, priority is not given to outputting the audio information transmitted by the transmission main signal (stream) as audio from speakers, earphones, headphones, etc.)
When audio information other than an emergency broadcast (emergency bulletin) is transmitted using the TMCC area, priority is given to outputting the audio information transmitted in the transmission main signal (stream) as audio from speakers, earphones, headphones, etc. do. (Therefore, priority is not given to outputting audio information other than emergency broadcasts (emergency bulletins) as audio from speakers, earphones, headphones, etc. using the TMCC area.)
Then, the setting signal in FIG. 86 transmits a control signal so as to set the selected mode among the modes displayed on the screen. Then, the audio controller EE103 in FIG. 86 sets the priority of audio output according to the mode selected by the user, and outputs audio from speakers, earphones, headphones, etc. according to the set priority. will do.

FIG. 88 shows an example of a configuration of a terminal different from that in FIG. 86, and those that operate in the same manner as in FIG. 85 are assigned the same numbers. FIG. 88 shows, as in FIG. 85, the configuration of the terminal when emergency broadcast (emergency warning) information is transmitted by the transmission main signal (stream). )) The controller (EE 103) receives the setting signal. This part will be described in detail below.

Similar to above, the audio controller (EE103) of FIG.
It is characterized in that the method of outputting sound can be controlled by a setting signal which is an input of .
FIG. 89 shows an example of a setting screen displayed on, for example, a television or monitor regarding an audio output method that can be set by a setting signal.

In FIG. 89, for example, it is assumed that there are modes of "priority for program audio", "priority for TMCC information audio", and "priority for emergency broadcast (emergency bulletin) audio in case of emergency broadcast (emergency bulletin)". (However, when it is displayed on the actual screen, different expressions may be used even if the content is the same. In addition, the mode displayed on the screen is "prioritize program audio", "emergency broadcast (Emergency bulletin) is not limited to "emergency broadcasting (emergency bulletin) audio priority", and there may be other modes, such as "program audio priority", "TMCC information audio priority", "emergency When broadcasting (Emergency Bulletin), there is no need to have all the "Emergency Broadcast (Emergency Bulletin) Voice Priority" modes.The important point is that the audio output method can be set.) For details of each mode, They are as follows.

"Prioritize program audio":
When the terminal selects this mode, priority is given to outputting audio information transmitted by the transmission main signal (stream) as audio from speakers, earphones, headphones, and the like. Therefore, audio information transmitted using the TMCC area is not given priority as output from speakers, earphones, headphones, and the like.
If the emergency broadcast (early warning) is transmitted by the transmission main signal (stream), and if the emergency broadcast (early warning) is transmitted instead of the program you are watching, the voice of the emergency broadcast (early warning) will be displayed. is output from speakers, earphones, headphones, etc.
If an emergency broadcast (emergency bulletin) is transmitted using the main transmission signal (stream), but the program you are watching is still being transmitted, the audio of the program you are watching will be output from speakers, earphones, headphones, etc. be done.
As described in the embodiment EE, in the case of "priority", a method of not outputting one of the sounds and a method of giving a magnitude relation between the volumes of the two sounds are conceivable.

"TMCC information voice priority":
When the terminal selects this mode, priority is given to outputting audio information transmitted using the TMCC area from speakers, earphones, headphones, etc. over audio information transmitted by the transmission main signal (stream). As described in the embodiment EE, in the case of "priority", a method of not outputting one of the sounds and a method of giving a magnitude relation between the volumes of the two sounds are conceivable.

"Emergency broadcast (emergency bulletin) voice priority during emergency broadcast (emergency bulletin)":
If the terminal selects this mode, it behaves as follows.
When the audio information of an emergency broadcast (emergency bulletin) is transmitted by the transmission main signal (stream), priority is given to outputting this audio information from speakers, earphones, headphones, and the like.
Then, the setting signal of FIG. 88 transmits a control signal so as to set the selected mode among the modes displayed on the screen. Then, the audio controller EE103 in FIG. 88 sets the priority of audio output according to the mode selected by the user, and outputs audio from speakers, earphones, headphones, etc. according to the set priority. will do.

As described above, by controlling the sound output according to the mode selected by the user, there is an advantage that the user can accurately hear the sound of the mode selected by the user. In addition, users who give priority to "emergency broadcast (emergency bulletin) audio" will be able to hear the emergency broadcast (emergency bulletin) audio accurately, so the safety of the selected user can be ensured. You can also get

Next, an example of operation in the case where the TMCC includes regional information as described in the embodiment BB and the embodiment CC will be described with respect to the above-described embodiment.
In the embodiment described above with reference to FIGS. 86 and 87, the details of each mode described in FIG. 87 are as follows.

"Prioritize program audio":
When the terminal selects this mode, priority is given to outputting audio information transmitted by the transmission main signal (stream) as audio from speakers, earphones, headphones, and the like. Therefore, audio information transmitted using the TMCC area is not given priority as output from speakers, earphones, headphones, and the like. As described in the embodiment EE, in the case of "priority", a method of not outputting one of the sounds and a method of giving a magnitude relation between the volumes of the two sounds are conceivable.

"TMCC information voice priority":
If the terminal selects this mode, it behaves as follows.
If the area information included in the TMCC matches the area to which the terminal belongs, priority is given to outputting the voice information transmitted using the TMCC area from speakers, earphones, headphones, and the like.
If the area information included in the TMCC does not match the area to which the terminal belongs, priority is given to outputting the audio information transmitted by the transmission main signal (stream) as audio from speakers, earphones, headphones, and the like.
If the TMCC does not contain the area information, priority is given to outputting the voice information transmitted using the TMCC area from speakers, earphones, headphones, and the like.
As described in the embodiment EE, in the case of "priority", a method of not outputting one of the sounds and a method of giving a magnitude relation between the volumes of the two sounds are conceivable.

"TMCC information voice priority during emergency broadcast (emergency bulletin)":
If the terminal selects this mode, it behaves as follows.
The TMCC area is used to transmit emergency broadcast (emergency bulletin) audio information, and when the area information included in the TMCC matches the area to which the terminal belongs, this audio information is output from speakers, earphones, headphones, etc. give priority to
When the TMCC area is used to transmit audio information for emergency broadcasts (emergency bulletins), and the area information contained in the TMCC does not match the area to which the terminal belongs, this audio information should be output from speakers, earphones, headphones, etc. do not give priority to (Therefore, priority is given to outputting the audio information transmitted by the transmission main signal (stream) as audio from speakers, earphones, headphones, etc.)
When the TMCC area is used to transmit emergency broadcast (emergency bulletin) audio information, and the TMCC does not contain area information, output of this audio information from speakers, earphones, headphones, etc. is prioritized.
When audio information other than an emergency broadcast (emergency bulletin) is transmitted using the TMCC area, the main transmission signal (stream) is transmitted regardless of whether or not the TMCC contains area information. Priority is given to outputting audio information as audio from speakers, earphones, headphones, and the like. (Therefore, priority is not given to outputting audio information other than emergency broadcasts (emergency bulletins) as audio from speakers, earphones, headphones, etc. using the TMCC area.)
Then, the setting signal in FIG. 86 transmits a control signal so as to set the selected mode among the modes displayed on the screen. Then, the audio controller EE103 in FIG. 86 sets the priority of audio output according to the mode selected by the user, and outputs audio from speakers, earphones, headphones, etc. according to the set priority. will do.

In the embodiment described above with reference to FIGS. 88 and 89, the details of each mode described in FIG. 89 are as follows.

"Prioritize program audio":
When the terminal selects this mode, priority is given to outputting audio information transmitted by the transmission main signal (stream) as audio from speakers, earphones, headphones, and the like. Therefore, audio information transmitted using the TMCC area is not given priority as output from speakers, earphones, headphones, and the like.
If the emergency broadcast (early warning) is transmitted by the transmission main signal (stream), and if the emergency broadcast (early warning) is transmitted instead of the program you are watching, the voice of the emergency broadcast (early warning) will be displayed. is output from speakers, earphones, headphones, etc.
If an emergency broadcast (emergency bulletin) is transmitted using the main transmission signal (stream), but the program you are watching is still being transmitted, the audio of the program you are watching will be output from speakers, earphones, headphones, etc. be done.
As described in the embodiment EE, in the case of "priority", a method of not outputting one of the sounds and a method of giving a magnitude relation between the volumes of the two sounds are conceivable.

"TMCC information voice priority":
When the terminal selects this mode, if the area information contained in the TMCC matches the area to which the terminal belongs, priority is given to outputting voice information transmitted using the TMCC area from speakers, earphones, headphones, etc. .
When the terminal selects this mode, if the area information contained in the TMCC does not match the area to which the terminal belongs, the audio information transmitted using the TMCC area is not prioritized to be output from speakers, earphones, headphones, etc. .
When the terminal selects this mode, if the TMCC does not contain the area information, the terminal preferentially outputs the voice information transmitted using the TMCC area from a speaker, an earphone, a headphone, or the like.
As described in the embodiment EE, in the case of "priority", a method of not outputting one of the sounds and a method of giving a magnitude relation between the volumes of the two sounds are conceivable.

"Emergency broadcast (emergency bulletin) voice priority during emergency broadcast (emergency bulletin)":
If the terminal selects this mode, it behaves as follows.
To transmit the audio information of an emergency broadcast (emergency bulletin) in the transmission main signal (stream), and output this audio information from speakers, earphones, headphones, etc. when the area information contained in the TMCC matches the area to which the terminal belongs. give priority to
When the audio information of an emergency broadcast (emergency bulletin) is transmitted in the transmission main signal (stream), and the area information contained in the TMCC does not match the area to which the terminal belongs, this audio information is output from speakers, earphones, headphones, etc. do not give priority to
When the audio information of the emergency broadcast (emergency bulletin) is transmitted by the transmission main signal (stream) and the TMCC does not contain the area information, priority is given to outputting this audio information from speakers, earphones, headphones, and the like.
Then, the setting signal of FIG. 88 transmits a control signal so as to set the selected mode among the modes displayed on the screen. Then, the audio controller EE103 in FIG. 88 sets the priority of audio output according to the mode selected by the user, and outputs audio from speakers, earphones, headphones, etc. according to the set priority.

In this embodiment, a system configured by a transmitting station, a repeater, and a terminal in Embodiments B, C, D, E, F, and G is Although explained as an example, it is of course possible to implement the same in a system composed of a transmitting station and a terminal.

(Embodiment GG)
In the embodiment FF, the setting method for audio has been described. In this embodiment, a screen setting method for a terminal will be described.
Note that the configuration of the TMCC, the configuration of the transmitting device, the configuration of the receiving device, etc. are as described in Embodiment AA, and descriptions thereof will be omitted.

Further, in this embodiment, as described in Embodiment B, Embodiment C, Embodiment D, Embodiment E, Embodiment F, and Embodiment G, the (terrestrial) transmitting station, A system composed of repeaters (satellites) and terminals will be described as an example.
As an example of this embodiment, Q ₀ (emergency warning broadcast activation flag) in Table 25 described in the embodiment, and R ₂ , R ₁ , R ₀ in Table 26 described in the embodiment EE (Information about the type of information (in the embodiment EE, it is described as the type of information for emergency warning broadcasts, but it is not limited to emergency warning broadcasts))) is transmitted by the transmitting station (ground station). It is assumed that there is

_At this time, the terminal can identify from Q0 whether the information transmitted by the TMCC is the information of the emergency warning broadcast or the information other than the emergency warning broadcast.
As another example, Q ₀ (emergency warning broadcast activation flag) in Table 25 described in the embodiment, and R ₂ , R ₁ , R ₀ in Table 26 described in the embodiment EE (information type information (although it is described as the type of information for emergency warning broadcasts in Embodiment EE, it is not limited to emergency warning broadcasts)), and S ₂ and S in Table 27 described in Embodiment EE. ₁ , S ₀ (Information about the purpose of use of the information (however, the purpose of use may not include emergency alerts (emergency bulletins))) is assumed to be transmitted by the (terrestrial) transmitting station. do.

_At this time, the terminal can identify from Q0 and S2, S1, and S0 whether the information transmitted by _TMCC is emergency alert broadcast information or information _{other than} emergency alert broadcast. can.
By any of the above methods, the terminal can identify whether the information transmitted using the TMCC area is emergency alert broadcast information or information other than emergency alert broadcast. think. Then, according to R ₂ , R ₁ , and R ₀ (information on the type of information), it is possible to designate “telegram information”, “video” or “still image” as the information transmitted using the TMCC area. Think system.

FIG. 90 shows an example of the configuration of a terminal according to this embodiment, and components that operate in the same manner as in FIG. 75 are assigned the same numbers. The features of this embodiment are the emergency warning (early warning) information analysis unit GG101, the decoder GG102, and the screen controller GG103. Therefore, these parts will be described in detail below.
A particular feature of this embodiment is that the screen output method can be controlled by a setting signal that is input to the screen controller (GG103) in FIG. The explanation will be given in order below.

In the embodiment EE, the transmission of emergency warning (emergency bulletin) information is handled, but in the present embodiment, TMCC is used to transmit "telegram information" or "video" or It deals with systems that can transmit information belonging to 'still pictures' or 'audio'. Therefore, in FIG. 86, the control information AA320 may include information belonging to "telegram information" or "video" or "still picture" or "audio" other than an emergency alert (emergency bulletin). and Therefore, the screen controller GG103 in FIG. 90 can obtain "telegram information" or "video" or "still picture" other than the emergency warning (emergency bulletin) from the input control information AA320.

FIG. 90 will be described, but descriptions of portions that operate in the same manner as in FIG. 75 will be omitted. The emergency warning (early warning) information analysis unit GG101 receives the control information AA320 and determines whether emergency warning (early warning) information is being transmitted. Then, the information medium of the emergency warning (emergency bulletin) is determined, and based on the determination, telegram, video, or still image. Alternatively, the audio is decoded, and from the information of the emergency warning (early warning) included in the control information AA320, emergency warning (early warning) message information, or emergency warning (early warning) video (or) still image, or Generates and outputs emergency warning (emergency bulletin) voice information.
The decoder GG102 is a decoder related to moving images and audio, receives the received data AA310, and outputs audio data and video data.
This embodiment is characterized in that the screen output method can be controlled by a setting signal that is input to the screen controller (GG103) in FIG.

FIG. 91 shows an example of a setting screen displayed on, for example, a television or monitor regarding a screen output method that can be set by a setting signal.
In FIG. 91, for example, it is assumed that there are modes of "screen parallel display", "TMCC information screen priority", "TMCC information screen priority for emergency broadcasting (emergency bulletin)", and "broadcast screen priority". (However, when displayed on the actual screen, different expressions may be used even if the content is the same. In addition, the mode displayed on the screen is "screen parallel display", "TMCC information screen priority , ``TMCC information screen priority in case of emergency broadcast (emergency bulletin)'', ``broadcast screen priority'', and other modes may exist, and ``screen parallel display'' and ``TMCC information screen priority , ``TMCC information screen priority during emergency broadcasting (emergency bulletin),'' and ``broadcast screen priority'' modes may not all exist. Details are as follows.

"Screen parallel display":
When the terminal selects this mode, if video information, still image information, or telegram information is transmitted in TMCC, it will be described as "TMCC video information, still image information, or telegram information." The "video information (or still image information) transmitted by the transmission main signal (stream)" is displayed in parallel on the monitor.
In FIG. 92, GG200 is a monitor, and for example, displays "TMCC video information, still image information, or message information" on screen #1 (GG201), and displays "transmission master" on screen #2 (GG202). Two screens are displayed in parallel on the monitor, such as displaying "video information (or still image information)" transmitted by a signal (stream).
When "TMCC video information, still image information, or telegram information" is not transmitted, as shown in FIG. (or still image information)” (screen #1 (GG201)).

"TMCC information screen priority":
When the terminal selects this mode, if video information, still image information, or message information is transmitted in TMCC, "TMCC video information, still image information, or message information" is transmitted. display on the monitor with priority. Then, in TMCC, if video information, still image information, or message information is not transmitted, "video information (or still image information) being transmitted by the main transmission signal (stream)" is displayed on the monitor. indicate.
There are three methods for preferential display.

<Method of preferential display>
(First method):
When there are the first information and the second information, only one of the information is displayed on the monitor. For example, as shown in FIG. 93, on the monitor (GG200), the first information is displayed like screen #1 (GG201), and the second information is not displayed. (The first information becomes information with priority.)

(Second method):
When there is the first information and the second information, screen #1 (GG201) and screen #2 (GG202) are superimposed and displayed on the monitor. However, as shown in FIG. 94, the first information is displayed like screen #1 (GG201) and the second information is displayed like screen #2 (GG202), that is, the screen sizes are different. shall be At this time, the screen size of the screen #1 is larger than that of the screen #2, and therefore the first information is prioritized.
It should be noted that the size of the screen and the position of the screen (top, bottom, left, and right) can be changed by setting, as in screen #2 in FIG. (Regarding screen #1, the screen size and screen position may be changeable.)

(Third method):
When the first information and the second information are present, screen #1 (GG201) and screen #2 (GG202) are displayed on the monitor without overlapping. However, as shown in FIG. 95, the first information is displayed like screen #1 (GG201) and the second information is displayed like screen #2 (GG202), that is, the screen sizes are different. shall be At this time, the screen size of the screen #1 is larger than that of the screen #2, and therefore the first information is prioritized.
It should be noted that screen size and screen position (upper and lower, left and right) of screen #1 and screen #2 in FIG. 95 can be changed by setting.

"TMCC information screen priority during emergency broadcast (emergency bulletin)":
When the terminal selects this mode, in TMCC, if video information, still image information, or message information of an emergency alert (emergency alert) is transmitted, "TMCC emergency alert (emergency alert) video Information, still image information, or message information" is preferentially displayed on the monitor.
In TMCC, if video information for an emergency alert (emergency alert), still image information, or telegram information is not transmitted, the monitor displays "video information (or , still image information)” is displayed preferentially.
For example, in TMCC, when video information other than emergency alerts (emergency alerts), still image information, or message information is transmitted, "video information (or static priority is given to the display of video information, still image information, or electronic message information other than the TMCC emergency alert (emergency alert).
Then, in TMCC, if video information, still image information, or message information is not transmitted, "video information (or still image information) being transmitted by the main transmission signal (stream)" is displayed on the monitor. indicate.
The method of preferential display is as described above.

"Broadcast screen priority":
When the terminal selects this mode, it preferentially displays "video information (or still image information) transmitted by the transmission main signal (stream)" on the monitor.
The method of preferential display is as described above.
Then, the setting signal of FIG. 90 transmits a control signal to set the selected mode among the modes displayed on the screen. The screen controller GG103 in FIG. 90 sets the priority of screen output according to the mode selected by the user, and displays the screen according to the set priority.
FIG. 96 shows an example of a configuration of a terminal different from that in FIG. 90, and those that operate in the same manner as in FIG. 85 are assigned the same numbers. FIG. 96 shows, as in FIG. 85, the configuration of the terminal when the emergency broadcast (emergency warning) information is transmitted by the transmission main signal (stream). is that the setting signal is used as an input. This part will be described in detail below.
Similar to the above, it is characterized in that the screen output method can be controlled by a setting signal that is input to the screen controller (GG103) in FIG.
FIG. 97 shows an example of a setting screen displayed on, for example, a television or monitor, regarding a screen output method that can be set by a setting signal.
In FIG. 97, for example, there are modes of "screen parallel display", "TMCC information screen priority", "emergency broadcast (emergency bulletin) information screen priority", and "broadcast screen priority". (However, when it is displayed on the actual screen, different expressions may be made even if the content is the same. In addition, the mode displayed on the screen is "screen parallel display", "TMCC information screen priority "Emergency broadcast (emergency bulletin) information screen priority""Broadcast screen priority", there may be other modes, and "screen parallel display ", "TMCC information screen priority", "emergency broadcast (emergency bulletin) information screen priority", and "broadcast screen priority" modes do not all need to exist. The important point is that the screen The point is that the output method can be set.) The details of each mode are as follows.

"Screen parallel display":
When the terminal selects this mode, if video information, still image information, or message information is transmitted in TMCC, "TMCC video information, still image information, or message information" is displayed. The "video information (or still image information) transmitted by the transmission main signal (stream)" is displayed in parallel on the monitor.
In FIG. 92, GG200 is a monitor, and for example, displays "TMCC video information, or still image information, or message information" on screen #1 (GG201), and displays "transmission master" on screen #2 (GG202). Two screens are displayed in parallel on the monitor, such as displaying "video information (or still image information)" transmitted by a signal (stream).
When "TMCC video information, still image information, or telegram information" is not transmitted, as shown in FIG. (or still image information)” (screen #1 (GG201)).
In addition, if the emergency broadcast (early warning) is transmitted by the main transmission signal (stream), and if the emergency broadcast (early warning) is transmitted instead of the program you are watching, the screen of the emergency broadcast (early warning) will be displayed. is displayed on the screen #1 (GG201) of the monitor G200 as shown in FIG.

"TMCC information screen priority":
When the terminal selects this mode, if video information, still image information, or message information is transmitted in TMCC, "TMCC video information, still image information, or message information" is transmitted. display on the monitor with priority.
If an emergency broadcast (emergency bulletin) is transmitted in the transmission main signal (stream), or if an emergency broadcast (emergency bulletin) is transmitted instead of the program you are watching, the emergency broadcast will be sent instead of the program you are watching. When (emergency bulletin) is transmitted, the emergency broadcast (emergency bulletin) screen is preferentially displayed on the monitor.
Then, in TMCC, if video information, still image information, or message information is not transmitted, "video information (or still image information) being transmitted by the main transmission signal (stream)" is displayed on the monitor. indicate.
The method of preferential display is as described above.

"Emergency broadcast (early warning) information screen priority for emergency warning (early warning)":
When the terminal selects this mode, in TMCC, if video information, still image information, or message information of an emergency alert (emergency alert) is transmitted, "TMCC emergency alert (emergency alert) video Information, still image information, or message information" is preferentially displayed on the monitor.
If an emergency broadcast (emergency bulletin) is transmitted in the transmission main signal (stream), or if an emergency broadcast (emergency bulletin) is transmitted instead of the program you are watching, the emergency broadcast will be sent instead of the program you are watching. When (emergency bulletin) is transmitted, the emergency broadcast (emergency bulletin) screen is preferentially displayed on the monitor.
In TMCC, if video information for an emergency alert (emergency alert), still image information, or telegram information is not transmitted, the monitor displays "video information (or , still image information)” is displayed preferentially.
For example, in TMCC, when video information other than emergency alerts (emergency alerts), still image information, or message information is transmitted, "video information (or static priority is given to the display of video information, still image information, or electronic message information other than the TMCC emergency alert (emergency alert).
Then, in TMCC, if video information, still image information, or message information is not transmitted, "video information (or still image information) being transmitted by the main transmission signal (stream)" is displayed on the monitor. indicate.
The method of preferential display is as described above.

"Broadcast screen priority":
When the terminal selects this mode, it preferentially displays "video information (or still image information) transmitted by the transmission main signal (stream)" on the monitor.
The method of preferential display is as described above.
Then, the setting signal of FIG. 96 transmits a control signal so as to set the selected mode among the modes displayed on the screen. The screen controller GG103 in FIG. 96 sets the priority of screen output according to the mode selected by the user, and displays the screen according to the set priority.

As described above, by controlling the screen output according to the mode selected by the user, there is an advantage that the user can accurately view the screen of the mode selected by the user. In addition, users who give priority to the "emergency broadcast (emergency bulletin) screen" will be able to see the emergency broadcast (emergency bulletin) screen accurately, so it is possible to ensure the safety of the selected user. You can also get
Next, an example of operation in the case where the TMCC includes regional information as described in the embodiment BB and the embodiment CC will be described with respect to the above-described embodiment.
In the embodiment described above with reference to FIGS. 90 and 91, the details of each mode described in FIG. 91 are as follows.

"Screen parallel display":
If the terminal selects this mode, if the region information contained in the TMCC matches the region to which the terminal belongs, and if video information, still image information, or message information is transmitted in the TMCC, "TMCC video information, still image information, or telegram information” and “video information (or still image information) transmitted by the transmission main signal (stream)” are displayed in parallel on the monitor.
In FIG. 92, GG200 is a monitor, and for example, displays "TMCC video information, or still image information, or message information" on screen #1 (GG201), and displays "transmission master" on screen #2 (GG202). Two screens are displayed in parallel on the monitor, such as displaying "video information (or still image information)" transmitted by a signal (stream).
When the area information included in the TMCC and the area to which the terminal belongs do not match, as shown in FIG. #1 (GG201)) is displayed.
If the TMCC does not contain the regional information, and if the TMCC transmits video information, still image information, or telegram information, "TMCC video information, still image information, or telegram information information" and "video information (or still image information) transmitted by the transmission main signal (stream)" are displayed in parallel on the monitor.
When "TMCC video information, still image information, or telegram information" is not transmitted, as shown in FIG. (or still image information)” (screen #1 (GG201)).

"TMCC information screen priority":
When the terminal selects this mode, the area information included in the TMCC matches the area to which the terminal belongs, and when video information, still image information, or message information is transmitted in the TMCC, "TMCC Video information, still image information, or message information" is preferentially displayed on the monitor.
If the area information contained in the TMCC does not match the area to which the terminal belongs, and video information, still image information, or electronic message information is transmitted in the TMCC, the monitor will be notified of the message "transmit as main transmission signal (stream)." display the image information (or still image information)
If the area information included in the TMCC is not included and video information, still image information, or electronic message information is transmitted in the TMCC, "TMCC video information, still image information, or electronic message Information” is preferentially displayed on the monitor.
Then, in TMCC, if video information, still image information, or message information is not transmitted, "video information (or still image information) being transmitted by the main transmission signal (stream)" is displayed on the monitor. indicate.
The method of preferential display is as described above.

"TMCC information screen priority during emergency broadcast (emergency bulletin)":
When the terminal selects this mode, the area information contained in the TMCC matches the area to which the terminal belongs, and in the TMCC, video information, still image information, or message information of an emergency alert (emergency alert) is transmitted. If so, "TMCC emergency alert (emergency alert) video information, still image information, or message information" is preferentially displayed on the monitor.
If the region information contained in the TMCC does not match the region to which the terminal belongs, and emergency warning (emergency warning) video information, still image information, or message information is transmitted in the TMCC, the monitor will The video information (or still image information) transmitted by the signal (stream) is preferentially displayed.
If the area information included in the TMCC is not included and video information, still image information, or electronic message information is transmitted in the TMCC, "TMCC video information, still image information, or electronic message Information” is preferentially displayed on the monitor.
In TMCC, if video information for an emergency alert (emergency alert), still image information, or telegram information is not transmitted, the monitor displays "video information (or , still image information)” is displayed preferentially.
For example, in TMCC, when video information other than emergency alerts (emergency alerts), still image information, or message information is transmitted, "video information (or static Priority is given to "image information)", and priority is not given to the display of video information other than the TMCC emergency alert (emergency alert), still image information, or message information.
Then, in TMCC, if video information, still image information, or message information is not transmitted, "video information (or still image information) being transmitted by the main transmission signal (stream)" is displayed on the monitor. indicate.
The method of preferential display is as described above.

"Broadcast screen priority":
When the terminal selects this mode, it preferentially displays "video information (or still image information) transmitted by the transmission main signal (stream)" on the monitor.
The method of preferential display is as described above.
Then, the setting signal of FIG. 90 transmits a control signal to set the selected mode among the modes displayed on the screen. The screen controller GG103 in FIG. 90 sets the priority of screen output according to the mode selected by the user, and displays the screen according to the set priority.

In the embodiment described above with reference to FIGS. 96 and 97, the details of each mode described in FIG. 97 are as follows.

"Screen parallel display":
If the terminal selects this mode, if the region information contained in the TMCC matches the region to which the terminal belongs, and if video information, still image information, or message information is transmitted in the TMCC, "TMCC video information, still image information, or telegram information” and “video information (or still image information) transmitted by the transmission main signal (stream)” are displayed in parallel on the monitor.
In FIG. 92, GG200 is a monitor, and for example, displays "TMCC video information, or still image information, or message information" on screen #1 (GG201), and displays "transmission master" on screen #2 (GG202). Two screens are displayed in parallel on the monitor, such as displaying "video information (or still image information)" transmitted by a signal (stream).
When the area information included in the TMCC and the area to which the terminal belongs do not match, as shown in FIG. #1 (GG201)) is displayed.
If the TMCC does not contain the regional information, and if the TMCC transmits video information, still image information, or telegram information, "TMCC video information, still image information, or telegram information information" and "video information (or still image information) transmitted by the transmission main signal (stream)" are displayed in parallel on the monitor.
When "TMCC video information, still image information, or telegram information" is not transmitted, as shown in FIG. (or still image information)” (screen #1 (GG201)).
In addition, if the emergency broadcast (early warning) is transmitted by the main transmission signal (stream), and if the emergency broadcast (early warning) is transmitted instead of the program you are watching, the screen of the emergency broadcast (early warning) will be displayed. is displayed on the screen #1 (GG201) of the monitor G200 as shown in FIG.

"TMCC information screen priority":
When the terminal selects this mode, the area information included in the TMCC matches the area to which the terminal belongs, and when video information, still image information, or message information is transmitted in the TMCC, "TMCC Video information, still image information, or message information" is preferentially displayed on the monitor.
If the area information contained in the TMCC does not match the area to which the terminal belongs, and video information, still image information, or electronic message information is transmitted in the TMCC, the monitor will be notified of the message "transmit as main transmission signal (stream)." display the image information (or still image information)
If the area information included in the TMCC is not included and video information, still image information, or electronic message information is transmitted in the TMCC, "TMCC video information, still image information, or electronic message Information” is preferentially displayed on the monitor.
If an emergency broadcast (emergency bulletin) is transmitted in the transmission main signal (stream), or if an emergency broadcast (emergency bulletin) is transmitted instead of the program you are watching, the emergency broadcast will be sent instead of the program you are watching. When (emergency bulletin) is transmitted, the emergency broadcast (emergency bulletin) screen is preferentially displayed on the monitor.
Then, in TMCC, if video information, still image information, or message information is not transmitted, "video information (or still image information) being transmitted by the main transmission signal (stream)" is displayed on the monitor. indicate.
The method of preferential display is as described above.

"Emergency broadcast (early warning) information screen priority for emergency warning (early warning)":
When the terminal selects this mode, the area information contained in the TMCC matches the area to which the terminal belongs, and in the TMCC, video information, still image information, or message information of an emergency alert (emergency alert) is transmitted. If so, "TMCC emergency alert (emergency alert) video information, still image information, or message information" is preferentially displayed on the monitor.
If the region information contained in the TMCC does not match the region to which the terminal belongs, and emergency warning (emergency warning) video information, still image information, or message information is transmitted in the TMCC, the monitor will The video information (or still image information) transmitted by the signal (stream) is preferentially displayed.
If the area information included in the TMCC is not included and the video information, still image information, or message information of the emergency alert (emergency alert) is transmitted in the TMCC, the "TMCC emergency alert (emergency alert ), or still image information, or telegram information” is preferentially displayed on the monitor.
If an emergency broadcast (emergency bulletin) is transmitted by the transmission main signal (stream), or if the emergency broadcast (emergency bulletin) is transmitted instead of the program you are watching, the emergency broadcast will be sent instead of the program you are watching. When (emergency bulletin) is transmitted, the emergency broadcast (emergency bulletin) screen is preferentially displayed on the monitor.
In TMCC, if video information for an emergency alert (emergency alert), still image information, or telegram information is not transmitted, the monitor displays "video information (or , still image information)” is displayed preferentially.
For example, in TMCC, when video information other than emergency alerts (emergency alerts), still image information, or message information is transmitted, "video information (or static Priority is given to "image information)", and priority is not given to the display of video information other than the TMCC emergency alert (emergency alert), still image information, or message information.
Then, in TMCC, if video information, still image information, or message information is not transmitted, "video information (or still image information) being transmitted by the main transmission signal (stream)" is displayed on the monitor. indicate.
The method of preferential display is as described above.

"Broadcast screen priority":
When the terminal selects this mode, it preferentially displays "video information (or still image information) transmitted by the transmission main signal (stream)" on the monitor.
The method of preferential display is as described above.
Then, the setting signal of FIG. 96 transmits a control signal so as to set the selected mode among the modes displayed on the screen. The screen controller GG103 in FIG. 96 sets the priority of screen output according to the mode selected by the user, and displays the screen according to the set priority.

In the above description, in TMCC, "emergency warning (emergency warning) video information, still image information, or message information" or "video information, still image information, or message information" is transmitted. explained what to do. In particular, when the transmitting station transmits "still image information" and "telegram information", even if the terminal obtains these information, the display processing, specifically the processing for the display time on the monitor, is terminal dependent. As a result, the broadcasting system does not transmit information to terminals as widely, accurately, and fairly as possible.
Therefore, in TMCC, when transmitting "still image information or electronic message information", it is proposed that the transmitting station transmit information about the time that the terminal displays on the screen.

Table 28 shows an example of the relationship between Ω ₀ Ω ₁ Ω ₂ and display time. In Table 28, Ω ₀ Ω ₁ Ω ₂ is information about display time transmitted using TMCC. (However, although 3-bit information is used here, it is not limited to this.)
When the transmitting station transmits "000" as Ω ₀ Ω ₁ Ω ₂ , the terminal interprets that the display time of "still image information or electronic message information" transmitted using TMCC is 1 minute.
Similarly, if the transmitting station
When "001" is sent as Ω ₀ Ω ₁ Ω ₂ , the terminal interprets that the display time of "still image information or message information" sent using TMCC is 2 minutes,
When "010" is sent as Ω ₀ Ω ₁ Ω ₂ , the terminal interprets that the display time of "still image information or message information" sent using TMCC is 3 minutes,
When "011" is sent as Ω ₀ Ω ₁ Ω ₂ , the terminal interprets that the display time of "still image information or message information" sent using TMCC is 4 minutes,
When "100" is sent as Ω ₀ Ω ₁ Ω ₂ , the terminal interprets that the display time of "still image information or message information" sent using TMCC is 5 minutes,
When "101" is sent as Ω ₀ Ω ₁ Ω ₂ , the terminal interprets that the display time of "still image information or message information" sent using TMCC is 10 minutes,
When "110" is sent as Ω ₀ Ω ₁ Ω ₂ , the terminal interprets that the display time of "still image information or message information" sent using TMCC is 30 minutes,
_When " ₁₁₁ " is sent as _Ω0Ω1Ω2 , the terminal interprets that the display time of "still image information or message information" sent using TMCC is 60 minutes.

However, the terminal does not necessarily have to adhere to the display time obtained with Ω ₀ Ω ₁ Ω ₂ . For example, when the user sets display cancellation of "still image information or telegram information" transmitted using TMCC, "still image information or telegram information" transmitted using TMCC You can cancel the display.
Also, using TMCC, the first "still image information or electronic message information" and Ω ₀ Ω ₁ Ω ₂ are transmitted from the transmitting station, and the first "still image information or electronic message information" is transmitted. Consider a case where the second "still image information or message information" is transmitted from the transmitting station within the display time. In this case, the terminal receives the second "still image information or telegram information" within the display time of the first "still image information or telegram information", but the second " Still image information or message information" may be displayed.

However, in this case, the transmitting station should store the _first "still image information or message information" within the _time set by _Ω0Ω1Ω2 .
In other words, in Table 28, it may be interpreted that transmitting Ω ₀ Ω ₁ Ω ₂ sets the storage time of “still image information or message information” transmitted using TMCC. Therefore, when the storage time has passed, the "still image information or message information" transmitted using TMCC is deleted from the terminal.

In this case, when a plurality of "still image information or electronic message information transmitted using TMCC" is accumulated in the terminal, the user using the terminal can display "transmitted using TMCC" on the monitor. "Still image information or electronic message information" is selected.
As another method, in TMCC, a display start flag is transmitted together with transmission of "still image information or message information". (However, the display start flag may be transmitted in a frame different from the frame in which the "still image information or message information" is transmitted.) may be transmitted.

In this way, by setting the display or accumulation time of "still image information or message information transmitted using TMCC", "still image information or message information transmitted using TMCC ” widely, accurately, and fairly as much as possible. Therefore, it is possible to obtain an effect that the safety of the selected user can be ensured.
In this embodiment, a system configured by a transmitting station, a repeater, and a terminal in Embodiments B, C, D, E, F, and G is Although explained as an example, it is of course possible to implement the same in a system composed of a transmitting station and a terminal.

(Embodiment HH)
In Embodiment AA, Embodiment BB, Embodiment CC, Embodiment DD, Embodiment EE, Embodiment FF, and Embodiment GG, emergency broadcast (emergency alert) information is transmitted using TMCC. I have mentioned sending. In this embodiment, a more specific transmission method for information on emergency broadcasts (emergency warnings) will be described.
As described in Embodiment FF and Embodiment GG, the role of emergency broadcast (emergency warning) information requires the transmitting station to accurately transmit information to terminals. (Because it is highly possible that the purpose is to ensure the safety of the user.) Therefore, in the present embodiment, a method for accurately transmitting emergency broadcast (emergency alert) information to terminals will be described.

In the present embodiment, for example, as described in Embodiment FF and Embodiment GG, emergency broadcasting (emergency warning) belonging to "telegram information" or "video" or "still image" or "audio" Consider a case where a transmitting station transmits information or information other than emergency broadcasts (emergency alerts) belonging to "telegram information", "video", "still picture", or "audio" using TMCC.
At this time, it is unlikely that information belonging to 'telegram information', 'video', 'still image' or 'audio' can be transmitted by one frame of TMCC. Therefore, when the transmitting station transmits the number of frames (however, only the TMCC area is used) necessary for transmitting information belonging to "telegram information", "video", "still picture" or "audio", etc., to the terminal good.

For example, as shown in FIG. 98, 3 frames (however, only the TMCC area is used) are required to transmit information belonging to 'telegram information', 'video', 'still picture' or 'audio' to the terminal. Suppose that At this time, the information belonging to "telegram information", "video", "still picture" or "audio" is divided into "first division information", "second division information", and "third division information", and the first It is assumed that "first division information" is transmitted in a frame, "second division information" is transmitted in a second frame, and "third division information" is transmitted in a third frame. In FIG. 98, the horizontal axis is time.

At this time, the TMCC shall be Since TMCC contains information and is data after error correction coding, for example, when using a systematic code such as LDPC (Low-Density Parity-Check) code, it is composed of information and parity. ing. Therefore, the "first split information" is part of the "first TMCC", the "second split information" is part of the "second TMCC", and the "third split information" is part of the "first TMCC”. Then, the "first TMCC" is transmitted in the first frame, the "second TMCC" is transmitted in the second frame, and the "third TMCC" is transmitted in the third frame.

Table 29 shows the relationship between δ ₀ δ ₁ δ ₂ and the number of frames (the number of TMCCs required) required to transmit information belonging to "telegram information" or "video" or "still image" or "audio". Table 30 shows the relationship between ε ₀ ε ₁ ε ₂ and the numbers of frames transmitting information belonging to "telegram information", "video", "still picture" or "audio".
From Table 29, when the number of frames (the number of TMCCs required) required to transmit information belonging to "telegram information" or "video" or "still picture" or "audio" is 1, δ ₀ δ ₁ Set δ ₂ =“000”.

Similarly, when the number of frames (the number of TMCCs required) required to transmit information belonging to "telegram information" or "video" or "still picture" or "audio" is 2, δ ₀ δ ₁ δ ₂ Set ="001".
When the number of frames (the number of TMCCs required) required to transmit information belonging to "telegram information" or "video" or "still picture" or "audio" is 3, δ ₀ δ ₁ δ ₂ =” 010”.
When the number of frames (required number of TMCCs) required to transmit information belonging to "telegram information" or "video" or "still picture" or "audio" is 4, δ ₀ δ ₁ δ ₂ =” 011”.
When the number of frames (the number of TMCCs required) required to transmit information belonging to "telegram information" or "video" or "still picture" or "audio" is 5, δ ₀ δ ₁ δ ₂ =” Set to 100”.
When the number of frames (required number of TMCCs) required to transmit information belonging to "telegram information" or "video" or "still picture" or "audio" is 6, δ ₀ δ ₁ δ ₂ =” Set to 101”.
When the number of frames (the number of TMCCs required) required to transmit information belonging to "telegram information" or "video" or "still picture" or "audio" is ₇ , δ0 δ1 _{δ2 =} ” Set to 110”.
When the number of frames (the number of TMCCs required) required to transmit information belonging to "telegram information" or "video" or "still picture" or "audio" is ₈ , δ0 δ1 _{δ2 =} ” Set to 111”.

In this example, it is composed of 3 bits of δ ₀ δ ₁ δ ₂ , but it is not limited to this.
The number of bits required to notify the terminal of the number of frames (number of TMCCs required) required to transmit information belonging to "telegram information" or "video" or "still picture" or "audio" is 2. It may be more than bits.
Table 30 will be explained in detail when explaining the example of FIG.
The TMCC information includes δ ₀ δ ₁ δ ₂ of Table 29 and ε ₀ ε ₁ ε ₂ of Table 30, so the transmitting station can obtain δ ₀ δ ₁ δ ₂ of Table 29 and ε ₀ ε ₁ ε ₂ are transmitted together with information belonging to “telegram information”, “video”, “still picture”, “audio”, or the like.

Next, setting values of δ ₀ δ ₁ δ ₂ in Table 29 and ε ₀ ε ₁ ε ₂ in Table 30 will be described using FIG. 98 as an example.
In FIG. 98, information belonging to "telegram information", "video", "still picture", or "audio" is divided into "first division information", "second division information", and "third division information". The first frame transmits "first division information"("firstTMCC"), the second frame transmits "second division information"("secondTMCC"), and the third frame transmits " 3rd division information” (“third TMCC”). That is, three frames are required to transmit information belonging to "telegram information", "video", "still picture" or "audio". Therefore, from Table 29, set δ ₀ δ ₁ δ ₂ =“010”. Then, δ ₀ δ ₁ δ ₂ =“010” is transmitted in the “first TMCC” transmitted in the first frame. Similarly, δ ₀ δ ₁ δ ₂ =”010” is transmitted in the “second TMCC” transmitted in the second frame, and δ ₀ δ ₁ δ in the “third TMCC” transmitted in the third frame ₂ = Transmit ”010”.

Table 30 shows ε ₀ ε ₁ ε ₂ and “telegram information” or “video” or “still picture” or “audio”
This is the relation of the number of the frame that transmits the information belonging to, for example. Therefore, since the "first division information" is transmitted in the _first frame, ε0 ε1 ε2 ₌ " ₀₀₀ ", and ε0 ε1 ε2 ₌ " ₀₀₀ " in the " _first TMCC". ”.
Similarly, in the second frame, since the "second division information" is transmitted, ε ₀ ε ₁ ε ₂ =“001” is set, and ε ₀ ε ₁ ε ₂ = in the “second TMCC”. Transmit ”001”.
Then, in the third frame, since the " _third division information" is transmitted, _{ε0ε1ε2 =} "010" is set, and _{ε0ε1ε2 =} "010" is set in the " _third TMCC". 010” is transmitted.
That is, in the case shown in FIG. 98, the information belonging to "telegram information", "video", "still picture", or "audio" is divided into X pieces (X is an integer of 1 or more), and "Y-th division information (Y is an integer of 1 or more and Y or less), the 3 bits of ε ₀ ε ₁ ε ₂ whose frame number in Table 30 is “Yth frame” are used as part of the TMCC information, and the transmitting station to send.

(However, in this example, it is composed of 3 bits of ε ₀ ε ₁ ε ₂ , but it is not limited to this. The number of bits required to notify the terminal of the number of the frame in which information is being transmitted may be 2 or more.)
By obtaining Δ ₀ Δ ₁ Δ ₂ , the terminal can know the number of frames required to obtain information belonging to “telegram information” or “video” or “still image” or “audio”. , and by obtaining ε ₀ ε ₁ ε ₂ , it is possible to know how many of the required number of frames have been received.
Next, an embodiment different from that of FIG. 98 will be described.
In view of the role of emergency broadcast (emergency warning) information, the transmitting station must accurately transmit the information to the terminals. As shown in FIG. 98, when the terminal fails to correctly obtain any of the "first division information", "second division information", and "third division information" when transmitting, an emergency broadcast (emergency warning) It becomes difficult to provide the content to the user. Therefore, it is important to apply a method that can receive all of the 'first split information', 'second split information', and 'third split information' as correctly as possible. In particular, when the emergency broadcast (emergency alert) information is "still image", "audio", or "telegram information", all of the "first division information", "second division information", and "third division information" are possible. It is recommended to apply a method that can receive as much as possible correctly. (In the case of video, there is a possibility that an emergency broadcast (emergency warning) can be transmitted even if part of the video cannot be reproduced.)

Therefore, we propose a method in which the transmitting station repeatedly transmits "emergency broadcast (emergency alert) information" so that the terminal can obtain information more accurately.
Table 31 shows the relationship between σ ₀ σ ₁ and the number of iterations. Note that σ ₀ σ ₁ is transmitted by the transmitting station as part of TMCC information.

Table 31 has the following meaning.
When the number of repetitions is 1, set σ ₀ σ ₁ =“00” and the transmitting station transmits σ ₀ σ ₁ =“00”.
When the number of repetitions is 2, set σ ₀ σ ₁ =“01” and the transmitting station transmits σ ₀ σ ₁ =“01”.
When the number of repetitions is 3, set σ ₀ σ ₁ =“10” and the transmitting station transmits σ ₀ σ ₁ =“10”.
When the number of repetitions is 4, set σ ₀ σ ₁ =“11” and the transmitting station transmits σ ₀ σ ₁ =“11”.
Although σ ₀ σ ₁ is composed of 2 bits, it is not limited to this, and the required number of bits changes according to the maximum number of iterations supported by the transmitting station.

FIG. 99 shows the state of frame transmission when repetition is set to 2 times. In FIG. 99, the horizontal axis is time.
As in FIG. 98, "emergency broadcast (emergency warning) video information, still image information, or message information" is divided into "first division information", "second division information", and "third division information". ”, and the terminal obtains “first divided information”, “second divided information”, and “third divided information”, so that “emergency broadcast (emergency warning) video information, or still image information, or message information” can be generated.

Therefore, since "emergency broadcast (emergency alert) video information, or still image information, or message information" is divided into three and repeated twice, "emergency broadcast (emergency alert) video information, or , still image information, or message information” is 3×2=6. Therefore, in FIG. 99,
"In the first frame, the first division information"
"Second split information in second frame"
"In the third frame, the third division information"
"First division information in the fourth frame"
"Second split information in fifth frame"
"In the 6th frame, the 3rd division information"
is transmitted by the transmitting station. At that time, δ ₀ δ ₁ δ ₂ and ε ₀ ε ₁ ε ₂ and σ ₀ σ ₁ are set as follows, and the transmitting station transmits.
"In the first frame, δ ₀ δ ₁ δ ₂ =”101”, ε ₀ ε ₁ ε ₂ =”000”, σ ₀ σ ₁ =”01””
"In the second frame, δ ₀ δ ₁ δ ₂ =”101”, ε ₀ ε ₁ ε ₂ =”001”, σ ₀ σ ₁ =”01””
"In the third frame δ ₀ δ ₁ δ ₂ ="101", ε ₀ ε ₁ ε ₂ ="010", σ ₀ σ ₁ ="01""
"In the fourth frame δ ₀ δ ₁ δ ₂ ="101", ε ₀ ε ₁ ε ₂ ="011", σ ₀ σ ₁ ="01""
"In the fifth frame, δ ₀ δ ₁ δ ₂ ="101", ε ₀ ε ₁ ε ₂ ="100", σ ₀ σ ₁ ="01""
"In the sixth frame, δ ₀ δ ₁ δ ₂ ="101", ε ₀ ε ₁ ε ₂ ="101", σ ₀ σ ₁ ="01""
(This transmission method is called "first repetition method".)

It should be noted that the state of frame transmission when the repetition is set to 2 is not limited to that shown in FIG. 99, and a different transmission order may be used. As an example, FIG. 100 shows the state of frame transmission when repetition is set to 2 times. Note that in FIG. 100, the horizontal axis represents time.

In FIG. 100,
"In the first frame, the first division information"
"In the second frame, the first division information"
"Second division information in the third frame"
"Second division information in the fourth frame"
"In the 5th frame, the 3rd division information"
"In the 6th frame, the 3rd division information"
is transmitted by the transmitting station. At that time, δ ₀ δ ₁ δ ₂ and ε ₀ ε ₁ ε ₂ and σ ₀ σ ₁ are set as follows, and the transmitting station transmits.
"In the first frame, δ ₀ δ ₁ δ ₂ =”101”, ε ₀ ε ₁ ε ₂ =”000”, σ ₀ σ ₁ =”01””
"In the second frame, δ ₀ δ ₁ δ ₂ =”101”, ε ₀ ε ₁ ε ₂ =”001”, σ ₀ σ ₁ =”01””
"In the third frame δ ₀ δ ₁ δ ₂ ="101", ε ₀ ε ₁ ε ₂ ="010", σ ₀ σ ₁ ="01""
"In the fourth frame δ ₀ δ ₁ δ ₂ ="101", ε ₀ ε ₁ ε ₂ ="011", σ ₀ σ ₁ ="01""
"In the fifth frame, δ ₀ δ ₁ δ ₂ ="101", ε ₀ ε ₁ ε ₂ ="100", σ ₀ σ ₁ ="01""
"In the sixth frame, δ ₀ δ ₁ δ ₂ ="101", ε ₀ ε ₁ ε ₂ ="101", σ ₀ σ ₁ ="01""
(This transmission method is called a "second repetition method".)

Although the "first iteration method" and the "second iteration method" have been described with reference to FIGS. 99 and 100, the order of transmitting division information is not limited to FIGS. The values of ε ₀ ε ₁ ε ₂ also need to be made to correspond to the order of transmitting the division information.
In the above description, an example of transmitting δ ₀ δ ₁ δ ₂ and ε ₀ ε ₁ ε ₂ and σ ₀ σ ₁ in TMCC has been described. A method of transmitting δ' ₀ δ' ₁ δ' ₂ instead of δ ₀ δ ₁ δ ₂ and ε' ₀ ε' ₁ ε' ₂ instead of ε ₀ ε ₁ ε ₂ by TMCC will be described below.

Table 32 shows δ' ₀ δ' ₁ δ' ₂ and the number of frames ( number of TMCCs required), Table 33 shows ε' ₀ ε' ₁ ε' ₂ and information belonging to "telegram information" or "video" or "still picture" or "audio" etc. is transmitted without repeating indicates the relationship between the numbers of the frames being transmitted.

As shown in Table 32, the number of frames (necessary TMCC number) is 1, set δ' ₀ δ' ₁ δ' ₂ =”000”. It should be noted that, as will be described in detail later, repetition may be performed. The setting of Δ' ₀ Δ' ₁ Δ' ₂ when repeating is also explained in detail later.
Similarly, the number of frames (the number of TMCCs required) required to transmit information belonging to "telegram information", "video", "still picture" or "audio", etc., assuming no repetition is 2, set δ' ₀ δ' ₁ δ' ₂ =”001”.
When the number of frames (the number of TMCCs required) required to transmit information belonging to "telegram information,""video,""stillpicture," or "audio," assuming no repetition, is 3. , set δ' ₀ δ' ₁ δ' ₂ =”010”.
When the number of frames (the number of TMCCs required) required to transmit information belonging to "telegram information", "video", "still picture" or "audio" etc. is not repeated is 4 , set δ' ₀ δ' ₁ δ' ₂ =”011”.
The number of frames (the number of TMCCs required) required to transmit information belonging to "telegram information", "video", "still picture" or "audio", etc., assuming no repetition is 5. , set δ' ₀ δ' ₁ δ' ₂ =”100”.
When the number of frames (the number of TMCCs required) required to transmit information belonging to "telegram information", "video", "still picture" or "audio" etc. is not repeated is 6 , set δ' ₀ δ' ₁ δ' ₂ =”101”.
The number of frames (the number of TMCCs required) required to transmit information belonging to "telegram information", "video", "still picture" or "audio", etc., assuming no repetition is 7. , set δ' ₀ δ' ₁ δ' ₂ =” 110”.
When the number of frames (the number of TMCCs required) required to transmit information belonging to "telegram information", "video", "still picture", or "audio", etc., assuming no repetition is 8 , set δ' ₀ δ' ₁ δ' ₂ =” 111”.

In this example, it is composed of 3 bits of δ' ₀ δ' ₁ δ' ₂ , but it is not limited to this, such as "telegram information", "video", "still image", "audio", etc. The number of bits required to notify the terminal of the number of frames (the number of TMCCs required) required to transmit the information belonging to , assuming no repetition, may be 2 bits or more.
Table 33 will be explained in detail when explaining the example of FIG.

The TMCC information includes δ' ₀ δ' ₁ δ' ₂ of Table 32 and ε' ₀ ε' ₁ ε' ₂ of Table 33, so the transmitting station _can ' ₁ δ' ₂ and ε' ₀ ε' ₁ in Table 33
_ε'2 is transmitted together with information belonging to "telegram information" or "video" or "still picture" or "audio".
Next, setting values of δ' ₀ δ' ₁ δ' ₂ in Table 32 and ε' ₀ ε' ₁ ε' ₂ in Table 33 will be described using FIG. 98 as an example.

In FIG. 98, information belonging to "telegram information", "video", "still picture", or "audio" is divided into "first division information", "second division information", and "third division information". The first frame transmits "first division information"("firstTMCC"), the second frame transmits "second division information"("secondTMCC"), and the third frame transmits " 3rd division information” (“third TMCC”). That is, three frames are required to transmit information belonging to "telegram information", "video", "still picture" or "audio". Therefore, from Table 32, set δ' ₀ δ' ₁ δ' ₂ =“010”. Then, δ' ₀ δ' ₁ δ' ₂ =“010” is transmitted in the “first TMCC” transmitted in the first frame. Similarly, δ' ₀ δ' ₁ δ' ₂ ="010" is transmitted in the "second TMCC" transmitted in the second frame, and δ' is transmitted in the "third TMCC" transmitted in the third frame. Transmit ₀ δ' ₁ δ' ₂ =”010”.

Table 33 shows the frames being transmitted when ε' ₀ ε' ₁ ε' ₂ and information belonging to "telegram information", "video", "still image", or "audio" are transmitted without repetition. It is the relationship of the number of
Therefore, since the "first division information" is transmitted in the first frame, ε' ₀ ε' ₁ ε' ₂ is set to "000", and ε' ₀ ε' ₁ is set in the "first TMCC". Transmit ε' ₂ =”000”.
Similarly, in the second frame, since the “second division information” is transmitted, ε′ ₀ ε′ ₁ ε′ ₂ is set to “001”, and ε′ ₀ ε is set in the “second TMCC”. ' ₁ ε' ₂ =”001” is transmitted.
Then, in the third frame, since the "third division information" is transmitted, ε' ₀ ε' ₁ ε'
₂ ="010" and transmit ε' ₀ ε' ₁ ε' ₂ ="010" on the "third TMCC".

That is, in the case shown in FIG. 98, the information belonging to "telegram information", "video", "still picture", or "audio" is divided into X pieces (X is an integer of 1 or more), and "Y-th division information ' (Y is an integer of 1 or more and Y or less), 3 bits of ε' ₀ ε' ₁ ε' ₂ whose frame number in Table 33 is "Yth frame" as part of the TMCC information , the transmitting station transmits.
(However, in this example, it is composed of 3 bits of ε' ₀ ε' ₁ ε' ₂ , but it is not limited to this. The number of bits required to notify the terminal of the number of the frame transmitting the information belonging to, etc. may be 2 or more.)

Then, the terminal obtains δ' ₀ δ' ₁ δ' ₂ , and if there is no repetition, the "telegram information"
Or you can know the number of frames required to obtain information belonging to "video" or "still picture" or "audio", etc., and by obtaining ε' ₀ ε' ₁ ε' ₂ , the required frames It is possible to know how many frames have been received out of the number.

Next, an embodiment different from that of FIG. 98 will be described.
In view of the role of emergency broadcast (emergency warning) information, the transmitting station must accurately transmit the information to the terminals. As shown in FIG. 98, when the terminal fails to correctly obtain any of the "first division information", "second division information", and "third division information" when transmitting, an emergency broadcast (emergency warning) It becomes difficult to provide the content to the user. Therefore, it is important to apply a method that can receive all of the 'first split information', 'second split information', and 'third split information' as correctly as possible. In particular, when the information of the emergency broadcast (emergency warning) is "still image", "voice" or "telegram information", all of the "first division information", "second division information", and "third division information" are possible. It is recommended to apply a method that can receive as much as possible correctly. (In the case of video, there is a possibility that an emergency broadcast (emergency warning) can be transmitted even if part of the video cannot be reproduced.)
Therefore, the transmitting station repeatedly transmits "emergency broadcast (emergency alert) information" so that the terminal can obtain information more accurately.

The relationship between σ ₀ σ ₁ and the number of iterations is shown in Table 31, and the details are as described above.
FIG. 99 shows the state of frame transmission when repetition is set to 2 times. In FIG. 99, the horizontal axis is time.
As in FIG. 98, "emergency broadcast (emergency warning) video information, still image information, or message information" is divided into "first division information", "second division information", and "third division information". ”, and the terminal obtains “first division information”, “second division information”, and “third division information”, so that “emergency broadcast (emergency warning) video information, or still image information, or message information” can be generated.

Therefore, since "emergency broadcast (emergency alert) video information, or still image information, or message information" is divided into three and repeated twice, "emergency broadcast (emergency alert) video information, or , still image information, or message information” is 3×2=6. Therefore, in FIG. 99,
"In the first frame, the first division information"
"Second split information in second frame"
"In the third frame, the third division information"
"First division information in the fourth frame"
"Second split information in fifth frame"
"In the 6th frame, the 3rd division information"
is transmitted by the transmitting station. At that time, δ' ₀ δ' ₁ δ' ₂ and ε' ₀ ε' ₁ ε' ₂ and σ ₀ σ ₁ are set as follows, and the transmitting station transmits.
"In the first frame, δ' ₀ δ' ₁ δ' ₂ =”010”, ε' ₀ ε' ₁ ε' ₂ =”000”, σ ₀ σ ₁ =
”01””
"In the second frame, δ' ₀ δ' ₁ δ' ₂ =”010”, ε' ₀ ε' ₁ ε' ₂ =”001”, σ ₀ σ ₁ =
”01””
"In the third frame, δ' ₀ δ' ₁ δ' ₂ =”010”, ε' ₀ ε' ₁ ε' ₂ =”010”, σ ₀ σ ₁ =
”01””
"In the fourth frame, δ' ₀ δ' ₁ δ' ₂ =”010”, ε' ₀ ε' ₁ ε' ₂ =”000”, σ ₀ σ ₁ =
”01””
"In the fifth frame, δ' ₀ δ' ₁ δ' ₂ =”010”, ε' ₀ ε' ₁ ε' ₂ =”001”, σ ₀ σ ₁ =
”01””
"In the sixth frame, δ' ₀ δ' ₁ δ' ₂ =”010”, ε' ₀ ε' ₁ ε' ₂ =”010”, σ ₀ σ ₁ =
”01””
(This transmission method is called a "third repetition method".)

In the above iteration method, the number of iterations is two, so σ ₀ σ ₁ =“01”.
Since the number of frames (the number of TMCCs required) required to transmit information belonging to "telegram information", "video", "still picture" or "audio" without repetition is 3. , δ' ₀ δ' ₁ δ' ₂ =”010”.

At this time, from the relationship in Table 33, ε' ₀ ε' ₁ ε' ₂ =“000” and “ε' ₀ in the first frame” is transmitted. ε' ₁ ε' ₂ =”000””.
"In the second frame, the second division information" is transmitted. At this time, from the relationship in Table 33, ε' ₀ ε' ₁ ε' ₂ ="001", and "in the second frame, ε' ₀ ε' ₁ ε' ₂ =”001””.
"In the third frame, the third division information" is transmitted. At this time, from the relationship in Table 33, ε' ₀ ε' ₁ ε' ₂ = "010", and "ε' ₀ in the third frame". ε' ₁ ε' ₂ =”010””.
"The first division information in the fourth frame" is transmitted. At this time, from the relationship in Table 33, ε' ₀ ε' ₁ ε' ₂ = "000", and "ε' ₀ in the fourth frame". ε' ₁ ε' ₂ =”000””.
"In the fifth frame, the second division information" is transmitted. At this time, from the relationship in Table 33, ε' ₀ ε' ₁ ε' ₂ ="001", and "In the fifth frame, ε' ₀ ε' ₁ ε' ₂ =”001””.
"In the sixth frame, the third division information" is transmitted. At this time, from the relationship in Table 33, ε' ₀ ε' ₁ ε' ₂ = "010", and "in the sixth frame, ε' ₀ ε' ₁ ε' ₂ =”010””.

That is, in the case shown in FIG. 99, information belonging to "telegram information", "video", "still picture", or "audio" is divided into X pieces (X is an integer of 1 or more), and "Y-th division information ' (Y is an integer of 1 or more and Y or less), 3 bits of ε' ₀ ε' ₁ ε' ₂ whose frame number in Table 33 is "Yth frame" are used as part of the TMCC information, The transmitting station transmits.

It should be noted that the state of frame transmission when the repetition is set to 2 is not limited to that shown in FIG. 99, and a different transmission order may be used. As an example, FIG. 100 shows the state of frame transmission when repetition is set to 2 times. Note that in FIG. 100, the horizontal axis represents time.
In FIG. 100,
"In the first frame, the first division information"
"In the second frame, the first division information"
"Second division information in the third frame"
"Second division information in the fourth frame"
"In the 5th frame, the 3rd division information"
"In the 6th frame, the 3rd division information"
is transmitted by the transmitting station. At that time, δ' ₀ δ' ₁ δ' ₂ and ε' ₀ ε' ₁ ε' ₂ and σ ₀ σ ₁ are set as follows, and the transmitting station transmits.
"In the first frame, δ' ₀ δ' ₁ δ' ₂ =”010”, ε' ₀ ε' ₁ ε' ₂ =”000”, σ ₀ σ ₁ =
”01””
"In the second frame, δ' ₀ δ' ₁ δ' ₂ =”010”, ε' ₀ ε' ₁ ε' ₂ =”000”, σ ₀ σ ₁ =
”01””
"In the third frame, δ' ₀ δ' ₁ δ' ₂ =”010”, ε' ₀ ε' ₁ ε' ₂ =”001”, σ ₀ σ ₁ =
”01””
"In the fourth frame, δ' ₀ δ' ₁ δ' ₂ =”010”, ε' ₀ ε' ₁ ε' ₂ =”001”, σ ₀ σ ₁ =
”01””
"In the fifth frame, δ' ₀ δ' ₁ δ' ₂ =”010”, ε' ₀ ε' ₁ ε' ₂ =”010”, σ ₀ σ ₁ =
”01””
"In the sixth frame, δ' ₀ δ' ₁ δ' ₂ =”010”, ε' ₀ ε' ₁ ε' ₂ =”010”, σ ₀ σ ₁ =
”01””
(This transmission method is called a "fourth repetition method".)

In the above iteration method, the number of iterations is two, so σ ₀ σ ₁ =“01”.
Since the number of frames (the number of TMCCs required) required to transmit information belonging to "telegram information", "video", "still picture" or "audio" without repetition is 3. , δ' ₀ δ' ₁ δ' ₂ =”010”.

"In the first frame, the first division information" is transmitted. At this time, from the relationship in Table 33, ε' ₀ ε' ₁ ε' ₂ = "000", and "ε' ₀ in the first frame". ε' ₁ ε' ₂ =”000””.
"In the second frame, the first division information" is transmitted. At this time, from the relationship in Table 33, ε' ₀ ε' ₁ ε' ₂ = "000", and "ε' ₀ in the second frame."ε' ₁ ε' ₂ =”000””.
"In the third frame, the second division information" is transmitted. At this time, from the relationship in Table 33, ε' ₀ ε' ₁ ε' ₂ = "001", and "in the third frame, ε' ₀ ε' ₁ ε' ₂ =”001””.
"In the fourth frame, the second division information" is transmitted. At this time, from the relationship in Table 33, ε' ₀ ε' ₁ ε' ₂ = "001", and "In the fourth frame, ε' ₀ ε' ₁ ε' ₂ =”001””.
"In the fifth frame, the third division information" is transmitted. At this time, from the relationship in Table 33, ε' ₀ ε' ₁ ε' ₂ ="010", and "In the fifth frame, ε' ₀ ε' ₁ ε' ₂ =”010””.
"In the sixth frame, the third division information" is transmitted. At this time, from the relationship in Table 33, ε' ₀ ε' ₁ ε' ₂ ="010", and "in the sixth frame, ε' ₀ ε' ₁ ε' ₂ =”010””.

That is, in the case shown in FIG. 100, information belonging to "telegram information", "video", "still picture", or "audio" is divided into X pieces (X is an integer of 1 or more), and "Y-th division information ' (Y is an integer of 1 or more and Y or less), 3 bits of ε' ₀ ε' ₁ ε' ₂ whose frame number in Table 33 is "Yth frame" are used as part of the TMCC information, The transmitting station transmits.
Although the "third repetition method" and the "fourth repetition method" have been described with reference to FIGS. 99 and 100, the order of transmitting division information is not limited to that shown in FIGS. Then, the values of ε' ₀ ε' ₁ and ε' ₂ also need to be associated according to the order of transmitting the division information.

Next, the relationship with division information, other TMCC information, etc. will be described in detail. As described above, the division information is, for example, "emergency broadcast (emergency warning) video information, still image information, or telegram information" as "first division information" and "second division information". ' and 'third division information' mean each division information of 'first division information', 'second division information', and 'third division information'. (For example, "first split information" is split information.)

FIG. 101 shows an example of a TMCC generation method that is transmitted in each frame.
First, "segmentation information" and "other TMCC information" form all TMCC information. In the above, other than the division information, information transmitted by TMCC (for example, δ ₀ δ ₁ δ ₂ (or δ' ₀ δ' ₁ δ' ₂ ), ε ₀ ε ₁ ε ₂ (or ε' ₀ ε' ₁ ε' ₂ ), σ ₀ σ ₁ ) will be included in other TMCC information.
Then, as shown in FIG. 101, BCH (Bose-Chaudhuri-Hocquenghem) encoding and null data insertion are performed on the "division information" and "other TMCC information", and "division information", "other TMCC information", and " Information for performing LDPC encoding composed of BCH parity" and "null data" is generated. Null data is, for example, data composed of a plurality of "0"s. (The method of constructing null data is not limited to this, and any data predetermined by the transmitting station and the terminal may be used.)

Then, as shown in FIG. 101, LDPC encoding is performed on "partition information", "other TMCC information", "BCH parity", and "null data" to generate "parity" (see FIG. 101). Therefore, in FIG. 101, "division information", "other TMCC information", "BCH parity", "null data", and "parity" are LDPC-encoded data. (It should be noted that block codes are used here as LDPC codes.)
Among "division information", "other TMCC information", "BCH parity", "null data", and "parity", since "null data" inserted by the transmitting station is known to the terminal, the transmitting station deletes "null data". , "segmentation information", "other TMCC information", "BCH parity", and "parity".

The configuration of each unit that implements FIG. 101 will be described. The configuration of the transmitting station is as described in other embodiments, and is as described using FIGS. In the following, a configuration example of the portion related to TMCC generation in FIG. 101 will be described.
In FIG. 102, a BCH encoding unit (HH102) receives control signal HH101, extracts TMCC information (“division information” and “other TMCC information” in FIG. 101) included in control signal HH101, and output BCH-encoded data (HH103) (“division information”, “other TMCC information”, and “BCH parity” in FIG. 101).

The null data insertion unit (HH104) receives the BCH-encoded data (HH103) as input, inserts null data (corresponding to the null data in FIG. 101), inserts the data after null data insertion (HH105) ("division information" in FIG. 101 "other TMCC information", "BCH parity", "null data") are output.
The LDPC encoding unit HH106 receives the data after inserting the null data (HH105), encodes the LDPC code, and converts the data after the LDPC encoding (HH107) (“division information” and “other TMCC information” in FIG. 101 "BCH parity", "null data", "parity").

Null data deletion unit HH108 receives LDPC-encoded data (HH107) as input, deletes null data ((“null data” in FIG. 101), and deletes null data HH109 (“division information”, “other data” in FIG. 101). TMCC information", "BCH parity", and "parity").The data HH109 after null data deletion ("division information", "other TMCC information", "BCH parity", and "parity" in FIG. 101) is transmitted as TMCC. station will transmit.

Next, FIG. 103 shows the configuration of the portion related to TMCC generation, which is different from that in FIG. FIG. 103 differs from FIG. 102 in that the BCH encoding unit HH102 and the null data inserting unit HH104 are arranged in a different order.

In FIG. 103, a null data insertion unit HH104 receives a control signal HH101 as an input, extracts TMCC information ("division information" and "other TMCC information" in FIG. 101) contained in the control signal HH101, and null data ( (corresponding to the null data of ) is inserted, and the data (HH201) after inserting the null data ("division information", "other TMCC information", and "null data" in FIG. 101) is output.
The BCH encoding unit HH102 receives the data (HH201) after inserting the null data, performs BCH encoding, and converts the data after BCH encoding (HH202) (“division information”, “other TMCC information”, “BCH parity” and “null data”).

The LDPC encoding unit HH106 receives the BCH-encoded data (HH202) as input, performs LDPC encoding, and converts the LDPC-encoded data (HH107) (“division information” and “other TMCC information in FIG. 101 ', 'BCH parity', 'null data', 'parity').
Null data deletion unit HH108 receives LDPC-encoded data (HH107) as input, deletes null data ((“null data” in FIG. 101), and deletes null data HH109 (“division information”, “other data” in FIG. 101). TMCC information", "BCH parity", and "parity").The data HH109 after null data deletion ("division information", "other TMCC information", "BCH parity", and "parity" in FIG. 101) is transmitted as TMCC. station will transmit.

FIG.104 shows an example of the configuration of the control information estimating section (TMCC information estimating section) in the receiving apparatus of the terminal described using FIG.19, FIG.75, and the like.
Null data log-likelihood ratio insertion unit HH302 receives as input the log-likelihood ratio (HH301) of the TMCC portion obtained by demapping, and inserts the log-likelihood ratio of the null data corresponding to “null data” in FIG. The log-likelihood ratio is inserted into the log-likelihood ratio, and the log-likelihood ratio after inserting the log-likelihood ratio for null data (HH303) is output.

A belief propagation decoding (BP (Belief Propagation) decoding) unit (HH304) takes as input the log-likelihood ratio (HH303) after inserting the log-likelihood ratio for null data, and performs, for example, sum-product decoding, shuffled BP decoding, Belief propagation decoding (BP (Belief Propagation) decoding) such as Normalized BP decoding, Offset BP decoding, min-sum decoding, Layered BP decoding, etc. is performed, and decoded data ("division information""other TMCC in FIG. 101 information", "BCH parity", "null data", and "parity" estimated data) (HH305).

The BCH decoding unit (HH306) receives the decoded data HH305, performs BCH decoding to correct errors in the TMCC information, and estimates the TMCC information ("division information" and "other TMCC information" in FIG. 101). ) (HH307).
As described above, the transmitting station creates TMCC data. At this time, the "third repetition method" when the "first repetition method", "second repetition method", "third repetition method", and "fourth repetition method" described above are applied. , the advantage of the "fourth iteration method".

Considering a standard based on "Advanced Broadband Satellite Digital Broadcast Transmission System Standard ARIB STD-B44 Version 1.0", for example, Embodiment AA, Embodiment BB, Embodiment CC, Embodiment DD, In Embodiment EE, Embodiment GG, and this embodiment, TMCC information other than TMCC extension information (“extension identification” and “extension area”) does not change rapidly, that is, , is very unlikely to change on a frame-by-frame basis.

Therefore, for example, when the "third repetition method" is used, in the "first frame" and the "fourth frame" that transmit the "first division information", the TMCC data of the "first frame" and the TMCC data of the "fourth frame" are very likely to be the same.
Similarly, in the "second frame" and the "fifth frame" that transmit the "second division information", the TMCC data of the "second frame" and the TMCC data of the "fifth frame" are the same. is very likely to be
In the "third frame" and the "sixth frame" that transmit the "third division information", the TMCC data of the "third frame" and the TMCC data of the "sixth frame" can be the same. very high in nature.

Then, the transmitting station stores the TMCC data of the "first frame" and transmits the stored data in the "fourth frame". has the advantage of being able to reduce
Similarly, the transmitting station may accumulate TMCC data in the "second frame" and transmit the accumulated data in the "fifth frame", and may also transmit TMCC data in the "third frame". Data may be accumulated, and the accumulated data may be transmitted in the "sixth frame".
Similarly, the "fourth iterative method" has the advantage of being able to reduce the number of processes related to error correction coding.

Considering errors due to a decrease in the received field strength of the terminal due to radio, using the "first repetition method" and "third repetition method" may reduce the possibility of erroneous TMCC data. is high.
When either the "first repetition method" or the "third repetition method" is used, the "first division information" is not transmitted in adjacent frames. This also applies to the "second division information" and the "third division information". Therefore, since the possibility of being affected by burst errors due to a decrease in the reception field strength of the terminal is reduced, using the "first repetition method" and the "third repetition method" reduces the possibility of erroneous TMCC data. more likely to be able to

In the present embodiment, a method for accurately transmitting emergency broadcast (emergency warning) information to terminals has been described. By implementing various examples of the present embodiment, the terminal can accurately obtain emergency broadcast (emergency warning) information, thereby increasing the user's personal safety. can be obtained.
In addition, in this embodiment, in Embodiment B, Embodiment C, Embodiment D, Embodiment E, Embodiment F, and Embodiment G, the transmission station, the relay, and the terminal are configured. Although the system has been described as an example, it is of course possible to implement the same in a system composed of a transmitting station and a terminal.

(Embodiment II)
In the embodiments so far, an example of transmitting emergency warning (emergency bulletin) information, message information, video information, still image information, and audio information using TMCC has been described.
In this embodiment, an example will be described in which a terminal that obtains information such as emergency alert (emergency bulletin) information, telegram information, video information, still image information, and audio information transmits the information to another device.

In this specification, as an example, in satellite broadcasting, control information such as TMCC is transmitted, and terminals, communication systems, relay systems, etc. using it have been described in each embodiment. It is not limited to the use by transmitting control information such as TMCC by , but the transmission station transmits control information such as TMCC by systems such as terrestrial broadcasting, cable television, mobile broadcasting, etc. This specification Each embodiment described in the document may be implemented. This point also applies to the present embodiment.
The configuration of the TMCC, the configuration of the transmitting device, the configuration of the receiving device, etc. are as described in Embodiment AA. The method of transmitting still image information and audio information is the same as described in Embodiment AA and later, so the description is omitted.

Further, in this embodiment, as described in Embodiment B, Embodiment C, Embodiment D, Embodiment E, Embodiment F, and Embodiment G, the (terrestrial) transmitting station, A system composed of repeaters (satellites) and terminals will be described as an example.
FIG. 105 shows the relationship between a receiving terminal that receives a modulated signal containing control information such as TMCC transmitted by a transmitting station and other devices.

In FIG. 105, a terminal II 103 receives, at an antenna II 101, a modulated signal transmitted by a transmitting station and relayed, for example, by a repeater, and obtains a received signal II 102. FIG. Terminal II103 then extracts the control information (TMCC) included in received signal II102. Then, as described in other embodiments, it is assumed that the terminal II 103 obtains emergency alert (emergency bulletin) information transmitted using TMCC. Terminal II 103 then outputs, for example, from antenna II 105 a modulated signal II 104 containing information related to an emergency alert (emergency bulletin). At this time, as a wireless communication method, for example, Wi-Fi (IEEE802.11a, IEEE802.11b, IEEE802.11g, IEEE802.11n, etc.), WiGiG, WirelessHD, Bluetooth (registered trademark), Gigbee, etc. can be considered (however, , but not limited to these.). In addition, terminal II 103 outputs signal II 106 containing information related to emergency alerts (emergency bulletins). At this time, signal II106 Ethernet (registered trademark), USB (Universal Serial Bus), PLC (Power Line Communication), HDMI (registered trademark) (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) or other wired communication method shall be a signal based on. (However, it is not limited to these.).

Device #A (II 107), device #B (II 108), device #C (II 109), and device #D (II 110) receive signals based on the wireless communication method and/or the wired communication method transmitted by terminal II 103. Then, processing such as detection, demodulation, and error correction decoding is performed to obtain information related to an emergency alert (emergency bulletin).
At this time, among device #A (II 107), device #B (II 108), device #C (II 109), and device #D (II 110), the device having a monitor or a speaker is, for example, an emergency alert (emergency bulletin). Related information may be displayed on a monitor, or sound of information related to an emergency alert (emergency bulletin) may be output from a speaker.

In addition, among device #A (II107), device #B (II108), device #C (II109), and device #D (II110), devices that may endanger the human body (for example, devices that handle gas) , ovens, electric stoves, gas stoves, and other fire-inducing devices and devices that may affect human life) receive the signal sent by Terminal II 103 and send information related to emergency alerts (emergency bulletins). By obtaining the power, control is performed to reduce the possibility of endangering the human body, such as turning off the power.
As described above, the terminal II 103 obtains the emergency alert (emergency bulletin) information transmitted by the transmitting station, transmits information related to this information to other devices, and the other devices obtain this information, Appropriate processing increases the possibility of ensuring user safety.

In FIG. 105, the terminal II 103 and the devices #A to #D may communicate directly, or may use a repeater (for example, an access point (LAN (Local Area Network) access point) or a cellular base station). The terminal II 103 and the devices #A to #D may communicate with each other via the terminal II 103 .
In the above description, it is described that the terminal II 103 in FIG. 105 transmits information related to the emergency alert (early emergency bulletin). This point will be explained.

Terminal II 103 obtains the information of the emergency alert (emergency bulletin) transmitted using TMCC. The terminal II 103 transmits information related to the emergency alert (emergency bulletin) to the devices #A to #D according to the application. good.
For example, the terminal II 103 generates information to be displayed on the monitor from the emergency alert (emergency bulletin) information included in the TMCC transmitted by the transmitting station, and transmits the information to the device equipped with the monitor. .

In addition, the terminal II 103 generates and transmits information for output from the speaker to the device equipped with the speaker from the emergency alert (emergency bulletin) information included in the TMCC transmitted by the transmitting station. .
Then, when controlling the device such as "turning off the power", information on the control to be performed on the device (for example, turning off the power If it is to be turned off, information indicating that the power is to be turned off) is generated and transmitted to the device.

In the above description, the terminal II 103 temporarily accumulates information of an emergency alert (emergency bulletin) transmitted using TMCC, and then generates information to be transmitted to other devices from the accumulated information. You may send the information to
Note that "the terminal II 103 obtains emergency alert (emergency bulletin) information transmitted using TMCC. Then, the terminal II 103 sends an emergency alert (emergency This is because terminal II 103 transmits information related to an emergency alert (emergency bulletin) according to the regional information described in other embodiments. You may control whether or not
For example, when the area information and the area to which the terminal belongs match, the terminal II 103 obtains emergency alert (early warning) information transmitted using TMCC. Then, the terminal II 103 transmits information related to the emergency alert (emergency bulletin) to the devices #A to #D according to the application.

On the other hand, if the area information and the area to which the terminal belongs do not match, the terminal II 103 performs a process of not transmitting information to the devices #A to #D.
In the above description, an example is described in which the terminal II 103 generates information from "emergency alert (emergency bulletin) information" and transmits it to another device. Information to be transmitted to other devices may be generated based on TMCC information transmitted by the transmitting station (information transmitted using TMCC described in other embodiments).
In addition, in this embodiment, in Embodiment B, Embodiment C, Embodiment D, Embodiment E, Embodiment F, and Embodiment G, the transmission station, the relay, and the terminal are configured. Although the system has been described as an example, it is of course possible to implement the system in the same way in a system composed of a transmitting station and a terminal.

(Embodiment JJ)
This embodiment proposes a method of transmitting URL (Uniform Resource Locator) or URI (Uniform Resource Identifier) information by TMCC.
In this specification, as an example, in satellite broadcasting, control information such as TMCC is transmitted, and terminals, communication systems, relay systems, etc. using it have been described in each embodiment. It is not limited to the use by transmitting control information such as TMCC by , but the transmitting station transmits control information such as TMCC by systems such as terrestrial broadcasting, cable television, mobile broadcasting, etc. This specification Each embodiment described in the document may be implemented. This point is the same for the present embodiment.

The configuration of the TMCC, the configuration of the transmitting device, the configuration of the receiving device, etc. are as described in Embodiment AA. The method of transmitting still image information and audio information is the same as described in Embodiment AA and later, so description thereof will be omitted.
Further, in this embodiment, as described in Embodiment B, Embodiment C, Embodiment D, Embodiment E, Embodiment F, and Embodiment G, the (terrestrial) transmitting station, A system composed of repeaters (satellites) and terminals will be described as an example.

In the embodiment EE and the like, the method of transmitting emergency warning (emergency bulletin) information, message information, video information, still image information, and audio information using TMCC has been described. At that time, transmission of message information, video information, still images, and audio emergency warning (emergency bulletin) information using TMCC has been described. However, since the TMCC is only an area for transmitting control information, the data transmission speed of data transmission using TMCC is faster than the data transmission speed when data is transmitted using the transmission main signal of the broadcasting system. is very slow, for example, large data transmission of emergency alert (emergency bulletin) information by TMCC cannot be performed, and some large amount of data can be obtained quickly in terms of user safety. Such a system construction is desired.

Therefore, as the type of information to be transmitted using TMCC, TM that can select "URL (Uniform Resource Locator) or URI (Uniform Resource Identifier) information"
A CC transmission method is proposed.
As described in the embodiment EE, for example, as part of control information such as TMCC, information R ₂ R ₁ R ₀ relating to the medium of emergency alert (emergency bulletin) information shall be transmitted. Table 34 shows the "relationship between R ₂ R ₁ R ₀ and types of emergency warning broadcast information" different from Table 26.

As shown in Table 34, when R ₂ R ₁ R ₀ =“000”, it is assumed that emergency warning broadcast information is transmitted as message information. When R ₂ R ₁ R ₀ =“001”, it is assumed that the emergency warning broadcast information is transmitted as video, and when R ₂ R ₁ R ₀ =“010”, the emergency warning broadcast information is transmitted as a still image. When R ₂ R ₁ R ₀ =“011”, the emergency warning broadcast information is assumed to be transmitted by voice, and when R ₂ R ₁ R ₀ =“100”, the emergency warning broadcast information is transmitted It is assumed that URL or URI information for obtaining information has been transmitted, and R ₂ R ₁ R ₀ =“101” to “111” is undefined.
The method of transmitting information related to TMCC is as described in Embodiment AA, Embodiment BB, Embodiment CC, Embodiment DD, and Embodiment EE. ) is transmitted using TMCC “extended information” as an example.

It is assumed that the configuration of a transmission station that transmits control information such as TMCC is as shown in FIG. 7, for example, as described in the embodiment DD. A detailed description has been given in another embodiment, so the description is omitted here.
FIG. 106 shows the configuration of the terminal (II103). It should be noted that the same numbers are attached to those that operate in the same manner as in FIG. 105 . Terminal II 103 receives, at antenna II 101, a modulated signal transmitted by a transmitting station and relayed by, for example, a repeater, and obtains received signal II 102. FIG. Terminal II103 then extracts the control information (TMCC) included in received signal II102. Then, as described in other embodiments, it is assumed that the terminal II 103 has obtained URL or URI information for obtaining emergency warning broadcast information transmitted using TMCC.
Then, for example, if the OS (Operating System) is not activated, the terminal II 103 activates the OS, activates the browser, and connects via the network to the URL or URI transmitted using TMCC. , Get information on emergency alerts (emergency bulletins).

The JJ101 antenna in FIG. 106 is, for example, an antenna for connecting to a wireless LAN network (examples of methods include Wi-Fi (IEEE802.11a, IEEE802.11b, IEEE802.11g, IEEE802.11n, etc.) , WiGiG, WirelessHD, etc.), JJ101 is an interface for connecting a wired network (examples of methods include Ethernet (registered trademark), PLC, etc.).

Terminal II 103, for example, via antenna JJ101 or interface JJ101, connects to a URL or URI transmitted using TMCC to send an emergency alert (
(emergency bulletin) information will be obtained. At this time, for example, terminal II103 connects to the URL or URI transmitted using TMCC via (but not limited to) access point JJ103 or cellular base station JJ104.
As described above, by linking the terminal to the URL or URI information of TMCC, a large amount of data can be obtained at high speed, and the information is obtained immediately, so the user's personal safety is improved. can be obtained.

Also, the URL or URI information obtained by the terminal obtaining the TMCC may be transmitted to another device. FIG. 107 shows an example of a system configuration diagram at that time. In FIG. 107, the same numbers are given to the parts that operate in the same way as in FIGS.
As in FIG. 106, the terminal (II103) in FIG. 107 connects to the URL or URI transmitted using TMCC via the network and obtains emergency alert (emergency bulletin) information. In addition, the terminal (II103) sends the URL or URI information obtained by obtaining the TMCC to device #A (II107) and device #B (II108) as shown in FIG. send to. (Note that the terminal II 103 and the devices #A and #B may communicate directly, or may communicate with the terminal via a repeater (for example, an access point (LAN (Local Area Network) access point) or a cellular base station). II 103 and devices #A and #B may communicate.)

Then, devices #A and #B access the URL or URI obtained from the terminal (II 103) via the network (for example, via an access point or a cellular base station), ) By obtaining information on an emergency alert (emergency bulletin), it is possible to obtain the effect that the user's personal safety may be ensured.

It should be noted that "the terminal II 103 obtains the information (URL or URI information) of the emergency alert (emergency bulletin) transmitted using TMCC, and the terminal II 103 transmits the information to the devices #A and #B. However, it is also possible to control whether terminal II 103 transmits information related to an emergency alert (emergency bulletin) based on the regional information described in other embodiments.
For example, when the region information and the region to which the terminal belongs match, the terminal II 103 obtains information (URL or URI information) of an emergency alert (emergency bulletin) transmitted using TMCC. Terminal II 103 then transmits information (URL or URI information) related to the emergency alert (emergency bulletin) to devices #A and #B.

On the other hand, if the area information and the area to which the terminal belongs do not match, the terminal II 103 performs processing not to transmit information to the devices #A and #B.
Also, as described in other embodiments, terminal II 103 connects to the URL or URI transmitted using TMCC when the area information included in TMCC matches the area to which the terminal belongs. good too.

Also, in the above, the URL or URI related to the information of the emergency alert (emergency bulletin) is dealt with, but it is not limited to this. The above-described embodiments can also be implemented in the case of
In addition, in this embodiment, in Embodiment B, Embodiment C, Embodiment D, Embodiment E, Embodiment F, and Embodiment G, the transmission station, the relay, and the terminal are configured. Although the system has been described as an example, it is of course possible to implement the system in the same way in a system composed of a transmitting station and a terminal.

(Embodiment KK)
Radio transmission methods such as changing the roll-off rate (embodiment AA, embodiment DD, etc.) and changing the ring ratio when using the 16APSK and 32APSK systems (embodiment A to embodiment G, etc.) The method of transmitting the information when changing the TMCC using the extension area of TMCC has been described.
On the other hand, from Embodiment BB onward, a case has been described in which various types of information are transmitted using the extension area of TMCC.
Control information is also transmitted in areas other than the extension area of TMCC.

By the way, as a simple method, it is conceivable to simultaneously transmit "information on changes in the radio transmission method" using the TMCC extension area and "various types of information" using the TMCC extension area. . This method has the advantage that the change of the radio transmission method can be performed every several frames.
However, considering the actual operation of broadcasting, it is not always desirable to have a system that changes the wireless transmission method every multiple frames. (There are cases where a system that changes the radio transmission method for each of a plurality of frames is desired.) Transmission of "information on changing the radio transmission method" using the TMCC extension area in consideration of this and the TMCC extension area A method of transmitting "various kinds of information" using .

In this specification, as an example, in satellite broadcasting, control information such as TMCC is transmitted, and terminals, communication systems, relay systems, etc. using it have been described in each embodiment. It is not limited to the use by transmitting control information such as TMCC by , but the transmitting station transmits control information such as TMCC by systems such as terrestrial broadcasting, cable television, mobile broadcasting, etc. This specification Each embodiment described in the document may be implemented. This point also applies to the present embodiment.
The configuration of the TMCC, the configuration of the transmitting device, the configuration of the receiving device, etc. are as described in Embodiment AA. The method of transmitting still image information and audio information is the same as described in Embodiment AA and later, so description thereof will be omitted.
Further, in this embodiment, as described in Embodiment B, Embodiment C, Embodiment D, Embodiment E, Embodiment F, and Embodiment G, the (terrestrial) transmitting station, A system composed of repeaters (satellites) and terminals will be described as an example.

In Embodiment EE, Embodiment JJ, etc., the method of transmitting emergency warning (emergency bulletin) information, telegram information, video information, still image information, and audio information using the extended area of TMCC has been described. Also, a method of transmitting "URL (Uniform Resource Locator) or URI (Uniform Resource Identifier) information" using the TMCC extension area has been described.
As described in Embodiment EE, Embodiment JJ, etc., for example, as part of control information such as TMCC, information R ₂ R ₁ R ₀ regarding the medium of information transmitted using the extension area of TMCC is shall be transmitted. Table 35 shows "relationship between R ₂ R ₁ R ₀ and the type of information transmitted using the TMCC extension area" different from Tables 26 and 34.

As shown in Table 35, when R ₂ R ₁ R ₀ =“000”, it is assumed that the information transmitted using the extension area of TMCC is transmitted as message information. When R ₂ R ₁ R ₀ =“001”, the information transmitted using the TMCC extension area is assumed to be transmitted as video, and when R ₂ R ₁ R ₀ =“010”, the TMCC extension area is transmitted. It is _assumed that the information transmitted _{using R 2 When} R ₁ R _{0 =} “ ₁₀₀ ”, it is assumed that URL or URI information for obtaining information is being transmitted. It is assumed that the information related to "transmission method parameter change" is transmitted, and it is undefined when R ₂ R ₁ R ₀ = "110" to "111".
The method of transmitting information related to TMCC is as described in Embodiment AA, Embodiment BB, Embodiment CC, Embodiment DD, Embodiment EE, etc., and the information is an example. , and is transmitted using TMCC "extended information".

"Transmission method parameter change" in Table 35 changes the roll-off rate (embodiment AA, embodiment DD, etc.) or changes the ring ratio when using the 16APSK or 32APSK system (embodiment A to Embodiment G, etc.), it means that information is transmitted using the extension area of TMCC.
It is assumed that the configuration of a transmission station that transmits control information such as TMCC is as shown in FIG. 7, for example, as described in the embodiment DD. A detailed description has been given in another embodiment, so the description is omitted here.

The configuration of the receiving device of the terminal is as shown in FIG. Based on Table 35, the control information estimator (TMCC information estimator) AA 319 in FIG.
For example, when R ₂ R ₁ R ₀ =“101”, the terminal determines that “the information to be transmitted using the TMCC extension area is information related to 'transmission method parameter change'”, and the transmission method parameter Estimate the content of the change. It should be noted that "estimation of transmission method parameter change content" is as described in other embodiments. As described in the other embodiments, "transmission method parameter change" can be changed to "satellite digital broadcasting transmission method standard ARIB STD-B20 Version 3.0 or satellite digital broadcasting transmission method standard ARIB STD-B20. It is assumed that it is also possible to switch to the transmission method of the ARIB STD-B20 standard of B20 version 3.0 or later.

As described above, by transmitting "information on changing the radio transmission method" using the TMCC extension area and transmitting "various types of information" using the TMCC extension area, the "radio transmission method In order to avoid parallel transmission of "Information on change of TMCC" and "Various types of information" using the TMCC extension area, the data transmission speed of "Various types of information" using the TMCC extension area is reduced There is an advantage that it can be made higher.
In addition, in this embodiment, in Embodiment B, Embodiment C, Embodiment D, Embodiment E, Embodiment F, and Embodiment G, the transmission station, the relay, and the terminal are configured. Although the system has been described as an example, it is of course possible to implement the same in a system composed of a transmitting station and a terminal.

(Embodiment LL)
In this embodiment, an example of a method of utilizing message information, video information, still image information, audio information, and URL (URI) information transmitted using TMCC will be described.
FIG. 108 shows an example of the configuration of a terminal according to this embodiment. Components that operate in the same manner as in FIG. Therefore, the description is omitted here.
The telegram information storage unit LL101 receives control information AA320 and a control signal, and in the control information AA320, when information transmitted using TMCC is telegram information, the telegram information storage unit LL101 stores the information. . At this time, tag information indicating "telegram information" is added to the information to be stored, and stored at the same time.
Similarly, the video information storage unit LL103 receives control information AA320 and a control signal. memorize At this time, tag information indicating "video information" is added to the information to be stored, and stored at the same time.

The still image information storage unit LL105 receives control information AA320 and a control signal, and in the control information AA320, if the information transmitted using TMCC is still image information, the still image information storage unit LL105 stores the information memorize At this time, tag information indicating "still image information" is added to the information to be stored, and stored at the same time.
URL (URI) information storage unit LL107 receives control information AA320 and a control signal as input, and stores URL (URI) information when information transmitted using TMCC in control information AA320 is URL (URI) information. Part LL107 stores the information. At this time, tag information indicating "URL (URI) information" is added to the information to be stored, and stored at the same time.
The voice information storage unit LL109 receives control information AA320 and a control signal, and in the control information AA320, if the information transmitted using TMCC is voice information, the voice information storage unit LL109 stores the information. At this time, tag information indicating "voice information" is added to the information to be stored, and stored at the same time.

In the above description, a telegram information storage unit LL101, a video information storage unit LL103, a still image information storage unit LL105, a URL (URI) information storage unit LL107, and an audio information storage unit LL109 are provided. The terminal may be configured to include the storage unit LL100. However, the type of information transmitted using TMCC (telegram information, video information, still image information, URL (URI) information, or audio information) is stored together with the information.

Then, for example, when the message information storage unit LL101 receives a control signal to "display the stored message information on the monitor" according to a user's instruction, the message information storage unit LL101 reads "stored Telegram information” is output (LL102). Further, it is assumed that the electronic message information storage unit LL101 can erase part or all of the “stored electronic message information” by a control signal (according to a user's instruction).
Similarly, when the video information storage unit LL103 receives, for example, a control signal to "display the stored video information on the monitor" according to the user's instruction, the video information storage unit LL103 stores the image information" is output (LL104). In addition, the video information storage unit LL103 is capable of erasing part or all of the "stored video information" by means of a control signal (according to a user's instruction).

For example, when the still image information storage unit LL105 receives a control signal to "display the stored still image information on the monitor" according to a user's instruction, the still image information storage unit LL105 outputs "store still image information” is output (LL106). Further, the still image information storage unit LL105 is capable of erasing part or all of the "stored still image information" by a control signal (according to a user's instruction).
For example, when the URL (URI) information storage unit LL107 receives a control signal to "display the stored URL (URI) information on the monitor" according to a user's instruction, the URL (URI) information storage unit LL107 outputs "stored URL (URI) information" (LL108). In addition, the URL (URI) information storage unit LL107 is capable of erasing part or all of the "stored URL (URI) information" by a control signal (according to a user's instruction). and
It is assumed that the voice information storage unit LL109 is capable of erasing part or all of the "stored voice information" by means of a control signal (according to a user's instruction).

As described above, by storing the information transmitted using TMCC, the user can obtain the information, and the information can be organized. has the advantage of being able to
The message information stored in the message information storage unit LL101 may be information transmitted using TMCC, or may be information after decoding for the message. LL 101 may store information in any format.
Similarly, the video information stored in the video information storage unit LL103 may be information transmitted using TMCC, or may be information after decoding for video. Part LL103 may store information in any format.

The still image information stored in the still image information storage unit LL105 may be information transmitted using TMCC, or may be information after decoding for a still image. The storage unit LL105 may store information in any format.
The URL (URI) information stored in the URL (URI) information storage unit LL107 may be information transmitted using TMCC, or information after decoding for the URL (URI). The URL (URI) information storage unit LL107 may store information in any format.
The audio information stored in the audio information storage unit LL109 may be information transmitted using TMCC or may be information after decoding for audio. , the information may be stored in any format.

Furthermore, each piece of information may be stored with a field-specific tag added.
For example, if the first information transmitted using TMCC is information about economic news, the tag "economic news" is also stored when the information is stored.
If the second information transmitted using TMCC is information about sports news, the tag "sports news" is also stored when the information is stored.
As for the third information, the fourth information, and so on, the field-specific tags are similarly stored together with the information.
Based on the information of these tags, the terminal can organize the information by item and display the information on the screen.
For example, when displaying message information, there are items classified as "domestic news", "international news", "economic news", "sports news", "science news", etc., and the information belonging to that item is displayed for each item. A screen such as "Yes" is displayed.

Specifically, the display is as follows.
"Domestic News"
{The content of the first information is described}
{The content of the eighth information is described}
"International News"
{The content of the sixth information is described}
{The content of the seventh information is described}
"Economic News"
{The content of the third information is described}
{The content of the ninth information is described}
"Sports News"
{The content of the second information is described}
{The content of the fourth information is described}
"Science News"
{The content of the fifth information is described}
{The content of the tenth information is described}

Regarding this point, the still image screen display, the video screen display, and the URL (URI) screen display are similarly organized and displayed for each item.

(Embodiment MM)
The setting of the audio output method has been described in the embodiment FF, and the setting method of the screen output has been described in the embodiment GG. In this embodiment, as an example, a setting method using a remote controller (remote controller) and a touch panel will be described. A touch panel is an electronic component that combines a display device such as a liquid crystal panel or an organic EL panel and a position input device such as a touch pad. be. (Touch pad: A type of pointing device that operates a mouse pointer by tracing a flat sensor with a finger)

Any method may be used to set the audio output method in the embodiment FF and the screen output setting method in the embodiment GG. For example, the setting may be performed by operating a switch or button mounted on the terminal. Alternatively, settings may be made using a remote controller (remote controller) capable of controlling the terminal by wireless transmission, infrared transmission, or the like.
In this embodiment, a setting method using a remote control (remote controller) and a touch panel provided in a terminal will be described.

For example, assuming a terminal such as a device for recording television or video, press the button on the remote control attached to the terminal and transmit the information to the terminal by wireless transmission or infrared transmission. Then, the terminal performs control based on that information. At this time, since the number of buttons on the remote control (remote controller) is large, the user is highly likely to get lost as to which button to press, which may make control difficult.
On the other hand, some terminals are equipped with control buttons for performing various settings, but in general, the number of buttons is small, and there is a high possibility that it is difficult for the user to operate them.
A setting method using a remote controller and a touch panel provided in a terminal, which will be described in this embodiment, is a setting method that can alleviate the above two problems.

FIG. 109 shows the states of a terminal and a remote controller (remote controller) in this embodiment. In FIG. 109, MM101 is a remote controller (remote controller), and MM102 is a terminal. At this time, the remote controller (remote controller) MM101 has a button or a touch panel that simulates a button. The information corresponding to the button is transmitted to the terminal MM102. When the remote controller (remote controller) MM101 transmits information to the terminal MM102, wireless transmission, infrared transmission, or the like is used.
The terminal MM102 receives the information transmitted by the remote controller (remote controller) MM101, and performs processing based on the received information. The terminal MM102 is equipped with a screen (display unit) for displaying video, message information, still images, etc., and the screen portion (display unit) has a touch panel function. and
Characteristic processing of this embodiment is as follows.

<1> First, the user presses one or more buttons on the remote controller (remote controller) MM101, and accordingly the remote controller (remote controller) MM101 transmits information to the terminal MM102.
<2> The terminal MM102 receives the information transmitted by the remote controller (remote controller) MM101. Display multiple options (not necessarily multiple options).
<3> The user wants to make a selection by, for example, touching the display portion of one of the options displayed (may be touched with a finger or touched with another object). option is selected.

It should be noted that in <3>, ``the user can touch the display portion of any of the options displayed (may be touched with a finger or touched with another object), for example. , the option that the user wants to select is selected.", but ``the user touches, for example, the display portion of one of the displayed options (it may be touched with a finger or other ), the option displayed in the part touched by the user becomes a candidate for selection, and then a confirmation screen such as "OK (may be set)" or "Cancel (originally When "OK (may be set)" is touched, the option that was a selection candidate is selected, and when "Cancel (back)" is touched, the option is displayed again. ” may be used.
The above is just an example, and the important point for <3> is that "the user touches, for example, the display part of one of the displayed options (it may be touched with a finger or other You may touch it.) and the touch panel will react."
As a specific example, the audio output method in Embodiment FF will be described.
When the user sets the audio output method, the following processing is performed.

<#1> The user presses one or more buttons on the remote controller (remote controller) MM101 to transmit the information "Start setting the audio output method", and the remote controller (remote controller) MM101 transmits the information to the terminal. Send to MM 102 .
<#2> The terminal MM102 receives the information "Start setting the audio output method" transmitted by the remote controller (remote controller) MM101. A screen as shown in FIG. 87 is displayed on a display unit having a touch panel function.
<#3> The user selects by, for example, touching the display portion of one of the displayed options (it may be touched with a finger or with another object). The desired option is selected.

(Note that <#3> may be another process described above, as described for <3> above.)
As described above, by adopting a setting method using a remote controller and a touch panel provided on the terminal, the buttons to be pressed (or touched) by the user are easy to understand, so that various settings can be made without confusion. It has the advantage of being able to

Note that the processing of <1>, <2>, and <3> may be used for setting the audio output method in the embodiment FF, and for setting the screen output in the embodiment GG. , the processing of <1><2><3> may be applied. In addition, when an application is installed in the terminal, the user presses to proceed with processing using a remote controller (remote controller) and a touch panel provided in the terminal in order to set the application or operate the application. It has the advantage of making (or touching) buttons easier to understand.

(supplement)
As a matter of course, a plurality of the embodiments described in this specification may be combined and implemented.

In this specification, when "∀" and "∃" are present, "∀" represents a universal quantifier and "∃" represents an existential quantifier.

Also, in this specification, when there is a complex plane, the unit of phase, such as an argument, is "radian".

The complex plane can be used to represent complex numbers in polar form as polar representations. A complex number z = a + jb (both a and b are real numbers and j is an imaginary unit) is given by a point on the complex plane (
When a, b) are made to correspond, if this point is expressed as [r, θ] in polar coordinates, then a=r×cos θ, b=r×sin θ,

where r is the absolute value of z (r = |z|) and θ is the argument. And z=a+jb is expressed as r×e ^j θ.

It should be noted that, for example, a program for executing the above communication method is previously stored in a ROM (Read Only
Memory), and the program may be operated by a CPU (Central Processor Unit).

Also, a program for executing the communication method is stored in a computer-readable storage medium, the program stored in the storage medium is recorded in a RAM (Random Access Memory) of the computer, and the computer is operated according to the program. You can do it.

Each configuration of each of the above embodiments and the like may be realized as an LSI (Large Scale Integration), which is typically an integrated circuit. These may be made into one chip individually, or may be made into one chip so as to include all or part of the configuration of each embodiment. Although LSI is used here, it may also be called IC (Integrated Circuit), system LSI, super LSI, or ultra LSI, depending on the degree of integration. Also, the method of circuit integration is not limited to LSI, and may be realized by a dedicated circuit or a general-purpose processor. An FPGA (Field Programmable Gate Array) that can be programmed after the LSI is manufactured, or a reconfigurable processor that can reconfigure connections and settings of circuit cells inside the LSI may be used.

Furthermore, if an integration technology that replaces the LSI appears due to advances in semiconductor technology or another technology derived from it, it is of course possible to integrate the functional blocks using that technology. Adaptation of biotechnology, etc. is possible.

A supplementary explanation of the transmission method will be given below.

In the description of the present invention, when single-carrier transmission is used as the transmission method, for example, FIG. show.

In FIG. 29 , mapping section 2902 receives a control signal and a digital signal, performs mapping based on information on the modulation scheme (or transmission method) included in the control signal, and performs mapping between the in-phase component of the baseband signal after mapping and the base band signal. Outputs the quadrature component of the band signal.

Band-limiting filter 2904a receives the in-phase component of the baseband signal after mapping and the control signal, sets the roll-off rate included in the control signal, performs band-limiting, and filters the in-phase component of the baseband signal after band-limiting. Output.

Similarly, the band-limiting filter 2904b receives the quadrature component of the baseband signal after mapping and the control signal, sets the roll-off rate included in the control signal, performs band-limiting, and performs band-limiting of the baseband signal after band-limiting. Output the quadrature component.

The frequency characteristic of the band-limiting filter that limits the band of the carrier is given by the following equation (30).

In the above equation, F is the center frequency of the carrier wave, F _n is the Nyquist frequency, and α is the roll-off rate.

At this time, if it is possible to change the roll-off rate when transmitting data symbols by a control signal, it is possible to change the ring ratio in each modulation scheme/transmission method in accordance with the change of the roll-off rate. may be used, in which case the information about the ring ratio change needs to be transmitted to the receiving device as in the example above. Based on this information, the receiving apparatus can perform demodulation/decoding.

Also, if the roll-off rate when transmitting data symbols can be changed, the transmitting device needs to transmit information regarding roll-off rate change as a control information symbol. At this time, the control information symbols may be generated with a certain set roll-off rate.

In Embodiment B, Embodiment C, Embodiment D, Embodiment E, Embodiment F, and Embodiment G, d ₀ , c ₀ c ₁ c ₂ c ₃ , c ₄ c ₅ c ₆ c ₇ , _{b0 b1 b2 b3 , x0} x1 x2 _{x3 x4 x5} , _{x6 x7 x8 x9 x10 x11 , y0 y1 y2 y3 y4 y5} , Although the case of transmitting y ₆ y ₇ y ₈ y ₉ y ₁₀ y ₁₁ using the TMCC extension information has been described, a method of transmitting without using the TMCC extension information is also conceivable.

When transmitting without using TMCC extension information, if two methods coexist like "scheme A" and "scheme B", Embodiment B, Embodiment C, Embodiment D, Embodiment E, Embodiment F, and d ₀ described in Embodiment G are transmitted (however, TMCC extension information is not used). On the other hand, if there are no two methods such as "method A" and "method B", that is, if there is only one method, there is no need to transmit the information of _d0 , In this case, the processing related to system identification described in Embodiments B, C, D, E, F, and G is not required, and the other processing, That is, the ring ratio can be changed as described in the B, C, D, E, F and G embodiments.

Further, in Embodiment B, Embodiment C, Embodiment D, Embodiment E, Embodiment F, and Embodiment G, a system composed of a transmitting station, a repeater, and a terminal has been described as an example. However, of course, it can be similarly implemented in a system composed of a transmitting station and a terminal. At this time, the transmitting station d ₀ , c ₀ c ₁ c ₂ c ₃ , c ₄ c ₅ c ₆ c ₇ , b ₀ b ₁ b ₂ b ₃ , x ₀ x ₁ x ₂ x ₃ x ₄ x ₅ , x ₆ x ₇ x ₈ x ₉ x ₁₀ x ₁₁ , y ₀ y ₁ y ₂ y ₃ y ₄ y ₅ , y ₆ y ₇ y ₈ y ₉ y ₁₀ y ₁₁ and the terminal obtains these information By doing so, it is possible to detect and demodulate by knowing that the APSK ring ratio has been changed.

In this specification there is a reference to "Audio data" (or "Audio"). As for the interpretation of "audio information", one of the following two interpretations is considered. (However, it is not limited to this.)

First case:
"Audio data" includes "information obtained by signal-processing and digitizing human voices,""speech synthesis information,""information obtained by signal-processing and digitizing human voices." ” and “information other than speech synthesis information”.
Second case:
"Audio data" is "sound information of words or sentences based on a certain language" and "other information".

In the embodiment EE, when the transmitting station transmits "emergency alert (emergency bulletin) voice information" and the terminal obtains this "emergency alert (emergency bulletin) voice information", the terminal receives "emergency alert (emergency bulletin) A method of preferentially outputting the sound of "voice information" from speakers, earphones, headphones, etc. was explained. When interpreting the above-mentioned "first case", "emergency warning (emergency bulletin) voice information" belongs to "information obtained by signal processing and digitizing human voice" or "speech synthesis information". In this case, the "emergency warning (emergency bulletin) voice information" described in the embodiment EE is preferentially outputted as an output voice, so that the user having the receiving device (terminal) can receive the emergency warning (emergency bulletin) reliably. information can be conveyed, the effect of increasing the possibility that the user's safety can be ensured will be greater.

When interpreting the above-mentioned "second case", if "emergency warning (emergency bulletin) voice information" belongs to "word or sentence sound information based on a certain language", it is described in Embodiment EE "Emergency warning (early warning) information can be reliably transmitted to users who have receiving devices (terminals) by setting emergency warning (early warning) voice information as the output sound preferentially. The effect of increasing the possibility that safety can be ensured will be greater.
This point can be similarly applied to the embodiment FF.

When interpreting the above-mentioned "first case", "emergency warning (emergency bulletin) voice information" belongs to "information obtained by signal processing and digitizing human voice" or "speech synthesis information". In this case, the "emergency warning (emergency bulletin) voice information" described in the embodiment EE is preferentially outputted as an output voice, so that the user having the receiving device (terminal) can receive the emergency warning (emergency bulletin) reliably. information can be conveyed, the effect of increasing the possibility that the user's safety can be ensured will be greater.
When interpreting the above-mentioned "second case", if "emergency warning (emergency bulletin) voice information" belongs to "word or sentence sound information based on a certain language", it is described in Embodiment EE "Emergency warning (early warning) information can be reliably transmitted to users who have receiving devices (terminals) by setting emergency warning (early warning) voice information as the output sound preferentially. The effect of increasing the possibility that safety can be ensured will be greater.

In addition, in the embodiment EE and the embodiment FF, a supplementary explanation will be given of an example of the reception operation of the terminal when information of an emergency alert (early warning) including voice information is transmitted.
When the receiver of the terminal receives emergency warning (emergency bulletin) information that includes voice information, the receiver immediately decodes (voice) the voice information contained in the emergency alert (early warning) information and outputs sound. It may be output from speakers, earphones, headphones, etc., but when it detects that the information of an emergency alert (emergency bulletin) has been received, a warning sound (alarm sound) stored in advance in the terminal will be output from speakers, earphones, headphones. etc., and then the decoded sound may be output from speakers, earphones, headphones, or the like.

According to this configuration, since it is possible to call attention to the viewer by a warning sound (alarm sound) or the like output as sound in advance, immediately after receiving the emergency warning (early warning) information, the emergency warning (early warning) It is possible to reduce the possibility that the viewer will miss the information of the emergency alert (emergency bulletin) as compared with the case where the sound of the information is output from speakers, earphones, headphones, or the like. If the audio information itself contains a warning sound (alarm sound) and sound information of words or sentences in an arbitrary language, the above configuration may not be used, or the above configuration may be used to ensure more reliable sound. A viewer may be able to hear the audio information.

In this specification, it is described that TMCC transmits "local information". At this time, as a method of specifying an area by "area information", a plurality of areas may be specified at the same time, or a specific area may be specified singly. In addition, when specifying a plurality of areas at the same time, the "area information" may be able to specify all areas (for example, "whole country").

Although the configuration of the "terminal" is described in this specification, it is not limited to the configuration of the terminal described in each embodiment. Specifically, the terminal does not have an antenna, and in this case the terminal has an interface for inputting the signal received by the antenna.

In this specification, as an example, in satellite broadcasting, control information such as TMCC is transmitted, and terminals, communication systems, relay systems, etc. using it have been described in each embodiment. It is not limited to the use by transmitting control information such as, but the transmission station transmits control information such as TMCC by systems such as terrestrial broadcasting, cable television, mobile broadcasting, etc. In this specification Each described embodiment may be implemented. Therefore, as a transmission system in radio transmission explained as an example, OFDM (Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing), MIMO (Multiple Input Multiple Output) transmission system with signal processing such as precoding and space-time (frequency space) coding , MISO (Multiple Input Single Output)) transmission method, or a spread spectrum communication method may be used.

The terminal described in this specification includes a speaker, a liquid crystal screen for displaying images, etc., an organic EL (Organic Electro-Luminescence) screen, an audio output terminal, and an output terminal for outputting screens such as images. It may be equipped with a terminal or the like.

In the embodiment FF, the setting of the voice (audio) output method was described, and in the embodiment GG, the setting related to the display of the screen was described. Alternatively, the terminal is connected to a remote controller via infrared or wireless (e.g., Wi-Fi or Bluetooth (registered trademark)), and the remote controller sets the audio output method. , the setting related to the screen display may be instructed, the output method of the terminal's voice (audio) may be set, and the setting related to the screen display may be performed.

A terminal in this specification does not have to have a screen display unit and a speaker. In this case, the terminal will be externally connected to a screen display device (for example, a monitor), an amplifier and speakers.

INDUSTRIAL APPLICABILITY The transmitting apparatus according to the present invention applies an error correcting code having a high error correcting capability to a communication/broadcasting system, and can contribute to improving the reception quality of data when iterative detection is performed on the receiving side.

200 transmitter

Claims (2)

A receiving method for receiving an emergency alert in a receiving device,
It is transmitted by broadcast, includes a message explaining the contents of the emergency alert and a URL (Uniform Resource Locator) indicating the acquisition destination of the detailed contents of the emergency alert, and is added with an identifier indicating that the transmitted data is an emergency alert. receiving said emergency alert;
if the emergency warning includes regional information indicating a target region of the emergency warning, determining whether the receiving device exists within the target region of the emergency warning indicated by the regional information;
if the emergency alert does not include the area information, determining that the receiving device exists within the target area of the emergency alert ;
if it is determined that the receiving device is within the target area of the emergency alert , displaying the message and decoding the detailed content of the emergency alert based on the URL;
The receiving method, wherein the emergency alert that does not include the area information indicates that the target area of the emergency alert is the entire broadcast area of the broadcast. A receiving device for receiving an emergency alert,
It is transmitted by broadcast, includes a message explaining the contents of the emergency alert and a URL (Uniform Resource Locator) indicating the acquisition destination of the detailed contents of the emergency alert, and is added with an identifier indicating that the transmitted data is an emergency alert. a receiving unit that receives the emergency alert;
When the emergency warning includes regional information indicating a target area of the emergency warning, determining whether or not the receiving device exists within the target region of the emergency warning indicated by the regional information, If the information is not included, it is determined that the receiving device exists within the target area of the emergency alert, and if it is determined that the receiving device exists within the target area of the emergency alert, the message is displayed and the URL is a parser for decoding the detailed content of the emergency alert based on
The emergency warning that does not include the region information indicates that the target region of the emergency warning is the entire broadcast region of the broadcast.

Images